Skip to main content

Full text of "Man"

See other formats 


Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 



M AN 

A MONTHLY RECORD OF ANTHROPOLOGICAL SCIENCE. 

PUBUSHEO UNDER THE MRECHON OF THE 

ANTHROPOLOGICAL INSTITITK 



GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND. 



II. 



1902. 



Nos. 1 — 182. 
WITH PLATES A-M 



PUBLL-JHED BV 

THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL INSTITUTE, 

J, HANOVER SQUARE. LONDON, W. 



••• 






• • • • 



^ • n • 

• • • 



• • • • 






• • • 
• • • • 



• •«•• -•-•••• 



• ■•• 

• • • 

• •• 









•• • 

• • • •• 

• • • • • ( 



• • 



• • 



• • • 

• • • • 



• • • 

• ••< 












. * • 






• • 



• • • 

• • • 

• • » • • •, 
• •• • • 

• • • • • 



• • • 

• • • 






i;x/iy(M 



OOlsTTEl^TS- 



ORIGINAI^ ARTICLES. 

No. 
lEgeSLIi. Note on AZgean Vaae ia the Salford Museum. (^IlbmfrntedJ) J. L. Mybes, M.A., F.S.A. 96 
Africa. '**•<• Koypt ; Uganda. 
Africa, South. The Natives of South Africa : A Note on the Recent Bluebook (Cd. 904), 

with a Plea for Further Investigation. E. Sidney Haktland, F.S.A 27 

America. See Eskimo ; Mexico ; Totemism. 

America, South. Implements and Ornaments of the Vahgans of Fuegia: with Notes by 

R. Morton Middleton. {With Plaie O.) J. L, Myrks, .M.7v., F.S.A 73 

Andaman Islands. Note on the Skull of an Andaman Islander. ( With Plate (\) W. L. 

l^UCK. nr OBni) BI\.m£Lm ... ... •.. ... ... ••• ... ... ... ... ... aO 

Archseology. *S^<'-Eoean; Crete; Cyprus; Egypt; England; Ireland; Mexioo. 
Asia. See ANDAMAN ISLANDS ; ASSAM ; BURMA ; INDIA ; Japan ; Lycia ; Malay. 
Assam. Note on the Recent Immigrations of Khonds and other Central Indian Tribes into the 

Jungle-country of Assam. F. Fawcett 30 

Biography. See Obituary. 

Brain. Rlght-Handedness and Left-Brainedncss. D. J. Cunningham, M.D., D.C.L., F.R.S.... 116 

Britain. British Ethnology. J. Gray, B.Sc. 41 

Burma. Native Smoking Pipes from Burma. (^Illu«t ruled.) R. Quick 3 

Crete. Excavations at Knossos in Crete. A. J. Evans, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S 58 

Crete: Fauna. Remains of Animals found in the Dictaean Cave in 1901. {llltmt rated.) 

W. Boyd-Dawkins, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S 114 

Crete, a Mycenaean Town and Cemeteries at Palaiokastro. (^W nitrated,) R. C. Bosanquet, M.A. 119 

Cyprus. Note on Certain Antiquities from Cyprus in the British Museum. H. B. 

W AuXJtUaB| Jft.A. ... ... ... ... ••• ... ... ... ... ... ... OO 

Egypt. Excavations at Abydos. (iZ/ifcrtra^tf/i.) W. M. Flinders Pbtrie, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. 64 
Egypt. Excavations at Reqaqnah in Upper Egypt. ( With PUite K) John Garstanq, B.A. 60 
Egypt. Note on the Early Dynastic Period of Egypt. QWith D'Kiijnimx.) Charles S. 

JllYlSKE)| IU,./\.} Ju. I-'. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ••• ... ... ... Ol 

Egypt. Prehistoric Egyptian Carvings, (ir//// Plate L.) W. M. Flinders Petkie, D.C.L., 

JLilj.U.. I^.x*.^. ... ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• **' ••• *** ••• ••• .•• Ho 

Egypt. Prehistoric Egyptian Figures. {With Plate H,) W. M. Flinders Petrie. D.C.L., 

l_iXj,U,. 1^ vXlr*^* ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• MT* 

Egypt. Prehistoric Egyptian Pottery. {With Pl<tte Jl.) V^'. M. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L., 

Xj1j.L/.« l^.x..^. ... ... ... ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• Ov 

Egypt. A Preilynastic Pot-Kiln, reccnlly discovered at Mahuhua, in Egypt. {Illu^tt rated.) 

^QU^ 1. 1 ^ RoT AJl \i ■ Xf*/\« ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• m^wM 

England. See Britain ; Stonehenqe. 

England : Prehistoric. Pigmy Flint Implements from the Sand-ljetU at Scunthori>c in 

Lincolnshire. {Illtuftrated.) Rev. R. A. Gatty. LL.B 15 

Eskimo. Note on some Measurements of Eskimo of Southampton Island. J. F. Tocher, F.I.C. 115 
Europe. See .i5oBAN ; BRITAIN: Crete; Cyprus; Exulaxd; Ireland; Thessaly. 
Folklore. -S^'* India ; Ireland ; Malay ; Religion ; Uganda. 
India: Folklore. The Mother's Brother: Notes an<l Queries on the Folklore of the 

Punjab (No. 2'>). H. A. ROSE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4o 

India : Gypsies. I'hc Origin of the Gypsies. A. T. Sinclair ; H. H. Risley, C.I.E. ... 126 

India. Hearl-shaping in the Punjab. H. A. Rose 2 

India: Microcephaly. Note on a Microcephalic Girl in Mmlras. F. Fawcett 43 

India. Note on some Indian Tatu Marks. H. H. Risley. CLE 74 

India. Notes on the Physical Treatment of Children in the Punjal), West of the Indus. 

uk. S. HAJI iVALANDAK IVHAN ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ol 

Ireland : Folklore. Supplementary Note on Certain Wells in Ireland. Roger Casement... 5 



95 



IT 

No. 
Ireland : Ogham. Szternal Evidences affecting the Problem of the Age of OghAm Writing 

in Ireland. R. A. Stewabt Macalistkb. M.A 4 

Japan. Gohei and Inao : A Note to an Article on the Japanese " Gohei " and the Ainu " Inao/* 

contributed to Jimrn. Attthr, Ind,, XX.XL W. G. AsTON, C.M.G HO 

Japan : Religion. Kiempfcrasan Authority on Shinto. W. G. ASTON, C.M.G 127 

Linguistics. See Ltcia ; Malay. 

Lycia. The Lycian Language. A. B. Cowlby, M.A. 62 

Malay : Folklore. Malay Divining Roils. QWUh Plate />.) B. B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.RS. ... 40 

Malay : Folklore. Malay Divining Rods : A Note on Dr. Tylor's Paper (Mak, 1902. 40). 

Hi. WESTLAKBj r.Ci'.o. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... oo 

Malay : Langruages. On a Sakai Vocabulary supposed to have come from Borneo. S. H. Ray 42 

Malay Peninsula. Anthropological Notes on Sai Kau, a Siamo-Malayan Village in the 

State of Nawnchik (Tojan). Nelson Annandale and Herbert C. Robinson 86 

Malay Peninsula. Blowpij>e from Kuantan. (^With PMe K.) W. W. Skeat, M.A. ... 108 

Malay Peninsula. Clay Tablets from Caves in Siamese Malaya. {}Vith PUife M.) 

A. Steffen ; N. Annandale 125 

Method. The Use of Diagrams. (IFt/A Plate F, and Diagram.) W. M. Flinders Petri e, 

A-'a Vy aX^** X^LJsX^** -I- t-L*«^« ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• •■• ••• •■• ••• ••■ ^#X 

Method. The Use of Diagrams for Craniometricul Purposes. (^WUh Plate /-V.) A. Thomson, 

MA 

Method. The Use of Diagrams : A Note in Reply. W.M. Flinders Petrib, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. 117 

Method. The Use of Diagrams : A Rejoinder. A. Thomson, M.A. 118 

Mexico. Reproductions of Nahua Manuscripts. {Illuxfrated.) O. M. Dalton, M.A., F.S.A.... 54 

Mexico. Further Note on Reproductions of Nahua Manuscripts. O. M. Dalton, M.A., F.8.A. 67 

Museum : Salford. Notes on the Ethnograpliical Collections of the Royal Museum, Peel 

Park, Salford. John L. Myres, M.A., F.S.A , 28 

New Guinea. stone-headed Clubs from the Outer Ccast of British New Guinea. 

(^Illicittrated.) J. Edgb-Partinoton 44 

New Zealand. Ancient Maori Houses : their Use and Abuse. (^Illiuttrated.) J. Edge- 

X «*JeCX l-M Vr X \/ A ••• ••• ••• ■•• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• cFcF 

New Zealand. Note on a Small stone Relic found near Orepuki, Southland, New Zealand. 

(^ninxfrated.) A. HAMILTON... 128 

Obituary: lAon Marillier. E. s. Hartland, f.s.a 18 

Pacific: Ornament. Note on the Occurrence of Spiral Ornament in Melanesia. (Ilhut- 

trated,) J. BdGE- PARTINGTON 17 

Pacific. **e New Guinea ; New Zealand ; Torres Strait. 

Pliysical Anthropology. See Andaman Islands ; Brain ; Britain ; Eskimo ; India ; 
Malay. 

Religion. Bugbear Gods. Andrew Lang, MA 100 

Religion. The Supreme Being and Totems in Sarawak. Andrew Lang, M. A. 62 

Religion. The Supreme Being and Totems in Sarawak : A Note in Reply to Mr. Lang. 

w. McDouoall, M.A. 83 

Religion. The Supreme Being and Totems in Samwak : A Note in Reply to Mr. McDougall. 

ANDREW 1jANQ| fl9..A. ... «•• ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... / f 

Religion. See Folklore ; Japan ; Totemism. 

Stonehenge. An Enquiry respecting the Fall of the Trilithons. (^Illustraied.) A. L. 

LflSinrir?! P«\./«A.« ••• ••• ••• ••• •«• ••• «•• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••« vf 

Stonehenge. The Recent Excavations at Stoncheuge, with Inferences as tu the Origin, 

Construction, and Purpose of that Monument. (^Illustrated,) W. Gowland, F,8.A. ... 8 

Stonehenge. Recent Excavations at Stonehenge. Abstract of the Discussion at the An- 
thropological Institute on the subject of Mr. Gowland's Pai)er on Stonehenge (Man, 1902. 6). 
A. J. Evans, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. ; A, L. Lewis, F.C.A. ; C. H. Read, F.S.A. ; C. W. Cun- 

^ XX^ \jr a V/^ ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• 

Thessaly. Prehistoric Villages in Thessaly. R. C. Bosanquet, M.A 76 

Torres Strait: String Figures. A Metho<l of Recording string Figures and Tricks. 

{Illtistrated.) W. H. R. RiVERS ; A. C. Haddon, Sc.D., F.R.S 109 

Totemism. An Amencan View of Totemism. J. W. Powell 75 

Totemism. An Amencan View of Totemism : A Note on Major Powell's Article. B. Sidney 

Jl A ^^Jth X 1J«LX^ '^l ^ aDvAAa ••• ••• ••■ •••. ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ^^4' 

Totemism. An American View of Totemism : A Note on Major Powell's Article. N. W. 

X XX vl ul A, Sf -aH. • X\ •••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• C#0 

Totemism. Note on the Haida Totem-Post lately erected in the Pitt-Rivers Museum at 

Oxford. {With Plate A,) (llhutt rated.) E. B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.R.S 1 

Ugranda: Folklore. On the Slaughter-place of Namugongo, Uganda. {Illustrated,) Rev. 

•9. JUxLiLiA-Kj XU.cL., f a^.O. ... ... ... ... ... ..* ... ... ... ... vO 



16 



RBYIBWS. 

No. 

Africa. Grogaa : Sharpe. Front tlie Cape to Cairo, E. N. F 107 

Africa, East. FUllcbom. AtUhrojMlogle der Xord-NyanHO'IAtider, F. C. Bhruiisall ... 121 

Africa, East. Gregory. The Foundtition of JiritWt EaH Africa, K. N. Fallaize 102 

AMca, East: LingruiStiCS. Madan. EnglUh'SaahlU Dictionary, A. Webner 104 

AMca, South. Theal. Pntgre** of South Africa in the Century, B. SIDNEY Hartland ... 87 

AMca, South. Luck. A Vixit to Lewaniku. E. N. F 181 

America: ArchseolOgy. Udden. An Old Indian rUiaye, O. M. D. 10 

American Negrro. Thomas. Tfic American Neyro: What he whm, irk/tt he island what he may 

trCCfifwf't^» Mji » w * • Dm ••• ••• ••• ••• •«• ••• ••• ••« «a« .,1 ,^^ m3 § 

Arabia. Nolde. Heiite nach Inner'arabieH^ Kurdittan uad Armenicn^ 1802. IJ. (J. H. ... 92 
ArchseolOgy. See Crete ; Egypt ; England ; France ; Stonehenge. 

Armenia. Lynch. Armenia: TraceUs and Studies, D. G. H HI 

Art. GroflBe. Le* DehuU de V Art, G. G. Seligmann 105 

Art. Him. TlteOriyinA of Art, Hy. COLLEY MARCH ^. 68 

Art. See Indonesia. 

Asia. See Arabia ; India ; Indonesia ; Malay ; Persia ; Puilippineh. 

Biometry. Galton, &c. BiomMrika: Jimnud for the study of Biological ProhlemH. J. Gray 20 

Britain. Mackinder. TIte Regions of the World, 1. Britain and the Britink Sean, 

V, DttLUJKJia ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,. ,,, ,,, / V 

Caucasus. Merzbacher. Aus den Uochregionen der Kauluuius, N. W. T. 122 

Chatham Island. Weiss. Mehr aU FUnfzig Jahre attf Chatham liland : KulturgcMchicht* 

liche und bUtgraphinche Schilderungen . . . aus den Briefcn eines Deu,*nchen. N. W. T. 86 

Crete. Boyd Dawkins. SkulUfrom Cace BuriaU at Xakro in EoMtern Crete, J. L, Myreh ... 89 

Criminal Anthropology. I>ombro8r>. KerkerpalimpMUfte^ WandinMchriftenund SeUfxtkennt- 

nisse gefangener Verbrecher, N. W. T 22 

Egypt. Petrie. Diospoli* Parra, the CemeterieM of Ahadiyeh and IIu^ 18tfft-W. F. Ll. 

\^^mX.Wmh^M\ ••• ••• ••« ••• •«« ««« •«« a«4 ,,^ ^^^ ,^^ ^^^ # 

Egypt. Petrie. The Royal Tomb9 oftfie Earliest Dynustiejt^ VM)\, Part If, F. Ll. Qbipfitii 8 

Egypt. Wiedemann. T/te Realms of the Egyptian Dead. H. H 91 

England: Stonehenge and Avebury. Harnton. Tfie WiUnhire ArchmologUal and 

Natural History Magazine, 8toneli£nge BihliAfgrapky Hunher^ Dec, 1901. A. L. L. ... 108 

Europe. See Armenia; Britain; Caucasus; Crete; England; France; Malta; 
Msditerrankan ; Stonehenge. 

Evolution of Peoples. Matteozzi. Les Facteurs de r Evolution den PeupUn. A. H. Keane 84 
Fishery. Jank^. Dritte AsiatiMrhe Furnchnngsreise de» Grafrn Kvgen Zichy^ Band J, 

Uerkunft der Magyarischen Fiseherei, C. G. 8 9 

Folklore : Method* Hoifmann-Krayer. Die Volkskunde a/s Wissensrhaft. U. i(. Makett 88 
Folklore. iSftr India; Mythology; Religion. 

Franee, Prehistoric Wor»fol.i. '*rhe French stonehenge**: An AtcoUHt »fthe Priwijnit 

Megalithir RemaimM in the Mtirhihun Arrhijfelagu, A^ L, L, ... ... ... ... ... 70 

India: Folklore. Kice. Ort-UMional hUsay on SiUire SityJh Indian Life, S, W.'V ^ 

India. Kao. St*me ^mestioninf Sititth Indiun EthmpUtgy. W. CE^iOKE 100 

Indonesia* Plevte. Jndttnesiun Art : Selected Hpeelmens of Ancient and Mttdern Art and 

Hamdwifrk from the DtUck Indian Archipelago, O. M. D. „, 88 

linguistics. See AKRICA^: LiNGUIMTIC>4 ; MALAT ; NEW GUINEA 

Malay: Fcdklore. Skeat. FahUM and Folk^Tales from an Etstern Forest, K. H, If, ,. ^ 

Malay: Ipoh Poisons. Gd^^'^r. IteHrtuj zur Xenntnls der fpoh Pfedyifie, i\, (i, 

DKljlvJt.AA9 ... ... ... ... ••. ... #•« «## ..# ... ,,f ... M^iO 

Malay : Language. i^;hmidt. Die Sprartufn der Sakei und Sem/tng t^uf Mal/wea und ikr 

\erkattnis zm d4fn Mnn-Khmir'Spntcken. .SIDNEY H, KaT ... ... ... ... ..^ ^ 

Malta. Marr. Die wrgeMchii-h/Urhen jMnkmi'der ton Malta, (lllu«trBi^l.; A, J, Kvaen .., 82 

Mediterranean. .'Mn- Thj; Mrdit^^rranean it^ne. w, m. VvmuntM yrrtHim 19 

Museum : DrifllekL Hitepfftird, A D^^^-rip^ire Ca/a/^fgne uj ttie HfterimenM in the Mitrtimer 

Mu*emm if Arrhf/r44tgy ond O^nhigy fi/ DriJIeld. k, ^ ' . H AUtt*fH , 21 

Mythology. Hkw.V., //^j^^/ryandtJhronal^fgyoftke.Hytk^MaktngAge, W, C'ft/KiEK ... 98 

Mew Guinea. flarMcm, //e^td'/UnterM^BUurk, White, and Brtftr.n. %. H. llAETLAVf; ... 40 

Mew Guinea, .-^itoiklt. Tk/i hm/jii^et of .S0rlh'FMJ0 New GuinML, H« H. MAY f80 

Persia. SjrkflU Ten Thf^sstnd Mde^ U Persia, U, UfMi^WOIttH l)AH$m |20 



VI 



No. 
PhllipplnOS. Koere. Crania Ethniea Philijwi niat, ein Beit rag znr AnthropoUujlf. d-er 

PhUippineti, BiB WILLIAM TUBNEB, M.Dm F.R,8 89 

Pliysical AnthFOpolOgy. (I.) Schwalbe : Der XeanderttuiUehadeL (II.) Schmidt : />/> 
XeanderthalroMte. (IH.) Schwalbe : NaandertlMUchidel und Friewmchiid'J. W. L. H. 

X/UUKi^ OKxn .«. ... ... ••• *•• ... •.* •.* ... ... •.• ••• \£M 

Pliysical Anthropology. See Philippines. 

Psychology. Hobhouae. Mind in Emlut'wn, J. L. MclNTTBB 101 

Race-Contact. Bryce. Yhe Relution* tif the Advanced and tits Backioard Ence* of Mayikind^ 

ffeing the Hitmaneit Lectnre, 1902. E. SIDNEY HabtlaND 78 

Religion. I^ang. Magic and Religion. N. W. T 90 

Sociology. C/awley. Tlie Myxtic Ume : A Study of Priinitire Marriage. VV. II. U. Kivers 57 

Sociology. Kidd. PriHcip!eHofWe)(ternCiri1imtioH. R. K. Mabett 55 

Sociology. Watt. A Stvdy of Social Morality, B.W. B. 36 

Statistical Method. See Biomktby. 

Technology. Farrand: Dixon. The Jettup yorth Pacific Kufffcdition, A. C. H 80 

Technology. W^hitc. Iloa* to Mah* Ha*ket», A. C. Haddon 69 

Turkestan, stein. Preliminary ItcfHtrt on a Journey of Arrhrrologiral and 7'o/>of/ra/fhira/ 

Krploration in Chinexe Turhcidan, E. J. RapSON ... ... ... ... ... ... 56 



PROGBBDINGS OF SOCIBTIBS. 

Belfast. Brilirh As^iciiition f«>r the Advancement uf Science 

London. AnthruiK)logiciI Institute of Great Britain and Ireland 

London. Folklore Society 

London. Society of Antiquaries 

London. Society of Biblical Arcliaiology 

New York, international (-ongrcss of Am rcanisi 8 

Paris. Conferences AnthroiKjIogiqaes 

Paris. Societc d*Anthropologie de Parts 



119 

• •• ••• ••• A Ami 

12, 24, 39, 40, 72, 82, 
94, 124. 132 
71,81 
13 
43 
48 
60 
11,25 



BRRATA. 

No. 5. The extract promised in the footnote is un.ivoidably hel«l over to VM\\\. 

No. 74, pajre UK), for andiri reatl audiri. 

No. 78, line 2(>, for ax read on. 

No. 93, for Ileicittt rea<l Hewitt. 

No. 124. The last two [Mragraphs should be interchanged. 



Vll 



DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES. 

A. Totem-post in the Pitt-Rivera Museum 

B. Prehistoric Bgyptian Fignrea 

c. Skull of an Andaman Islander 

D. Malay Divining Rods 

E. Excavations at Iie<iaqnah, Upper Egypt 

F. Diagrams for the Correlation of Namerous Variables 

o. Implements and Ornaments of the Yahgans of Fuegia 

H. Prehistoric Bgyptian Pottery 

I-j. Craniometrical Diagrams 

l^« BUSkUmy X>10^« pipQ ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• 

L. Prehistoric Egyptian Carvings ^. 

M. Clay Tablets from Caves in Siamese Malaya 



With No. 1 


!• 


14 


»» 


26 


>» 


40 


»t 


50 


>» 


61 


?l 


78 


»? 


83 


»» 


95 


M 


108 


W 


US 


»> 


125 



ILLUSTRATIONS IN THB TBXT. 

N.B, — All are Phrttographs, except where oth^noijte Ktated, 

Totem-poets at Masset Village, Qaeen Charlotte Island, British Columbia 

Totem-post in the Pitt-Bivers Museum, Oxford 

Smoking Pipes : (a) Cbimmd ; (ft) Quaymu ; (r) Shindoo Smoking Pipes 

View of Stonehenge from the West 

Plan of Stonehcngc. (^Drawing,) 

Section through Sand and Peat at Scunthorpe 

Pigmy Flints : (2) Scunthorpe ; (3) Indian. (Drawing j(,) 

Spiral Ornament, Micronesia. {Drairimj.) 

Pre- Dynastic Pot-kiln at Mahftsna in Egypt. (^Draicing.) 

Prehistoric Monuments of Malta : (1) Cist-like Receptades, Hagiar Kim ; (2) Rude 

Clay Figure, Valetta Museum; (3) Clay Figure with Grattiti, Valetta Museum ... 

Stone-headed Clubs from New Guinea 

The Early Dynastic Period of E^ypt. Diagrams of Naaal Length, Orbital B*eulth. 

Cranial Breadth, Bi-zygomatic Breadth. (^Drawing*.) 

Reproductions of Nahua Mauuscripts. Pages from (1) "Codex Borgianus ** ; 

(2-3) " Codex Cospianus" ; (4) " Tonamatl *' ; (5) •* Codex Bios" 

Diagram of Climate and Intelligence of Races. {Drawing,') 

Excavations at Abydos : (1) Tailed Scraper ; (2) Borer ; (H) Crocodile ; (4) Crescent ; 

(6) Comb; (6, 7, 8) Pottery Fire-places; (9, 10, 11) Stone Vase Grinderi; 

(12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17) Series showing History of an Amulet. {Drawings,) 

Indian Tatu Marks 

Skulls from Cave Burials at Zakro 

Diagrams illustrating comparisons between Cephalic Indices. {Drawing.) 

iEgean Vase, Salford Museum : (2) Hieroglyphic on Vase. {Drawing.) 

Views of Stonehenge. {PiMtograph from print*.) 

Pot used in Slaughter-rite at Nam ugongo 

Maori Carving from a House now at Welliogtoii. {Drawing.) 

String Figures and Pozzies from Torres Strait (9 Examples.) {Drawings.) 

Vrontiet ot Bos domesticuSf YSkT, cretitrnH 

McMoiements of Eskimo : (1) Diagram of Head-Form ; (2) Diagram of Stature 

PaUdokaftro Burial Enclosure. {Drawing,) 

Small Stone Relic found (near Orepuki, New Zealand: (1) Front and Back View; 

(2) Re-constructetl Design. {Drawing.) (3) Side Views. {Drawings.) .. j2S 



With No. 1 


ft 


1 


t* 


3 


n 


6 


11 


6 


11 


15 


♦» 


15 


fi 


17 


11 


29 


»• 


82 


ft 


44 


!■ 


51 


'» 


54 


11 


61 


ft 


64 


•» 


74 


M 


89 


M 


95 


!• 


96 


»• 


97 


»• 


98 


»• 


99 


?l 


109 


»» 


114 


»> 


115 


!♦ 


119 



• •• 

Vlll 



LIST OF AUTHORS. 

N,B, — T%e Numhern to which an atterhk U added are thttite o/ Jievieiv» oj Bitok*, 



Annandale, N., 86, 125. 
Aston, W. G., 110, 127. 

B., E. W., 36», 37». 
Beddoe, J., 79*. 
BOSANQUET, R. C, 76, 119. 
Boyd-Dawkins, W., 114. 

Casement, Roger, 5. 
Cowley, A. E., 52. 
Ckooke, W., 93», 106». 
Cunningham, D. J., 116. 
Cunnington, W., 16. 

Dalton, O. M., 10», 33», 54, 67. 
DucKwoKTH, W. L. H., 26, 129». 
Dames, M. Longworth, 120*. 

Edge-Partington, J., 17, 44, 99. 
Evans, A. J., 16, 32», 53. 

Fallaize, E. N., 103», 107», 131*. 
Fawcett, F., 30. 

Gatty, Rev. R. A., 15. 
Garstang, J., 29, 50. 
Gowland, W., 6, 16. 
Gray, J., 2()», 41. 
Griffiths, F. Ll., 7*, 8*. 

H., D. G., 92», 111». 

£1., M., 91 . 

Haddon, a. C, 21», 69», 80», 109. 

Hamilton, A., 128. 

Hartland, E. S., 18, 27, 46», 59», 78», 
84, 87*. 

Keane, a. H., 34*. 

Khan, K. S. Haji Kalandar, 31. 

Lang, A., 62, 77, 100. 

Lewis, A. L., 16, 70», 97, 103». 



Macalister, R. a. S., 4. 
March, Hv. Colley, 68*. 
Marett, R. R., 38», bo*. 
McDougall, W., 63. 
McIntyke, J. L., 101*. 
Millar, Rev. S., 98. 
Myers, C. S., 51. 
Myres, J. L., 28, 73, 89», 96. 

Petrie, W.M. Flinders, 14, 19*, 61,64, 

83, 113, 117. 
Powell, J. W., 75. 

Quick, R., 3. 

Rapson, E. J., 66. 
Ray, S. H., 42, 47*, 130*. 
Read, C. H., 16. 
RiSLEY, H. H., 74, 126 
Rivers, W.H.R., 51 •, 109. 
Robinson, H. C, 86. 
Rose, H. H., 2, 45. 

Seligmann, C. G., 9% 105% 123». 
Shrobsall, F. C, 121*. 
Sinclair, A. T., 126. 
Skeat, W. W., 108. 
Steffen, A., 125. 

Thomas, N. W., 22», 35», 58», 85, 
90% 122». 

Thomson, A., 95, 118. 

Tocher, J. F.. 115. 

Turner, Sir W., 89*. 

Tylor, E. B., 1, 40. 

Walters, H. B., 66. 
Werner, H., 104». 
Westlake, E., 65. 



M-N, tqo.-, Plai 




MAN 



A MONTHLY RECORD OF ANTHHOPOLOfilCAI. SCIKNCK, 

PUBLISHED UNDER THE DIRECTION OF 
THE ANTHROPOUraiCAL INSTITUTE OF QREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND. 



X.R. — All eammumeaHong printed in "Man" are MffAtd or imtialled hg their 
aulAort, and the Cayneil of the ItutUult! itenret it to bn un/ierttwxl that in r/iring 
ptihHeit;/ to them it arreptg »o retponttbHiig for tht opinioM or tlaleittent* expreiiaetl. 



ORIGINAL ARTICLEa. 

Totemism. With Plate A. Tylor. 

Note on the Halda Tfrtem-Post lately erected In the Pitt Rivers 4 

Museum at Oxford. //y E. H. Tijlor, DA.!.., F.Jl.S.. l',-ofc>.-,or »f \ 

A„lliroiitilog>i i» (hr r,iiwr.ii/y of Oiforii. 

Ai tiie wisli of iliL> Editor of Man I wriw u inw linos iq uouompiiiiy ibo t^olour&l 
plttte of tlie tuiem-|>oet from the Iltildu village iif Slaaset. Tliia ii< to nnticipnte a 
fuller accouut to be offered to ilie Auiliropologiunl luHtitiito wheii tlio evitleDco 
respeci.iiifr llio inoniiinent comes into a. more eonijdote state, The post stood till last 




'^j*i4i<^ 



1902.] 



Mj\N. 



[No. 1. 



b 



rri)nt of llip I'liicf^' louses. It is i-arveil 
an irei-, bullowetl al the Ijack to be more 
reKilily nii»oil Iiilii its place whfii fiDished. 
A pit wus ling flomewbaL afiur lUe 
miinij(.T of aueieiit E^ypt to receive tliu 
lower 8 or 10 feel when the huge post 
witi» rai^eil into position. Its preaent 
height, after its leiug eawii a(;ro£B near 
the ground ami set on a base in the Pilt 
Rivers MiiBeiitn, is a little over 10 feet, 
not far from the original height. 

The totems represented lieloDg to 
those with which the family wa» ddd- 
necteJ. The bear appears repeatedtir, 
with the raven, frog, crayfish, uiiii allu- 
sively the killer whale, whose li[j» are 
iuserled, with nativi.- inuotigruity, on the 
raven's wings, Above all sit the three 
chiefs wearing the tall chiefs' hats {tadn 
xhillii). It Imppened, fortnnaiely, that 
(he two house-posts liotween which the 
(otom-post now stands {Journ. Antkr, 
bat.. Vol. XXVIII., pi. siii.) eaine from 
ihe satne village, perliapH frmn the nnnie 
house. Thus ihe story of Hoortsthe Hear 
liiiggiiig to death Towata the Hunter 
^ippears twice, a good example of Hnida 
lotcmism, in which thetoteni-atjimal repre- 
-ents, not a forefather (for the Hniilassay a 
Sear In always rt-born a hear) but a mythic 
creature who figures in the traditions of 
I he family. Whether any myth is at- 
liieheil to the bear eating one frog and 
I 111 lowing another, Mr. Ilalfourandl have 
ilotie our Iwsl to diJieover, as yet without 
iivuil. But there may still be Indians on 
(Juecu Charlotte Island who know. 

No more posts are likely to he set 

up at Masset. Miesicinary influence has 

alive mind a sense of such art being a waste of labour. The Haidas 

:mber their old ideas for a. generation, and it is to be hoped that more 

It seems, however, that The last time is come for getting logorher 

liable there and ehewhere as to the institution of totemism, whidi 1 

portant in the lower stages of human society. It is 

ver lo Europe from the Ojihwas through an EngUah 

to confuse it with the Indian hunter's patron genius, 

like the other than a eoat of arms i. 




impressed on th 
will, perhaps, rt 
will be eollcutec 
the informatiuu 

voDtnrc to class among the most I 
a pity that the word totem came 
interpreter who wuk bo ignorant as to confu 
bis rwtnilu or "medit'lne." The one if do 
like a saint's picture. ^Those who kuew the Algonquin tril>eH better made it clear l.hnl 
totems were the animal signs, or as it were crestj, distinguishing esogamous clans ; 
that is, clans lound to marry out of, not into, their own clan. But the original sin, 
of the mistake of Long the interpreter, has held on ever since, bringing the intelligihle 
institutiou of the totem-clan into such coufuaiou, that it has become possible lo write 
( 2 1 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 1-2. 

about " »cx totems " and " individual totems," each of which terms is a self-contradiction. 
It is to he hoped that in the full examination of totemism, which seems likelj to take 
place before long, it may be borne in mind, first and foremost, that totems are the 
signs of intermarrying clans. E. B. TYLOR. 



India. Rose. 

Head-shaplniT in the Punjab. By H. A. Rosr, Census SfiperintenienL A 

The following notes on the question of head-shaping may be of interest. I see C 
that the author of the excellent article on *' Survivals among the Kappadokiaii 
Kizilhash" {Journ, A nthr. Inst. ^ Vol. KX.X.^ p. 323) appears to doubt whether the 
broad high skull, straight from behind, is artificial or not. The following note by 
Captain A. C. Elliott, Deputy Commissioner of Gujrat, seems to show that it is due to 
swathing in infancy : — 

'• I have ascertained the following facts as to Pathaus of the Dorajat. lu that part 
of the country a flat back to the head is considered a beauty. The mother for the first 
few months ties the infant in a cloth, the hands being placed on the chest or stomach, 
with a fold of tiie cloth passing over each arm. 

^' The mother places the cloth on her legs lengthways, not acrohs them, and the 
infant is placed on the cloth. One end is passed over the tight arm and under the left 
thigh, and the other end passes over the left arm and under the right thigh. The ends 
are brought over the knees and logs, and then tied. 

" A pad, consisting of several layers of cloth, is placed on the ground on which the 
child sleeps, his back being laid on this, the head hanging down and the back of it 
resting on the hard floor. 

" The child is bathed every da} and the head rubbed with oil, the back of the head 
l>eing gently pressed and flattened. At the same time the nose is pressed and pulled 
gently with the fingers to make it long. 

'' A long nose and a flat back to the head are considered essential points for every 
handsome Ynan or woman in those parts I The treatment shown above keeps the child 
from moving about, and the soft infantile head gets perfectly flat in time.'* 

In Jhaug, in the centre of the Punjab, the same account is given with the addition 
that both Hindus and Mohammedans consider ^' a long nose and a flat back to the head '^ 
essential to beauty. To secure the latter the child is made to lie with its head in a 
round earthern vessel lined with soft material but with a hard flat tablet against the 
back of its head. 

Elsewhere the object seems to be to secure a broad forehead : — 

'^ There is one peculiar custom, which I am told is almost universal, of moulding 
the heads of new-born children by means of an earthenware cup, so as to produce a 
broad open forehead. This custom prevails, I believe, in Afghanistan and Multao, but 
is certainly unknown in the Punjab proper. The Civil Surgeon assures me it is very 
eflicacious and does not appear to injure the brain, though it certainly does produce the 
round bullet head associated in European minds with a meagre intellectual development.^^ 
— Gazetteer of the Mozaffargarh District, p. 53. 

To this Pandit Hari Kislien Kaul, M.A., adds : "It is con-^idered the first duty of 
a mother to shape the head of her child. In addition to pressing the forehead with 
an earthen cup, the mother keeps pressing it with the palm of her hand whenever she 
" is suckling the baby. If the head is not shaped well in this manner, the child is 
" called Mula, Dhasira (bavins: 2\ heads), or a Satsira (having 7 heads). It is 
'^ considered a mark of beauty tliut there should be a pit in the chin. This is made 
" artificially by frequently pressing the centre of the chin of a baby with one end of a 
** Suramchu. An eagle nose is considered very beautiful, and the nose of the infant is 
accordingly pulled and moulded. 

I 3 ] 



44 



U 



1902.] 



[Nos. 2-3. 



'Tile mother is ul8oex|)oute<i to shape the liinliH udiI liody of the infant. This h doiio 

a process exiled Bandhmt Baddhan. A ehoet of cloth \i wrapped ronud the infant 



" go that hie arm« should be stretched nlon^Bide of his body nud his legs straij^lil. A strip 
*' of cloth ia then tied rounil ibo extremities, Boinuwbnt like the figure H with a knot inlhu 
" middle, The hcnl is kept out. ThiH practice is eiippOfiiMl to keep thi^ IxHly hi shnpo." 

Further, in Eohtak (in the S.E. of the PuiiJHb) the cusii.m i» thus describe.! : 
" There is no pmetii-e aiiulof^ous to that which the Pathaus of Denijat have, of preaaing 
" the head o( a child to give it a certaiu ahape and add to its beauty, in this district. 
" The only Mistom prevailing in this district soinswhnt akiu to it i:*, that fine wheaten 
** Hour kneaded in gki and water is rubbed un the foroiiead in certuin lines in order to 
" uproot hair and give specified angles to it. It is continued for about forty day», k& 
" by thut titne no hair reraaiua on that pari of the forehead which is wanted to be 
" cleared and there ia do danger of its growing agtiiu. Some apply collyriiiin ou the 
'' eyebrows to give them a black coioui'." 

The enquiries made are incomplete, but it is clear that u Hat hui^k to the hetul may 
be artificially produced. H. A. IIO.SE, 

Burma. Quick. 

Native SmokinK Pipes from Burma. Zfy R. Qmrk, Curator of the n 

HorMimm Mmeum. U 

The pipes figured in the accompanying illustrations were collected a few years aj^o 
in Burma. 

I. The gourd pipe (u) in the first illuaCratiou is of very uuusual size ; S ft. 9 ins. in 
.l6Dgth. Through a hole in the side is fised a small hollow reed carrying an earthenware 
|.'bowl. The mouth end cf the gourd is bound with brass wire in order to strengthen it. 



r" 



% 



19020 



MAN. 



[No. 3. 



luiri jvUnclieil tn ihe Deck of rhe gourU is u trimmer (uaai for olenuiug the stem), wbieh 
ifl, in fact. It ril) of iiii English iimbrella. Lieui.-Coloiiel 8. C. F. Peilc (who premeated the 
pipe to tbe lloruiiimu MiiNeiirn), in writing to me in Deisember lH9G from Knngoou, 
Mya, " I pickeil up a rare pipe ihe otlier tfay in tiie Arakao Hill Tracts bpionging to a 
" tribe oalleil Cliimm^" hdi] when lie returueJ to Loudon iu June 1897 he broiigLt it 
vfith him. The gourd ia ptirtlv filled with water, and the smoker sits down to enjoy his 
pipe. By its sidn in the photograph I have pUced a Qiiaymu pipe (b) to show the size. 
II. Tlie second illnatration represents some pipes i^mokod by the women only among 
the Shiiidoos. a trilie which iuhabitfl the connlry north of the Province of Amknu. 




Here again we i$ee the gourd, bnt this time nsed in <{nile a ditTerent manner. The clay 
buwl is fitted with a small botubou receptacle beneath for tbe tobai'co juice, wbicli ie 
colluded, mixed with a little water, and then given to Ihu nieu who carry it alKtnt in a 
small gourd from which eips are occasioually taken. The men carry these gourds in 
their belts, and when they meet a friend they hand it ti> him ; he takes out the stopper, 
places his linger o\cr tho hole, aiid gives it a shake up ; he then lii'ke the linger with the 
nicotine. The juice in course of time makes the gourd turn a dark, rich, brown colour. 

A similar pipe is use<l by the Nagas. Dr. George Watt, C.I.E., makes the 
follawiug staicmunt which explains this custom ; he says, " Among the Angiimi N'ligas, 
" a wild hill tribe inhabiting the north-eastern frontier of India, a sip of nicotine is 
" considered a , rare luxury. It is prepared by the old women, who smoke all day and 
" spit into a vessel placed near them for thia purpose. The liquid is boileil down, ami 
" in a conileuseil form is given to the men, who carry it aWit in small vessels (gourds). 
" ^bese tlicy present to eacii other on meeting as a friendly Mthitation, the tip of tbe 
" finger being dipped into ibe nicotine and then placed on the tongue." 

Tlie alwve specimens were brought from Lower Burma by Mr. Thos. H, Kooke. 
Nos. I anil -i have clay IhiwIs uud bamboo nicotine receivers ; 2 has a clay bowl, broken ; 
lower part made of hum ; handles of each lacquered red. The gourds are those neul to 
carry the finished nicotine Holution. 

Gourds are alno used fur pipes by tbe natives of East Africa ; some good specimens 
are in tbe British Mnscuni. K. QUICK. 

TTl 



1902.] MAN. [No. 4. 

Ireland : Ogrham. Maoalister. 

External Evidences affecting the Problem of the A^^ of Oi^am m 
WrltlniT In Ireland. /?y R. A. Stewart Macalister, M.A. T" 

Two views of the a^e ef Ogham writing in Ireland have been held and strenuously 
supported. The first regards all existing monuments as pre-Christian, and considers 
all crosiFes or other Christian symbols upon them as subsequent additions. The second 
considers the script itself (and consequently all examples of the use of the script) as 
entirely post-Christian in origin. No one seems willing to accept a compromise, 
whereby the script might be considered of pre-Christian origin, but continued in use 
till many years after the establishment of Christianity. This, however, seems the view 
most consistent with existing evidence. 

While it may be regarded as axiomatic that stones found on Christian sites, or 
bearing Christian symbols, are of Christian origin — the theory that crosses are all 
superadded is quite too far-fetched to be admissible — there are some which are evidently 
examples of the reappropriation of Ogham monuments for subsequent Christian use. 
Of such stones the best example is at Kilfountain, near Dingle ; this bears on one face 
a cross and inscription, Ginten^ in Irish letters ; on the edge is an entirely independent 
ai'd no doubt earlier Ogham, Inisi. The two have nothing to do with each other. 
The stone found at Glenfahan, also near Dingle, bears two crosses and an inscription 
which there seems every reason to regard as an occult or magical formula. Such a 
formula can scarcely be a Christian invention, and its inventors must have had some 
sort of script in which to write it down. (On this stone see Trans. R.I.A,^ Vol. XXXI., 
p. 317.) 

Thus even among stones with crosses upon them, of some the crosses are not 
conclusive evidence of date, and in others there is definite indication that the stone 
belongs to the Pagan-Christian overlap. 

If now we turn our attention to stones not marked with the cross we find certain 
monuments which it would be very difficult to persuade ourselves (if we be unbiassed) 
are Christian. The three examples of Ogham writing found associated with stone 
circles need not be called in evidence, as in that case the monument mast precede the 
Ogham ; anything we know of stone circles suggests that they must be put back to an 
age quite too remote for writing to be contemporary with them. But we find Ogham 
writing in other connexions as well in which the disparity of date is by no means 
a probable hypothesis. Examples are (I) the very pagan looking tumulus at 
Lugnagappul, near Auniscaul, co. Kerry ; a low mound of stones and earth, overgrown 
with furze, with stones set round its circumference — two of them Ogham inscribed. 
This monument is locally connected by tradition with a great battle, and is known as 
Cnocdn anfhola^ "the little hill of blood." It bears every indication of enclosing very 
instructive secrets. (2.) The great rude pillar-stone at Crag, near Tralee, inscribed, 
"Of Luguttis the Poet," and interesting as being the oldest monument of a poet in the 
British Islands. It would bo difficult to conceive a more pagan looking monimieut. 
unless it be (3) the imposing stone alignment on the top of a hill at Droumatouk, near 
Kenmare. This consists of a magnificent slab of stone, about 12 ft. in height. Hanked 
on each side with two smaller but conspicuous stones. Who Lugunis, the occupant of 
this sepulchre, was, we do not know ; but he certainly owns a royal monument. (4.) 
Lastly, a stone recently discovered at Dromlusk, in the same district, is in point. This 
cotisists of two stones in uoi'th and south alignment ; on the eastern face of the stone 
bearing the Ogham is a circle engraved, in exactly the same technique as the scoring 
of the letters. Though solar symbolism and the like are generally discredited and 
ridiculed hypotheses in explaining monuments like thi-i, it is impossible to free the mind 
from them in examining this stone. The meridian alignment and the east-pointing 
circle are very suggestive in this direction. 

[ 6 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 4-6. 

These examples make it at least admissible to doubt that all Ogham monuments 
are of the Christian period ; and it follows that the script may reasonably be regarded 
as a pagan invention carried into the Christian epoch, and widely used long after the 
establishment of Christianity in Ireland. R. A. 8. MACALISTER. 



Folklore : Ireland. Casement. 

Supplementary Note on Certain Wells In Ireland. (C/ Man, r 
1901. 11.) By Roger Casement^ British Consulate^ BomUy Congo Free State. V 

In the article. On Certain Wells in Ireland^ by Professor Rh^s (Man, 1901. 11), 
which is of uncommon interest, I observe that Sir Henry Blake speaks of a book by the 
Rev. Csesar Otway, which he styles "Erris and Trelawney." I read the book many 
years ago, an 1 if my memory serves me right, and with all respect to so distinguished 
an Irishman as Sir Henry Blake, the title should be " Erris iuid Tyrawleyy Trelawney 
would be, I think, a Cornish name ; Tyrawley is the name of a district in North Mayo. 

The prefix Tyr (or Tcr, as Sir Henry Blake himself applies it in speaking of the 
islan<1 of Termoncara) was one common in Celtic Ireland in territorial designations of 
tribal divisions of the country. We find it to-day in Tyrone (formerly Tyr or Tir-Owen), 
I.e., " the land of Owen" ; Tyr-connell or Eoghan (now Donegal), i.e., the land of Conail 
or Council, whose descendants, the O'Donneils, were chiefs of Tyr-connell. 

Regarding strange Irish wells, I enclose an account of some remarkable wells in the 
county of Antrim in 1683, as recorded by Mr. Richard Dobbs, of Castle Dobbs, in that 
county. ROGER CASEMENT. 

•^* fVe hope to publish under a subsequent number some extracts from the MS. 
of Richard Dobbs. Otway'* s " Erris and Tyrawley'''' was published in 1843. — Ed. 



Stonehenge. Qowland. 

The Recent Excavations at Stoneheni^ with Inferences as to q 
the Orli^ln, Oonstruotlon, and Purpose of that Monument. Abstract Q 

of a Report presented by W. Gowland^ F,S.A., to the Society of Antiquaries, 

December 19M, 1901. 

The fall of one of the uprights of the outer circle of Stonehenge on the night of 
31st December 1900 (c/1 Man, 1901. 18) led the owner, Sir E. Antrobus, Bart., to 
permit a careful examination of the remainder by a committee appointed for this pur- 
pose, and to execute the works recommended by this committee for the protection of the 
stones from further damage. The engineering work was planned by Mr. Carruthers and 
superintended by Mr. Detmer Blow. The exploratory work was conducted by Mr. Gow- 
land, and a most careful record was kept of every detail of the incidental finds. 

The primary object, the replacement of the " leaning-stone " {see illustration on next 
page) in its original erect position, was effected by enclosing the stone — which had 
declined from 77 degrees in 1650 to the dangerous angle of 61 degrees in 1901, and 
which showed three serious fissures on its upper side — in a cradle of stout timbers, and 
raising it with ropes and winches, while supporting it alno on the underside by struts 
of stout timber. To secure it for the future the whole of the underlying soil was 
removed in successive sections down to the rock level and replaced by concrete ; and it 
was in the course of this excavation that the discoveries to l>e described were made. 

As to foundations, the *' leaning stone " was found to go down 8 ft. below the 
surface datum, to terminate oblicjuely, and to rest upo.i two "sarsen " supports. Its 
fellow, the " recumbent stone," hud been supported on one face by a pile of " sarsen " 
blocks, and on the other by two large blocks, by which a row of stone mauls {see below) 
was found, which seem to have been used to wedge the *' recumbent stone " tight. If 
setback in its place thus indicated the " recumbent stone" wouM be exactly in line 
with the '* leaning stone." 

[ 7 i 



1902.] 



UAN. 



[Ila.«. 



The principal ohjoicts fnuud were (1) chippiiigs from llie great blocki'. (2) iniple- 
luenu. (3) lioiicn adJ (■ojni). Tli<! rhipping* wrri? nf nil tlio vnTietiea of stone known to 
lin*e l>een u»wl in ilie uioiinniuut. Frofu-taor JudJ, of tiie Boyal College of Scieni-e, in 
uuguged on u detiLJletl report uii their characters. They lay f»r too deep to have Ijcen 
uierel; tlie work of ileepoilers, nnd show that all the stones were worked upon more or 
less after iheir tirrivnl on thu site of erection. The proportion of •' sarsen " chips to 
bluestoue shows, however, that tho " aarsons " must have bei-n dressed roughl; before 
tlieir arrival, and ouiy (inishud at Ktonehenge ; while the bliiestoues mast have been 
wholly dressed on the Hpol, Professor Judd regHrdt< the " blueetones " as ice-borne 
boulders, the relics of a fonncr drift-deptrait. They were probably commoner formerly 
than uuw, and an accidental nbiindance of ibem at or near Stoneheuge may have helped 
to det'Tmiue the selei-tiiiu of this site. 

The U)ol» were of severul kinds; (I) hacbes, longer or shorter; (2) an intermcdjate 
type much chipped ami Miiiited ; (il) liiiiiinicr-axes ; (41 iuttiiLLn-iliiilr' l\ |i.'s of bamtner- 




rmled arm. 



Stones with traoee of an edge — types 1 to 4 being ttll of flint unhafted and too brittle 
for use oit " bard sarsoiis " or " bliieetoueH," though serviceable for the softer varieties ; 
(a) regular buiniiier atones of ((uarlKite, more or leaa chipped, from I lb. to 6 lbs. 
in weight ; (6) ijiiartzite maulit, with two well-deiined faces, and lrace» of a waUl as if 
U> bold a rope ; these weighed from ■)? lbs. to 134 lbs. The use of these mauls ie 
illustrated from Japan, wliure greiit mauls of this kind' are raised and let fall by ropes 
held by several men, while another mun directs their aim by a wooilen handle. Similar 
iiiauls lire noted from Llandudno, and from the shores of Lake Superior. Throughout 
it ithould he noted that for maMou's work of the kind required tine tools would be out of 
place ; and thai both for breaking great stones into shape nnd for trimming the faces 
the great mauU would be the moat appropriate implemeuts. 

The lionet were only of domCBlic animals, with the exception of certain antlers, 
vrbitdi were need as picks. Coins, even of Roman date, were found only in the superficial 
Uyer^, and occasionally in odd juxtaposition of different dates. 

[ « 1 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 6. 



Onlj one trace of copper or bronze occurred, other than coins and superficial 
finds ; a mere stain on a trimmed block of **' sarsen ^' from a depth of 7 ft., and all 
that was required could have been accomplished with stone tools, antler picks, timber 
props and frames, and ropes of hide. The results of the excavation show that neither 
for the transport of the stones nor for their preparation and erection was any knowledge 
of metals necessary. In Japan, for example, where megalithic remains are abundant, 
and megalithic methods survive, the 17th century castle of Osaka contains blocks 
measuring 40 ft. by 10 ft. by 5 ft. or more, and weighing upwards of 160 tons ; and 
Japanese drawings show stones of many tons weight carried, by mere man power, on a 
timber frame with cables attached, without the use even of rollers. 



^oO. 




PLAN OF BTONEHEMOE. 

A. Stone which/ell in 1900. BB. Stinuuf which fell in 1797. Th^ " Leaning Stime " w the 

shaded (i.e., standing) igt&ne neapt Mruth of BB. and a little went of the " Altar *^'Stom. 

The ^* Recumbent Stone " m immediately south of the " Leaning Stone" 

As to the dressing, the tabular structure of the '^ sarsens,'* and their great inequality 
of hardness, makes very little workiug necessary. They seem to have been broken to 
shape by alternate heating and chiliiug, and by the use of the heavy mauls ; but their 
preliminary dressing took place, as already stated, at a distance, aad all that can be seen 
at Stonehengo are the grooves pounded out by the mauls and the traces of the sideward 
blows by which the iuterv^ening ridges were obliterated. The bluestones show no 
grooves, but also no such careful shaping as that of the ^^ sarsens.^* 

The surface tooling was effected by the hammer-stones noted above, and has been 
reproduced very closely by Mr. Stally brass. 

The mode of erection was shown conclusively in the course of the excavations and 
differed in different cases, for the " recumbent stone," 25 ft. long, went only 4 ft. into 
the ground, while the " leaning stone," 29 ft. long, went 8 ft. down. The reason is 
obvious, for the two stones were set up as a pair, to carry a lintel, in the most important 

[ 9 ] 



1902.1 MAN. [No. 6. 

part of the whole structure. The shorter stoue, therefore, being set less deep, had a 
more elaborate base, and, to gaiu base, was only dressed od the parts which showed 
above ground. The leaning stone was erected by (1) excavating a pit with three 
vertical walls and one sloping rim on the side next the stone ; (2) raising the head-end 
of the stone by levers and timber packing till its foot slid down the sloping rim into the 
pit ; (3) hoisting it from about 50 degrees into an erect position by ropes ; (4) securing 
it in place by the smaller '^ sarsens ^' which support its oblique lower surface. Similar 
leverage is customarily employed in Japan with trunks of trees, and many rope-ends 
each pulled by one man. 

The " recumbent stone," on the other hand, was (1) supported at its foot-end on a 
low wall of small ^' sarsens " ; then (2) tipped upright, as above, against two large 
^' sarsens " placed in front ; then (3) packed tight, as above, with disused mauls. 

The chronology also receives • important new light fmm these excavations. A 
legend is current that the ^^ bluestones " circles are of earlier date than the ^^ sarsens," 
and that they were brought from Ireland. Both statements prove to be inaccurate. 
" Sursen " chippings go right down to the bed rock, along with chippings of " blue- 
stone " ; the " sarsens " prove to have been raised from inside, which could only have 
been done before the " bluestones " were set up, and there is evidence for a much less 
remote origin for the " bluestones " than Ireland. 

The absolute age of Stonehenge also may be inferred within certain limits. No 
bronze or iron tools occurred in the lower layers ; the work seems to have been done 
throughout with stone implements ; the types found have a neolithic look ; and, even if 
metal tools were of no use for this particular work, it is difficult to believe that, if the 
monument were of the Bronze Age, no bronze implement would have been lost in the 
course of its erection. On the other hand, the stain of CuCOs, already mentioned, 
shows that copper or bronze was already known, though probably not as a useful 
metal, and it must be remembered that the area at present excavated is but a fraction 
of the whole site. Now the beginning of the Bronze Age is given for Britain by Sir 
John Evans at 1400 B.C., and by Canon Greenwell at 1000 B.C., and for Northern Italy 
by Montelius at 2000 B.C. But these dates are for implements^ and implements pre- 
suppose a long transitional period of acquaintance with the metal. The evidence, 
therefore, points at present to a date about 2000-1800 B.C. for the structure. 

The purpose of Stonehenge was not sepulchral, but is probably connected with 
some form of sun-observance. In Japan, also, the orientation required for the sun- 
festival is obtained by the use of a pair of natural monoliths. There is no evidence 
of foreign influence ; every nation which keeps sun-observance inevitably develops 
sun observing instruments on its own account. 

In discussion, Sir Norman Lockyer described the attempts of Mr. Penrose and 
himself to ascertain the date of Stonehenge by the same astronomical considerations as 
they had applied to " sun temples " in Greece and Egypt respectively. The need for 
an approximate determination, if not of a solar year, at least of the seasons of 
ploughing, &c., led inevitably to the invention of means to determine equiuoxes, May and 
November seasons, and more especially solstices, as at Stonehenge. Petrie's deter- 
mination of azimuth for Stonehenge did not seem to him well founded, and Mr. Penrose 
and he had attempted a new determination ; which gave azimuth 49° 34' 18", and 
obliquity 23° 54' 20". Now the obliquity in 1901 is 23° 27' 1", which gives an approxi- 
mate date for Stonehenge of 1680 B.C., with a margin of error " ± 200 years." He 
regarded Stonehenge as an important member of an early series of related monuments. 

Dr. Maskelyne pointed out that bronze tools would not work " sarsens," and 
Mr. Penrose supported Sir Norman Lockyer's contention. 

Dr. Garson compared the results of recent excavations by a British Association 
committee at Arbor Lowe {Proc. Brit. Assoc., 1901, Glasgow, forthcoming). 

[ 10 ] 



1902.] MAN. [N08.6-7. 

Sir Henry Howorth asked how the stone sockets and dowels, which he compared 
with those of a Swedish circle, could have heen made with stone tools. 

Mr. Gowland, in reply, pointed oat (1) that in Japan snch sockets were made com- 
monly by pounding and bruising ; (2) that the absence of bronze implements made it 
improbable in any case that bronze tools had been employed ; (3) that the reason for 
the absence of the smaller chips of ^' sarsen *' was that pounding produced not chips but 
powder and granular pieces, except where large fragments were broken away at once. 



REVIEWS. 
Egypt, Petrie. 

Recent Excavations on Prehistoric and Dynastic Sites in Esypt. 

Diospolis Parva^ the Cetneteries of Abadiyeh and Hu^ 1898-9. By W. M. ^ 
Flinders Petrie. Special Extra Publication of the Egypt Exploration Fund. ■ 

The Royal Tombs of the Earliest Dynasties^ 1901. Part II. By W. M. Flinders 
Petrie. Twenty-first Memoir of the Egypt Exploration Fund. 

Diospolis was held back by the author to enable him to issue without delay his 
account of the subsequent seasoned work at the royal tombs of Abydos. But the 
postponed volume is not inferior in real interest even to the first instalment of the Royal 
Tombsj nor Indeed to any volume of the series in which it appears. The title of the 
memoir conveys no idea of the true significance of the book. The cemeteries of 
Abadiyeh and Hu, indeed, proved rich in prehistoric objects and not uninteresting tor 
subsequent periods though strangely deficient in inscriptions. Besides these cemeteries, 
a Ptolemaic temple enclosure at Hu was investigated and found to have been converted 
in Roman times into a fortress. Here a soldier had left a record on a potsherd in some 
script and language of Asia Minor, which now presents a puzzle to the learned in such 
matters. But the great importance of the volume lies in the attempt which Professor 
Petrie makes to utilise his observations, and those of Quibell, Randall-Mad ver, and others, 
on the prehistoric remains in Egypt, for establishing a system of dating them. This 
dating is not by years but by sequences, and the sequences are those of development or 
changes of style, which of course may not be in strict historical order, and would hardly 
have prevailed over all the country alike. There is seldom any stratification or even 
superposition of the remains to guide the archaeologist. The prehistoric cemeteries, which 
abound in Upper Egypt, are spread over wide areas on the edge of the desert so that 
the graves interfere little with each other. Petrie has had to depend for his guidance 
on style and association alone. A sketch of the ingenious system by which he worked 
the results of his mass of observations into a practical form was first given in the 
Journal of the Anthropological Institutey XXIX., pp. 295, et seq. The main guide is 
the pottery, a specimen or two of which was seldom absent from a grave. Other classes 
of remains were far less common than the pottery and must therefore be dated by the 
latter ; ihey may, however, usefully supplement that evidence confirming a view 
previously held, or deciding between views as to which the evidence of the pottery would 
b3 evenly balanced. No country has hitherto yielded such abundant and comparatively 
full record of its prehistoric age of stone and bronze in Egypt. The only pure stone 
age, however, known there is that which produced implements of palseolitbic type, the 
civilisation of the prehistoric cemeteries does not seem to extend behind the period 
when eoppar was utilised. It may here be remarked that Petrie believes that paUeolithic 
man continued in the Egyptian deserts down to the time when the Nile began to 
deposit alluvium. The rich soil then attracted a superior African race which already 
employed metal (hammered, not molten ?) and made fine pottery by hand without the 
wheel and soon exterminated or absorbed the weaker aborigines. Petrie recognises sur- 
vivals of the old race (as slaves ?) amongst the new in the steutopygous statuettes found 
in the earliest graves. Seven chapters in Diospolis Parva are occupied with a statement 

[ " ] 



4( 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 7-8. 

of the'method of claggification aud with digciissioc of 'the pottery, the stODe vases, the 
slate '^palettes," the ivories, the stone and metal tools, the amalets and beads, and finallj 
with an outline reconstruction of the prehistoric periods. Taking a series of numbers 
from 1-100 to represent the division of prehistoric remains m Egypt, Petrie starts 
his classification at 8.i>. (sequence date) 30, so as to leave room for earlier pliases 
when discovered, and ends at s.d. 80. Between the latter time and the First Dynasty 
(Menes) there seems to have been some interval by the style of the remains, and this 
gap Petrie would fill with Manetho^s dynasties of Thinite kings preceding Menes, of 
which he recognises traces at Abydos and Hierakonpolis. He considers the best period 
of art to have been in the thirties when the pottery had the purest forms. But greater 
evidence of wealth and technical skill is found from s.D. 50-60, which Petrie considers 
to have been the acme of prehistoric civilisation in Egypt. " We see, then, the most 
^ elaborate flint working, with perfect serial flaking, the best metal work 

the more valuable beads of gold turquoise and amethyst, the greatest profusion of 
hard stone vases, and the greatest amount of decorated pottery (perhaps rather 
** from 45-00.) " Petrie detects a marked change about 8.D. 40, which he is inclined 
to attribute to the influx of a new people, perhaps from Syria, amongst the earlier 
population of Libyan stock. The first remains of the copper-using race Petrie would 
pla(;e about 7,000 B.C., considering that the Nile deposit must have begun about that 
time. The date of 7,000 B.C. may never be verified, but Petrie's sequence-dates for the 
prehistoric remains ou<^ht to be verifiable by his own future researches and those of 
other explorers. Besides Mr. Maclver*8 and Mr. Garstang's work of last season, there 
has also been the ex|>c(lition of the University of California working among the pre- 
historic remains on scientific lines. Mr. Maclver's '* eastern " cemetorv at El Amrah, 
excavated this year, (see Max 1901. 40) yieldcil the whole of the prehittoric sequences 
and reached down to the period of the First Dynasty, thus bridging the archieological 
gap after s.n. 80 left by Petrie in Diottjfolis Farva* Other cemeteries cover 
only small portions of the whole. Careful deductions from observations on such points 
should soon settle the succession to the satisfaction of all. Unhappily the cemeteries 
are being ruined wholesale by plunderers, so that there can be few now remaining intact. 
The observations hitherto have all been carried on amid the embarrassing wreck of 
recently plundered graves, otherwise the problem would have been far easier of solution 
and the results much fuller than they actually have been. A glance at the plates w^ill 
convince the ethnologist as well as the student of prehistoric remains of the extra- 
ordinary importance of this oldest but most recently exploretl field of archaeology in 
Egypt, and they will be grateful to Petrie for his courageous and brilliant eflbrt to 
co-ordinate the results. 

The work amongst the Royal Tombs of Abydos seems t^ follow naturally on Q 
the prehistoric archaeology of Diospolis Parva. At Abydos, Professor Petrie has O 
been working through the remains of the earliest dynasties, I. and II. of Manetho. In 
some cases the royal names found in these tombs are recognizable in the New Kingdom 
lists, though always more or less deformed and misunderstood. The greater number, 
however, must be arranged according to circumstantial evidence, sequence of style, &c. 
At that time, as also at some later periods, changes in fashion were evidently very 
rapid within certain limits, so that in general the succession of kings, thanks to a few 
fixed points, can be made out with surprising ease and certainty. Here again a great 
stumblingblock is the mixture of remains through ancient and modern plundering, so 
that the attribution of graves to particular kings is often a matter of s})eculation. 

• Mr. Mace informs me that the latest disco verieji show s.D. 80 to have been contemporary with, or 
e?en later than, Mene% thus abolishing the gap from s.d. 80 to 100. In general, Profebsor Petrie's 
coDclnsionB are confirmed from s.D. 80 to 80. 

[ 12 1 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 8-9 

Menes, the founder of Dynasty I. of Manetho, is an important starting point. There 
seems little doubt that he is identical with a king generally called by the '^Horns- 
name " Aha ou contemporary remains, though the '^ personal *^ name Menes (MN), 
by which he was known later, occurs only once. The style of Aha*s inscriptions is 
important as a link between the style of his successors and that of other kings who 
must have preceded him. Petrie at present recognises three or four kings before Menes. 
Egypt under the early dynasties was still in the flint and copper stage ; bronze is not 
found before the Sixth Dynasty. Apart from the vessels in hard stone, which were finely 
shaped even in the early prehistoric periods, there are excellent carvings in relief and 
short inscriptions earlier than Menes. It may be recollected that the end of the Third 
Dynasty and the beginning of the Fourth is the time when the solid rectangular mastaba- 
tomb with sloping sides passed rapidly through the step-pyramid stage and culminated 
in the perfect pyramid of Khufu. At the same time the walls of private tombs in the 
Memphite region were covered with a profusion of exquisite sculptures and paintings. ' 

The royal tombs at Abydos belong in part to kings just before Menes, in part to 
the Menes (the First) Dynasty of about eight kings, in part to the Second Dynasty, 
which consisted of about nine. Garstang^s work at El Ahaiwah shows that some of the 
tombs of the early Third Dynasty kings were in the same district, so that we may hope 
soon to have a continuous scries of dated remains connecting the Fourth Dynasty with 
the prehistoric period. There is certainly a vast gap between the First Dynasty and the 
Fourth in the archaeology as in the history ; changes were proceeding rapidly amid much 
fluctuation of artistic power and finish. One might expect the accompaniments of a royal 
tomb to be all of the finest workmanship, but this is certainly not the case at Abydos. 
The inscriptions on ivory and ebony are often mere ugly scrawls, though the bad pieces 
are interspersed with an occasional good piece. The level of that art during the 
First and Second Dynasties would seem to have gradually receded rather than advanced 
but we cannot be sure that the pieces found at all represent the higher levels of work- 
manship of the time. It may not have been the custom, especially as culture developed, 
to waste good work wholesale by burying it in graves. The fine work was very 
probably reserved for the open parts of the tomb, and all or most of this has perished or 
disappeared. In almost every tomb, however, of the earlier time, fragments or samples 
of exquisite work have been found. Such, for example, are the fragment of a crystal 
vase (pi. V. 12), carved marble (ib, 15), the ear of barley (ib, 16), all from the tomb of 
Zer. In the tombs of Dynasty II., where little that can display art is found better than 
the clay sealings applied to the mouths of vessels, the seals were very neatly arranged 
and engraved. The stelae with the name of Perabsenof the Second Dynasty, which were 
probably visible after the tomb was closed, are in a fine style. 

It must always be remembered that these great brick tombs — which seem to have 
had floors, roofs, and in some cises linings of wood — together with their countless 
ofierings in jars and boxes, were almost utterly destroyed by fire, as well as plundered 
again and again, not least during the years 1895-8. Flinders Petrie and his coadjutors 
are to be congratulated on the splendid results brought out by scientific methods from 
a wreckage and confusion apparently hopeless. F. Ll. GRIFFITH. 



Fisliepy. JankS, 

Primitive IMethods of Fishing in North-Eastern Europe and 

Northern Asia. 

Dritte Asifif'schc lu)rschung8reise des Graf en Evgvn Zichy, Baud I. Herkufift f% 
der Magyarischen Fischerei, Von Dr. Johauu Jank6. Leipzig : Ilirsemann, 1900. U 
4to, pp. 708. With 17 plates and 544 blocks in the text. Price £1 17*. 6d. 

In this work — in two folio volumes, printed in German and Hungarian in parallel 
colnmns, well got up and adequately illustrated — Dr. Jank6 gives an account of much of 

[ 13 ] 



19j02.] MAN. [No. 9. 

the work done duriDg Count Zichj's third ethnographical expedition, of which he was 
a member. Before starting six months were spent in studying the collections and 
literature accessible in Russian and Finuish museums, and the wealth of comparative 
matter accumulated would suggest how necessary this was even if the author in his 
introduction did not paj full tribute to the help thus derived. The first part of the 
work comprises an elaborate account of the different methods used for catching fish in 
enclosures (corrals). This method, it is pointed out, can onlj be used when shoals of 
migratory fish are on the move, and depends essentialij on their tendency to track along 
any obstruction rather than be turned aside. Hence the simplest form of corral consists 
of a couple of rows of stakes converging towards each other so as to enclose a 
V-shaped space, at the apex of which is a small closed chamber in which the fish 
collect. This is, in fact, the form from which most of the elaborate corrals figured 
are derived, whether as on the Neusiedler See there are many compartments leading 
into each other, and constituting for the fish a veritable maze, or as on the Dnjestr a 
simple chamber approached round a complicated system of palisades. The various 
forms of fish weirs are then discussed, and in connection with these many forms of 
baskets and traps, some resembling our eel baskets and lobster pots, are figured. The 
simplest form of weir described is that in which walls, roughly built of stone as in the 
Scotch salmon cruive, stretch from the two banks of the stream towards each other, 
just failing to meet at the centre, where some form of trap is interposed. The difference 
between these and some of the simpler forms of corrals is but slight ; probably the 
author lays too much stress on the quality of permanence in such structures constituting 
a weir : certainly some of the large examples figured as occurring, e,g.y on the Volga, 
might equally be called corrals, in which the usual kidney-shaped chamber was 
replaced by a large rectangular palisade box. 

SeincH, tramels, clap and hoop nets, and trawls are considered. The casting net, 
to which considerable attention is paid, resembles that in use among the Malays, and 
is stated to have been picked up from Greek fishermen on the shores of the Black 
Sea, and to be perhaps Persian in origin. The snaring of fish, which occurs only 
in Western Europe, reached the Magyars through Germany, while the highly 
specialized forks or grains in common use, together with large and often elaborate 
snatch-hooks such as are used in the winter sturgeon fishery on the Volga, are Russian 
in origin. 

The most interesting parts of the book is that which deals with angling. The 
earliest form of the craft is traced to the use of what, for want of a better term, I 
venture to call the gorge-spike (Angelpjiock). 

This simple contrivance introduced to the Magyars by the Turks, and still used by 
children in Northern Germany, consists among the Jakuts of a piece of bone about 
H inches long, sharpened at both ends. The bait is impaled on it, and the spike is 
then tied to the line by its centre. The fish is allowed to gorge the bait, which it does 
by swallowing the spike longitudinally, a sharp tug on the line then brings the spike 
across the victim's gullet or stomach, which is usually transfixed. Passing from this, 
there is in the museum at Helsingfors what is probably the simplest form of hook 
extant. This consists of a V-shaped piece of wood with sharp pointed arms of equal 
length, the running line being knotted by a modified half hitch to the apex of the V. 
A hook similarly knotted on, but with one arm only sharpened and shorter than the 
other, is also figured. Then come the well-known composite hooks with a nick cut on 
the shank for the reception of the snood. These are unbarbed, as are the simplest iron 
hooks figured, which are, however, eyed. One primitive form of hook, consisting of a 
Dortion of the trimmed stem of a thorny plant, with a suitable spine left attached, such 
as still occurs along the Essex coast, is not mentioned, and presumably is not met with 
among the Magyars. Composite hooks are still used among the Ostjaks in combination 

[ U ] 



1902.1 MAN. [Nos. 9-10. 

with a primitive form of trimmer — the luma. This consists of a somewhat flattened, 
pear-shaped piece of wood, to which the running line is fastened, and round which it is 
then carried in a series of loose flgure-of-eight loops. The whole is then dropped in the 
water with a dead bait impaled on the hook, or it is balanced on the water's edge so that 
the fish easily pulls it into the water, the running line being often carried over the fork 
of a stick from which the fish can easily free it in its struggles. Another method is to 
firmly tie a shortish line to a large gourd. This, presumably live baited, is thrown into 
the water, and then connected with a peg on the bmk Hy a thread so weak that the 
fish can easily break it, and tow the gourd about in the water. A form of double and 
even treble composite hook with a long shank, resembling in a general way our gorge 
trolling hook, is used for live baiting, when it is tied either to the bait's side, or the 
shank is introduced at the mouth and passed out at the gills. Live baiting for 
Silurus glanis with a frog, with the help of a small horn-like or heart-shaped piece 
of wood used to beat the water, is fully discussed, and the belief entertained by 
the fishermen that the noise so produced resembles the croaking of a frog, or acts 
as a sexual lure to the cock fish, is shown to be untenable. Various accessory 
pieces of fishing apparatus, ice axes, sinkers, &c., are figured throughout the book, 
which closes with a resumi of the origins of the various fish-catching appliances 
in use throughout the ethnographical district inhabited by Magyar and kindred Ugrian 
peoples. 

A primitive form of fish weir and the luma are considered to date back to times 
when the Ostjaks, Finns, and Magyars still lived together. Fish baskets and traps 
\%ere invented after the Finns had split off, when a large number of new appliances 
were introduced by successive waves of Turkish immigrants. Fresh hordes of Asiatic 
invaders then carried the Magyars and their Turkish conquerors westwards, where 
Russian, Greek, and lastly western methods of fishing were learnt. Finally, a 
discussion of the geographical distribution of the pike, carp, and Silurus glanis, and the 
names for these fish lends the author to infer that the region immediately west of the 
Urals and south of latitude 55° was for long the dwelling-place but not the cradle of the 
Ugrian 'Magyar stock. C. G. S. 



10 



America. Udden 

Pre-Columbian Archmology in Kansas, U.8.A. 

An Old Indian J^llage. By J. A. Udden ( Augustana Library Puhlica- 
tionSy No. 2). Rock Island, Illinois, 1900. 80 pp. 

This pamphlet contains an account of the exploration of a villuge site south of the 
Smoky Hill River, Kansas. The antiquities discovered consisted of objects in stone 
and bone, with fragments of pottery, mostly of types familiar to us through the work 
of explorers in States lying furtiier east. They were chiefly excavated from low 
flat-topped mounds which had formed the platforms or bases on which dwellings had 
been erectt'd. An interesting object was a small piece of chain-mail, the occurrence of 
which leads the author to conjecture thai; the village may have received a visit from the 
Spaniards at the time of Coronado's Expedition in 1542. In bup{>ort of this view he 
gives a map (p. 75) showing the probable route taken by the Spaniards according to 
various authorities. Mr. Udden has performed his task very thoroughly, and has 
illustrated his paper by a number of excellent process-blocks. He disclaims the title of 
archaeologist, and announces that the present work will be his last on an antiquarian 
subject. We may be permitted to hope that he will ultimately change his mind, and 
give us similar monographs on other interesting localities in the United States to which 
the exercise of his functions may call him. 0. M. D, 

[ 15 J 



1902.] MAN. [NoB.U-18. 

PROCEEDINQS OF SOCIETIES. 
Prooeedings. Soo. d'Anthr. de Paris. 

Sommaire des Proch-verbal de la Seance du 2i novembre 1901. — Le Prix A A 
Bertillon a eti attribue (ex aaquo) k MM. Cauderlier et Ripley, avec mentiou tr^ 1 1 
honorable k M. Macquart. Le Prix Godard a iti attribu^ a M. VoJkov, avec m^ilaille 
de bronze k M. Titehener. 

M. Zaborowski: Nouveaux cranes du caucase. Discussion : M. Delislc. 

M. A. Dumont : Demographie du d4partoment de Lot et Garonne. Discussion : 
MM. Yves Gujot, Paul Robin, Sanson, et Delislc. 

M. le Dr. Felix Regnault : Osteogenic. Discussion : MM. Vcrnenu, Papiilault, 
et Azoulaj. 

M. Bloch : Preuves ataviques de la transformation des races. Discussion : MM. 
Nicole, Dumont, et Regnault. 

Seance du 5 dScembre 1901. Pr^entation et don d^objets de Madagascar par 
M. le Dr. Danjou. Discussion : MM. Volkov, G. Raynaud, P. Robin, Manouvrier, 
Vinson, A. de Mortillet, Y. Guyot, et Delisle. 

Elections : Bureau pour Tannee 1902. President, M. Verneau ; I'* Vice-president, 
M. d'Ault du Me-snil ; 2* Vice-president, M. Deniker ; Secrdtaire general, M. Ch. 
Letourneau ; Secretaire general adjoint, M. Manouvrier ; Secretaires annuels, MM. 
Papiilault et Anthony ; Conservateurs des Collections, MM. A. de Mortillet et Ed. Cuyer ; 
Bibliothdcaire-Archiviste, M. Zaborowski ; Tresorier, M. Daveluy ; Commission de 
Publication, MM. Herve, Capitan, et Yves Guyot. 



Proceedings. Anthropological Institute. 

Ordinary Meeting^ 26th Noyemher 1901. Mr. C. H. Read, F.S.A., President, in 4|| 
the chair. The election was announced of Mr. H. B. Johnstone as a Fellow of the liL 
Institute. 

Mr. E. Willett exhibited and described a numl>er of Palceolithic Implements from 
Savemake. His paper will be found in full, with the discussion, in Jourti, Anihr, 
Inst.y XXXI. 

Mr. N. W. Thomas exhibited a collection of objects collected by the Hon. Auberon 
Herbert, and described by him as " Totem stones " (see Times, September 3rd and Tth^ 

1901, and subsequent letters). 

Rev. R. F. Gatty exhibited and described a number of Diminutive Flints from 
the Sand-mounds of Scunthorpe, An abstract of the paper will be found in Man, 

1902. 15 (hereafter). 

Ordinary Meeting, 10th December 1901. Mr. A. L. Lewis, F.C.A., treasurer, in 
the chair. The election was announced of Messrs. S. H. Williams, W. W. Thorn, and 
F. Eyles as Fellows of the Institute. 

Mr. T. C. Hodson read a paper, illustrated by numerous exhibits, on the Native 
Tribes of Ma?iipur. It will be found in full in Journ, Anthr, Inst., XXXI. 

Mr. S. H. C. Hawtrey read a paper on the Lengua Indians of the Gran Chaco of 
Paraguay, which will be found in full in Journ, Anthr, Inst,, XXXI. 



Proceedings. Society of Antiquaries. 

Ordinary Meeting, 19th December 1901. The Right Hon. Viscount Dillon, ^o 
President, in the chair. |y 

Mr. W. Gowland, F.S.A., presented his Report on the Recent Excavations at Stone- 
henge, of which an abstract is printed above (Man, 1901. 6). Discussion : Sir Norman 
Lockyer, F.R.S. ; Dr. Maskelyne, F.R.S. ; Mr. F. G. Penrose, F.B.S. ; Sir Henry 
Howorth, K.C.I.E., F.R.S. ; and Dr. Garson. 

Printed by Etbb akd Spottiswoode, His Majesty's Printers, Bast Harding Street, E.G. 



1903.] MAN. [No. 14. 

ORiaiNAL ARTICLES. . 
Egypt. With Plate B. Petrie. 

Prahistorio Egyptian Fisures. % H\ M. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L., 44 

LL,D*j Edwards Professor of Egyptology at University College^ London. I ■ 

The following figures have been collected in Egypt, mainly from prehistoric graves, 
but have not yet been published : — 

1. A kneeling figure of a captive, carved in hard red limestone ; a splinter of rock 
crystal inlaid in the eye (the other eye broken), and another piece of crystal inlaid on 
the top of the hca<l. 

2. A figure carved in hard red limestone with the usual domed head and pointed 
chin of the prehistoric people. The truncation of arms and legs is seen also in early 
figures (as the arms of the steatopygous figures) and in the historic times of the dolls 
of the twelfth dynasty. 

3. Ivory figure of upper part of body ; a long strip of gold has been bound round the 
neck and forms a loop above the head for suspension. It has l)een greatly worn by use 
as an amulet. 

4. Figure in brown steatite with suspension hole in lower end. 

t5. Ivory double-fa(!(Hl head, broken from a long ivory tusk carved with a head. 
Thiis is one of the best examples of such figures for the style of the face. 

6, 7. Ivory combs with heads carvwi upon tbcm, and necklaces shown by three 
rows of dots. All of these heads show the usual type of prehistoric Egyptian (cf. Journ, 
Anthr. Inst., Vol. XXXI., PI. XVIII., l-o). 

8 to 16. A cliuss of amulets which have l>ecome so degraded in copying that it is 
difficult to be certain of their origin. An example found at Abydos last year, however, 
showed that these were bulls* hetids ; the muzzle has become a cylinder with a ridge 
found it, the eyes have been put too high up, and the horns brought round on the face. 
The materials are — 8, clear serpentine; 9, carnelian ; 10, green serpentine; 11, black 
steatite ; 12, yellow and black serpentine, back view showing the suspension hole usual 
in these; 13, carnelian; 14, black steatite with white shell eye inlaid; lo, slate; 
16, black steatite, prolmbly later, and looking much like late Roman work. All the 
above are full size. 

The following figures are two-thirds size : — 

17. Bird flying, chip|>ed in flint. 

18. Serpent, chipped in flint, from Koptos. 

19. Dog (?), chipiKjd in flint. 

20. Hippojwtamus, chippe<l in flint, proljably of the twelfth dynasty, from Kahun. 
These flint figures of animals are very rare, as I have only met, beside these, some more 
pieces of flint serpents. 

21. Pieces of brown steatite, and of creamy limestone, of unknown use. Aliout 20 
such were brought to me together ; they vary in size, but are clearly in equal jwiirs. 
Perhaps some analogy or explanation for these can l)e suggested. 

22. Lid of a pottery Ik)x, of the usual dccorate<l pottery ; a re<l line scnibbling 
across it hardly shows in this photograph. Before baknig, figures have been in<rijstMl 
uix>n it, apparently two hunnm figures, an ostrich and a scorpion. The white has l)een 
recently rnblKjd into the lines for photographing. 

23. Ivory piece of unknown use ; four such were found together. 

24. Moilel dagger in ivory ; the form of the handle is unlike any of the historic 
age, and the three rivet-holes atrross the end of the blade and the rib down the blade 
agree well enougii with the copper <higger known to be prehistoric {Xuf/uda and 
Hallos, PI. LXV., 3). This probably shows, therefore, the mode of hatting the 
l)rehistoric daggers. W. M. FLINDEKS PKTKIii, 

[ 17 J 



leoa.] 



CHo. Ifi. 



England : PrehlBtorlo. Qatty. 

Pigmy Flint Imptements fivm the 8and-l>eilB at Scunthorpe ^* 
In Lincolnshire. I'lstrari „/ „ Pa/irr hy ihr Hr<: H. A. Catty. LI..U.. ]Q 
prenenled lo the AtilkropohyUal tmliluU, Xovemher 26t/i, lUOl (r/. M*s, 1902. 12). 

Tlio cihject Iff iliia pupiT ia ineri-ly to give a geueml aecoiml of a collccliou of fliut 
implements of very small aise, aaJ of the site at Sciititliorpe, Liiit-olpBliire, ou whiph tbese 
fliule are fouiul in greut abuDilsiice, anil lo stale certain iuferences as to llieir origin 
wliieli aeem tft he jiistitietl liy the circumsrunces of their iHsi-overy, niiil by the close 
likeoutB wliiuli tlicy prCnuut to the pigmy flints wliiub uro foiiml in Fraiinc, Belgium, 
aitd ill Iiulia. 

irliimd of .Sciintliorpe in lor tlic mn?|. (utrt Icvol, l>nl a riil^e of liill« 
n the plain, uiul (ixtumlu fur thirty mites tn l.itii'olii. The pigmy Hints 
lIio liillH atid OH tlie phiiu — iiu inolaleU sites, of wbicli ito ]aa thuti 



The noigi) 

rises abrnplly I 

Are fouQil iKtlli 

t wven aro know 



Tho whole liistriot a 




1.— 6BCT10K THIIunBH C 
PRAT AT SOUSTHOaPE : ITl 
TO THE SUBPACE LAI'GB n 



have lioeii cnvcrod with lutnd ; in some 
plaeeit to u tieptii of 2U ftiet. Thii^ ilepcwit 
may be of glacial iletritus origiually, hut 
ill its presient atrotilioil form muet be due 
to the action of wind, as nothing mariiie 
is found in it, and in many plaoee the 
gnnd, when espised, eontinnes to drift, 
iHid occasionally even bloyks the mad. 
The drifted sanil fo rmsmonnds, oecaaioii- 
ally us mneh as ten feet high, lint u«iially 
much less, unU it is on the Hour of these 
mounds that the pigmy flints are found, 
ill wiiiil-lilown depresaions of irregular 
and shifting shape, which meaKuro from 
H Ity 4 yards to 50 yards square, sunk 
from two to sis feet below the surface. 

1 have obtained more than 2(X) pigmies 
from oue of these depressioua, and my 
own belief ia that they are the mitee of 
habitations or workshops. 

Below the aand is a lied of jient some 
four feet thick, and below this a bed of 
valuable ironstone, which is being wurkeil 
without difficulty by digging away the 
sand and peat. The whole aeries of beds 
ia tli^s clearly exposed in succeseive sec- 
tions. The peat is full of tree roots and 
pieces of timber ; and n horn and {lurt of 
the skull of Bo» primiffi'niu* have been 
fnnnd iu the peat or iw the auperincumbeut 



fonnil it it. No pigmy flints, however, a 
sand, but only on the surface of the snod. 

The area whore the flints are tonml is now unciiltivnted 
herhi^e suitable for pasture; the rahbilo which abound in the 
some distance tor their food, und water is very scarce, and in 
unobtainable. It ia therefore dtRtcnlt to see what inducement 
eettlers. There arc, moreover, uo earthworks, and no truce of 



for fighting : nor would 
captured, by snaring. In 



Kor 



. pif 



my implemontM l>i 
times, never the 1 1 
[ 18 ] 



th but liitic 

sandy soil must go 
ilry seasouB uinjosl 
I'oiild be oHered lo 
irnplemonta suitable 



of use to kill animnls, even when 
99, the saudholos were occnaionally 



1903.] MAN. CITo. Iff. 

inhabited, for I have found a Roman coin, probablj of the later Empire, and several 
fragments of bronze ornaments ; potterr also occurs, both of Roman types and of the 
rongh British fabric, decorated with rude patterns. All the objects of human workman- 
ship from the flints onwards seem to me to be posterior to the deposition of the sand bed, 
and this in turn seems to exclude the idea that the flints belong to a period between 
the paleolithic and the neolithic. 

No large implements or polished tools are found in the sand- holes with the pigmv 
flints, and verj few ordinary neolithic implements of any kind, but those which do (KXMir 
seem from their stratigraphical position to belong to the same date as the pigmies. 

The pigmy flints, both worked and fragmentary, occur in great quantities — too great 
to be classed merely as workshop debris. Most of them s^eeni to have been iiseii for 
scraping or cutting, and the scrapers are the more common and go down to the smalles^t 
size ; 64 circular scrapers weighing less than half -au-ou nee. In form these more nonde* 
script implements are very like those rough neolithic forms which do not generally liiul 
their waj into collections, but seem nevertbele»s to have been use<1 for the common 
purposes of everyday life. 

Though the pigmies are found in such numbers together, and though the simple 
scrapers have clearly been struck ofl* by a single blow, no cores liave hitherto been found 
with them. Further search, however, may bring them to light, for it was not till after 
some time that I succeedeil in finding the rhomboidal types which Mr. Pierpont in 
Belgium calls " trapezes." 

There is no native flint at Scunthorpe, but flint i>ebMes could be obtained from the 
gravels of the river Trent some four miles away, or from the wolds of East Yorkshire : 
and the enormous quantity of small debris coiw hives me that the saml holes are the actual 
places of manufacture. I found, however, two implements of chalcedony, and of an 
Indian type, which gives them all the more resemblance to those of the Vindhya 
Hills. 

The types which are represented are best descril>e*l by reference to those brought by 
Mr. Carlyle from cave shelters in the Vindhya Hills in India, and examined and drawn 
to scale by Mr. Charles Seidler ; and to the characteristic examples of lK>th the Indian 
and the Scunthorpe series, which are figure*! herewith (Figs. *2 and 3). Mr. Seidler 
has kindly examined the Scunthorpe flints also, and reports as follows on their respecti\e 
sizes : — 



Smallest crescent - 


- 


- India, -^ in. 


Scunthorpe, ^. 


Scalene 


- 


10 


»' T€' 


Roundeil and pointed 


• 


10 


4 


Rhomboidal - 


- 


8 


" A* 



This identitv of form deserves some consideration That **a common want '' mav make 
a "common tool " may l>e tnie enough when the use of a tool is clear, as in the case of 
an arrowhead or a scraper ; but when the use is unknown, and when the tools oi'cur only 
in rare localities, the prol>ability increases that there is some other connei'tion l»etween 
them. For the sake of clearness I have discounted the very numerous nontlescript 
pigmies ; but as search goes on we shall prol>ably have to admit a numl)er of new types, 
e.g.j the minute points, which may have been the tips of l>low-pipe darts. 

Both at Scunthorpe and in the Intlian rii\o shelters the pigmy flints were pro- 
duced in enormous quantities. At Scunthorpe, iiuleed, a day's work will yield some 
sixty specimens. Further, if the pigmies were merely diniinutivc neolithic implements 
we should expect that ordinary neolithic tools would ho found abundantly with them ; 
vet none are found on the Indian sites, and verv few intletnl at Scunthorm*. 

The principal Indian tyj>es are (1) triangular or scalene ; (2) roundeil at one end 
and pointetl at the other ; (3) crescent-shaped. The last-named is not so common at 

[ 19 ] 



1901^.1 



MAN. 



[Nor. 15. 



Scunthorpe as the two former type?. None of these types can be merely accidental ; 
the circular flakes least of all, quite apart from the fact that they frequently show signs 
of wear on their edges. A knife-like form (which occurs also at Scunthorpe) has a 
cutting edge and a very thick circular back, well worked as if to afford a good grip. 
There is also a distinct chisel form with a bevelled edge. 



f I 




1« 



ir 



2.0 cm, 



f 



II' « 




O II M O O o i 



^M f f t f « « 



flHMH^^^MiMM^^ 



FIO. 2.— SCUlfTHORPK FLINTS. 




YUclkif t M JIa , /(%^k VutvwM. JMrVvMUU ^ J^U^-ci 




^ 







(! < 





i 



i 



' - ■ • ■ 



* IitcK««. 



t 



■y- 



FIO. 3. — INDIAN FLINTS. 

[ 90 ] 



1903.] MAN. [Ho. 15. 

The triangular arrowheads (Fig. 4) speak for themselves. I have one in mv collection 

somewhat fire-stained, which came, not from Sconthorpe, hot from 
^./^ ^ A a similarly sandy common ahout five miles oC It was found, so the 

finder (Mr. M. Peacock, of Cadney) told me, in the hottom of a hroken 

FIG. 4. (I) m-jj among burnt boues, and, though 1 did not see the urn myself, I have 

no reason to doubt his statement. This arrowhead measures i^-in. long, and has no barbs. 

It is, of course, often difficult to say how much of the work on a pigmy is due to 
definite flaking, and how much to use ; but the flaking which results from pressure 
during use, especially in scraping, does not produce that regularity of chipping which is 
so marked in some of the finest pigmies. 

As to their probable use, (I) the character of the implements is too well defined, and 
the working too regular to allow us to regard tbem merely as the teeth of a saw or of 
an instrument for wool carding. (2.) Mr. Pierpont suggests that the Belgian pigmies 
were used for tattooing, and figures an iron tattooing implement of similar form from the 
Congo ; but the multitude of the pigmies on each single site makes this unlikely. 
(3) The fact that the Indian pigmy flints were found in cave shelters suggests, however, 
that they served some domestic purpose, and the delicacy of their fabric may be due to 
manufacture by the women, and as they certainly could be used to puncture skins, they 
may have been used in sewing. This, however, still leaves unexplained the borers, mere 
spines of flint without a cutting edge. (4.) The knife-like and chisel-like forms point to 
some practice of delicate carving on wood, bone, or jet. Yet no beads or traces of 
women's ornaments have been detected as yet at Scunthorpe. (5.) The suggestion that 
the crescontic pigmies were fish-hooks is negatived by the waterless character of the 
area ; and (6) the idea that they are an accidental by-product of ploughing, by its 
barrenness, and by the total absence of all trace of former cultivation. 

The considerations which seem to me to point to a distinct origin for these pigmy 
flints are mainly as follows : — 

(1.) The variety of their types, and the care devoted to their manufacture differen- 
tiates them altogether from the ordinary neolithic borers. 

(2.) Their absence from the vast majority of neolithic sites can hardly be due to the 
indifference of collectors. Mr. Worthington Smith writes from Bedfordshire, ** I have 
^' never found any pigmies. Of course I can find plenty of small irregular fragments 
^* and artificially struck off flints, the small refuse from implements such as celts, arrows, 
^' scrapers or borers ; but anything like an extra small arrow, scraper, or borer I have 
" never found. There are none here." Mr. A. S. Kennard, of Beckenham, Kent, 
writes, " I have only found pigmies in two localities, one near Sevenoaks, and the other 
'^ at Sittingbourne. I have looked for them in vain in this district, though neoliths are 
•* abundant." It is true that the Scunthorpe sands are easy to examine, and that the 
forms found there are well defined ; but the correlative fac of the almost total absence of 
ordinary neolithic forms from the Scunthorpe and Indian sites seems to confirm the 
validity of the assumption that if pigmy fliuts had existed on neolithic sites, they would 
have been seen and rei)orted long ago. 

(3.) On the other hand, I have found pigmies myself at Bradfiold, near Sheffield, 
high up on the Pennine range, and not far from the point where Dr. Col ley March found 
examples under a peat bed, and also at Hooton Roberts near Kotherham in Yorkshire. 
So far as I know, there are some eight or ten places in England where pigmies have 
been found, but nowhere have they been discovered in .such numbers, or so very small, as 
at Scunthorpe, where the circumstances, however, are unusually favourable. I think, 
therefore, that at present the evidence is against the supposition that the pigmy flints are 
of universal occurrence. 

(4.) In France, however, and in Belgium, as we have seen, exactly similar types 
recur, and from India come the same tvpes again. The exact similaritv of type between 

' [ 21 ] 



Id02.] MAN. [Nob. 16-16. 

Belgium and ludia, and the absence already noted of neolithic types from pigmy flint 
sites, has led Mr. Pierpont to the inference that the pigmy flints are the work of a par- 
ticular people ; and all the evidence which I have got at Scunthorpe leads to the same 
supposition. I have endeavoured, however, to keep out the theoretic side of the question 
and to confine myself as far as possible to a plain statement of the facts as I have observed 
them. R« A. GATTY. 



Stonehenge . Discussion. 

Recent Excavations at Stonehenfl^e. Abstract of the Discussion 4n 
of Mr. W, GotclafuTs Paper on Stonehengc (Man, 1902. 6) read at a 10 
Special Meeting of the Anthropological Institute^ January 13/A, 1902 (Max, 1902. 24). 

The discussion here summarised took place at a special meeting of the Anthro- 
pological Institute, of which the formal report will be found below (Max, 1902. 24). 
The occasion was the delivery by Mr. W. Gowland, F.S.A., of a paper on Recent 
Excavatiofis at Stonehengc^ arising out of his Report to the Society of Antiquaries, 
of which an abstract will be found above (Max, 1902. 6). After the reading of the 
paper : — 

Mr. Arthur Evaxs congratulated Mr. Gowland on the very complete and scientific 
record that he had preserved of the recent works on Stonehenge. For the first time 
they had before them the true '^ anatomy ** of a part of the monument. At the same 
time he was unable to read the evidence quite in the same way as Mr. Gowland. 
Amongst all the stone implements discovered there was nothing distinctly neolithic. 
Mr. Gowland had laid stress on the absence of bronze implements as an argument for 
referring the date of the monument to at least the close of the Neolithic period. But 
under one of the sarsen slabs had been found traces of copper oxide, very probably 
left by a bronze implement. There was here an indication that the soil was not 
favourable to the preservation of that metal. On the other hand, a ground or polished 
implement or even a fragment of such must have been preserved. Mr. Evans himself 
(in a paper in the Archeeological Review) had put forth the theory that the monument 
belonged to the late period of the Bronze Age. The low mound seemed to stand in a 
specially close relation to the latest class of the surrounding barrows belonging to that 
period. It was reasonable, moreover, to bring it into connection with the surrounding 
necropolis, and a characteristic ^' incense burner/* like those of the barrows, has been 
found near one of the triliths. It was important to observe that Stonehenge was a 
very advanced representative of its class. Certain structural features, such as the 
mortices and tenons of the outer circle, even recalled the similar appliances of Greek 
temples like that of Segesta. Irish megalithic monuments of probably Bronze Age date 
did not show such advance, yet on the whole Ireland — that early " Eldorado " — was 
during that period ahead of this island in technical skill. As to the astronomical 
argument, applied to a rude stone monument it had very little force. Even in the case 
of Greek temples such deductions had led to errors of about 1,000 years. The religious 
connexions of Stonehenge were not a mere matter of conjecture, and sun worship was at 
most a secondary object in its structure. It was, in fact, one of a large series of 
jjrimitive religious monuments that grew out of purely sepulchral architecture. 
The various features of the primitive chambered barrow — itself the outgrowth of 
the mound hut, such as may still be seen in Lapland and elsewhere — were all 
traceable here. There was the entrance passage which in the case of various barrows 
could be seen in the act of growing into the free standing, honorific avenue. There 
was the stone doorway represented by the trilith — a form found elsewhere standing by 
itself in a sepulchral relation. There were the supporting ring-stones of the mound 
become, as in the case of some barrows, a free-standing circle. The entrance passage of 
primitive huts, as seen, for instance, in the Lapp gamme^ faced the rising sun for practical 

[ 22 ] 



IMS.] MAN. [Ho. 16i 

rasons. The eotzmoee ol our earlj chambered bmrrows was oriented in the same waj. The 
orientation of the avenue of Stonehei^ sprang from the same sepulchral source. The 
evolution of cTenr feature of the monument could be traced bj successive links from tliese 
sepulchral elements, and although doubtless we had here a building no longer confined 
to the mere worship of human dead but diToted to the service of higher spiritual beingji, 
it must be r^arded as doselj connected with a chthonic cult. The solar element, if it 
existed, was certainlv of a subsidiary nature. Whether actual interment went on 
within the building was a secondary question, though the finding of the ** thurible ^^ 
might be thought to point that way. 

Mr. A. L. Lewis said : I am quite prepared to believe that the earthworks were 
made and a circle erected on the t«ite of Stonehenge for purposes of sun worship 
or observation as long ago as 1800 B.C., but I am not equally prepared to admit that 
the ruin we know as Stonehenge is the original circle. I am still inclined to regard 
it as a much later reconstruction. I doubt whether there existed in this country nearly 
4,000 years ago any people who could or would have cut the tenons and sockets on 
these stones and placed the linteb on the top of the uprights ; and, if such a people 
did exist, I cannot understand why they left no other such remains behind them. We 
know of the remains of perhapt* 200 circles, great and small, in the British Isles ; but 
in most of them the stones are quite unshaped, nor is there in any of them an example 
of capstones, tenons, and sockets. It is only at Avebury that we find stones of greater 
cubic content and weight than the largest at Stonehenge, and even there we have no 
sign of any capstone ; the existing remains at Stonehenge seem, therefore, to me to be 
a later development of the earlier circles. Bat if the existing Stonehenge were nearly 
the last of all the circles, and were erected 1800 b.c., how is it that it was never 
imitated, and that the bronze and iron-using people went on for nearly 2,000 years 
till the Roman conquest with this great structure before them, and left us practically 
nothing of their own ? In Egypt the fourth dynasty pyramids were the finest, but 
pyramid building went on till the twelfth dynasty, a period of 1,500 years or more ; 
but Stonehenge has no imitator, no follower. It is quite unique, and I* cannot under- 
stand its remaining unimitated throughout the whole Bronze Age. If, however, the 
earthworks and a circle or circles of unshaped stones — sarsens or bluestones, or both — 
were erected 1800 b.c, and if long afterwards it were resolved to reconstruct the 
circles in a different fashion from any other, we might find the old unshaped blocks 
taken down and trimmed into shape, and others brought to the s{)ot and shaped and 
added to them, and the whole re-erected on a new plan ; and, finally, the chips and the 
stones used in making them swept into the holes in which the .uprights were set, just 
as Mr. Gowland has described them to us ; and the difficulties I have suggested would 
be removed. But, it is said, the stones were shaped with stone tools, and that must have 
been doue l>efore metal was introduced. Stone, however, was used side by side with 
metal in Egypt down to the eighteenth dynasty, and it seems to me very likely that the 
inhabitants of Salisbury Plain, having great numbers of these blocks to deal with. 
develoiHjd a way of doing it with rough stones, and a<lhere*l to it long after metal had 
come into general use, because stones were not only still easier to come by, but were 
more effective for the purpose than the early metal tools. Again, it is said, if metal 
were in use, some would have been dropped and found in digging. We have an account 
of metal being found in the middle of Stonehenge, and it is likely that mediroval 
explorers— of whom there may liave been many — would have taken any metal they 
found, and left stones, especially such as those exhibited. Further, if metal-using 
people might have been expected to lose something on the spot, so might stone-using 
people ; but, though well-shaped stone tools and weapons have not been uncommon in 
the barrows on the plain, none have yet been found in these diggings, and there is no 
proof as yet of the period of erection or re-erection. I venture to submit, therefore, 

[ 23 ] 



i90i^j kAN. XTSto. Id. 

that the reconstruction hypothesis — though, of course, it is onljr a hypothesis — is by no 
means disproved, but does iit all facts known at present better than any other, besides 
having a semi -historical basis. 

I hope Mr. Gowland will be able to superintend the setting up of the triiithon 
which fell in 1797, of the stones that fell last year, and perhaps some others ; and that 
in doing so he may obtain further evidence. I would also suggest that search be 
made for the holes in which the stones required to complete the south-western part of 
the outer circle stood, in order to ascertain whether it ever was completed, and that 
sections be cut across the ditches and trenches to ascertain their original depth and 
profile, and to see whether the silting up is as great as might be expected in the 
3,700 years which are now supposed to have elapsed since they were made. 

Mr. C. H. Read confessed that the view of the use and purpose of Stonehenge 
expressed by Mr. Evans was in accordance with the ideas he had himself always held, 
and that he preferred rather to wait for further evidence before changing them. With 
regard to the date of Stonehenge, he thought it more probable that the full evidence, 
when it became available, would show that bronze was known as a metal at the time ; 
but it was obviously bold, and perhaps unwise, for anyone at this stage to attempt any 
great precision in the matter. He thought, however, that the recent exploration of the 
circle at Arbor Low had a bearing on this point, for there a barrow of the early 
Bronze Age stood on the vallufn. This barrow clearly does not form part of the plan 
of the greater monument, but intersects and interferes with the completeness of the 
vallum. It must, therefore, have either existed before Arbor Low was constructed or 
have been placed there afterwards. It can scarcely be contemporary. A consideration 
of the possibilities appeared to Mr. Read to point to the latter as being the more likely, 
and in that case the great circle would be earlier than the barrow. Thus, assuming an 
analogy between Stonehenge and Arbor Low, the evidence furnished by Arbor Low 
rather bore out Mr. Gowland^s contention for the Neolithic period for the date of 
Stonehenge, than Mr. Evans' attribution to the end of the Bronze Age. 

Mr. C. W. CuNNiNQTON said that, while Mr. Gowland's paper taught us much 
hitherto unknown as to the manner in which the large trilithons were erected, and the 
quantities of ciiips of the stones proved more conclusively what was ah*eady known—* 
i.e., that the stones were trimmed on the spot — nevertheless these excavations were too 
limited in extent to justify a conclusion as to the date of the structure, for it was still 
quite possible that a find of bronze implements — and even Roman coins — at Stonehenge 
would completely upset the conclusions of Mr. Gowland as to its builders. He suggested 
that the stone " mauls " might have been used as rollers. 

Mr. Gowland, in reply, said that his opinion that the date of Stonehenge should 
be referred to the latter part of the Neolithic or the early part of the Bronze Age — that 
transitional period when bronze was known, but had not passed into common practical 
use — was based on the total absence of any bronze implements in the excavations. The 
use of deer's horn picks for the very extensive excavations of the hard ehalkrock around 
the base of the leaning-stone also gave, he thought, some support to this contention. 

The incrustation on the piece of stone in excavation V. merely proved that bronze 
was known and did not prove that bronze tools were then in common use. It contained no 
oxide of copper, an indication that the soil was favourable for the preservation of the 
metal. Its amount and nature were such that it could only have been the result of contact 
with a very small piece, possibly an ornament, but not with a tool of bronze. 

The low mounds mentioned by Mr. Evans are, it is self-evident, later than the vallum, 

Mr. Evans' reasoning as to the structural features of Stonehenge and its evolution 

from a chambered tumulus is ingenious, but if the same reasoning l^e applied to several 

Greek and Egyptian temples they also must have had the same origin, a view which 

cannot be reasonably entertained. 

[ 24 ] 



190d.] MAN. [No. 16. 

Stonehcnge and dolmens or the chamber of some tumuli are of megalithic structure 
and of east orientation, and that is all they have in common. And as regards the last, he 
held that it is in the highest degree probable, if not absolutely certain, that the orienta- 
tion of the dolmens and chambered tumuli was based on the tenets of the prevailing 
religious cult, and hence followed the orientation of the temple of that cult, and that the 
orientation of the temple did not originate in that of the dolmen. As to that cult in the 
case of Stoneheuge, it is impossible to disassociate it from some form of sun worship, 
adoration, or observation. The horseshoe arrangement of the trilithons and of the inner 
blucstones opening to the east and the direction of the avenue towards the rising sun at 
midsummer cannot, he thought, be regarded in any other light than as pointing to the 
sun as the chief and not a subsidiary element in the cult for which the monument was 
designed. 

As regards its sepulchral character, only future excavations would enable him to 
say whether it has been used as a place for burial or not, and at what time it was so 
used. Until these excavations are made and we have definite evidence that the burial 
or burials, if any, were made at the time the structure was erected, he should continue to 
hold that it was a temple or sacred place dedicated to ceremonies in which the solar 
element was predominant. The mere finding of a "thurible" recorded by luigo Jones 
was not evidence of any value as to the original use of the structure, as the conditions 
under which it was found are not stated. If it belonged to a burial it may have been 
one of much later date than Stonehcnge itself. In this connection he might say that he 
had dug up a modern preserved meat tin at a considerably lower depth than the flint im- 
plements in the same excavation, but it occurred at the bottom of one of the rabbit 
burrows, of which there are many within the circles. 

That the trilithon is by no means always a sepulchral structure there was abundant 
evidence in eastern Asia, especially in Japan, where its representative in wood is of very 
ancient date. There it has never been used except in connection with religious 
ceremonies, or to mark the direction of some point of veneration. As to the reconstruc- 
tion of Stonehenge as suggested by Mr. Lewis, not a particle of evidence has been 
brought forward by him. He (Mr. Gowiand) might say, however, that the chippings 
found in his excavations proved conclusively that the sarsens were not shaped near the 
structure, so that the stones of the trilithons and outer circle cannot have been taken 
down and trimmed as Mr. Lewis suggests. As regards the placing of the lintels on the 
uprights the operation was much easier than erecting the uprights themselves. 

The absence of similar structures in imitation of Stonehenge is in favour of the view 
that it was a place or temple of special sanctity. Thus in Japan there is one great 
temple dedicated to the Sun Goddess, which is unique in its sacred character, so much 
80 that every Japanese, not excluding the emperor, makes at least one pilgrimage to it 
during his life. 

Then as to the metals to which Mr. Lewis alludes as having been discovered in 
the middle of Stonehenge, he found enumerated in the records iron armour and a barbed 
iron arrow-hciid. Now, no one could attribute these to the date of the erection of the 
monument. There is no record of any find of bronze. 

As regards another point, he might say that the layers of the excavation.s in which 
the flint and stone tools were found were absolutely undisturbed ground and had not 
been dug down to before, these tools are hence not the refuse left by previous explorers. 
As to the use of stone implements in the Bronze Age he had fully stated in his paper 
that if the Bronze Age people had found such tools to ])e suitable for dressing the stone 
they would certainly have used them. 

Mr. Cuunington's suggestion that the stone mauls were used us rollers is astounding ; 
he cannot have looked at them carefully, or he would have seen that their flat sides 
precludes such use altogether. Finally, he (Mr. Gowiand) might say that the date 

[ 25 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[Noa. lft-17. 



1800-2000 B.C. IB given ia his puper oaly &8 an ftpprosimation based Bolely od his 
excavatious and ttiibject to revJeion from any data whiob his future diggings might 
field. And as regards this approximate date, and the origio aud purpoeeof Stoaeheuge, 
he should continue to hold the opinions he bad expressed in his paper until thejr were 
disproved by future discoveries. No one would then be more ready timn he to modify 
or relinquieh them, as all he desired waa to arrive at the truth and not tu bolster np any 
pet theories. 



Edge-Partlnfrton. 

I Mforon«*i«. ^y 



Faolflo : Omameiit. 

Nfrte on tha Oceurr«ne« of Spiral Ornament I 

By J. Edge- Par tin ff Ion. 

Some two or three years ago a collection from the Admiralty group and the islands 
to the west was disposed of in London. I was fortunate in procuring three lime spatulas, 
repro«luced herewith, which I think are worth noting on account of the spiral ornament 
contained in their elaborately -carved bandies. For some time past the origin of this 
particular form of ornament has been occupying the attention of ethnologists, and several 
notes on the subject have already appeared (Journ, Autkr, lutt,. Vol. XXIX., p, 30o ; 
Vol. XXX. {jVi»ceWanc«, Kos. 40, 41); Uan, 1901. 55). I cannot, however, agree 
with Professor Haddou that the scroll pattern can be derived from the frigate bird, 
whose long, straight tail-featbcrx could hardly suggest sucb a design. I still adhere 




to the lizard or snuko idea, and tbi^ has been cunfirmed by a note thai I have just 
received »s to the existence iji Now Zciiluud oC loa/cr' snakes at all events. Tlic 
figures above show how easily sucli a scroll as that, so commonly produced by Maori 
carvers, might have been derived from tlic coiled tail of n lizard. The spatulas in my 
possesnion are closely allied to those from tlic Anchorite Inlands figured by Dr. F. 
Grabowsky in the Internalionales Archie Jvr Eehnoffraphic,Vo\.VU.(l89i),r[,XlV., 
Figs. 10, 14, and 15, but they are not so highly conventionalised. They tend to prove 
that the scrolls are not connected with the anthropomorphic design from which other 
examples figured by Dr. Grabowsky are derived, but to au indepenJcut molive of which 
the lizard is the original type. J. EDGE-PAUTJKGTON. 



[ 



] 



19020 MAN. [No8. 18-19. 

L^on Marlllier, Hartland. 

i^on Mariliier. By E. Sidney Hartland, F.S.A. ^g 

The death of M. Mariliier has removed odc of the ablest and most learned of ID 
French anthropologists. Not France alone but science lias suffered a terrible and 
unexpected loss. The coasts of Brittany have an evil reputation, and from time to time 
they remind us that their terrors have not been exaggerated. A storm one evening last 
summer capsized the skiff in which had embarked a joyous family party to return 
to Tregaier after a happy day with some friends. Nearly the whole company were 
drowned, and though M. Mariliier himself was thrown up on the beach and was found 
in the morning alive, he had lost his wife and other relatives, bis young sister-in-law 
had died at his side daring the night, and the shock and the exposure and the sorrow 
resulted in an illness from which he never rallied. In less than two months he was laid, 
with the remains of those whom he had loved, to rest in the graveyard of Treguier. 
Happily few storms claim a victim so brilliant, so generous, so devoted to the best 
interests of humanity and of science, so widely and sincerely mourned. Yet he had 
written no big books. His literary and scientific work was confined to essays, to the 
direction of important periodicals, and to his lectures in the Ecole des Hautes Etudes and 
other educational institutions. But no one who had read his essay on La survivafice de 
Vame et Vidie de justice chez les peuples non-civilis^Sy his preface to the translation of 
Mr. Lang's Myth Ritual and Religion (promptly put on the Index Expurgatorius), or 
his articles on Totemism in the Revue de VUistoire des Religions could fail to be struck 
by his learning, his acumen, and the sanity of his judgments, or to doubt that his 
inHnence must be an important power for the development of true scientific thought and 
enquiry, especially in his native land, though also far beyond its borders. His influence 
with his pupils was unbounded. His salon was the place where scientific and literary 
men, both French and foreigners, loved to assemble. An eloquent speaker, and a man 
of quick susceptibilities and wide sympathies, he was ever ready to travel any distance 
to plead for the defenceless and the suffering, to advocate the cause of temperance and 
the cause of peace. British anthropologists may well join their French brethren in 
mourning a comrade who, dying so young, has left behind a sense of loss whose 
magnitude is not to be measured by the work he had actually accomplished, a void that 
cannot easily be filled. E. S. HARTLAND. 



REVIEWS. 
Mediterranean. Sergl. 

SeriTl's Views on the Ethnology of the Mediterranean Area. ^^^ 

Tke Mediterranean Race, By G. Sergi. London: Scott, 1901. 320 pp. 6*. |9 
The rarity of broad constructive work in anthropology makes this a welcome book, 
although probably no investigator would agree with most of the conclusions. As any- 
one touching such questions would certainly get the book, we only give here a brief 
summary, and then note some of the large questions that are raised and minor corrections 
that may be useful to readers. 

Chapter I. is a vigorous attack on Iiido-Germanism, in which the southerner fights 
well against the view that salvation is of the Germans. Chapter II. brings forward the 
unity of the Mediterranean peoples. Chapter III. is the African tiieory, of which more 
below. Chapter IV. is a useful summary of the Libyans. Chapters V. to VIII. deal 
with Egyptians, Western Libyans, Canary Islands, Syria, and Asia Minor. Chapter IX. 
deals with the south of Europe. Chapter X. is on the earliest types of man in Europe ; 
Chapter XI. on the prehistoric North-Europeans ; Chapter XII. on the mixing of races ; 
Chapter XIII. mainly on facial types of living races ; Chapter XIV. on the archaiology, 
which is not satisfactory. A number of theses are given in the preface, which greatly 
help the reader. These propound that the dolichocephalic pre-Aryan people of the 

[ 27 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. Id. 

Mediterranean and Bouth Europe came from Africa, that the primitive civilisation is Afro- 
Mediterranean, and that the savage Aryans came in as destroyers rather than as 
civilisi^rs. The large questions that are raised may be briefly commented on separately. 

The uniformity of type of races round the Mediterranean is assumed to prove 
identity of origin. But as type is the product of conditions, there is the further question 
as to how far the generally uniform nature of the coasts may not tend to produce a 
uniform type. The hilly limestone shores, with scanty vegetation, are closely alike in 
Spain, Italy, Greece, Syria, and Africa, and may well induce similarity of inhabitants 
(p. 32). We read that " there exist about a dozen cranial forms — by me termed varieties 
^^ — common alike to all the peoples called Iberian, Ligurian, the central Italic as well as 
^^ the southern and insular Italic region, the Greek peoples, Asia Minor, ancient Egypt, 
*' and all northern Africa now occupied by the Berbers and Kabyles " (p. 36). " I am able 
^^ to assert that these characters are not found among the Celtic, Germanic, Finnic, or 
^' other populations '^ (p. 38). This is a very serious assertion, and lies at the root of all 
Professor Sergi's work of classification. But what does it imply ? Is it (I) that these 
dozen forms arc separate strains incapable of fusion and persisting by different lines of 
descent ? Or is it (2) that these forms are the standard deviations of one germ type ; 
and, if so, liable to appear in rotation in a single family ? Or is it (3) that these forms 
are reversions to different ancestral types which were long since mixed and fused ? 
None of these conclusions will fit to all of the author^s remarks ; yet, if we are asked 
to believe in a dozen different forms all diffused over certain lands, but never found else- 
where, we should have some logical and definite theory of such a strange condition of 
things (p. 36). 

Next, we have the African theory, that the long-headed race of early Europe came 
from the quaternary Sahara. But this rests on saying that it ^' could not have its 
'^ cradle in the basin of the Mediterranean ^* ; though no arguments beyond vague 
assertions are given. The positive fact which seems to entirely preclude this theory is 
the southward recession of the steatopygous race. In the cave period, late palaeolithic, 
we find this type disappearing from South France. At the early neolithic age we find 
it disappearing from Egypt. In 1600 B.C. it was in Somali-land. Now it is only in 
South Africa. Here is the continuous southward recession of a markedly different species 
of man, from South Europe to South Africa; associated in the earlier cases with the 
close of the palaeolithic age, which suggests that this was the type of the vanishing 
palsQolithic race. To bring their immediate successors up northward in the contrary 
direction seems quite impossible ; the steatopygous race was being pushed southward 
by the dolichocephalic race which lined the Mediterranean basin. There is, besides, the 
general law that the harder life of a northern people enables them always to push south- 
ward and overcome a less robust race ; an invasion from the south is very rare, and 
even then is not a racial movement but only a subjugation (p. 39). 

A valuable remark is quoted that in Italy blonds are found over 400 m. altitude 
and brunettes below that. But there is nothing to show that this is the effect of altitude 
on a uniform race ; it may be the effect of voluntary sorting of two races according to 
preference, or of natural selection by climate from among a mixed race (p. 73). 

Sonic good general remarks are to be welcomed. On p. 35, " A method which is 
" only in appearance a method inevitably leads to errors and can produce no results," 
which is too true of most of the elaborate measuring of anthropologists not based on 
single elements of growth, and would perhaps be applied by many also to Professor 
Sergi's classifications of skull forms. Again, on p. 106, ^' Craniometry is a kind of 
" Kabbala and will prove anything and everything one wishes ; what strange things it 
" will demonstrate is shown by Fouquet, who brings in Indians, Hottentots, Kaffirs, 
^' Bushmen, and so on, in order to interpret prehistoric Egyptian skulls. It is the sense 
" of reality which is lost in stich craniometric lucubrations." And on p. 198, " The 

[ 28 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 19-3(r. 

** DUmerical variatioD of a few units cannot constitute a ditierence of race ; an index of 
" 74 is in its ethnic significance the same as one of 76 or 77, and it would be absurd 
'' to suppose otherwise • . . We cannot accept the evidence of the cephalic index 
^' when that evidence is contradicted by other important facts/* All this will be 
blasphemy to the worshipper of millimetres ; but it is at least a wholesome reaction 
against erecting an arti6cial system and letting that rule all conclusions. 

Turning now to errors of detail, some passages (for instance, on pp. 39, 41, 53) are 
absurd owing to want of thought on the part of the unnamed translator, who has also 
left some names in Italian form. But we must question, on p. 30, the denial of modern 
influence from Babylonia, when we remember astronomy, sexagesimal notation, and the 
Psalms and other religious expression. On p. 46 the denial of ethnic value to Egyptian 
sculpture is certainly unjust, and is not followed by the author on p. 60. On p. 61 
the date of Amenhotep IV. should be more than three centuries later than 1700 B.cl 
there stated. We must demur to the pyramids being called chambered tumuli (p. 71) ; 
their development is from the subterranean tomb, and not from a raised mound. On 
p. 80 the presence of flint tools in the Sahara proves nothing of the antiquity of the 
Libyan stock, and even the age of the flint work is based on sand polish which might 
be due to one century or a hundred centuries. The coarser forms being further south 
may be due to diflerence of material or lo degradation of race in more remote regions. 
None of these facts will prove the southern origin of the Libyan stock and its great 
age. Regarding p. 92 we must say that the Egyptians never burnt the dead. On 
pp. 96-7 all the marks figured are ordinary Egyptian hieroglyphs, which are perfectly 
understood ; and on p. 99 it should be noted that the sign system is entirely separate 
from the hieroglyphic and was already in a decadent state before the new system of 
hieroglyphics broke in upon it. On p. 102 the conclusion quoted about the Nagada 
skulls is my own, and was never stated by Thompson and Thane. On p. 278 the late 
bronze of Egypt is put in opposition to the early copper of Cyprus ; but Egypt had 
copper some 5,000 years before it was supplanted by bronze. In general the last chapter 
on the culture and archseology is not satisfactory, and the whole remarks and examples of 
alphabetic signs need recasting since the fuller lists of early signs and their comparisons 
with Earian and Spanish alphabets have been published (Journ, Anth, Inst.^ XXIX. 204). 

The main benefit which this work may give is the sense of the uniformity of the 
dolichocephalic people of the Mediterranean and Europe ; and the view that the Aryan 
may well have been a ruder race, conquering as the Dorian overcame the Mycemean, 
or the Goth and Frank subdued the Greek and Roman. A fresh standpoint and a 
freedom from bondage to earlier suppositions is of much value, and may well give scope 
to genuine growth. W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. 



Biometry. Qalton, &o. 

The Statistical IMethod In Bioloi^y. im 

Biometrika ; a JotirnnI for the Statistical Study of Biological Problems, £\3 
Edited, in consultation with Francis Gal ton, by VV. F. R. Weklon, Karl Pearson, and 
C. B. Davenport. Vol. I., Part I. 

Physical anthropologists will give a hearty welcome to this journal, and wish the 
new venture a permanent success. The new statistical methods initiated by Francis 
Galton, and developed chiefly by Karl Pearson, have placed a most powerful means of 
research in the hands of students of evolution antl ethnolo^'v, and jiromise to rescue 
physical anthropology from the comparatively stagnant condition in which it has 
remained since the time of Blumenhach and Retzius. 

Biometrika^ as might be inferred from its title, covers not anthropology only, but 
the whole field of biology. According to the editorial foreword, Biometrika will 
include (ri) memoirs on variation, inheritance, and selection, in animals and plants, basecl 

[ 29 ] 



19020 MAN. [Ho. 20. 

on the examination of statistically large numbers of specimens (including statistical 
investigations in anthropometry) ; (b) those developments of statistical theory which 
are applicable to biological problems ; (c) numerical tables and graphical solutions 
tending to reduce the labour of statistical arithmetic ; (d) abstracts of memoirs dealing 
with these subjects, which are published elsewhere ; and (e) notes on current biometric 
work and unsolved problems. It is proposed to include memoirs written in English, 
German, French, and Italian. 

Mr. Francis Galton leads off with a capital article on Biometry, giving a clear and 
concise account of the modern methods of statistics, and how they are applied to the 
data of biology. Since Mr. Galton calls the devotees of this science biometriciaDS, why 
not call the science itself Biometrics on the analogy of mathematics, statistics, &c. ? 

An interesting article by Mr. A. O. Powys, founded on anthropometric data from 
Australia, discusses the fertility of man and woman in relation to age, the correlation 
between the duration of life and the number of offspring, the stature of man between 
the ages of 15 and 80, and the alteration of stature with old age. By comparing data 
from Victoria and Now South Wales it is found that the age of maximum fertility 
is earlier in the warmer climate, but the age at which fertility begins is earlier in the 
colder climate. The woman in Australia reaches her age of greatest reproductive 
vigour between 24-5 and 27 years, and the man at about 32 years. As regards the 
relation of age and number of offspring it is found that women living 60-70 years of 
age leave more offspring than either those who die younger or those who die older. An 
inference from this is that reproductive selection may tend to preserve the threescore 
and ten years of the Psalmist as the standard duration of life. Some interesting deduc- 
tions are drawn from the analysis of the stature statistics of male and female criminals. 
We note that the stature of women is in most cases 7 per cent, less than men^s. 

The article on The Inheritance of the Duration of Life and on the Intensity of 
Natural Selection in Man^ by Mary Beeton and Karl Pearson, is a fine example of the 
Pearson methods of aual}^sis. The data were ohtained from the pedigree records of the 
Society of Friends. At the conclusion of this article one of the authors says, " I think, 
" therefore, we can no longer talk of natural selection as an hypothesis. It is in the 
" case of man demonstrably at work either changing in a quantitatively definite manner 
" his constitution as a whole or else necessary to k^ep that constitution stable." Natural 
selection is found to be a factor in 50 to 80 per cent, of the deaths of men. The article 
contains elaborate investigations into the correlations of the ages-at-death of relatives, 
and from these formulas are deduced by which a man can calculate his chance of life 
from the known ages at death of his relatives. 

If we might venture to criticise Professor Karl Pearson's methods in determining 
these correlations, he appears to have made no effort to ascertain that the individuals 
with whom he was dealing belonged to the same race t\pe. The curve sot out from the 
statistics is invariably irregular, but a straight line foimd by the method of least squares 
is always taken to represent this curve. Now is it logical to assume that a straight line 
truly represents the curve if the individuals dealt with belong to different race types "t 
And it is a fact that even in the same families we find individuals of different race type 
if the ancestry is mixed. This objection appears to apply to the numerous correlations 
between different parts of the human body calculated by Karl Pearson and published 
elsewhere. He states somewhere that the frequency curve of stature usually comes out 
a single peaked curve agreeing very well with the theoretical curve. In our experience, 
frequency curves of British stature and other bodily dimensions, even when made from 
people living together in a limited district, have invariably two or more ])eaks. 

There are other valuable papers in Biometrika^ dealing with ]x)tanical and zoological 
statistics by Dr. Ludwig, Mr. Browne, and Professor Weldon. J. GRAY. 

L 30 J 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 21-28. 

Museum : Driffield. Slieppard. 

A Descriptive ' Catalogue of\ the Specimens in the Mortimer Museum of Qi 
Arch(Bology and Geology at Driffield, Bv Thomas Sheppard, F.G.S. (With ^ ' 
illustrations.) 1900. \s. 

Judging from the catalogue this museum appears to be a model country museum 
as its main object is the exhibition of local specimens intelligently arranged. The 
catalogue, which seems to be very well done, is illustrated with 38 figures. What with 
the general information that is 'given and the descriptive details it forms a valuable 
summary of the archaeology of the East Riding. The collections have been amassed 
by the energy and enthusiasm and liberality of Mr. J. R. Mortimer. It is a pity that 
there are bot more men of equal public spirit, who not only would collect but would 
make it a point that the collections were kepi in the country, preferably in the locality 
from which the specimens were collected. On reading through Mr. Mortimer's notes 
on the history of the museum in the catalogue it is evident that many so-called 
collectors in the East Riding were nothing more than traders and their collections have 
been dispersed, probably into mostly unrecorded localities. Mr. Mortimer has opened 
a large number of barrows and he has carefully kept each find separate in the museum ; 
in the catalogue, however, the barrows are described in groups, but the more important 
objects have their individual barrow specified. There are a large number of human 
skulls, " British," " Saxon," " Danish," and so forth. It would be a valuable piece of 
work for an anthropologist to study these remains, and Mr. Mortimer has intimated to 
the writer that he would be much pleased if this were done ; but the specimens cannot 
lie removed from the museum. A. C. H, 

Oriminal Anthropology. Lombroso. 

Kerkerpalimpseste^ Wafidinschriften vnd Selhslhekenntnissc gcfangcner ^|% 
Verhrecher, By C. Lombroso. Hamburg: Verlagsanstalt nnd Druckerei A. G., L^ 
1899. 8vo, pp. xii, 318. Two plates and 20 blocks in the text. Price 7.v. 6r/, 

For the wide interest which the works of Professor Lombroso have excited there 
could be found no better evidence than the extent to which his books, intended originally 
for the student, have found acceptance among the general public. The original volume 
was issued some years ago, and it is a testimony to its popularity that the author and 
Dr. Kurella should have found it necessary to add another to the five works of Professor 
Lombroso already published by this firm. N. W. T, 



PROOEEDINQS OP SOCIETIES. 
Prooeedings. Soo. Bibl. Arohseology. 

Annual Meeting^ Sth January^ 1902. — Professor A. H. Sayce presented a paper AQ 
on The lonians in the Tel-cl-Amarna TahletSy in which the discovery of the name of fcO 
louians in the tablets was defended against Dr. Kundtzon's article in Beitr, z, Assyriologie^ 
iv. 3. Dr. Kundtzon maintains that in the words Vi-i-ma-a na a-na^ the termination of 
the name Yi-i-ma-a-na, which Professor Sayce identifies with Javan or Ionian, arises 
from a mistake made by the writer of the letter, who has written ana, " to," twice, 
the name thus reading Fitiz/ia, doubtless a mistake for Yima. But in an official docu- 
ment such a mistake is hardly probable, while the parallel passages quoted by 
Dr. Kundtzon rest upon conjecture. Dr. Kundtzon's criticism has thus ended only by 
confirming the discovery of the Ionian name in the Tel-el-Amarna tiiblets ; Fiw, )7a, and 
Vievu which Dr. Kundtzon brought forward in support of his contention are proved to 
be non-existent. The only one for which there is any evidence is Yia, and could this be 
proved to have any existence it would confirm the identification of Yivdnn with 
"Ionian." Sargon {Khors, 145) speaks of the seven Cypriote kings who paid him 

[ 31 ] 



1002.3. MAN. No8.28-3«. 

tribute from the " land of Ya, a district of the land of Y&nana, which is seven days' 
^* journey in the middle of the western sea." Ydnnna represents the Greek 'ItSyd^y just 
as Vavnd is the older form of Mctf [o]yc(, and la' will bear the same relation to it that l^ 
bears to 'I^^yc^. Y, or Vod^ had at that time been lost in most Greek dialects ; Via 
would then l>ecome la (Assyrian JPrt'), That the root of *ldwt^ is Va is shown by the 
correlative Ia^> while {v)on la the suffix we find in Kata(v)onia or Lyka'{v)oma, Kf'a, 
if it exists, and Ya' would thus both alike represent the *id'^ of Greek, while the ITi' 
nagi of Sargon would represent a Greek *\<x^ x^P^- 

The Ionian name, it should be noted, has been detected independently by W, Max 
Miiller in hieroglyphic records of liameses II. 



Prooeedings. lAnthropologlcal Institute. 

Special Meeting, 13th January 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddou, F.R.S., President. i\M 

Mr. W. Gowlaud, F.S.A., read a paper on The Recent Excavations at £rT 
Stonehenge, illustrated by lantern slides and by numerous specimens kindly lent 
by Sir Edmund Antrobus, Bart. The substance of the paper will be found above 
in Max, 1902. 6, and the discusnion which ensued in Man, 1902. 16. 

Mr. A. L. Lewis read a paper, illustrated by lantern slides, on Stonehenge : An 
Enquiry respecting the Fall of the Trifithons, which will be found printed in full in 
Man, 1902 (below). 

Ordinary Meeting, 2lst January 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. 

The election was announced of Mr. Hedley Visick and Dr. T. H. Bryce as Fellows 
of the Institute. 

Mr. A. L. Lewis exhibited slides of certain Rude Stone Monuments in Yorkshire, 
which will be hereafter published in Man, 1902 (below). 

Dr. T. H. Bryce read a paper, illustrated by lantern slides and diagrams, on ^ 
Group of Cairns with Megalithic Cists in the West of Scotland, and the Human 
Remains associated therewith. Discussion : The President, Dr. Garson, Messrs. Lewis, 
Gray, and Ling Roth. The paper will be published in full in the Proceedings of the 
Society of Antiquaries of Scotland, and an abstract of it will be found in Man, 1902 
(below). 

Annual Meeting, 28th January 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. 

The Report* of the Council and Treasurer were presented and discussed. 

The Officers and Council were duly elected for the ensuing year. 

The President delivered an address on the subject, PFhat the United States 
are doing for Anthropology. The official minutes of this meeting, with the Reports 
and the President's address, will be found in full in Journ, Anthr. Inst,, Vol. XXXII., 
p. 1. ff. 



Ppoceedings. Soc. d'AnthP. de Paris. 

Seance du 19 decembre 1901. — M. Fourdrignier presents le compte- ftt 
rendu du Congr^s de Tongres (Belgique). ^^ 

M. Courty rend compte des fragments de gr^s ayant servi a tracer des sigues 
prehistoriques. Discussion : M. Ad. de Mortillet, Fouju, et Otgier. 

M . Vauvill6 offre au Musee de la Societe des silex tallies ou polis de I'epoque 
n^olithique provenant de quatre communes du canton de Montfort-l'Amaury (S. & O.). 

M. Volkov : Sur les representations figurees des Scythes sur des objets trouvis en 

Ukraine. 

M. le D' Garuault : La Bible et le Talmud ont-ils connu et d&rit la tuberculose 

bovine. 

M. Emile Schmit : Fouilles dans la Marne et don de deux squelettes gaulois. 

Printed by Btbh A»P Spottjswoqde, His Majesty's Printers, East Harding Street, K,C, 



iaoii.] Man. [No. ti6. 

OMQINAL ARTICLES. 
Andaman Islands. With Plate C. Duokworth. 

Note on the Skuii of an Andaman Islander. Bi/ W, L, Duckworth^ f^rk 

M.A.y University Lecturer in Physical Anthrojwlogy, Cambridge, £Xl 

The Cambridge Etliuological Museum contains the skull of an Andaman Islander 

which forms part of a collection of objects from the Andaman Islands, presented by 

Colonel Temple. 

The specimen (which bears the following distinctive marks and description, *' No. 45, 
" ' Changa-lot-cheta,' as carried by relatives of the deceased, in mouioriam ") is in fairly 
good preservation ; the mandible is present, and this and the cranium have been smeared 
with red and white paint. A sling of plaited vegetable fibre is attached between the 
zygooiatic arches and would enable the skull to be easily suspended or carried about as 
suggested in the foregoing description. It is not propose<l to enter into a discussion of 
the ethnological significance of such a method of preparation of the skull, but the 
photographs in Plate C. show the general characters of the decoration and of the sling. 

The skull is that of an adult individual, the sex not being evident, but probably 
male. The general aspect is cuboid, the skull being distinctly short. Fig. 1 shows the 
skull in norma verticalis ; it is brachy cephalic and crypto-zygous : no synostosis of 
satures is observed : there is a single parietal foramen on the left side. 

Fig. 2 shows the skull in norma. lalMralis : the prognathism is subnasal, and distinct, 
though not revealed by the alveolar index : the glabella is flattened, as are also the 
nasal bones ; the lacrymo-ethmoidal suture is of good length (right side, 8*6 mm. ; left 
side, 9'5 mm.) : the spheno-parietal sutiA^ measures 12 mm. on each side and contains a 
small ossicle. The maxilla and spheno* I, meet to the exclusion of the malar bone from 
the boundaries of the spheao-maxilla fissure in each orbit. Infantile characteristics 
are denoted bj the feebleness of the temporal and other muscular ridges, the small size 
of the mastoids, and the shallowness of the external auditory meatus. The frontal bone 
riaoB abruptly above the nasion, the bregma is the highest point of the sagittal arc, there 
HI alight ilattei^ing at the obelioQ, and no protuberance or torus on the occipital bone ; 
tka skull rests on a plane surface upon the molar teeth and the opisthion. 

Fig. 3 is a view of the skull in norma facialis; the skull wall is markedly 
protoberant in the pterion region, suggesting high development of the frontal lobes of 
the brain, and the transverse cranial arc is well rounded even posteriorly to the bregma. 
The nasal bones are flat, but the nasal aperture is not strikingly wide. The canine fosssa 
are not deep, and both malar bones undivided. On the left side there is destruction of 
the alveolar margin of the jaw, which is apparently the result of disease of the teeth 
and of alveolat abscesses. 

Fig. 4 shows the skull in norma basilaris : a large molar tooth showing much wear 
remains on each side of the palate, which is small and has a blunt posterior s])ine. The 
two pterygoid plates on each side are also small and no (pterygo-spiuous) foramen of 
Civinini is seen. The glenoid fosna is of moderate depth ; the carotid canal is completely 
covered in, and small eustachian processes are present on each side. The styloid 
processes and occipital condyles arc small and the foramen magnum is not pyriform. 
Postcondylar foramina are present on each side. In norma occipitalis the contour is 
pentagonal ; several wormian bones are present on each side of the lambda. 

The mandible is small and the teeth relatively large ; the mandibular notch (sigmoid) 
is of moderate depth, and the angle of the ramus and body of the mandible exceeds 9(P« 
The following notes refer to the teeth. The first and second molars on each side are of 
the normal human form and tetracuspid. The third molars arc of smaller size than the 
preceding and have three large cusps, viz. : antero-external, antero-interual, and postero- 
external ; while the postero-internal cusp is very small and a small accessory cusp is 

[ 33 J 



Id02.] MAN. dToB. 26-27. 

seen between the an tcro -external and postero-external cii^ps and on the outer border of 
the crown. The dimensions of the crowns of the lower molar teeth are as follows (in 
every instance the antero-posterior diameter is given first, followed by the transverse 
diameter) : — 
Right side : 

First molar, 12 x 11 'o mm. Third molar, 11 x 10 '5 mm. 

Second molar, 11x11 mm. 
Left side : 

First molar, 11*5 x 1 1 ' o mm. 
Second molar, 11x11 mm. 
The principal dimensions of the skull itself are as follows : — 
Maximum length, 159 mm. 
Maximum breadth, 129 mm. 
The chief indices are as follows : — 



Third molar, 11x11 mm. 



Basi-bregmatic height, 134 mm. 
Horizontal circumference, 470 mm. 



Cephalic index, 81 • 1 
Height index, 84 • 3 
Alveolar index, 102-2 



Eollmann^s facial index, 44 ' 7, 
Orbital index, 82 • 9. 
Nasal index, 48 • 8. 



In reviewing the several features which have been mentioned, there will be noticed 
a distinct lack of osteological characteristics denoting morphological inferiority ; there 
are, however, certain infantile features which have been retained to maturity. Such 
retention of infantile features is common among individuals of the races of small stature, 
among whom the Audamanese are to be placed. No argument as to the inferiority of 
the Andamancse skull can therefore bo based on this observation. 

As regards comparisons with other Audamanese crania, the present example is 
quite representative ; its dimensions fall within the limits of those recorded by the late 
Sir William Flower in his classical account of the osteology of the aborigines of the 
Andaman group of islands {Journ. Anthr, Inst,, IX.). W. L. H. DUCKWORTH. 



South Afrloa. Hartland. 

The Natives of South Africa: A Note on the Recent Biuebook |^^ 
(Od. 904), with a Plea for Further inveetifl^ation. Bt/ E, Sidney ^f 
ffarilandy Esq., President of the Folklore Society, 

The Biuebook recently issued on ^' Legislation affecting the Natives in the Trans- 
vaal," (Cd. 904) should not be overlooked by those who are interested in the joint 
memorial presented by the Anthropological Institute and the Folklore Society to Her 
Majesty's Secretary of State for the Colonies in July 1900, praying for an inquiry into 
the customs, institutions, and superstitions of the Natives in our new colonies. It contains 
the correspondence of the Anti- Slavery Society and the Aborigines Protection Society 
with the Colonial Office, the proclamation amending the Liquor Law and the Labour 
Contract Law, a memorandum by Sir Godfrey Lagden, Commissioner for Native Affairs, 
and a long despatch by Lord Milner, giving the reasons for the proclamations and 
expounding the views of the administration upon the communications of the two societies 
last mentioned and on the " Native Question " generally. 

It is impossible to divorce entirely the political from the scientific aspect of the 
" Native Question," but happily, on this matter, there is practically no party division in 
the ordinary sense of the phrase. The vast majority of the people of this country are 
agreed on the general objects of our policy with regard to the Native races. We all want 
to make just and reasonable laws which will enable the white and coloured races to live 
side by side in toleration and peace, and will provide the opportunity and the means for 
the gradual improvement of the condition and advance of the civilisation of the Natives, 
Our interest and our duty alike demonstrate the wisdom of this aim. The only question 
is how to attain it. The Anti-Slavery Society and the Aborigines Protection Society 

[ 34 ] 



u 

44 



44 
44 



1902.] MAN. [Ho. 27. 

Start from certain premises which maj or may not be correct ; and they are l>oth largely 
preoccupied with the fear that cfTorts will be maiie by those iu charge of the great 
indiHtries (mining and other) to entrap and hold in what amounts to slavery a con- 
siderable part of the ^ Native *^ population. Lord Miluer^s recent proclamations deal 
with the industrial contracts and the conditions of life of the coloured labourers while at 
the mines. It may be hopeii that they will allay to some extent the fears of the societies, 
but their operation will require to be carefully watched. In any case it is obvious that 
they form only the 6r8t and probably a temporary instalment of a larger and vastly more 
important and comprehensive policy. What that policy in its details should l)e, the 
administration, represented by Lord Milner and Sir Godfrey Lagden, has not decided. 
The former recognises " the need of uniformity of policy in native questions " throughout 
South Africa, and says, ^^ I agree w^ith the Aborigines Protection Society that native 
^^ institutions should not be unnecessarily interfered with : that their existing system of 
^^ communal tenure and of tribal government, and their traditional customs, as far as 
they are not in gross conflict with civiliseii ideas, should be respected ; that they 
should not be compelled by force or indeeil by fraud to leave their own country for 
service with white men ; and that their taxation should be in proportion to the 
services rendered and the benefits bestowed upon them by our Government. Finally, 
^^ I think, though this is not a point specially touched upon by the society, that much 
*'* more should be done for the education of the natives than has ever yet been attempted 
^^ in the Transvaal. I do not mean that they should bo educated like Europeans, for 
their requirements and capacities are very different, but that they should be trained to 
develop their natural aptitudes for their own good and that of the community.** All 
this is excellent as far as it goes, and in complete harmony with (ho best British 
traditions. But it must be remembered that the Native institutions vary from trit>e to 
tribe, even where, as among the Bantu, there is a general agreement. The customs of 
the Bushmen differ widely, if not fundamentally, from those of the Bantu, and will 1>e 
much more difficult to reconcile with civilised rule. Nothing whatever is known of the 
customs of the Vaalpens, a people still lower in the suule of humanity, inhabiting the 
northern portion of the Transvaal and believed to l>e the true aborigines of the country. 
How can these various populations be ruled according to their own institutions until 
their institutions are fully ascertained ? It is true that Lord Milner is trying to find 
Native Commissioners acquainted with the native languages and customs. However 
admirable these men may be when they are found, it is neither advisable nor safe to 
allow the knowledge of Native institutions to remain recorded only in their memories and 
the memories of their staff. However well-intentioned, however experienced they may 
be, their habit of mind is different from that of the Natives. Glaring instances are not 
wanting in which even such men have wholly mistaken the intent ami value of customs 
with which they were familiar. 

Legislation, too, will be absolutely necessary. The iniquitous law of the Transvaal 
respecting Native marriages remains unrepealed and unaltered. It has a very thorny side, 
and amendment must be preceded by careful enquiry and consideration. The law of 
marriage is at the root of Native as well as civilised society. But is by no means the 
only subject on which a serious attempt must be made to regulate the relations of the 
Natives among themselves and to the dominant race. In several particulars their 
customs are, to use liord Milner*s words, " iu gross conflict with civilised ideas." 'J he 
Labour Laws (by no means disposed of in the recent proclamation). Taxation and 
Education are alluded to in the quotation I have just made. There is another subject, 
e<iually important, mentioned by the A uti- Slavery Society and the Aborigines Pro- 
tection Society, the delimitation of reserved districts for the Native communities. The 
Bantu are not a decaying race. They are prolific, thoroughly acclimatised, and with 
well-marked capabilities of progress. Peace, prosperity, and education will result 

[ 36 ] 



I90:i.] itAlK. tNo. 21 

in a rapid iucreaso and improvement. The size of these reservations, their locality, 
and their capacity of responding to ever larger demands by an advancing population 
will have to be anxiously considered in fixing them. Nor must the future demands of 
the white community be forgotten. Want of foresight in one or other of these 
particulars has already led to trouble in Natal. The experience of the United States 
is likewise full of warning ; and the metalliferous soil of the Transvaal aud Rhodesia 
adds emphasis to both examples. 

For all the subjects here referred to — ^and more might easily be added — the first 
requisite is exact and detailed information. Such information is only to be obtained 
by a formal public and detailed enquiry ; and this cry for an enquiry is not a fad of 
scientific societies. A commission of enquiry was found to be necessary twenty years 
ago by the Cape Government aud that of Natal. A similar enquiry extending to all 
the rest of British South Africa is declared to be urgent by the authors of The Natives 
of South Africa, a book here expressly approved by Lord Milner as a ** collection of 
valuable and well-informed essays." And Sir Godfrey Lagden himself, in his memo- 
randum of 29th November last, says : " There are many sides to the native question, 
" administrative and political, which it would be premature now to enlarge upon. There 
" is much yet to be learnt by those who are vested with the control of native affairs and 
" every reason why they should not bo hurried." These testimonies amply justify the 
joint Memorial of the Anthropological Institute and the Folklore Society. 

The considerations adduced above are mainly political ; the direct interest of the 
Anthropological Institute and the Folklore Society, on the other hand, is scientific. 
There is no need to enlarge on that interest here. But while political and scientific 
interests do not always concur it may be desirable to point out that in dealing with 
savage races they are very often identical. If it were necessary to reinforce the 
arguments of special application to the problems of the Transvaal and the Orange 
River Colony by more general considerations we might refer to other precedents than 
those of Cape Colony and Natal. It is the fashion just now to regard Germany as an 
example in matters where practical results are to be obtained by means of scientific 
enquiry and experiment. The number of industries which German science has taken 
out of English hands during the last quarter of a century amply shpws in what direction 
success will be found in the future. What is true of trade and manufactures is not less 
true of the practical business of government. Germany has already recognised this by 
the expenditure she has made and is making on anthropological enquiries, especially in 
her new territories in Africa aud the Eastern Archipelago. We cannot afford to be 
behind her in this respect, or all the much-vaunted practical British genius for govern* 
mcnt and colonisation will not save us. The Dutch Government has for years been 
sensible of the importance of such investigations in her own colonies, and even beyond 
their borders, and has given them substantial pecuniary and other encouragement. The 
Government of the United States devotes yearly large sums to the investigation and 
record of aboriginal customs, beliefs, and institutions, and whatever illustrates aboriginal 
art and civilisation. South Australia, Victoria, aud Queensland among the Australian 
States are following the same course ; and lastly, the Indian Government has undertaken 
an ethnographical survey of the countries uuder its sway. 

Sir Godfrey Lagden's objection to being hurried is a reasonable one, but when the 
Commissioner for Native Affairs himself confesses that " there is much yet to be learnt," 
when there is a danger of legislation being prematurely " rushed " by a half- informed public 
opinion, and when those who are admitted to know something on the subject demand an 
enquiry as "urgent," is it not time for the Anthropological Institute and the Folklore 
Society to follow up their joint Memorial by pressing for the promise of a commission 
as soon as the state of affairs in South Africa permits ? E. SIDNEY HARTLAND. 

[ 36 ] 



190S.] MAN. [No. 28. 

Museum: Salford. Mjrres. 

Notes on the Kthnoffraphlcal Oollectlons of the Royal Museum, |^q 
Peel Park, Salford. By John L, Myres^ M.A., F,S,A., Secretary of the £J} 
Anthropological Institute, 

It is a Doto worthy symptom of the growiog importauoe which is attached to the 
study of Mau and his works, that so mauy of our provincial museums have recently 
undertaken the rearrangement of their ethnographical collections on systematic and 
educational lines. And the movement is matler for congratulation from the point of 
view of the export student also ; for it not infrequently happens that local museums 
are the fortunate possessors of rare and valuable objects which have come to them in 
chance fashion in times past, but have been practically lost to knowledge because they 
failed to fit into any recognised department of exhibition-space. 

Both the Committee, therefore, and the Curator of the Salford Museum have 
deserved well of ethnologists in respect of the recent rcarraogement of the ethnological 
specimens under their care. They have a considerable quantity of valuable material ; 
they have now allotted a proportionately adequate space to its display ; and they have 
adopted a mode of arrangement which combines, in a compact series, the advantages of 
more than one system of classification. 

The Salford Royal Museum was opened in the year 1850, and contains besides the 
ethnographical collection now to be described, a library, picture and sculpture gallery, 
and a small museum of natural history. The early date of its foundation will perhaps 
explain the fact that its ethnographic collection in particular contains so many specimens 
which have since become rare, or even impossible to procure. The more recent additions 
—which are numerous and important — are the outcome partly of limited expenditure 
on the part of the Committee, partly of donations and deposits by public-spirited 
neighbours. The new ethnographic gallery is 75 ft. long by 28 ft. wide, top lighted, 
with a double row of double-fronted cases standing free down the middle of the room, 
and occasional table cases and wail cases round the sides. The standing-cases are well 
designtnl and of sound workmanshiii — about 7 ft, high, nearly 7 ft. long, and about 
4 ft. wide. Each face, therefore, forms a compartment not too large to be studied as a 
whole, but at the same time capable of sub-division if required. Down the middle of 
each case is a moveable screen, fitted with Tonk's bars and brackets, so that shelves 
can l>e used, or not, as the contents may require. A good deal more case-room could be 
supplied without overcrowding the gallery ; and if this were done it would, perhaps, 
be possible to disburden some of the more crowded sections, and also to make the 
sections run in their proper sequence as described below, which they do not quite do at 
present. 

The arrangement of the collection itself shows thought, and some ingenuity in 
making the most of what must have been, at the outset, a rather miscellaneous 
assembhigc. At the nearer end of the room, an introductory case exhibits a repre- 
sentative collection of implements of flint and bone of Palaeolithic Age, followed by a 
series of objects of Neolithic, Bronze, and Early Iron Age. The latter deserve more 
space and fuller treatment, if they are to serve, as seems intended, as an introduction to 
the ethnology and culture-history of Europe. In default of actual specimens something 
might easily be done with the help of casts, or even of typical photographs : the latter 
is a mode of filling vacancies in an educational series, which is not at all so widely used 
in local museums as it ought to be. 

Then, coming nearer home, follows a British series of considerable interest, which 
illustrates the successive phases in the life-history of this country from the late Celtic 
and Roman periods onwards ; and at this point the small and rather miscellaneous 
collection of Greek and Roman pottery, glass, and bronze is brought in to illustrate, 
even if only in its elements, that Mediterranean culture, whose advent in the north 

( 37 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Hob. 28-29. 

marks the beginDing of the modern European world. This, in an ethnological museum, 
seems only right and appropriate, but I do not remember to have seen '* classical 
antiquities '* thrown into their true setting in this fashion before. 

It is curious to find, in a remote local collection, and classified rightly but vaguely 
as of Mediterranean origin, a very fine example of the pre- My cenaean stage of j^gean 
pottery, with an incised pictograph on its surface, to which, by the courtesy of the 
Curator, I am permitted to give a separate note before long. 

The archaeological series, described above, is evidently intended to serve as a kind 
of general introduction to the more strictly ethnographical collection which occupies the 
remainder of the gallery, and at this point the inevitable question has had to be faced : 
** On what system should the museum l>o arranged ? ^^ In a large and representative 
collection a geographical system is, of course, essential, but anyone who has passed 
through the ethnographic galleries of a great national museum knows how sadly uninstruc- 
tive such a grouping of material may be, and in a small museum it has the further serious 
drawback that its gaps are often more conspicuous than the specimens. What, for 
instance, is to be done with a series from Fiji, which, as at Salford, consisted originally 
of a spear and a hair-comb only ? In a small collection equally, on the other hand, the 
alternative arrangement, by ethnographic types (as in the Pitt-Rivers Museum at Oxford), 
is liable to the same defect, and involves, moreover, a very serious burden of cross 
reference. 

At Salford an ingenious compromise hjis been effected. Excluding Europe (which 
in its pre-civilised stages has been covered by the archaeological series already men- 
tioned), the surface of the earth has been subdivided into six main divisions, Africa, 
North America, South America, Polynesia, Australasia, Asia, and in these main divisions 
the specimens have been classified under the following ethnographic heads : Arts of 
Life, Arts of Pleasure, War and Chase, Spirit World and Religion, Domestic Economy, 
Personal Economy, and Transport and Carriage. Within these classes the sub-headings 
are geographical again, and refer to the minor districts into which the primary areas of the 
earth's surface are divided. By this arrangement the Fijian spear, for example, finds 
irself in company with other sj)ears, and weapons of "war and chase" from Polynesia, 
while the hair-comb is found not far off among the " personal economy " of the same 
general region. Thus the student finds equal facilities awaiting him whether he 
approaches the study of ethnography from the side of geographical distribution or 
from an ethnological standpoint. Another advantage is that it is possible to compare 
the war axes, the ornaments, the pipes, or the musical instruments of one people or 
group of peoples with those of another, while at the same time the o]>jects from any one 
portion of the world are so close together that it is possible to study the civilisation of 
the inhabitants of any district as a whole. That for practical purposes these half 
geographical, half ethnographical classes are sufficient is shown by the fact that each 
of the many thousands of objects comprised iu the Salford collections has found a 
suitable place in them. 

Pending publication of a catalogue of the collections iii their new order, the 
descriptive matter contained in the old ethnographical catalogue has been utilised 
for the production of a series of descriptive labels, which are mounted and exhibited 
among the specimens. J. L. MYRES. 



EgTPt. Qarstangr. 

A Pre-dynastic Pot-kiin recently discovered at Mah&sna, in AQ 
Bgyptm By John Garstang^ B,A . £Sj 

An interesting pottery-kiln was found in course of excavation of a pre-dynastic 
settlement (S. 1) at Mahasna in the spring of this year. The excavations were made 
for the Egyptian Research Account, for which fund a more complete report is iu 

[ 38 j 



1902.] MAN. [No8. 29-3t 

preparation ; but on account of its interest and its unique character I may be permitted 
to reproduce the diagram above with brief descriptive notes. 

The kiln is not complete, but its essential features are preserved. A large vessel 
(jnajur) is supported on firebricks of varying lengths placed vertically. Their arrange- 
ment is symmetrical, those which support the centre of the pot are about 10 inches only 
in height, those supporting the rim afe more nearly 2 feet high, and the heights of 
those intervening are proportionate. The sketch shows the arrangement of these small 
pillars in average section. 

The bricks themselves are of semicircular section with one edge roughly flattened. 
Similar pieces of red firebrick were found some years ago by Petrie and Quibell on 
pre-hifitoric sites ; but the use of them does not seem to have been previously 
explained. 

The kiln appears to have been surrounded at one time by a wall of firebricks, but 
whether it was covered over cannot be determined. In one place two or three similar 
kilns seem to have been groupe<l together. The vessel itself is separated from the 
mould of fireclay (which rests directly upon the pillars) by a thin layer of charred 
material. The fire seems to have been between the vertical pillars. 

The rim of the vessel was fashioned with trectangular indentations, on the small 
portion of it which was preserved ; a large vessel, complete, 4 feet 6 inches in height, 
with similar ornamentation was found upon the site. J. GARSTANG. 



Assam. Pawoett. 

Note on the Reoent Immifl^rations of Kh6ncls and other QA 
Central Indian Tribes Into the Junfl^le-oountry of Assam. By OU 

F. Fawcetty Local Correspondent of the Anthropological Institute, 

The anthropologist of the future may be surprised to find that the inhabitants of the 
Assam jungle are unlike the peoples surrounding them. Up to within 15 years ago the 
Kh6uds of the Ganjam hills, often quoted as sacrificers of human beings, would not 
engage in any ordinary labour. They would not, for example, carry even the smallest 
article of the District Officer's luggage. Elephants were accordingly provided by 
Government for carriage of tents and all camp luggage. But there has come a change, 
due, no doubt, in the mind of the Khoud to the compulsory cessation of the sacrifice of 
human victims ; and within the last ten years or so the Khonds have taken to work in 
the ordinary way. Within the last few years, for the first time, the Kli6nds have been 
emigrating to Assam to work in the tea gardens. Accurate figures are not available, 
but the estimate of the best authority gives the number as somewhere about 3,000. This 
emigration is now stopped by edict, but it may be recommenced. Not only Khonds but 
the Kolarian Savaras (Savras) of the Ganjam hills, and the Gadabas (also Kolarian) 
of Jeypore (of Madras) have contributed to populate the Assam jungle. It is likely 
that many of these people have gone to stay. Hard times have, so to speak, driven 
them from their own country, and modern facilities of communication have rendered it 
easy to transfer them over several degrees of latitude to jungles other than their own. 
Of course they do not set out and go of their own accord. They are t^iken. The 
strange thing is that they go willingly. F. FAWCETT^ 

India. Rose. 

Notes on the Physical Treatment of Children In the Punjab, q4 
West of the Indus. 1^2/ K, S, Haji Kalandar Khan, Hais of Madi, Dera U I 
Ismail Khan District, Punjab : Communicated by II, A, Hose, Superintendent of 
Ethnography. 

(1.) For the first 40 days the mother suckles the infant while sitting. The reason 
for her adopting this manner is that if she suckles the baby while lying its nose will 
surely be pressed by striking against her breasts and will be flattened, 

[ 40 ] 



1909.] MAN. [Nob. 31^82. 

(2.) In this child {chila or ehhila from ckali^ meaning 40 — the first 40 days from 
the date of birth) the women who are welt up in these things dig a circular pit of the 
size of the infant's head. The infant is laid down on the groiiud with its head in the 
pit to flatten it, instead of doing so by pressing. This process also makes the neck 
longer. The reason assigned by these women against the practice of flattening the 
head by pressing is that this process affects the natural construction of the head and 
weakens the intellectual faculties. 

(3.) During the first child the body of a child is rubbed with a mixture of maidd 
(fine flour) and ghi to make it beautiful. This gives a twofold result, as it makes tlie 
body soft and white, and is besides a sort of bodily exercise. 

(4.) In this child collyrium is applied to the eyes of the baby by means of a coarse 
needle with a view to make them broad and large. 

(5.) A compound of the following drugs is given to the infant for 40 days : — 
Ammaltas. two pieces. Badian (aniseed), -^th of a tola. Cheese, two grains. 

The drugs are saturated in water, and then warmed by placing them on a fire if it 
is winter, or in the sunlight if it is summer, and the mixture is given to the infant 
every morning and evening. The quantity of water is half a tola. This improves 
the health of the infant. The quantity of medicine stated above is considered sufficient 
for two doses — morning and evening. After the child the use of this mixture is totally 
given up. 

REVIEWS. 
Malta. T/Lbjt. 

The Prehistoric Monuments of Malta. g^g^ 

Die vorgeschichtlichen Denkmdler von Malta. Von Al!)ert Mayr. Abhand- Wi* 
lungen der k. bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, I. Classe, XXI. Band, 
III. Abtheilung. 

The great stone monuments of the Maltese islands, first excavated between the 
years 1827-1840, have been the sport of a somewhat capricious fat«. The ruins of the 
Gigantia in Gozo, indeed, were well described and planned by La Marmora shortly after 
their uncovering, but no scientific record of the excavation itself was preserved. An 
account of the exploration of Uagiar Kim, which was undertaken iu 1839 by Mr. J. S. 
Vance on behalf of the British Government, appeared in Archaologia, but was rendered 
almost worthless by tlie incompetence of the excavator, who failed to keep any record 
of the most essential particulars concerning the finds. Of Mnaidra little more than 
Fergussoii's small plan exists, and the subsequent re-ex piorations of the monuments by 
the native antiquary Caruana, though characterised by zeal and industry, were vitiated by 
his imperfect archieological training and overclouded by the Phoenician myth. Fergusson 
has the double merit of pointing out that these monuments had nothing to do with the 
Phoenicians and of connecting them with sepulchral usage, though he was far from 
realising their true antiquity. 

The treatment that these monuments received in Messrs. Perrot and Chipiez' great 
work was unfortunately based on the Phcenician theories of the native explorer. It 
was even sought to find support for them by invoking parallels with the rude stone 
monuments of the interior of Palestine, which might themselves be thought to have 
equally little to do with Phoenician agencies. 

The want of a really adequate account of these great primitive structures — in some 
respects the most striking of the Mediterranean world — has long made itself felt. This 
want has now been largely met by the excellent monograph of Dr. Albert Mayr on The 
Prehistoric Monuments of Malta, The work is the result of personal investigations of 
these structures carried out on the spot during the autumn of 1897. It contains not 
only a careful analysis of the buildings but a well-infonqed comparative study of their 

" [ 41 J 



1903.] 

lending features, i 
i^laod^ on the on 
Dr. Mdvr nexleci 



MAN. [No. 32. 

id their relation to primitive' monuments of Sardinia and the BuleHrir 
side and those of the opposite African coast on the other. Nor has 
)d the Sicilian pai'alleh and the traces of early iofluences from the 



JEgeaii siUe. 

To myself the results of Dr. Mayr'a iovestigatiouB have a special iurerest from the 
great agreement that tliey present with the conclusions put forth in a Hummary form \u 
my monograph on Tree and Pillar Cult, to which I had been led liy an independent 
investigation of these remains made by me in the spring of IH97 on my return from a 
journey, partly in Mr. J. L. Myrei»' company, (brotigh Eastern Algeria, Tunisia, and 
the Tripolitan interior. The Libyan parallels suggested to myself have also weJghi 
largely in Dr. Uayr's comparisons, who finds a natural link in the more tower like 
sepulohrni struetures- — the " Sesi " — of Pantelleria, which show analogies with otbers, such 
as those ot Enfida on the opposite African coast. He might have added that the portals 
of many of [he side cells in these Maltese Banctuaries show a striking resemblance to 
the entrances of the aucieut Libyan rock-lombs such as those of Chaouack in Tunisia. 
The same parallel recurs in the case of the tombe a fcnettrn explored by Orsi on the 
opposite Sieilian coast. In the work cited I have pointeil ont the close analogy existing 
between the punctured and incised bueohero ware associated with the Maltese 
monuments and the similar pottery of the Sicilian uim1>s belonging to the second Sikel 
period. This comparison, which Dr. Mayr fully endorsee, has considerable chronological 
value, since the Sikel tombs in question are distinguished by the abundance of imported 
Mycensean objects and by spiral carvings which {>oint to the imitation of j^gean 
models. This phonoineuou again fiuds a parallel in the spiral reliefs found in Gigantta 
and Hnffinr Ktm. It would seem, then, that the parts of the structure with which these 

remains are associated belong to 
the BrouKe Age civilisation of 
about the middle of the second 
milleQDinm before our era. But 
Dr. Mayr has justly laid stress 
on the evidence of gradual eou- 
Blructiou presented by these 
monuments, and the more primi- 
live elements of the buildings 
may go back to a still earlier 
period. 

In a supplement dealing nitli 
some comparisons iusiitnied hy me 
between the Maltese nionument.'i 
and the shrines of Myceua<un 
pillar worship, ihe author, though 
expressing a geueral assent, .iccins 
to imply that I had wished to 
derive these western sanctuaries 
themselves from .;Egeaii piotu- 
types. Such n theory I had cer- 
tainly never wished to suggest. 
The influence on ornament and 
certain details may be admitted, 
hilt ihe monuments themselves 
and the cull they represent are 
essentially in situ, and their 
uearer relationship must he sought 




1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 32. 



Libna amI Ibam sides. Th« rMemUatiFr lu iIm 
shriuM is lo m graa cxImiI a iwinr»1 r««n)l nf * 
pUBll«l Bjueonie stage of relifrious rail, tboi^h it is BlwrnTN 
poeihte ilwi a MMBBMM utulftljiD^ Libiran c^vmeui m>r \te 
pTcninallj ffKiml to sa|ipl; tlip iniivincxititit' liak of n niurn 



n 

^^k^ *-, ^^^H Dr. Mavr U_t» ilnv slr«M on iii« »iintlariiif«i attnrxl^'d b;r 

^^HF ^^^H ibe noBnniMit of iht Il<«<ric wor!*!, e«p«ciall; tliuM of the 

^^^m ^^H Bal««rir i.*Uai]^ He reJMis, with gn^l ramsKHi U. Carlailbac'* 

^^^■j^^^^^^^H Tiew ■£ lo ill; T-«iiap(>i] siaaca of the TKlaTols, niu) irrngniscs 
^^^^^^^^^^^^H ti>«ni alcan raibvr than siipporu. whieli Iw 4H»n|HLre»' with 

^^^^^^^^^^^H lite peJcstnle «mI slabs in tlto rellf nf Ibe Uslt^Mi uoiiiimcuts. 
^^^^^^^^^^^H Tlirs Tw<r is c<>i>Gn9M>d br ike pHmlM |,trbiob I Itavo bail vIm-- 
Pie. 2. when oonaoioo to poiM nai} between those T-sltapn) vus-tions 

and ibe ^Mia siooes uf Imlia. It ix n»l clear, huwevor, 
why in aootlwt plarc Dr. Mayr objects to my vunr gcncnil 
I of these building irith the Tabtjobs. The ^emi-circular rvce;<« at ibo 
«nmtK!«9 of ibe Maltese ^auotu.triee is hero richiJj roatparaU with tjtoae outi^itle ibe 
beejiiie lotnb of Los Millan« in S|miti. the Sii^ilian "giants* |;raT<s," am) the "Navetas " 



of the Balearic islaii<ls. The featiirv i^ iodiwil, 
of manj couotries. Be^iijes ilie Iberic examplps 
good parallele may be cited fram ItoIbdi] and 
among ifae British long baiTOws, and the same 
sepulchral ground plan recurs in Northern Africa. 
Id everj direflioa, in short, llle.se Mallosr 



lo Che rliamtxTiil linrroiv* 



i^hoi 



with 



sepulchral prototypes. Tbe vorsbip practised 
Mritbiii their w&lU was evidently Insed oii the 
cult of departed bureau spirits, though, l>y a 
natural evolalion. the cult may have been iu pari 
at least aunexed to that of higher spiritual beings. 
Ill thiii respeol tbe Ualtese monuments prceeiii 
a perfect paralleliain witb StoDclionge, tbe com- 
ponent features of whii^b — avenue, stone arcli, 
and iriliih alike — luay be traced bauk to se]iiili'hrul 
soiirees. Obviously the building ba-s now Ijeeonii' 
auuietbiug more than a lumli. The colls anil 
galleries, and to n certain extent the apses, weri- 
etill covered over, hut the ceutntl jiart of Gigauiin. 
Mnaidra. and Hagiar Kim nas clearly bypiulbral. 
Dr. Mayr, iudeeil, eantends that the monii' 
ments were devoted solely to the anieouie oiill, 
of which we have evidence in the cones. menbirR. 
uiiJ altars ; and decides against tbe view to n*hi<-h 
my own investigations hail led me, thai jmrts of 
the structure were still used for purposes of burial. 
The great abundance of pottery, the accounts 
preserved by tbe jtensntits of discoveries of bnmaii 
ImicK, the small cisi-Hke receptacles — a view of 
which, from a photngrapb taken by myself in 
tlngiur Kiln, is sceu in Fig. 1 — all suggest tlic 
former exiateuce of iutermenis within the wulls. 
[ "« ] 




)902.] MAN. [Nob. 82-38. 

The author quite endorses the comparisons made between the small squatting 
fifs^ures of stone and clay found in Hagiar Kim (absurdly known as *' Kabiri '') and similar 
figures from the prehistoric Egyptian tombs of Naqada and early ^gean deposits, 
the examples from which are now increased by those found in the Neolithic settlement 
at Knossos. To the specimens of those illustrated on Plates X. and XI. of the present 
work may be added a small plain clay figure in the Valletta Museum, probably also from 
Hagiar Kim, of which an illustration is given in Fig. 2. 

Fig. 3 gives a side view from a photograph taken by me in 1897 of another female 
image of clay, which is very imperfectly adumbrated on Dr. Mayr's Tafel XI. It is 
much better modelled than the other, and close inspection shows a peculiarity which 
seems hitherto to have escaped attention. The surface, namely, of the figure is covered 
with a series of fine grafRto markings, which , on close inspection appear to be something 
more than mere random scratchings. There is a kind of zone about the loins with 
a curved and triangular figure below it, and further signs are ^een upon the arms and 
back. It seems very probable that we have here indications of tattoo marks such 
as appear incised on some ^gean and Danubian images and reappear as painted 
decoration on others from Naqada. The usage of tattooing survived to historic times 
among the Thracian and Illyrian tribes, but it has been nowhere more permanent than 
among the Libyan stock. From the primitive race who inhabited the Nile Valley before 
the first Egyptian dynasties the practice seems to have been handed down without a 
break to the modern Berberik ARTHUR J. EVANS. 



Indonesia. Plesrte. 

Indonesian Art : Selected Specimens of Ancient and Modem Art and Hand- f\f% 
work from the Dutch Indian Archipelago. By Dr. C. M. Pleyte. Folio. 0^ 
The Hague : Nijhoff, 1901. Parts 1 and 2. 

These handsome folios, which are appropriately dedicated to the Queen of the 
Netherlands, form the first instalments of a large publication to be issued in five parts. 
Each part is to consist of five plates accompanied by concise descriptions of the 
objects represented, and the author has decided not to burden his pages with a mass of 
critical notes which the serious student can without difficulty supply for himself. 

The first instalment contains Plates I. to V., admira]>ly executed in collotype, 
and representing objects from the islands of Java, Bali, and Borneo. The first plate 
reproduces a carved and gilt wooden litter from the district of Savan, Bali, the lotus 
fiower forming the principal motive of the ornamentation ; the litter is a remarkable 
specimen of elaborate wood-carving, and has been used in religious processions. The 
second plate gives a scene from the sixth book of the Ramayana, representing Sugriva 
endeavouring to overthrow Kumbhakarna. The original is a water-colour painting on 
a wooden panel, and well illustrates the peculiar conventional style of the Baliuese. On 
the third plate are three figures of Buddha, two of bronze and one of gold, all of 
considerable antiquity, and found in the island of Java. Plate IV. shows us five 
polychromatic wooden figures from Bali, representing the god Hanuman, Garuda, the 
serpent Vasuki, and two effigies of lions. The latter reveal evident traces of Chinese 
influence, a perfectly natural fact when we consider the length of time during which 
the Chinese have frequented the island for commercial purposes. 

On plate V. are miscellaneous objects from Borneo, comprising swords, masks, and 
a portable cradle. The author may be sincerely congratulated on the success of his 
efforts to provide a trustworthy series of illustrations of the industrial art of the Dutch 
Colonial possessions. Such a series was all the more needed from the fact that the 
Dutch National Ethnographical Museum, though very rich in specimens, loses much of its 
value as an educational institution through terrible overcrowding, owing to which, as the 
f^uthor tersely puts it, " hopeless chaos reigns." In Great Britain the book will be 

[ 44 ] 



1M3.] Man. Kob. 33-34. 

doubly wekome, as the ethnography of the Asiatic archipelago is not a strong point of 
our museums ; and the appearance of such valuable plates with descriptions in the 
English language should prove of the highest utility to students in this country and 
in the United States. 

The second part contains the following plates : VI., Ancient Statuettes of Ganesa, 
Durga, Mahadeva, and Vishnu, carved in volcanic stone, from Java ; VII., carved teak 
screen, painted in colours, representing Garuda attacking Bavaua, from Bali ; VIII., 
statuettes of the five Dhyani Buddhas, from Java ; IX., two cloths inwoven with 
human and animal figures from Sumba, and two wooden idols from Damar ; X., a 
Javanese water-colour drawing representing a scene from the Mahabharata. Each 
plate is accompanied by a concise descriptioo. The appearance of the remaining parts 
of the work will be awaited with interest. 0. M. D. 



Evolution of Peoples. Matteuzzi. 

Les Facteurs de L^ Evolution des Peuples. By Dr. A. Matteuzzi. Translated g%M 
fpoBl the Italian by J. Gatti de Gamoud. pp. viii — 411. Paris, 1900. 0^ 

The author of this attractive volume is to be commended for the frankness witii 
which he states his views on a subject which is full of contention and difficulties, and 
for the learning and ability with which he upholds his theory against some of the 
foremost exponents of seemingly established anthropological principles. These principles 
are not directly assailed, but rather whittled down to a residaum of truth, on which is 
raised a new and comprehensive superstructure which shall account for the growth and 
decay of nations on strictly scieotitic grounds. The writer tells us that he begins where 
his predecessors have stopped short ; that the probable, enemy of all science, moat be 
replaced by certainty induced from the observation of ascertained data ooTering the 
whole field of human activities ; that a philosophy of history, based on metaphysical 
theories and restricting itself to the study of isolated moral phenomena, will never 
arrive at definite results, which can be reached only by utilising the contributions of the 
natural sciences, those especially of physiology and psychology. All the peoples of 
ancient and modern times are here passed in rapid survey, their rise and fall and direrse 
vicissitudes are all explained by the two essential factors of the physical enviromnent 
and the heredity of acquired characters. ^ Les deux faoteurs prinoipaux dans r^volutioa 
'' d^un peuple sont : au commencement le milieu, plus tard Ph^r^dit^ des caraet^res 
'' acquis qui fixe les variations d^termin^es par le milieu.** So far, here is nothing, 
perhaps, very novel, the first of these factors being universally accepted, while the second 
is still sub judice. Only from the author's standpoint of eertainty or nothing, it was 
uecessury to take the second also as established. Indeed, heredity is practically made the 
key-stoue of his whole system, " la clef de voute qui relio et resserre toutes les variations 
determinees par le milieu " ; and we arc confidently assured (without any refereuc;e to 
the Weissmauu school) that even those characters which an organism has not inherited 
but only acquired during its life, combined with the legacy inherited from its ancestors, 
" peuvent so transniettre aux descendants." 

It was also necessary, in the same way, to eliminate or diminish the force of other 
contributing factors, which are here regarded almost as rivals, and we are told with equal 
courage that the race itself counts for little in the struggle for existence or predominance 
with its competitors. " The race theories which assert that the psychic constitution 
" of a i>eople is formed of innate elements, and refuse to admit that ancestors have 
" exercised any influence on their descendants, are in manifest opposition to the facts." 
Put in this way, the distinction between racial and inherited characters does not come 
out very clearly. But it is elsewhere made plain enough, and in a concluding paragraph 
the author writes : ^^ Our theory breaks down tho«;3 barriers that certain anthropologists, 

L *'> ] 



1902.] MAN, 

'' liistoriuiiir, and philosophers had mised up itelv. 

" ii elleK SDiit pla<^i/os dans lee cuiid itioiiA fnvombii 

Tim hul.lj dieciiHsed ({iieation of inherent rnciul si 

by reducing rU to the same level, ami endowing all with tli 

in ihe socinl eenla under like fnvonrnble (londitione. 



[Nob. 34-36. 



le rncei^ of maukind. Toutec, 

vent s'elevorttlft ui viliBation." 

ity in thns dogmuticully solved 

faculty of rising 

> L-onchieion that 



hitii been arrived nt hy serious students, for ioHtnnce, of the full-hlood Nc^ro i>eopieB. 
of the Fuegians, the Aiistralian and Papuan aliorigines. 

But apart from these (.';on si derations, the book oati Ive read with pleasrire, and even 
proltt, Ihaiikii to its earnest and f^euuinely honest spirit, and to the skilful way the 
hintorie and moilcrn peoples of the world are successively reviewed, with the object 
of establishing the exclHfii^ efficacy of two imporljint fautors in their evolution. 
Indeed, there would be tittle objection to raise against its general teiiour, were it 
possible to strike out the italicised word in the foregoitig remark. A. H. KEANE. 



Chatham Island. 

Mehr als Fihifzig Jnlirr u 
h iogntp hiirhe SchUderuiiffen 
Herausgegeben von Dr. Brun 
pp. r" 



35 



Weiss. 

"f niiilliniH hlaiid KiillaryesrliichltUhr uitif 
. . . aus den Brief vn eincx DeutscAeu. 
I Weiss. Berlin: Dentscher Kolouial-Verlag, 190]. 

This interesting little work is largely eom|io8ed of extracts from the letters of the 
Kov. J. C. Engst, a former missionary, who at the request of Dr. Schaniuslauii, the 
director of the Bremen Museum, wrote down what he knew of the island, its history, 
and its inhabitants. The anthropological part of the book is, uufortuuatoly, very short. 
There are details with regard to the cannibaUsm of the Maoris, and the eonfliets of the 
Morioris wilb their oppressors. Of the Morioria tbemsolves an interesting custom is 
recorded. On a certain day in eumraer, when the Pleiades were plainly visible, they 
nsed to assemble ; each had a stick in his hand, on the end of which fmit of the karakn 
tree was fastened. This was hold out towards the constellation and supplication made 
for the friiitfulness of the trees, In addition to the details on the religious ideas of the 
Morioris, which are on the whole very meagre, we have a description of their ciknoes, 
of which four kinds are briefly described, one of which was only used for ceremonial 
purposes to soud an ofTering to Rongomoana, one of the gods who presided over their 
tishing. 

Other sections deal with the " Hau Hau" religion and the present slate of the 
islnnd. The remainder of the book is devoted to a biography of Engst and n discussion 
of his views on various subjects. N. W. T. 



36 



Sociology. Watt. 

.1 Slwli, of Sociai Mornlily. By W. A. Watt, M.A., LL.B., D. Piiil., 
Clasgow. Edinburgh ; T. T. Clark, "pp. siii— 293. Price 6«. 

Mr. Watt studies social morality — first, from tlie staudpoiut of virtue; secondiv, with 
reference to social organisation. Among the virtues he analyses justice, benevolence, 
truthfulness, and the rest. Under the second head he considerH social groups, first 
generally and then under some aspects of individual life, lays down moral rules and 
resolutions, and discusses the wider ethical unities, and the formation of the State. He 
doubts the adequacy of considerations of justice to maintain the moral order, and seeks to 
supplement them by considerations of benevolence. There he is oli dangerous ground, for 
benevolence is generally a more euphemism for the laziness that will not trouble itself 
to aneertain what is juslioe. The analysis of Iruihfulues? leads lo ii good deal of 
eaauiatic disuussion which does not appear greatly to advance the matter. It is not by 
[ *6 ] 



19020 



MAN. 



[Nos. 30-38. 



aesking to imagine cases thut may or iii»j not nnsG that we arrive at a knowledge 
of what is truth, hiit by L-tiltiv,iting the facility of getting iit the reality of things that 
will enable us to ileal with a wholly iiuexpected aud 11 iicoutem plated condition of 
eveutu when it does arise, as Mr. Watts states very elearly in hia chapter ou "Uoral 
Rules aud Kesolutious." The other qualities considered are fortitude, temperance, and 
the rest of the self-i'egardiug virtues. Passing to the rolatiou of man to his fellows 
when organised into social groups, the author proposes lo himself, keeping closely in 
touch with common sense, to consider some of the higher aspects of individual life, as 
aaiodiness and the desires for glory and for power. This leads to the discussion of 
Dr. Bosanquut's ronceptiou of the general will, and of the limitation of State interference 
with freedom of action and of opinion. We have to thank Mr. Watts for a thoughtful 
and suggestive work. He coufessea that he has not altogether reprosseil his idealistic 
sympathies. E. W. B. 



fflial /i, 



Amerloan Negro. 

The AmcricamXcffro 
A critical aud practical 
Macmillau & Co., 1900. 

Mr. Thomas is himself a person of negro 
atmosphere of aversion to human bonda; 



U)n.<, what he 

by William 

'—440. Price 7j 



Hes 



Thomas. 

is, and what be mtiif become. m^ 
Hauuihal Thomas. London : Wf 
!. &d. net. 

iccstry, born in Ohio, and bred in an 
erved in the army on the side of the 



Northern States and lost his right arm. In 1871 he went south, and, despite strong 
opposition from the southern white lawyers, was admitted to the practice of the law in 
the courts of South Curoliua in January 1M74. In 1876 ho was elected a moiulier of 
the Legislature. 

lu tracing the condition of the negro from alien chattelism to deeretal freedom, he 

is {lainfnlly impressed with the indifForence of the negroes towards the agencies which 

consummated their freedom. He shows the great benoHts the negro has derived in his 

passage from industrial bondage to material thrift. He is very severe, however, on 

. those characteristic traits which distinguish the negroes from the rest of uiaukiiid, on 

rtbe evils caused by tbe tendency to extreme emotional religion in their ethnic beliefs, 

m-oa their moral lapses, and their criminal instincts. He draws a gloomy picture of the 

[depravity of the race, which be holds to be a result of environment as well as of 

heredity. Their educational methods do not supply them with efficient mental training, 

and they are still denied, rather by customary colour-prejudice than by law, many 

social rights. Like all natives of the United States, they have the full status of 

eitizenship, hut their rights are to a great extent disregarded by some of the Slates, 

Hence it is admitted in alt quarters that raee-friction exists, and that in morals, 

intelligence, industry, and thrift, the freed people are not what they ought to be. 

Mr. Thomas hopes, however, for a national assimilation that will in time blend the 

heterogeneous peoples of America into a composite type which will combine the best 

features of all. Whether tiiat aspiration will ever be realised may be doubted, but he 

is to lie thanked for a candid and unsparing analysis of the weak points of a race which 

he has shown in his own person to be capable of rising to great distiDction. E. W. It. 



Folklore : Method. Hoflinann-Krayer. 

Die \';tk.skiind'- ih m»i,enscka/i. Von E. Hoffmaun-Krayer, A.O. Pruf..^ 
' an der Univerailjit Basel. Ziirich : ¥. Amberger, 1902. pp. 34. Price I nm 

This short pamphlet, de<licaleil lo Mr. E. S. Harthiud, seeks to establish the study 
of Folklore on a scientific basis with the express object of rescuing it from the clutches 

t « 1 



38 



of the mere dilettante. It is conceived in a spirit of the greatest moderation, and the 
writer is to be prai&ed hardly more for what he sajs than for what he does not saj. He 
avoids the common mistake of undertaking the apriori delimitation of precise spheres of 
influence within a more or less unexplored continent. He takes things as he finds them : 
Ethnography ranging Negro fetishes and Lapp sledged side by side with Chinese vases 
and Egyptian mummies in its museums, whilst rejecting Greek statues or mediasval 
miniatures ; and Folklore, on the other hand, confining its attention in the first instance 
to those elements in what may be called our civilisation which, from the point of view 
of the history of culture, are to be reckoned rather as its passive than as its active 
conditions. What these elements exactly are might perhaps, for the sake of clearness, 
have been set forth in greater detail. We may safely conclude, however, that Professor 
Hoifmann-Krayer finds himself m entire sympathy with the stated aims of the English 
Folklore Society. He proceeds to show — ^and here, doubtless, we reach the pith of hie 
message to the dilettante — that there are two kinds, or rather stages, of Folklore. The 
descriptive branch of the science which interests itself in the customary ideas and 
practices of particular ethnic units or groups is, he urges, but preparatory to a 
ciiisparutive branch which has to determine the general laws of the origin and 
distribution of the phenomena selected for observation. With which dictum the serious 
student is not likely to quarrel. At the same time, the question may be raised whether 
Folklore can be expected to survive as Folklore — that is, as a specific department of 
inquiry distinct from ethnography as our author understands it — when it comes to 
formulating " laws." Surely the differentiation of home from " exotic " custom is at best 
but an artificial and temporary arrangement somewhat on a par with that separate 
treatment of the customs of ethnic units which Professor Hoffmann-Krayer assigns to 
the preliminary or descriptive stage of Folklore. As Plato says, Hellene and Barbarian 
are not '' real kinds." Comparative science, meanwhile, owns to no other function than 
that of hypothetically constructing /' real kinds " — that is, laws. Granted that there 
exist in Nature distinguishable areas of human characterisation presenting individual 
features of their own, it must surely remain the ambition of the anthropologist to explain 
similarities and differences alike in terms of the generic. Professor Hoffmann-Krayer, 
indeed, ends his paper with a protest against the mechanical assumptions which 
naturalism would fain introduce into ethnic psychology. The individual will, he 
contends, is the mainspring of variation, and custom is but the process of mutual 
assimilation which keeps the variant factors together in a sort of loose bundle. Such a 
view, however, must tell, if anything, in favour of an amalgamation of Folklore with 
Ethnography at the comparative level, since it limits the range of both to the unvarying 
and common conditions. Meanwhile was it quite judicious thus to suggest, without 
proceeding to explain and justify, a dualism between the passive and active conditions 
of man^s spiritual evolution ? The mere dilettante, if ho be metaphysician enough to 
take the chance that is here offered to him, might after all make out a plausible case for 
dabbling iu Folklore without troubling his head with " laws" at all. 

li. R. MARETT. 



PROCEEDINGS OP SOCIETIES. 

Proceedings. Anthropological Institute. 

Ordinary Meeting^ 1 1th February 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. qQ 
Mr. W. W. Skeat, M.A., read a paper on The Wild Tribes of the Malay 0\s 
Peninsula^ illustrated by lantern slides. The paper will be published iu full in 
Jourti* Anihr. Inst.y XXXII. 



Printed by Etbs and Spottiswoode, His Majesty's Printers, East Harding Street, E.C. 



1902.] MAN. [Xos. 40-41 

in bis craft and undeniablj a successful well-sinker. But it seemod quite natural to his 
mind that a main-spring, whether of water or of a watch, would be likely to deflect his 
forked twig in the same way. Now this is typical in the art of the divining rod and 
analogous instruments, from the coffin which leads the bearers of the corpse to the 
murderer, to the ring suspended by a thread over a glass which tells what o^clock it is.* 
As is well known, the European divining rod used to find not only water but mineral 
veins, stolen treasure, and even the thief who stole it.t The Malay instrument finds 
lost property and, if asked, springs of water. Now what have these various objects in 
common ? Nothing but that the diviner wishes to find something. The divining 
instrument has no physical relation with water more than with stolen goods, or 
murderers, or the lime of day ; it only follows the seeker's state of mind and body. He 
may imagine that the instrument is giving him information, an explanation which is at 
its height in the Malay rattans, which are believed to be possessed by a demon and can 
be used to drive out other demons, and in the European divining rods, which used to be — 
and possibly still are — wrapped in a baby's clothes and taken to church to get them 
surreptitiously christened. 

If it is true, as is stated, that bursars at Oxford and Cambridge employ diviners to 
find water on college estates, this is tantamount to saying that a man who puts himself 
into an abnormal nervous state by taking tight hold of a twig gains knowledge and 
guidance, wanting in • his saner moments. If this be true, how is it that Mr. Lang, 
while exalting the powers of the water-finder, has not a word to say in favour of the 
treasure-finder or thief-finder ? Is it because in the civilised world the magical thief- 
finder has proved an utter failure, whereas the dowser, happening to be a trained 
well-sinker, is more successful than if he knew nothing about springs ? 

E. B. TYLOR. 



Britain. Gray. 

British 'Ethnolofl^. Summary of paper read by «/. Gray^ B.Scy before m^ 
the Viking Club, March, 14, 1902. ^1 

In G. Retzius' recently published work, Crania Suecica Antiqua, measurements are 
given of 107 prehistoric skulls, 44 of which are assigned to the Stone Age, 21 to the 
Bronze Age, and 42 to the Iron Age. It occurred to me that some additional light 
might be thrown on the early British races and their origin, by analysing the Swedish 
statistics, and comparing the results with those obtained from prehistoric British skulls, 
and from the living population. 

The method of analysis adopted was to draw a frequency diagram from the breadths 
only. This usually showed several peaks or points of maximum frequency. The 
diagram was divided up into sections, each section having a peak at its centre, the 
assumption being that each peak represented a racial element in the population. The 
average length of the skulls in each section was then calculated, the number of skulls 
being too small to permit of each section being seriated according to lengths. This 
method I consider is much more logical than seriating according to cephalic indexes 
because there is no evidence that people inherit cephalic indexes from their ancestors 
without regard to the absolute dimensions ; and the difference between the skulls of 
the highest and the lowest races is not so much in their cephalic indexes as in their 
absolute dimensions. In order to compare skulls with living heads, 8 mm. was added 
on to the breadth, and 10 mm. to the length to represent the thickness of the skin. 
These figures were obtained from measurements made in the dissecting room, and may, 
I think, be taken as a very good approximation. The method of adding two to the 
cranial index is illogical on mathematical grounds since it is easy to show by a little 

* Instancen in my Primitive Culture^ Vol. I., p. 126. 

f Brand, Popular Antiquities, VoL III., p. 332-5. Chevreul, La Baguette Divinatoire. 

[ 50 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 41. 



simple algebra that, if it is correct for one particular index, it must be wrong for all 
other indexes. 

The following table gives 'the result of the analysis by this method of the 107 
Swedish skulls mentioned above, and also 26 longbarrow skulls which I have taken to 
belong to the Stone Age, and 87 skulls forming the remainder of the skulls in Tables I. 
and II. of the Crania Britannica which I have taken to belong to the Bronze Age. 
The table also contains measurements of living heads taken on the east coast and in the 
highlands of Aberdeenshire (40 miles inland).^ The per-centage of the leading type in 
the S.W. of Ireland is taken from measurements recently made by myself. 

BRITAIN AND SCANDINAVIA. 
Cnmnnrative Table of Rncex, 







Stone Acs. 




Broxze Age. 

• 


Iron Age 




I. 
149 


II 


III. 
150 


IV. 


III'. 

150 
194 


IV'. 


V. 


VI. 


VI'. 


II'. 


III". 




140 


163 
194 


164 
19o 


145 
193 


154 
194 


156 
1^/ 


142 
194 


152 


C.I. 


72 


72-5 


76-5 


84 


77-4 


84-1 


75 


79-6 


79 


73-2 


77 1 



Prehistoric : 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


Per 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


cent. 


Britaia - - - 


100 


— 




— 


24 


32 


13 


— 


31 






Sweden 


— 


52 


24 


7 


— 


— 


81 


19 


— 


86 


14 


LiviDg : 
























Scotland, E. coast - 


— 




28 


14 






14 


44 




— 


— 


„ Highland • 






12 


60 






2 


35 








Ireland, S.W. - 








50 

















1 he Roman numerals in the second line denote racial groups found by the above 
method in the prehistoric and living populations specified above ; where the number is 
marked with one or two dashes it means that the typical dimensions found in that 
population were slightly different from those found in another population, but still were 
near enough to justify us in assuming that the racial elements were identical. The 
numbers in the third line are the average head lengths and breadths of the racial groups 
found as described above, the lengths being written below the breadths. The numbers 
in the fourth line are the cephalic indexes of the average individual obtained from the 
numbers in the third line. The numbers in the following lines are the per-centages 
which each group forms of the population. 

Considering, in the first place, the living population of Aberdeenshire, we see 
from the table that four racial groups were found among the people on the east coast, 
namely. III., IV., V. and VI. When we move inland about 40 miles to the Highlands 
of west Aberdeenshire we find the same groups among the people but in different 
proportions : one group, No. IV., increases from 14 to 50 per cent., the other three groups 
all decrease. Now, to my mind, this shows that race No. IV. is more primitive than 
the others, i.e., the country was inhabited by race No. IV., when races Nos. III., V. and 
VI. arrived on the coast. Race No. IV. was gradually pushed inward, and consequently 
we find it now in much smaller percentage near the coast than inland. The data given 
in the paper cited,! show that No. IV. was a dark race and very tall (average stature 
about 5 feet 9 inches) ; race No. III. showed a decidetl blonde tendency and had an 
average stature of about 5 feet 8 inches ; race No. VI. had a doubtful blonde tendency 
(blonde in the E. and brunette in the W.) and an average stature of 5 feet 8^- inches. 



See Journ, Anthr. ituct.^ Vt»i. XXX., p. 104, »qq. 



t Ibid. 



1902.1 MAN. [Nos. 41<42. 

These circumstances make it probable that race No. III., at least, comes from North 
Germany or its neighbourhood where the highest per centage of people with blonde 
hair is to be found ; and also that race No. IV. could not possibly have come from that 
region. The origin of races Nos. V. and VI. is doubtful, and to determine this we have 
to appeal to measurements of the prehistoric races. 

The Stone Age race in Britain (No. I.) is unique on account of its great length 
(207 mm.) and does not correspond with any other race living or prehistoric either in 
Britain or Sweden. In the Stone Age in Sweden we find 52 per cent, of No. II., a race 
not represented in Britain, and 24 per cent, of No. III., which is well represented in the 
living population of Britain. This confirms the conclusion about this race indicated 
above, and makes it almost certain that No. III. was at least one of the aboriginal 
blonde races of North Europe. We also find 7 per cent, of race No. IV., but, as we have 
conchided, from the pigmentation of this race, that it could not have been aboriginal in 
North Europe, the conclusion seems to be inevitable that this was a small percentage 
of the Bronze (or Copper) Age race of Britain that found its way into Sweden, the Stone 
Age in Sweden lasting to a much later date than in the British Isles. This conclusion 
is a curious confirmation of Montelius' opinion, that metals first reached Scandinavia from 
the British Isles. 

A remarkable change takes place in the population of Sweden in the Bronze Age. 
The Stone Age types have completely disappeared and two new types appear, and, strange 
to say, these are the two races (Nos. V. and VI.) in the living population of Britain 
whose provenance we were looking for. In the Iron Age Sweden reverts to the Stone Age 
types slightly modified. 

There can be little doubt, therefore, that a foreign race or races came into Sweden 
with the bronze culture, and also it appears highly probable that these races passed over 
almost completely to the British Isles before the Iron Age in Sweden. I believe it is 
pretty generally admitted by archaeologists that bronze came into Sweden from the 
Danube or thereabouts. This people may have been the same race as the colonist.s 
of Hallstadt, or Professor Ridgeway^s Achasans. From a considerable number of 
measurements I have made of persons from all parts of the British Isles, I have got 
the impression that No. VI. represents the predominant element in England and 
Scotland. No. IV. appears to be the predominant type in Gaelic-speaking districts in 
Scotland and Ireland, where I have found it forms about 50 per cent, of the population. 
It agrees more closely with Deniker's Adriatic type than any other in Europe, and the 
Adriatic type corresponds more closely than any other race with the distribution of 
dolmens in Europe. Comparing the distribution of this race in Europe with ancient 
tribal and place names, we find Piceni, Pictones, and Picti closely associated therewith, 
and also Elba (island), Albion (Britain), and Elbe (river, Germany). In the Adriatic 
type I think, therefore, we find the true Pictish race ; and Albion, the oldest known name 
of Great Britain, may have been derived from another tribal name of the same race. 
This race probably first introduced copper and then bronze into the British Isles by the 
Mediterranean route. Some of these conclusions are merely speculations as yet, but the 
comparison of the physique of the peoples of Britain and Scandinavia given above may 
be of some value to ethnologists, even though some of the conclusions that have been 
drawn therefrom in this article may have to be modified. J. GRAY. 



Malay: Langruages. Ray. 

On a Sakai Vocabulary supposed t6 have come firom Borneo, m n 

By S. H, Ray, *fZ 

Among the numerous vocabularies printed at the end of the second volume of 

Mr. H. Ling Roth's book on The Natives of Sarawak* appears a list of words with 

* Ling Roth, H. : Tke Natlrex of Sarawak and BrUuh North Borneo^ Vol. II., Appendix, p. xlvi 

[ 62 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 42. 

the heading, " A vocabulary collected by the laf« H. Brooke Low, Esq, The locality 
not specified in the MS., but Mr. Hose informs me the vocabulary is that of a dialect 
of a Rejang river tribe. — H. L. R," 

Some time ago, when comparing the vocabularies in Mr. Ling Roth's book with 
those collected by myself from natives of various places in Sarawak, I found that 
this particular list (excepting the Malay words contained in it) agreed with no other 
Borneo vocabulary. The presence in it of such words as chiap^ ** bird " ; osh^ " fire " ; 
auky ^*' water,'' suggested that it had some relationship to the dialects of the Malay 
Peninsula. On closer investigation I came to the conclusion that it was entirely Sakai, 
and had been included among the Borneo iists by some mistake. 1 duly noted it as a 
subject to be dealt with when my manuscript material on the Borneo dialecfs should be 
prepared for publication. Recently, however, a reference in P. W. Schmidt's v/ork on 
the languages of the Sakai and Semang* has again brought the matter to my notice 
especially as Mr. Low's list is used by Schmidt as evidence of a Sakai migration to 
Borneo. In trying to decide this question I have specially to thaok Mr. C. O. Blagden 
for his suggestions and for the loan of books, and Mr. Ling Roth for the use of 
Mr. Low's manuscript. Sir Hugh Low has also kindly aided me in my enquiries. 

Mr. Brook Low's vocabulary is written in pencil on one of the printed forms issued 
by the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society for the purpose of obtaining informa- 
tion as to the languages of the Malay Archipelago. No title is given to the vocabulary, 
and of the 115 words in the printed lists Mr. Low has supplied the equivalents of 110. 

The paper in itself affords no evidence that it came from Borneo. The sole reason 
for its inclusion among the Borneo vocabularies in Mr. Ling Roth's book is the fact of 
its being found among Mr. Low's Borneo papers. 

The region from which the vocabulary really came was the basin of the Pluss 
river and its tributary Sungei Kerbou in Northern Perak. 

An excursion up these rivers was made by M. Errington de la Croix in company 
with Mr. Brooke Low in January 1881, the father of the latter. Sir Hugh Low, being 
at that time Resident of Perak. The Sakai tribes visited were those in the ^' environs 
'* of Kampong Lasah, on the River Pluss, in Kampong Tchabang on Sungei Kerbou, 
'' one of the affluents of the River Pluss, and finally Missigit-Batu, a small village 
^^ situated at the north point of Gunong Bujang Malacca, in the valley of Kinta."t At 
the village (Kampong) Tchabang, on Sungei Kerbou, vocabularies were collected^ by 
both travellers, and that now discussed is no doubt the one made by Mr. Low.§ That 
of M. de la Croix was published in the Revue (T Ethnographie. || About the same time» 
February 1881, M. de Saint Pol Lias visited the same district. He did not collect a 
vocabulary but has recorded a few words.H Later, in 1884, M. J. de Morgan travelled 
over the same ground and collected an extensive vocabulary in three dialects.** 

I give overleaf Mr. Low's vocabulary in the order of the printed form, with that 
of de la Croix. I also add for comparison the corresponding words from de Morgan. 

* P. W, Schmidt, S. V. D. : Die Sprachen der Sakei und Semang auf MaUieca und ihr VerhSUniM 
zu den Monr Khmer- Spraehen, (Bijdr. t. d. Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde v. Ned.-Indie, 6« Volg., 
Deel VIII.) (Cf. Man, 1902. 47.) 

t Errington de la Croix, J. : Leu Sakaies de Pirak^ in Revue d* Ethnographie, Paris, 1882. 
Tome 1., p. 320. 

J Op. eU,f p. 326. " Leur chef, cependant, comprend le malais, ce qui nous permet de recueillir lea 
mots les ploB usaels.*' 

§ Sir Hugh Low writes : " I quite remember my sou going on an expedition up the Pluss river to 
'■*■ study the Sakais in the company of Mr. E. de la Croix, and I have not the least doubt that he made 
" a vocabulary of the language and that it must be this record which has been inadvertently printed, 
" as a dialect in use in Borneo." || Op, rit^ p. 328. 

5 Brau de Saint-Pol Lias : Perak et les Orangs-Saheya, Paris, 1883, pp. 270-273. 

** Morgan, Jacques de : Explorathn dant la PreMqu'Ue malaU : Linguuttique, Kouen, 1886, 
(Ez trait da Bulletin de la Soci^ de Geographic, pp. 26-47.) 

r 53 ] 



18020 



[No. 43. 









J.deMwvan. 




















SS«a». 


•eohol 


Jaia».aj:n*<«. 


Vu 


«] 


11 


■sUiol 


senboI,Bll 




ludoi 


kodol 


HObol-biba 


•mboLkede 


lenhDi tttbA 


Hnibacd 


Uu 


Mb 








tab 


Wife 


kedSl 


k«dol 


kBdor 


kUnab 


kOdol 


^ther 


ban 


b«i 


bouk 


abouh 


Ivub 


Hother 




eung 






W.6nirh 


Child 


koad 


koiud 


kODOd 





kmad 


fcllj 


es 


e* 





rtgb 





Uood 


IM 




daia 


b«hlni 


dkift 


Bodr 


ta 




mrfg 






Bone 


tulw 





lODllk 


diihaa 


MU 


Bar 


mwntok 





— 


ghnlntok 





Bja 


n»d 


mad 




[iioii4t.mM 


mlt 


Fa» 


kapft (»u) 




k4po (tonw) 


klmi 


kaiA (fl ot t) 


Pinimr 


Janatig 





tlghn 


koDoun.lafi.da«k 


ki,* 


Foot 


Jo* 


i™s (Pi) 


djoup 


t«p«dion 




Ikir 


wap 




•ep 


cbAk 


eb» 


H>ad 


tig (I) 




taparU 


tapatoli 


lBi»r 


End 


chsunc 


— 


koul 


k«ii 


l>aton 


Houtb 


EiUff 


— 


Aiangn 


moutout 


Ikiak 


Nul 


cbuf 










^o« 


merh 




mouh 






Skin 


B«to 


— 


lok 


ichAlauh 


gOW 


ToTWUe 


l.nt.g 


Ianll7 


lUntig 


liiattt 


lenlUi. iBDitI 


Tooth 




moina (plj 




k*p-k*|i 




Bird 


chi-p 


(chap 


lob«m 


tob»m 


trhop 


Em 


iM 


lie 


lab 




tab 


Fwther 


mlfl 





{■"!S=-j 


Mutohnat - cilN 





Kth 


ktf 


kih 


ki 


kl 


»gm«kM 


Pawl 


DUwk 


manok 


mtnou 


P« 


manflk 


■AlliiwUir 


babais 
















hieb 


ni*b 


hiftb 


Sdnout 


beiach 


Deer 




ptogutne 


niiun 


lakapaAfA 


pafiko-pebghin 


Dt* 


cbufi 




tohou* 


lohouo 




Bleplant 


adon 


adane 








HoHiuilo 


»h« 


»W« 


■ubik 


ntmim 


Khatlo 


Pi. 


chanwak 


( ickamn 1 
i (SuwUer) ) 


ffflr 


iou.l<« 


Lchufiicliel 


But 


likua 




tihoiu 


prt 


likou. 




uab 


■gabe 


h>«htp 


blda 


r-l*«ii»li.hagU. 


Bn>ke 


taju 


tadioii 


U^jou 


cwUr 


uajou 




buoga 




boAnu 




bougt 


Fruit 


buah 


boua 


l»ua (fruit, grainei 


kHbouk 


kAlxni 


Lmt 


>»U 


hU 




(Hb 


tuU 


Bont 


tingtek 


tewttak 








UbUk 


S<«d 


keb*u 


kebeu 




kHboub 


btdj^kOl»b 


Tree 


jihii 


did«.n 


tBnbo 


dieu,p 


dj6iop.d)0liofl 


Wood 


jihu 





nHhou 


djohou 


djOhou 


Bm»n» 


totul 


IIodT 


taioui (baoanieri 


( t^Z ) 


lolomWiouldjal 


CoCI«-DUt 


hor 





tehBrt 


ajiiho 


QlAr 


RiCH 


chBTOT 


tcharofs 


(1 


•>»«. tchab-iu 


al. icliind 


Honej 
Oil 

Mt 


labal 


lebwil 


t*bol 








empoig 


empoiT" 


mpoJ 


Bmpol,lcb«ni6i 


empol 


Vu 


keltiai 


keloja 







kaioi 


Quid 




maM 


mto.in«a 








bo« 


bwl 


liDvit 


bo»l 


djouftt 


Biher 


p«n>k 


pen* 


p«rl,ptrt 


pit* 


pto*l.p«c6 



1902.] 



[No. 43. 



£oW> roeabtUaty. Dt la Orobt. 



Pwldle 

BUiv-pipe 
WftiiMlotb 
Juiitfe 



T*kBl 



jrakkl 



JUlu 



)■ oae« (habit. 



Iflueh', nuitoli 



Jlchib (Vm-l 

\i CenlJ } 



(Dcplchip diena) 
< (Kl-mldb 1 

paMehlp ()iBrtir| 

I teu-teht 
'tek 



tebilAdaUfi.rtk 



l>;«k 



bDgUk 
tcliip, nabowl 



tc)nt<'U 
h■n■lKl^ 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 42. 





Lwf9 Voettbviarv, 


DelaCroia, 


J. de Morgan. 














Soman, Sdka^B 8. Maya, 


8akaye A Kerbou. 

1 


Twelve 


nU-blas 


nal-blas 


( neldjonlblas, ^ 

< djoalblas. \ narrblAs 

C nelblas ) 


naftrrblas 


Twenty 


oAl-puloh^ 


j nal-ponlo 

1 


( neldjoolpoolo, ") 

•< djoulponlo, \ narrpoulo 

C udlpoulo ) 


nafipoulo 


Thirty 


I 


1 


n^poulo 1 nftpoulo 


ntpoulo 


One hundred 


Santos 


seratoa 


nl-ratons , naratons 


nelratous 



De la Croix also gives four wordfl which are not in Low's list : — 

J. de Voirnm. 



Dela Croix, 



Soman, 



Sakaye S. Raya. 



Sakaye S. Kerbou. 



Ouivre 


1 

tembae;a 


timbsga 


timbagA 


timbafca 




Midi 


ou Ish 


pddi-his 


kdlidji 


p6di-his8 




Treise 


n6-bla8 










Qoatorze 


ampat-blan 











The following words (among others) are given bj Brau de Sainte Pol Lias : mano^ 
poule, volaille ; hei mado^ viens ici ; ago tchip^ ne t'en va pas ; tchouo^ chien ; tah^ oeuf ; 
tchxip^ oiseau ; ohk^ boire ; tcha^ manger ; djaroij riz en grain d^cortiqui ; nei, un ; 
nar, deux ; ne^ trois ; neiblas, narblas, nkhlas^ 11, 12, 13. 

The list given by de la Croix is much shorter than that of Low, and the ortho- 
graphy is French, but there is a very close agreement. It is also evident that the 
Sakaye S. Kerbou of de Morgan represents the same language. Mr. Blagden has 
suggested that M. de la Croix probably added to, or corrected his list from Low's. This 
suggestion seems to be supported by curious errors in some of the words as given by 
de la Croix. In Low's manuscript, in writing the letter ^, the cross stroke is often 
separated from the upright and thus appears to be / with a horizontal stroke over the 
following vowel. A final g is often written so as to be mistaken for y. Hence in 
(apparently) copying from Low, de la Croix has written lanlay for lantag, and lap for 
tdpy empoye for empoig in the words for tongue, egg^ and salt. In nieb, ant, for hieb, 
a similar error occurs. Ling Roth also printed lap instead of tap, and when transcribing 
the MS. I myself at first wrote gSl for gSto (skin). Low also at first wrote teh^ earth, 
which is the form given by de la Croix, but crossed it out and wrote te, De Morgan 
apparently added words from de la Croix to those collected by himself. He also has 
lanlai for tongue. 

The origin of the vocabulary thus seems to be clearly made out. It must also be 
noted that Mr. Low would hardly have found a vocabulary in Borneo resembling Sakai 
without taking notice of it in some one or other of his papers.* 

A few words are necessary as to the supposed migration of Sakais to Borneo 
referred to by P. W. Schmidt. 

A tradition of the Orang Tiimi6r is given by Stevens,! to the effect that, owing to 
the attacks of an enemy who nearly exterminated them, a remnant of that tribe fiod to 
Borneo (NSgri B rAnei), remained there for some time, and afterwards returned to their 
own country. The Orang Tumi6r of Stevens are identified with the Tembe of which 
Clifford^ gives a vocabulary. As the language of these differs but little from the Sakais 

* Sir Hugh Low writes : " Had he (Mr. Brooke Low) met with any dialects in Borneo resembling 
the Sakai, I shoald certainly have heard of il.** 

I Veroffentl. d. K. MoseumH fiir Vblkerk. zu Berlin, Bd. 3, p. 97. 

{ Clifford, Hugh : Nvtes on tome Sakai Dialects, Joum. Straits Branch, Boy. Asiat See., No. 24, p. 13 

[ 66 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[Nos. 42-43. 



of Low's vocabalary, P. Schmidt has regarded the latter as evidence supporting the 
tradition. He quotes only the numerals and has not referred to the unmistakeable 
Sakai character of the other words, his note on the numerals being taken (so he writes 
to me) at an early stage of his enquiries before going deeply into the subject of the 
vocabulary. 

The determination of the locality from which Low's vocabulary came, of course 
disposes of this support of the tradition. P. Schmidt also adduces the first two numerals 
of Bintulu (north-west coast of Sarawak) as being in favour of the tradition. The 
words quoted are gia^ one ; 6a, two. P. Schmidt compares gia (:= English jia) with 
the Sakai forms tiei, ni^ neh, &c., among which is the Tombe of ClifiTord, and ba with 
the Semang forms behy bie, &c. 

In Borneo I collected a considerable vocabulary from a Bintulu native and this 
shows no evidence of Sakai words. The numeral for " one " was given me in the form 
jia (j as in English) which is only a variant of the usual Borneo forms yia, cha or «a, and 
the common Indonesian root. The word given me for ** two " was gwa (which might 
be mistaken for wa or bwd). This is a variant of the ordinary numeral dua^ the 
transition being shown by other dialects, dua^ duwa, dtgwa^ gwa. 

The inherent improbability of a non-maritime people like the Sakais migrating from 
the interior of the Peninsula, and travelling to far off Sarawak, as well as the 
unsupported authority of Steven's informant, also tends to negative the theory of any 
Sakai connection with Borneo. SIDNEY H. RAY. 



India: Miorooeplialy. Fawoett 

Note on a Microcephalic Qlrl in Madras. By F. Fawceti, Local Min 

Correspondent of the Anthropological Institute. w%3 

The subject of this note is a microcephalic girt, by name Chima-bhai, aged 19 years, 
of the '^ Mabratta tailor ** caste. The name of the caste given by the father was Nam 
D6o. Her physical measurements were as follows : — 



Height 


- 118-0 


cm. 


Left hand width 


5-8 


cm. 


Span 


- 122-0 




Left foot length - 


18-2 




Head length - 


. 12-6 




„ width 


6-9 




„ width 


- 10-3 




Width of shoulders 


29-1 




Cephalic index 


. 81-7 




Bizygomatic 


10-4 




Vertex to tragus 


8-9 




Bigoniac 


8-7 




w » • 


. 15-1 




Maxillo-zygomatic in- 






Left hand length 


- 120 




dex - . . - 


83-7 


>» 



The girl had not attained puberty, the usual age for which is about 12 years. She 
exhibited in the centre of her forehead a \ertical ridge leaving a depression on either 
side. The orbital ridges are very thick and protuberant, and the vertical ridge above 
mentioned joins them near the glabella. Her hair is fairly thick and cut short. In the 
helix of the ears, which are small, Darwin's point is not apparent. The lips are of 
normal thickness, and the face is prognathous and monkey-like. The girl eats as much 
as two ordinary men. The limbs are very strong, though slight. 

She objects strongly to be touched, and is very passionate, becoming furious 
instantly if opposed. Her intelligence is altogether snb-human, and she is therefore 
unable to speak or to understand anything said to her. She is absurdly fond of getting 
hold of a piece of pencil and paper and scribbling on it like a small child. It is of 
course quite impossible to teach her to write. She came to me and by grunts and 
gestures got from me pencil and paper, and with evident enjoyment scribbled on the 
floor. Soon afterwards, on being annoyed by some trifling circumstance, she tore the 
paper to shreds and flung away the pencil. The mother is much attached to this 
semi-human daughter. 

[ 57 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



ClroB. 43-44. 



The father ia a good-Iookiag, well-niiiile miin of 6 ft, 6 Id. or H ft. 7 iu. The mother 
is said to be haniiaome. They are not relatfid to ea«h other. 

This is their eldest child. Their second child was tiorraal and die<I of small-pox. 

Their third child was also microcephalic and died aged niue. He set fire to 
himself when alone in the house, and tbea ran about outside pointing to his body. He 
could not speak. 

Their fourth child was microoephalic and more monkey-like in all his actions than 
the girl. He is now nged II and looks like an anthropoid. 

Their fifth ehild was a girl and normal. She died iu uonvulsioiis at 12 months 

Their sixth child is a boy and normal, now aged five. 

Their seventh child is a boy and normal, now aged eight monthn. 

F. FAWCETT. 



44 



New Guinea. Edgre-Partlngton, 

', stone-headed Cluba frown the Outer Coast of British New 
Quinea. Ii</ J- ICdgK-Partinifton. 

^,Dr. Haddou, in his piiper on the classification of the stone clubs of British New 
GuiueiL {Journ. Anthr. Intl., Vol. XXX. ; N.S. III.), figures only one specimen from the 
niilnrJfN.R.) coivjil (PI. XXtl.. Fig. 5). He mentions, however (p. 247), having seen, 
ill mliiJiiorj to [iiitnerous specimens from ibo Mambare river, other stone t'liihs from the 





HTOfT^H EARED 

Kuinu^i, which is a little further south, Kome, and other localitiea on the N.E, coast, 
and thut these do not differ in any essential point from those obtained ftoin the Maniliarc 
ri^'e^. Dr. Haddon says there is ou difference between these club-heads and thobe from 
the Mekeo districts. In spite of that,-howev«r, I think it advisable that nil the t^pes 
[ 58 ] 



1902.1 MAN. [No. 44. 

from the outer coast should, as far as possible, be figured so as to give au opportunity to 
compare them with specimens from the inner coast and other tribes. On doing this, I 
think that there can be little doubt that the greater number have a common origin. As 
far as one can judge bj comparison, not onl j are the heads identical, but the hafting is 
also similar ; the various forms found on the outer coast being also seen in clubs, more 
especially from the central and Rigo districts. Dr. Haddon says that the painting on 
the disc club is characteristic of the Gulf district ; this, however, is a very common form 
of ornamentation on clubs from the outer coast. The cup-like expansion of the plaiting 
is also common to the outer coast and central districts {cf, Haddon, PI. XX., Fig. 93, 
and PI. XXII., Fig. 5). The characteristic difference is that on clubs from the 
former coast, in addition to the usual covering of finely-plaited cane above and below 
the stone heads, there is very often, not always, an ornamental band of plaited cocoanut 
fibre and small parrot feathers, added to which there are local ornamentations such 
as CU9CUS fur and strings of white feathers. The photograph above, which includes 
all types from the outer coast in the British Museum, gives examples of specimens 
from Holnicote and Dyke Acland Bays, obtained in 1895, and from Colling wood 
Bay, purchased last year from Mr. Abbott, a missionary who had been resident for 
over three years in that district, the natives of which from whom he obtained all his 
specimens were, so he says, hillmen, and that all the coast settlements were peopled from 
the hills. He informed me that most of the parrot feathers found decorating these clubs 
were from a species only found in the higher ranges, leading one to suppose that not 
only were the heads manufactured in the hills on account of the requisite stone being 
found there but that they were hafted there also, and that this form of weapon has found 
its wav down both watersheds either naturally or by way of trade. 

The clubs represented in the photograph are all in the British Museum, and may 
be described as follows : — 

No. 1. — Mace-headed club, flanged. Total length, 48 J ins. ; length of head, 
3| ins. Mitre Rock. 

No. 2. — Ovoid-headed club. Total length, 43 ins. ; length of head, 3 ins. Holnicote 
Bav. 

Xo. 3. — " Pine-apple " headed club. The head coloured red and white in the 
grooves. Total length, 4\ ins. ; length of head, 3J ins. Collingwood Bay. 

No. 4. — Boy's club with hemispherical head. With these clubs boys were allowed 
to knock about the dead bodies after a battle. Total length, 41^ ins. ; length of head, 
3^ ins. Collingwood Bay. 

No. .5. — Disc-headed club. The underside of the head is decorated with radiating 
re<l lines, the spaces between them are coloured white ; the upper surface has two broad 
red ban<ls crossing at right angles, the remaining parts coloured white. Length, 
3o| ins. ; diameter of head, 8 ins. Collingwood Bay. 

No. 6. — Ball-headed club of white stone. Length, 39 J ins. ; diameter of head, 
2| ins. Collingjwood Bay. 

No. 7. — Complex star-headed club. Below the usual matwork band the shaft has 
a square section and is carved on the four sides with sloping parallel lines. Total 
length, 46]^ ins. ; length of head, 3 ins. Collingwood Bay. 

No. 8. — Starheaded club with nine points. Total length, 45 ins. ; diameter of 
hea«l. 4f ins. Collingwood Bay. 

All the above types of stone heads appear to be in common use from Mitre Point 
to Collincrw()o<l Bav. J. EDGE-PARTINGTON. 



[ 59 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 45. 

India : Folklore. Rose. 

The Mother's Brother: Notes and Queries on the Folklore of ^p 
the Put^ab (No. 26). By H. A. Rose, Superintendent of Ethnography. ^D 
{Cf. Man, 1901. 136, for Notes on the Position of the Mother^s Brother {Maternal 
Uncle) in Torres Strait.) 

The part played bj the mother's brother in many marriage ceremonies is well 
known, but no explanation of the following superstition has been offered : — 

1. Hoshiarpur Account. — A child who first teethes from its upper jaw is con- 
sidered unlucky to its maternal uncle. The ceremony performed to remove the evil 
effects is this : the mother of the child goes beyond the limits of her village on the 
path leading to her parent's house. From the opposite direction comes the maternal 
uncle of the child bringing with him a white brass tray, one and a quarter seer of rice, 
seven pice, one yard of cloth, and four iron nails. All these things except the tray and' 
the nails are knotted in the cloth. The maternal uncle drives the four nails in the 
ground in a square form and touches the teeth of the child with the tray, and then 
puts the tray and the cloth with the other articles wrapped in it within the square 
between the nails and goes back to his house. The uncle and his sister neither talk 
nor see each other's faces. The sister sits with her child clinging to her shoulder, 
with her veil drawn and her back towards her brother, who returns silently after 
performing the aforesaid ceremony, which is called datiton ha thakna, or the charm of 
the teeth. 

2. Kamal Version. — When the front teeth of upper jaw of a child of either sex 
happen to come out first it is a bad omen to the maternal uncle. His sister (i.e., the 
mother of the child) sends word to him of the event. On receiving the message the 
maternal uncle takes a bronze cup of medium size, a quarter of a seer of hasar or 
panjiri (wheat flour baked in ghi and mixed with sugar) and half a cocoanut in a 
piece of red cloth (hharwa) and proceeds to his sister's house without informing her 
or any other person in the house of his arrival, which is kept strictly secret. He goes 
quickly on to the roof of the house in which his sisteris residing and puts the cup, &c., 
on it, or if there is no staircase he throws them on. After performing this ceremony 
he silently retraces his steps without speaking to, or seeing the face of his sister and 
returns home. When it is known that the ceremony has been performed the things are 
taken from the roof and made use of without scruple. 

This ceremony is performed in a different way in those villages which are situated 
in the neighbourhood of Patiala. A time is fixed and a place appointed for the 
ceremony. The mother of the child goes to the place, which is always fixed beyond 
the limits of the village, on the road to her brother's house. He starts from his own 
village and halts a mile from the place to get information of his sister's arrival. He 
brings with him an old three-pie coin (Mansuri Paisd) with an iron nail, but nothing 
else. When he is informed that everything is ready he proceeds to the place. His sister 
takes up her child in her arms so that its face is towards the way her brother is coming, 
she herself standing facing the village whence she came. The brother comes silently 
and opens the mouth of the child, touches its teeth with the Paisa and iron nail, 
without showing himself or seeing the face of his sister, and, burying these things 
on the spot^, returns to his village. 

Any further particulars concerning this, or any similar belief, might be noted. Why 
should the mother's brother of all people be affected by this particular occurrence ? Is 
his fate bound up with that of his sister's child in any other way ? For his astrological 
position, see Sherring's Hindu Tribes and Castes, I., 17. H. A. ROSE. 



[ 60 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 46-47. 

REVIEWS. 
New Guinea. Haddon. 

The Oambrldffo Expedition to Torres 8trait. m n 

Head-Hunters — Black, WhiU, and Brown, By Alfred C. Haddon, Sc.D., ■ " 
F.B.S London : Methuen & Co., 1901. 23 x 15, pp. 426. 15*. 

Dr. Haddon^s preliminary account of the Torres Strait Expedition has the double 
virtue of being an entertaining popular narrative and a work of real anthropological 
value on the peoples of Torres Strait, New Guinea, and Sarawak. 

The expedition, it will be remembered, started in 1898 for the purpose of making 
scientific investigations into the anthropology of the Torres Strait islanders and the 
adjacent population of New Guinea. The party consisted of Dr. Haddon, Dr. W. H. R. 
Rivers, Dr. C. S. Myers, Mr. W. McDougall, Mr. Sidney H. Ray, the late Mr. Anthony 
Wilkin, and Mr. C. G. Seligmann. Each member of the party had his special depart- 
ment, and together they formed a very strong company for the purposes in view. It is 
to be hoped that Mr. Wilkin's notes relating to the important subjects of house-construc- 
tion, land-tenure, transfer of property, and other social data will not be lost by his 
untimely death last year, to which Dr. Haddon makes a kindly, sympathetic reference. 
Whatever adventures the travellers met with, and they were sometimes not without an 
element of excitement and even danger, nothing seems to have marred the harmony with 
which they all worked together, and contributed to the success of the expedition. The 
visit to Borneo was not part of the original programme, and the official report will not 
include the results of inquiries there. It was due to the pressing invitation of Mr. 
Charles Hose, the Renident of the Baram District. Some of the most interesting 
chapters in the book relate to this visit, and discuss the information obtained by personal 
inquiries and observations among the natives directly by members of the expedition, or 
from Mr. Hose and other British officials. The chapters on the omen-animals and the 
cult of skulls are of special value. The final chapter, describing an assembly of the 
natives at Baram to meet the Resident, and the solemn conclusion of inter-tribal peace 
under Mr. Hose's auspices, forms an epical climax to the narrative. 

The book is profusely illustrated from photographs taken by members of the party, 
and by drawings and diagrams in the text which materially assist the comprehension of 
the descriptions of objects and ceremonies. Some of the drawings were made by natives 
of Torres Strait to illustrate their stories. E. S. HARTLAND. 



Malay : Langruagre. Sohmldt. 

The i-anffuai^es of the Wiid Tribes of the iMaiay Peninsuia. m^ 

Die Sprachen der Sakei und Semang auf Malacca und ihr Verhdltnis zu wl 
den Mon-Khmtr- Sprachen. Von P. W. Schmidt, S.V.D. (Ueberdruck aus de 
Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land-, en Volkenknnde von Ned.-Indie, G'* Volgr., Deel VIII.). 

In this work Professor Schmidt brings together nearly all that is known at present of 
the languages of the wild tribes of the Malay Peninsula and then offers proofs of their 
relationship to those of the Mon-Khmer group. 

The first portion deals with the Word-store, Texts, Grammatical structure, and 
Relations of the dialects to one another. A very nearly exhaustive list of authorities is 
given, which shows, however, that though many have undertaken to give information 
about these languages, few have accomplished the task with much completeness or 
accuracy. In the section on Word -store the vocabulary brings together under simple 
Semang or Sakei stem-words, all the variants of those words. The list of distinct stem- 
words thus given amount (with the supplement) to 1,249. In a few cases where the 
differences between the words given are complicated by apparent affixes, the compiler 

[ 61 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 47. 

has supplied hypothetical steins, and in the case of compounds has indicated the other 
words in the list which explain them. 

The Texts consist of sentences from Skeat (Joum. Straits Branch Roy, Asiat. Soc.j 
No. 30, p. 13, &c.) and Clifford (ibid., No. 24, p. 13, &c.), and a story in three 
dialects from de Morgan (exploration). The former have a full, the latter a partial, 
interlinear translation. 

In the Grammar the phonology is based upon the spellings adopted by the various 
collectors. As these have been £nglish, French, Russian, German, and possibly also 
Malay, the task of the writer was not an easy one. In his discussion he has applied to 
the phonology the transcription system of Fr. Miiller in his Griindriss der Spmchwissen- 
schaft (excepting g for Miiller^s dz), but in quoting words has wisely used the original 
spelling of the collectors. The word-building section is based upon a close analysis of 
the words in the vocabulary. An attempt is made in some cases with fair success to 
show that many dissyllabic words are formed with a common syllable, which, as in 
Chinese, &c., to some extent classifies the word. 

A meaning is suggested for most of these prefixed syllables. The personal pronouns 
apparently fall into two groups, but the lists are very incomplete. This, of course, is to 
be expected in a Malay or Indo-Chinese region where true pronouns are always liable to 
be obscured by expressions of politeness, or by nouns used as substitutes. Demonstrative 
words are formed from four groups of particles. In the substantives there are no certain 
examples of the expression of number, gender is indicated only by a word for man or 
woman following, and case is only shown by position. The adjective follows the noun 
to which it belongs, but the numeral precedes. The numerals from 1-3 are given in most 
of the dialects, that for 4 in a few other, for 5 and 6 in two dialects, that for 7 in one. 
As arranged by Prof. Schmidt they fall into four groups. 

In a note on the numerals Professor Schmidt refers to a traditional migration of 
Sakais to Borneo, quoting in support the Bintulu and so-called Rejang River numerals. 
These I have elsewhere discussed. 

Material for the study of the verb was found to be very deficient. The only 
examples show the use of auxiliaries borrowed from the "Malay to express completion, 
futurity, &c. The other parts of speech are not discussed, but examples are found in 
the vocabulary. 

In the fourth section Professor Schmidt endeavours to form the dialects into related 
groups by discussing their atfinities to each other. The lists show a diversity of 
vocabulary corresponding to the mixed character of the people. A list is given of 
46 words which are practically the same in all the dialects. It is followed by lists 
of words for the equivalents of which different roots are found. These lead to the 
following grouping : — 

Group I. — Subdivision 1. — Quedah Semaug, Semang Ijoh and Ulu Selama, Ulu 

Kelantan and Patani. 
Subdivision 2. — Semang (of Tomlin), Orang BSnua (Newbold), Juru 
Semang. 

Group II. — Subdivision 1. — Besisi, Sakai S. Raya, Senoi. 

Subdivision 2. — Sakai S. Kerbou, Soman (Morgan), Tembe, Perak 
Semaug. 

The author notes that nearly all the Semang vocabularies belong to the first group, 
and the Sakai to the latter. He describes their geographical position. 

A map in this part of the work would have been a great help to the reader. 

In the second part of his book Professor Schmidt discusses the relationship of the 
Sakai-Semang dialects to the languages of the Mon-Khmer group. For the latter his 
material consists of the Mon (Peguan) Grammar and Vocabulary of Haswell, the Cam- 
bodgian Vocabularies of Moura and Aymonier, the Stieng and Bahnar Dictionaries of 

[ 62 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 47-48. 

Az^mar and Dourisbonre, the Anam Grammar- of Aubaret, Vocabularies of the Wild 
Tribes of Cambodgia by Garner and Bastiau, wit.h Himly*s notes on the Tscham. 

The subject of this relationship had been to some extent worked at independently 
by £. Kuhn in his Beitrdge zur Sprachenkunde Hinterindiens in 1899, and by Mr. 
Otto Blagden in EaHy Indo-Chinese Influence in the Malay Peninsula. Kuhn was, 
however, content with a mere affirmation of a relationship between the Mon-Khmer 
languages and those of the Kol, Nancowry, and wild tribes of Malacca. Blagden 
considered the evidence insufficient to assume that the Peninsula dialects were cognate 
dialects to be classi6ed in the Mon-Annam (i.e., Khmer) family. 

Professor Schmidt undertakes to prove the certainty of their relationship as cognate 
members of the same linguistic family. 

The first proof deals with the word-store of the languages. The stems which 
stood as the representative forms of the Sakai and Semang in the first part are here 
compared with the corresponding expressions in the Mon-Khmer. The list extends to 
about 240. or about one-fifth of the whole Sakai-Semang vocabulary. Nouns, verbs, 
and adjectives occur in this list, and it includes every variety of name and occupation. 
The word-formation section discusses the formation of Khmer, Stieng, Bahnar, and Mon 
words by means of prefixes and infixes, and then proceeds to show that the Sakai- 
Semang dialects use the same prefixes and infixes in the same way. The pronouns, 
demonstrative adverbs, and numerals, so far as they are known, are shown to have 
cognate forms. Professor Schmidt thus sums up his argument : — 1. The phonology is 
similar in the two groups. 2. Word-formation follows the same principles. 3. The 
personal pronouns show agreements. 4. Pronouns and demonstrative adverbs are sub- 
stantially the same. 6. The syntactical relations of substantives, adjectives, and verbs 
are the same. 6. The form and construction of the numerals are the same. 

In his concluding remarks Professor Schmidt has a few anthropological notes. He 
quotes Thorel {Voyage d'^ Exploration en Indo- Chine) with reference to the difierence 
between the Mon-Khmer peoples (especially the wild races) and the Mongolian (Tibeto- 
Burman) and Malay races. The chief marks distinguishing the former are stated to 
be: — 1. Dolichocephalic skull. 2. Darker skin-colour. 3. Non-oblique eyes. 4. Wavy, 
not straight hair. He quotes Logan and Martin with reference to the same characters 
of eye and hair among the Sakais, though the skull formation varies. Martinis Senoi 
being dolichocephalic, and his Besisi brachy cephalic. The Semangs, with thpir still 
darker skin-colour and woolly hair, are anthropologically distinct from the Sakais. 
Professor Schmidt, however, concludes that, like the Negritos of the Philippines, they 
have mainly given up their own for a foreign speech, but that a few traces of the original 
still remain in the Semang. 

Professor Schmidt's work is a valuable contribution to the study of this subject, but 
it shows that a great deal has yet to be done both in the way of collecting material in 
the languages and in the comparison of them with others. If only one-fifth of the 
vocabularies can be shown to be Mon-Khmer what are the remaining four-fifths ? One 
may be permitted to hope that Mr. Skeat's expedition to the Peninsula may provide 
new data, and that in discussing this, the possibility of connection with the Andaman 
languages or the primitive Indonesian will not be lost sight of. SIDNEY H. RAY. 



PROCEEDINGS OP SOCIETIES. 
Prosrramine. International Congress of Americanists. 

Internfitioual Congress of Americanists : Preliminary Announcement of the M Q 
Thirteenth Session to be held at New York, October 20-25, 1902. ^0 

In accordance with a vote at the last session of the congress, held in Paris in 1900, 
the thirteenth session of the International Congress of Americanists will be held in the 

[ 63 ] 



1903.] liAN. [Nob. 48-49. 

halls of the American Museum of Natural History, in the city of New York, from the 
20th to the 25th of October 1902. 

The object of the congress is to bring together students of the archaeology, 
ethnology, and early history of the two Americas ; and, by the reading of papers and by 
discussions, to advance knowledge of these subjects. 

All persons interested in the study of the archaeology, ethnology, and early history 
of the two Americas may become members of the International Congress of Americanists 
by signifying their desire to the general secretary of the commission of organisation, 
Mr. M. H. Savilie, American Museum of Natural History, City of New York, U.S.A., 
and remitting either through the general secretary or direct to the treasurer, Mr. .Harlan 
J. Smith, at the same address, the sum of three dollars in American money. The receipt 
of the treasurer for this amount will entitle the holder to a card of membership, and to 
all official publications emanating from the thirteenth session of the congress. 

Communications may be oral or written, and in French, German, Spanish, Italian, 
or English. The council will decide upon the time allowed for each communication. 
No single paper shall exceed thirty minutes in delivery. All debates are expected to 
be brief, and will be within limitations determined by the presiding officer of the day. 
All papers presented to the congress will, on the approval of the bureau, be printed in 
the volume of proceedings. All members of the congress are expected to send, in 
advance of the meeting, the titles, and if possible abstracts, of their papers to the 
general secretary. 

The meetings of the congress will be held in the American Museum of Natural 
History, and every possible facility for the comfort of the members and the despatch of 
the work of the congress will be given by the trustees and officers of the museum. 
The Lecture Hall is provided with electric lanterns for the illustration of papers by 
slides. 

The subjects to be discussed by the congress relate to : — (i.) The native races of 
America ; their origin, distribution, history, physical characteristics, languages, inventions, 
customs, and religions, (ii.) The history of the early contact between America and the 
Old World. 

The commission of organisation is constituted as follows : — President, Morris K. 
Jesup ; vice-president, the Duke of Loubat ; general secretary, M. H. Savilie ; treasurer, 
Harlan I. Smith ; assisted by a strong organising committee of some forty members. 
The general committee will consist of the delegates representing governments and learned 
bodies. The bureau of the congress will be organised and the officers of the cougress 
will l>e elected at a meeting of the general committee to be held at the American Museum 
of Natural History at 10 a.m. on Monday, October 20, 1902. 



Ppooeediiifirs. Anthropologloal Institute. 

Ordinary Meeting, 11th March 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddou, F.R.S., President, m^ 

The election was announced of Rev. W. Sanday, D.D., as Fellow of the ■ 3 
Institute. 

Sir William Thiselton-Dyer, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., exhibited a collection of Andamanese 
objects presented to the Museum, Royal Gardens, Kew, by P. Vaux, Esq. 

Mr. E. Fallaize, Assistant Secretary, read a paper entitleil " The Nicobar Islanders : 
Extracts from Diaries kept in Car Nicobar by V. Solomons, 1895-1900." Communicated 
by Colonel R. C. Temple, CLE. 



Pointed by Stbs akd Spottiswoodb, His Majesty's Printers, Kast Harding Street, E.G. 



1902.] 



Egypt. 



[Ho. so. 



OSIOINAL ARTICLES. 
With Plate E. 



Garstanff. 

li-j John Gtirtliii 



50 



The excnvatioii of a Decro|>oiis ut Ri3<|ac|[iab, neiir U> Bi't Kballilf, wt«lwanl rram 
(lirga, has e^tuMiBhed several new links between the eutljest ilynastieia. In pnrticular n 
portioD of ihis silo (Fij;. 1, Plate B.), which was fouud iiuiliHtiirbeil, [irnvideil a ei-rips niiil 
seqneDce id typen of private biiri&la belongiug, eieemingly, lo Ibe euil of the Third atii) Ihe 
begioniug of the Fourth Dvnastiefi. The ilal« of the later tombs is fixed by two lintal 
objects, a glazeil cylinder seul of Khikfra {neferti mer) utiil a stono bowl iiisuribed with 
the name of Scneferu {siifen bill). Thnt some of ihe adjoining — and, indeed, couti^nuits — 
tombs were built earlier is evident by inapert.ino of the musonry where the joins were 
made ; thnt they were not greatly anterior is seen in the similarity and mergence of the 
archteological formei recovered from tliem, chiefly pottery and stone rases. 

One feature is nommon to all the Iflniba : they are enclosed by n foitr-tvalled mastabs, 
in the east face of which were one or two rece^seil panele. In some cases a rectangitlnr 
eucloBiire was marketl off with bricks, within which ofiering-vesxels were found ; in other 
cases the recess was more probably architectural. 

Tn tlie Third Dynasty tombs the onter mastaba was an enclosing wall merely. 
Within was a grave at no great depth covered with a. roof built like an iintrimmed false 
aroh. Similar dated tombs have been observed at El Amrah, at El Kat>, and at Naga- 
Dfr ; their range seems to have been the first three dynasties. In this Bit« ihev were 
tn all coses but one found surrounded by the wall with two panelled reoessi's on the east 
(as in the case of tomb HO shown in Fig. 3) ; in this exceptional case the burial was in 
the corner of a wide, square pit, two metres deep. The roof (as shnwu iti Fig. 2) 
was supported partly on the principle of the cantilever, with eumpensating weight 
of masonry superimposed ; it was also supporI«d by a horizontal friction, carried 
by the placing of each stretcher above the join of the two below, the whole rosliiig 
against a wall temporary or permanent at one end and so built upou the xlope, a method of 
construction still familiar lo the natives of Nubia and the vicinity of Assiian. The burial 
bad only one permanent feature : its heail was always lo the north. But the face might 
be east or west, the position partly or fully conlraeled, or almoHt extended (as shown in 
Fig. i). In burial 72 the head reste<l upon a wooden headrest with fluted column, lu 
some cases a pit was found within — more commonly outside — the closed door. 

In the early tombs of the Fourth Dynasty the whole masluba woe solid, save for the 
shaft of a square pit descending in the centre. This was found commouly three to five 
metres deep, with a small recess ou the south t>ide at the bottom. The burial was 
generally fully contracted, head north, face oast, or head west and face north, and was 
Accompanieil by a few pots. In one case (63) a recess was in the north, and contained 
a deposit of stono vases and table : but in this instance the burial — partly contrauted — 
lay in the pit itself. 

The slightly later series of the Fourth Dynasty also differed only slightly in detail ; 
the retaining wall enclosed a larger area, and some space 61led with rubbish intervened 
between it and the walls of the shaft, t^ome of the pits, too, were much deeper, reaching 
eo far as seven, eight, ami even nine metres. 

There is another class of burial of some iutoresi ; that which is covered by a large 
pottery bowl or iniijur. Some instances observed at El Kab by Quibell woreattribuhible 
to the Fifth Dynasty. One example from this site is shown in Figs. S, fi, and 7. The 
A is alwaye /ully contracted with bead generally norlh-«aBi. Several observatioua 
1 65 J 




1903.] 



MAN. 



[Ifos. «>-5L 



help to limit the use of this form. Two tombe (with pftoelled mastaba walla) were 
foimd built betwocu tombs of the Third and early Fourth Dynasty ; and another case 
waa observed in the substnitum of a large maataba probably not later than the Fifth 
Dynasty. It tliua socms thai these majur burials may here be dated to th« Fourth and 
Fifth Dynasties. 

This expedition was arranged for by Mr. F. Hilton Price, the funds being subscribed 
at his invitation by Mr. W. MacGregor, Mr. Martyn Kennard, Mr. R. Brocklebank, and 
Mr. Arthnr J. Evana (for the ABhmolRan Museum). Its object was to look for early 
tombx in the vicinity of the royal tombs of the Third Dynasty discovered lost year at 
B^t Khallaf. Work was thus 'lone at several iuterveniug points, bnt was chiefly 
confined to this necropolis, which proved to be extensive. The results obtained will 
be published in due course. In addition to the small private tombs — the character of 
which has been indicated — this same knoll contained some large mastabas of the Fourth 
Dynasty, with panelled walls (of the El Kab type), whilst in an adjoining mound were 
also excavateil some large mastaba tombs characteristic of the Third Dynasty, in which 
A long stairway descends under a scries of arches into the chambers deep Iwluw the 
surface. 8ome interesting stone monuments have been found, both vaseri and inscriptioDs. 
One further result may be mentioned, viz., that tho "stairway tombs" of these early 
dynafities are now presented in a series, both architectural and chronological, linking the 
types fonnd by Maelvt-r at El Amrah, Potrio at Abydos, Quibell at £1 Kab, Ac., not 
only with the large tombs of Bet Khalluf (which are described in a forthcoming memoir 
of the Kgyptain Researuh Account), but also with the well'known type of mastaba of 
the Old Kingdom, the development of which the present site illustrates in an interesting 
series. JOHN GAESTANG. 



Egrypt 

Note on tha Early Dynastic Porlod of Ecypt. By Charles 
M.A.,M.D. 

In a paper on Egyptian Craniology read at the recent Glasgow 
British Association (abstract in Man, I£)01. 127), 1 reviewed favounibly i 
Ivcr's suggestion that, at the dawn of the dynostii; period, Egypt w 
people who differed from the prehistoric 
population iu a greater breadth of skull 
aurl length of nose. In the discussion on 
my paper, Professor Macalisier remarked 
that his own unpublished measurements 
on the extensive collection of Egyptian 
crania at Cambridge entirely negatived 
such an opinion. 

It must, however, be remembered, io 
the first place, that the several hundred 
skulls of liie prehistoric perio 1 in ihe 
Cambridge Museum have been gathered 
together from various parts of Upper 
Egypt. Prohablj no pure race is known 
to us in Egypt, and it is almost certain 
that at all times the component ethnic 
elemeuts were variously distributed in 
different parts of the country. 

f 



Myers. 

S. Myeri, p^ 

meetiug of the 
Ir. Randall Mac- 
as inva.lc<f bv a 




m 



BS 3 



III 1 1 




ill 11 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[Nos. 51-52. 



B= S 2 5 = S 

2 23=aa = 



3 = 5 = 3 


; 


i 




m 






2 


i 




\ 



Secondly, the Cumbriilge collection 
wftH formed at a time when archfuological 
• \Ma of the first three tlyniistles were 
BlmoHt iiukiiowu. The later ex i-uvatioiiti 
lit Alijp-dos tench us that the prohistorit! 
jmsses liy grudiitkl stages iuto the dynnDtii' 
[jf liod, «iid it is now possildf to dinthiguish 
the uiiltiiro of three periods — the early 
prehistoric, the late prehistoric, and the 
protodynastic — from oue another. It \a 
cerlnin that skulls belonging in reality to 
the first or even to the aoooud dynasty are 
included ia the Cainhrldfie collection of 
prehistoric skiillii. 

In order, tiien, t^atisfactorily to solve 
the i]iiostioo, we reiintro from one and 
the same spot on the Nile two seritis of 
skeletons, belonging to the prehistoric and 
protodynastic periods respectively. Such 
series have been raeasurod at Ahjdos by 
Mr. Kiindull-Maclver, who has recently 
set forth his resnlla. in tabular fashion. • 
From his tables I have compiled the 
:i!iuii[. iiMvi..,kiAric BiLHUDiH. Lwelvs figures in the accompanying 

diagrams, etu:\i small squaro representing 
III skull, the three aeries, vh., (I.) the early prehistoric, (II.) the late 
and (III.) the protodynastic. being set out oue below the other. They 
allow of a very obvious couvluaion (unsafe, however, because the numlier of nknlls 
is so small), lliiU the protmiynastic invaders possessed a longer nose, a wider skull, a 
broader face and orbit than the earlier pOBSesBOrs of Kgypt C S. MYERS. 



MM 



i i i ■ : 






52 



I^oia. Cowley. 

The L^elan LansuRce. Abttrttct of a Paper rend by A. E, Cawlej/, M.A., 
before ihr Oxford PhiMof/ienI Sorirtff, February 21, 190a. 

It is less than a century since ttttention wa!> first oalled to this subject (by Hummer 
in Ifilt)' ""'' '^ '""^'^ ""'y '" "*■" "'*' '''** fi"^' "*' »"*T' ■* deciphermenl was made 
by G. F. Grotefend. Since that time much bus been written, but it is rather dillii-ult of 
access, as it is scattered chteHj in periodicals. A Tory useful bibliography \» given at 
the beginning of the new Corpus, published by the Vienna Academy. What was most 
Deeded was a trustworthy collection of llie material. A good deal was couiaiued in 
Fellows' OiscoverirM in Lyria, and though the copies were far from satisfactory, Sharpc 
was able to make some really creditable progress in the clecFpherment, relying chiefly on 
the bilinguals. How little he was fitted for the work may l>e judged from his identifi- 
cation of the Lyi-ian ladn (""/") *''•■'' '■^^ English " latly." Uowever, no one had 
hitherto attempted a systenialia investigation of the values of the letters which, after 
all, is the first thing needful. 

After M. Schmidt published Suhouborn's copies it bet-ame possible to work on 
something like aoliil ground, and the new Vienna Corpui seems to be as aconntto as cnn 
be wished. It is now generally agreed that the alphabet is substantially the same us 
that of the Bhodian inscriptions, and about tlie majority of the letters no reasonable 
doubt is possible. The crucial letter ia the N^. now translilenited as x, not ^ a« in 



» The Karlxett Inli-il 



xufAhydtii. Bj D, fiandaU-Uaclvcr. London: Frowde, JSKil. 
[ 67 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 52. 

other alphabets. The diflRculty is to settle the values of the letters peculiar to Ljcian — 

t.>^,^. |,C./w, )(,w 

The starting- point for anj discussioD of these must, of course, be the transcribed 
proper names occurring in bilinguals. Kalinka holds that they are mere modifications 
of similar Greek letters, and seems to be biassed in the values he assigns by this theory. 
We want to know first the precise values before attempting to determine the origin of 
the characters. Schmidt endeavoured to show that they bore a certain resemblance to 
Cypriote syllables. On essential points, Imbert, Hill, Thomsen, Torp, Kalinka, are in 
agreement, although differences in detail make it very perplexing to compare their work. 
With regard to the specially Lycian characters, so much is doubtful that it is probably 
wisest, for the present, to avoid basing any argument on forms which depend on them. 
Moreover, some of them are found only rarely, and knowing how mistakes occur in 
inscriptions, we cannot feel sure that they are not occasionally mistakes or vagaries of 
the stone-cutter. 

The really interesting question in connexion with the subject is. What are the 
affinities of the race and language ? From the geographical situation of Lycia, 
surrounded as it is by Semitic and Aryan tribes, one would expect the language to 
belong to one or other of those great families. Both views have been held. Saint- 
Martin, relying on a defective transcription, held it to be Semitic. Probably no one 
now holds this view. The peculiarity of Semitic languages is the rigidly triliteral 
character of the roots and the way in which the root appears clearly in all derived forms 
in a language, and is, besides, common in varying degrees to the different languages of 
the family. Nothing of the sort is to be found in Lycian. No trace is to be found of 
roots which are common to all Semitic languages, nor apparently any sign of the well- 
known formative principles of Semitic. It is only fair to Saint-Martin to say that his 
identifications with Syriac rested largely on faulty transliterations. 

There is then a certain presumption in favour of regarding Lycian as a dialect 
belonging to some branch or other of the Indo-European family. Treating the matter, 
for the present, merely historically, it may be well to show the reasons which have been 
given in support of a view which has been held by all the most respectable authorities 
until recently. Grotefend and Lassen (^ZJ).M,G.^ 10.) both argued in favour of it. 
More recently Blau {ib. xvii.) compared it with Albanian. The whole question is well 
summed up by Frd. MUUer in a review of Blau in Orient u. Occident, ii., 739. He 
points out what is obvious but often disregarded, that it is unsafe to compare Lycian 
with modern forms of speech. We must compare it with something as nearly as possible 
in the same stage of development. Blau believes Albanian to be an Iranian language. 
But, even if this were so, it is a corrupt and vitiated modern form, full of foreign 
elements, and we should require to trace it back to something like its primitive form 
some 2,000 years ago, for which materials do not exist. F. Miiller, therefore, proposes 
to compare old Persian, old Bactrian, and Armenian, thus going back to Lassen's view, 
and proceeds to enquire whether the Lycian language can be purbly Iranian. If it is, 
we shall expect to find the language possessing a flexional system agreeing substantially 
with that of contemporary Indo-European {i.e., Iranian) language^, and secondly, it 
bhould exhibit the phonetic peculiarities of those languages. Of the former (flexion as 
in old Persian), he contends that there is no sign. Similarly with regard to the second, 
it is a well-known law of old Persian that initial Indo-European s, or medial s between 
vowels, becomes A, whereas there is abundant evidence that this rule does not obtain in 
Lycian. He thus holds that the language belongs to a class which has no feeling for 
case endings, otherwise it would have preserved them as Sanskrit, or in a decayed form 
as Greek. Considering the probable age of the inscriptions, this absence of flexion 
cannot be due to advanced phonetic decay, since the other languages of about the same 
period preserve their grammatical apparatus, and there is no reason why Lycian should 

[ 68 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[Ho. 62. 



not have done the same. He therefore cooclades that it is aolikely to prove Indo- 
European, and if it is cognate with Albanian, then Albanian most be regarded as only a 
distant relative of the Indo-European family. Certainly Blau^s comparisons are most 
unconvincing. We may therefore safely reject his view, but before going on to other 
theories the case for Indo-European is worth considering, without, however, pledging 
oneself to it. The language which it is most practicable to compare with Lycian is that 
of the old Persian inscriptions, for many reasons. They begin with Cyrus the Great 
(or, rather, Darius) and end with Artaxerxes Ochus, i.e., roughly speaking, their date is 
between 500 and 350 b.c., which is apparently about the date of the Lycian texts. They 
show the form of the language as it was at the time of writing, without its having suffered 
from corruption as would have been the case if handed down in manuscript. Moreover, 
they can now be read with certainty, and the careful way in which they are cut, the 
peculiarity of the character, their good preservation and the division of words, together 
leave little doubt as to the reading. On the other hand, their contents are limited and 
lack variety ; the whole of the grammar is not represented and the vocabulary is small. 
Some grammatical forms can only be supplied from the analogy of the cognate languages. 
Still, we have plenty to go upon from the old Persian side. On the Lycian side the 
position is not so satisfactory. The inscriptions are numerous and the reading is, in 
many cases, pretty certain, but the amount of our real knowledge of the language is 
small. In fact, although much work has been done and very probable results obtained 
by Torp, Thomsen, and others, it is, perhaps, wise to accept the sober verdict of Kalinka 
that our real knowledge is confined to the very limited coutents of the bilinguals (Lycian 
and Greek), although we need not follow him in thinking that what has been obtained 
by means of comparing passages is '^ hardly worth mentioning.** Kalinka gives the 
following list of words known from the bilinguals (in Neue Jahrbb, f. d, kl, Altertum^ 
1899, p. 680) :— 

hrppi etli ehbi ^ iavrtf 

laclu = Tt^v yvvaiKa 

laili = ry yvvaiKi 

brppi laJa epttehe = raiq yvvailiv raXg lavrutp 

tideimi ^ vi6^ 

tideime (ehbiye) ^ roTc rlcvoic, iyyovoit 

cbatru ^ Bvyarkpa 

tubes = aitX^iiovQ 

tuhesil = AiiX^iitiv 

pifLneziyehi = oUiioi 



eXAfivA priinSyu 


:^ TovTi rb fivrifAa 


eb§iLne fitat& 


^ TOVTO t6 fiVfifia 


ebeiya eravaziya 


:= TO flvfjfAa TOO I 


prilnavate 


= iTOifiaaTO^ i^pydtraTo 


prfinavilte 


^ ilpydtrapTO 


se 


^Kai 


brppi 


= fciri [for tbe purpose 




(use) of] 


ebbi 


^ lavTov 


atru ebbi 


^=^iavr6v 



The sum total is not very promising. To this Torp 
holds to >>e the assured results of his own methods, and 
on a different footing from the foregoing list : — 



adds the following, which he 
they are mostly sound, though 



ne, ni 


^ tbe negative 


1 


tleiti, tlidi 


r= shall pay (pays) 


ti 


^ tbe relative 


1 


tuvete 


^deiicated 


tike 


:= tbe indefinite prunoun 


tebete 


— smote 


tibe 


= or 




^fitevete 


= commandeil 


kbi 


= another, a stranger 




esu 


^itTTta 


-ne 


^enclitic pronoun 




-ne 


:= infinitive termination 


-iye 


= dative demonstrative 


-tu 


= im|)erative termination 




pronoun 




epu 


= to, in addition 


ade, adi 


= made, makes 




ene 


= father 


fitepitati 


=r buries (^hhuii nlegt) 




xabba 


= son-in-law 


brppitati 


= adds (/f / n zvlegt ) 




litata 


^ grave 


mai-tti 


:= commands 




qla 


^ l>eople 


piyeti, -e 


^ fixes, -<1 (Jhegtimmty 


■te) 


trbb 


^ city 


iyeti, -e 


= fixes, -d 




terii 


^army 


sttati 


^sets up 




brzzi 


^ superior 


matif smmati 


= allows 




etri 


= inferior 


tubeiti 


= owe8 


[ 


b&ta 
9 ] 


=8elf (^ipgum) 



1902.] MAN. [No. 62. 

If we get nothing else out of this list we can, at least, reconstruct to some extent 
the system of declension in Lycian. Disregarding doubtful forms the ^-noun seems to 
go thus in the singular : — 

N. -a A. -2, -<»,-« O. -ahe^ -ah D. -t, -aye 

The correctness of this scheme is made the more probable by the fact that the 
/-nouns have precisely the same terminations, preceded by the t of the stem, which is 
sometimes changed to e (a). If we now compare the old Persian ^-decleusion, the 
resemblance is rather striking : — 

N. -a A, -am G. -ahya (^hya) hoc. -aty 

In the accusative, -a (nasalised a) seems a natural step between -am and -e/. In 
the genitive there is a similar weakening from old Persian -ahya through -ohe to -ah. 
In the dative, Lycian seems to have retained the more primitive form in aye^ from 
which old Persian -a-iy is a weakening, while that, again, is further weakened in old 
Persian to -a-y, and in Lycian to -i. In the plural the Lycian forms are less certain. 
A nominative in -ahi is quoted for A nouns, which would agree with old Persian -aha 
(contracted, -5). The accusative is in -as^ or -«z, while the old Persian haga is for 
bagah from bagans. For the dative the Lycian forms seem too doubtful to compare, 
and the genitive has not yet been discovered. If it agrees with old Persian it should 
end in -amij but the form does not seem to occur. In the verb we only know for certain 
the third singular, past indicative active (or middle) in -ate^ -etCy -a/?, -cft'^ corresponding 
to old Persian -/i, and the third plural in ate^ ete, ate, vtCy old Persian 'a{fi)ii. 

So far, then, the relation of Lycian to old Persian seems to be close, and if we accept 
Torp's conclusions the points of contact may be multiplied. No doubt the argument, 
from grammatical forms, is one of the strongest, but it is not the only one. When we 
come to the vocabulary the case is very different ; for the words of which we certainly 
know the meaning it is very difficult to believe in Indo-European affinities. The names 
expressing family relations should be similar in kindred tongues. But take the common 
word, tideimi = " son,*' or rather " offspring." Savelsberg would connect it with 
TiBiivfiiiay which seems a desperate attempt. It might be connected with old Persian 
taumti = " family," but the more original form of this appears in old Bactrian, as 
iaokhma, Prnnavate is connected by Savelsberg with irplia^ irf)/(irf, '* to saw," lada^ 
with the root of Xfjfia, &c. No one has been yet found to provide an Indo-European 
root for cbatru = Ovyaripa. 

Pauli, in his work on the Lemnos Inscription, regards Lycian as certainly not Indo- 
European. He argues that even if the grammatical inflexion is Indo-European, the 
words expressing kinship, which ought to "go with " the inflexions, are not Indo- 
European, and further, that the inflexion itself is not Indo-European, but the 
resemblances are due to mere coincidence. Pauli is most learned and ingenious, but 
seems to bo led away by his desire to connect Lycian and Etruscan by way of Lemnos, 
and unable to judge whether his case is proven or not. He thinks that all that is 
Indo-European in Lycian inflexion is the general principle of declension by suffixes, 
which is found also in Etruscan (he might say practically in all languages), and holds 
that the genitive in -h may be a weakening of the /, -//, forming genitives in Etruscan. 
This may be so, but the one assumption is as good as the other, except that we know 
the Indo-European forms, while Pauli's Etruscan genitive still requires further proof. 
The whole grammatical system of Lycian may, indeed, turn out to be not Indo-European 
when we know more about it, but the above view is not controverted by one doubtful 
comparison. A great deal more evidence must be collected before we either accept or 
deny positively the Indo-European character of the grammar. However, the popular 
view at present, held by Pauli, Kretschmer, Imbert, and Arkwright, is that Lycian is 
not ludo-European. It was Kiepert who first <lrew attention to the widely-spread series 
of names of i>er8ons and places, ending in -//r/a, riaao^y and varieties of them, found 

[ 70 J 



1902.] MAN. [No. 62. 

throughout Asia Minor as well as in Greece. Pauli has given lists of them, and 
Kretschmer improves on him and discusses them thoroughly. Pauli shows that many 
personal names in Lycian belong to the same root as place-names, that both again are 
closely related to similar Carian names, and that all go back to a pre-Hellenic language 
and race which he chooses to call Pelasgian. He further holds that Carian names in 
-irfXXoC) which is parallel to Lycian -aXoc« may be connected with Etruscan names in -/, 
&c., and so spreads his Pelasgians west to Italy. This clearly shows, as he thinks, a 
close relation between all these peoples. Without accepting all his conclusions we must 
admit that the names in -nda are probably not Greek, and that their position shows the 
presence of a non-Greek population at one or at different times in Greece and Asia 
Minor. But this is a long way from proving that the Lycian language, as found on the 
monuments must belong to the same stock, because we believe it to be not Indo-European. 
By the same argument we might prove classical Greek to be not Indo-European because 
it WHS spoken at Korinthos and Zakuntho^. especially as we* find the termination used 
in, e.g., ooTpcuclvla trail^tiv (fiXiweiy). All we can say is that there was in Lycia and 
elsewhere in early times a race not Indo-European with which the Lycians of history 
may or may not be connected. 

Kretsclimer's view is more sober. To put it shortly, he tiikes the -nday -tfaaot 
names to belong to a race comprising Lycian, Lydian, Mysian, and Carian, which he 
calls the Kleinasiatisches Volk, but says nothing as to its affinities, except that it is 
not Indo-European. He rejects , the argument that the Lycian verb has an Indo- 
European termination (not knowing of the nasal vowels), and he does not discuss the 
noun. As signs of its not being Indo-European, he instances such combinations as 
initial khy yh in khe^ yhati^ &c., Ihhiybi (although we do not know what vocalisation 
is here suppressed), the doubling of suffixes, e.g.^ in the genitive, and the vowel-harmony 
(typical of Ugro-Altaic languages) which Arkwright points out. 

Perhaps, in conclusion, a further possible view may be very briefly stated. So far 
as the grammar is known it seems that an unprejudiced person must admit at least a 
probability that it is Indo European and nearly related to old Persian. That the words for 
kinship do not agree with this, as they ought, seemc to Pauli a sufficient reason for 
rejecting it. But such general rules cannot be laid down. Nothing can be more remote 
than English and German son^ tti/e, from Latin Jilius and uxor^ yet the languages are 
closely akin. This does not mean that when we know Lycian as well as Latin we shall 
find that tideimi and lada are good Indo European, but simply that the general state- 
ment is untrue. Yet the vocabulary certainly seems to be for the most part not Indo- 
European. The list of words given before, shows it, as well as our inability to translate 
a single line except what we know from the biliuguals. The subject is full of difficulty. 
We do not, for instance, even know whether the language on the northern and western 
sides of the Xanthus stele is the same as the rest — whether it is poetry or Carian. In 
fact, the inscriptions must be interpreted from themselves before we can decide tin se 
points or get any help from comparative philology. If some words seem to have an 
Indo-European look, that is only what we might expect. Considering the position of 
the Asia Minor tribes, it is only natural that all these languages should be very much 
mixc4l. Take such a case as the well-known Phrygian gloss yavoc, irapdlitaoQ (Heb. 
gftn) xdp^a . . . iil6vri (to explain TavviitihiQy from Greek), &c. While un-Indo-European 
words do not prove the vocabulary to be un-Indo* European, so Indo-European words do 
not prove the contrary. Most probably the language is mixed, an original Indo-European 
tongue keeping its grammatical forms and taking on the vocabulary of an alien race of 
eouqnorors or conquered, very much as a page of Macaulay^s English is Saxon in 
grammar, but almost wholly French or Latin in vocabulary. Who or what the foreign 
race may have been is very hard to conjecture. The name Avccoi seems Greek, and if 
the Ruku {Lnkti) of Rameses^ I. are the same, they would appear to have been probably 

[ 71 ] 



1902.] MAM. CNos. 52-68. 

in Asia Minor in the fourteenth century, B.C. In that case were the Termilai the 
foreigners ? If so, we need not expect the name Termilai to have anything to do with 
a wolf-totem, as Hall suggests. The position of the monuments, in a fringe round the 
coast, certainly looks as though their authors came by sea. If so, their alleged Cretan 
origin seems possible. Hall suggests interpreting Evans* pictographs by Lycian. Before 
anything certain can be obtained we must read the monuments. It certainly seems a 
reproach to us that the Xanthus stele and the Agram mummy defy decipherment — not to 
mention the Hittite monuments. A. E. COWLEY. 



Crete. Evans. 

Excavations at Knossos In Crete. Extracts from a Letter from Arthur mg\ 
J, Evans J M,A,, F,R.S,, Director of the Cretan Excavation Fund^ dated %30 
March 23, 1902. Communicated by the Secretary of the Fund, 

The operations of the Cretan Exploration Fund have this year been restricted to 
Knossos, where Mr. Arthur Evans has continued, for a third season, the excavation of 
tlie prehistoric palace. The work has been greatly hindered by an abnormally rainy 
spring, but considerable results have been obtained already. Mr. Evans writes that '* A 
" new hall has been uncovered, south of the ' Hall of the Double Axes,' which was 
^' excavated last year, with an unique system of stylobates and a small bath-room in the 
'•^ comer, to the sides of which, above the fine gypsum lining slabs, remains of a painted 
" frieze still cling." 

The last week of March '' brought an interesting development in the shape of a 
*'*' small staircase, two flights of which are preserved, apparently leading up to the 
*^ thalamoi of the upper floor ; the doorjambs and thresholds of which are still in 
*^ position. A fallen block shows that the stairs went up to a third story ; the block 
'* shows the traces of the side of an upper flight. 

'^ Some good remains of fresco have occurred, quite an aquarium of fish in the style 
of the Melian fresco (A?in. Brit, School, 1897-8, PI. III.), a new lady in a yellow 
jacket, a part of a brilliantly-painted bird in a new style of stucco relief, which is 
rather intaglio and suggests the gem engraver's craft. 

^^ A very remarkable And is a kind of lararium in a ' late Myceusean' room with a 
small painted terra-cotta figure of a goddess, with cylindrical body, bearing a dove on 
her head and holding up her hands, while opposite is a small similar figure of a male 
votary holding out a dove. Between them was a small votive double-axe of steatite. 

^* A small stucco closet belonging to the earliest palace period contained a series of 
late * Kamares ' pots, some with very naturalistic lilies, white on lilac brown ground — 
the most naturalistic design of the kind yet found on ^gean pottery. 

" Many tablets have occurred ; one deposit shows figures of swords and refers to the 
armoury. A very large hoard shows figures dealing in percentages. 

" Somewhat low down on the cast of the site mighty stone walls were beginning 
•* to appear " — at the end of March — " with stairs running down their bastion." 

It will be seen from what precedes that in spite of inadequate funds, which have 
made it impossible to carry on more than this single piece of work this season, the present 
campaign has been far from unproductive hitherto, and that though a very large area 
*has already been cleared down to the principal Myceniean layer, there remains enough 
at Knossos itself to occupy the excavator for at least the remainder of the present 
season. It should, moreover, be remembered that below the Myceniean level there lies, 
as at Tiryns and at Phylakopi, a considerable depth of earlier settlement-r/^Ar/.v (Man, 
1901. 146), which has only been sounded hitherto in a merely preliminary way. 

J. L. M. 

[ 72 ] 



1902.] 



I 




from hooks proctiiCLsl W<iii' rlie S\i 
Uler f xam|ileo, amrli a» llie Code^^ 
Metiilitzit of rlie Bixlleiiiii Li- 
lirary ; the HFth is fmin [lie 
Cadrr Riot «f the Vaiimn. 
whiili WR* painted iifler tlir 
».lvei>t nf Ihe <-ou<|iienirH. It 
WBK at i-oiiDio to t)0 expei'ieil 
that iu n coiiutrjf so extcn.iivi' lis 
tlie Mexican Emfiiro, JifftKiit 
dialriul» sliould pniduite iliftVrHni 
srbools of pnitilerF, anil Ibiii ili>' 
M.SS. of oue province hImujII 
differ In st^le from tlu.s.- J 
ttiiotlicr. 

Fi){iir<a> 1 anil 2 ropriHlui i 
p»f(K» of ll)e famous Cndex II-" 
ffiintng in the Varifau : Vlp. i 
ia a |»g^ from a MS. »■ Itoln^M.i. 
known »s till. Cndrj- C«*pmi»ix : 
Fig. 4 is tuktn from a Titi"i- 
/nmtill or .liviiior'B tmok of l.i.,k_v 
anJ unlucky Jayg, out of wliifb 
buroscopeM were uatt, and of 



[No. S4. 



54 



reproduolious of Nnlinu 

i»r-riprti edileJ \iy various 

I)eLmliBtH uuiler llie anapine^ 

.( tlie Dm- (le I.onhat, lioriomry 

.re.*iilent of [.lie Soi-iet.y of 

of Talis. Tlie 

lieen eiiriclicil 

n the uJilltioii U> the list of 

lie Coritji: Fejervary-Maj'or, a 

>ii'-ColnmbinTi MS. of the Kree 

'ii'iliu MiiHeiiins nl Liverpool. 

that the 

t puhlie 

brariee of tlit^cK.' vnliialilo aidii 

■^ the sliidy of Mcxlinu anti- 

iiities hIioiiIiI lie more wldely 

u<»vu, luid that (I dioiild lj<- 

iiili-rstoiHt thai [liewhol(>i)erlHt>ii4 

iiiilable Fur purpoHeit of atiidy. 

'lie appcLidml photugraphu 

Mtenikil to givti a general 

idea of the upjiearatiee of Nabun 

lieroKlypliB : four iire lakcn 

ililTer e^^uiilially rimn ibi.' 




1902J 

this it may Im.' of imerem Ui give 
from which i.ho illustral.iuii is IhI 
Uiic lie Ixtiilml iiy Pnifesaur Hull 



mm 



MAN. 



CNo. 64. 



s 




mt: 



w^mmmmm 




more detailed oxplunation. Tbe pitrticular luauuttcrifil 
sen is preserved in PariB, and lias lieen edited for ilie 
!r uf Berlin, li> whum t.lie iiilerpretatiun i« due. The 
Xahuas eniplojed for njligioiis 
jiiirposes a nynle of ^60 days, 
>.l>it-b fwM he dhidmi into 20 
I'i'i'inds oF 13 days eacli, every 
iluy mid every iioiir being plneeil 
under llie iiiHui^noe of a jtimkI ur 
'Ail ileity. The I'aris Tana- 
/'I'luill .lind iiriginally 20 {lagex. 
oiiii for tMali perioil, of wbich 
thai here illustrateil iu the (.bird, 
I II the larger square iti (he 
iiplifr left-litind corner siiB the 
-od wlio rnles the week. Hi- 
iNiuie IB Tepe^iiUotli, meuniug 
" the voiue from the iuterinr nf 
ilie mountnina": be appears 
under the fonii of u jaguar, and 
\^ here iilentieal #iih the gnd 
<>r war. The otber figure is 
QiietzalciMifl, tbe wind god, 
liringiug forward a I 



i-rifii-i 



BefW 



the 



spearx, a hravier, and u eon 
icu of rhe jaguar, 
of explaiiatiou into Four vertical c< 
nine each, E-H. Colnm 
of tlie " week " ; tboy rend From 
us follows : door, rabbit, water, 
dog, ape, l-runh, rend, jiignar 
eagle, vnllure," rolling m ifu i 
»lone-knif(, unit mm 1 In \ nil 
liclotig to the regular Mexnnn 
s of 20 days, though in ibi" 
ript U and not 20 hu< 
been taiken as thennil C'llnnm 
C and line G i^onljiiu the pi 
tures of ihc " LonlH ot il 
hours of the nigbr," and m 
rewi in the same ordei ll.i^ 
are the god'4 of rain, fire, Htoni 

knife, tlu -511 .1/1, d.-.ili 

, earth, ill* bean of tlit. 



various syinholf ; among others, 

-shell trumpet, signifying battle, eonflagration, and tbe 

Tbe remaining S2 email squares are divided for purposes 

of four squares euub, A-D, and four horlzoutal 

Liid line n .-oi-tiitii The -I'-ri^ of ill.- I :i diivs 



in, rain, tin , iiiui/e, and 
tbe »uu ihu Lortls of ih> 
night are really onljt nine in 
uumlnr, hut foui of tbim an 
twiee repeated, making up the 
uuuiber 13. Columns A, B and 






[?ifKf*WiW*- 



.A 



1902.] 



KAK. 



[Ras.«4-«. 



liaee £, F fonn % (laplicmte series rapresentiDg the 13 Lords of tbe hours of the 
d»j, each lord having an alternative in tlie shape of a bird. Column B and line F 
give the gods proper, several of them identical with the Lords of the night hom-s ; 
columos A and E their bird- 
s^mbole, among which may he 
recognised the borned-owl, the 
turkej-cock, and the eagle. The 
remaining pages of the mana- 
script are arranged upon a similar 
principle, and it may be imagioe^l 
that from such material?' destinies 
of Ibe most varied description 
might be easily assigneil to Ihoi^e 
who came to consult the oracle. 
Fig. o is taken from tbe post- 
Columbian MS. in the VaticBn 
Library, known as the Codex 
Riot. It ia here reproduceil 
partly by way of contrast with 
the indigennuH work unaffectinl by 
Spanish influence, partly because 
it aflonls a good illustralion of 
human sacrifice in ancient Mex ico. 
The method adopted was, ii will 
be remembered, to tear out the 
heart of the victim with a pointed 
knife of stone or obsidian of 
the type represented in most 
mnseums which possess collec- 
tions of Mexican antiquities. 

Id addition to the above manuscripts which form part of the series of the Due de 
Loubat, another codes has just "been reproduced in facsimile by the Peabody Museum, 
Harvard Univer»ity, with a '.-ommentary by that indefatigable student of Mexican 
antiquities, Mrs. Zelia Niittall. This book, the property of Lorxl ^ncbe and preserve*! iu 
ibe Britiiih Museum, is painted on deerakiu, and is prot>ably paiut«d by the same hand as 
the tiue nianuHcripi in the Imperial Library at Vieuna. Like the Vienna Codex, it was 
sent to Florence not long after the Conquest, and was ultimately placetl in the library 
oF the Monastery of San Marco, until some thirty or forty year" ago it was sold to a 
wealllty Englishman, who presented it to the 14tli Lord Zouclie. It appears to 
contain historical episoilo'', jierlinps the aehievemenLs of the warriors who exteiide;! ihe 
borders of Mexico iluriii}; ihi: reign of Montezuma. MrH. Nutdtll will publish nliort 
papers embodying tbe results of her auulysis of this coder. O. M. DALTON. 




[ moe" (VATICAN). 



REVIEWS. 
Sociology. Kldd. 

PriiicipUi of IVestcrn Cimlitalion. By Benjamin Ki.ld, Author of Sorial pp 
Evolution. London : Mfti-miUan & Co., Ltd., |y02. «vo, pp. vi-51H. lo*. »el. XiXi 
Mr. Kidd's gospel is the gospel of *' I'rojecteil Eftieiency," This meuus "ilie 
" progressive subordination of the present und the individual to the future and the 
" infinite." Western civilisation, as represented especially by the Anglo>Sa\ou 

I ■"> ] 



1903.] MAN. [No. 66. 

democracies, has, we are told, been showing itself ever more capable of planting the 
tree in order that some quite indefinite other may enjoy the fruit, or rather may gather 
the seeds for the planting of fresh and finer trees. Universal suffrage, factory legis- 
lation, a living wage, the abolition of private monopoly — these ideals have been, and are, 
pursued in the name of *' social juntice,*' and not because of any profit that is likely to 
accrue therefrom to anyone in particular : for, humanly speaking, the claims of social 
jnstic^e are not to be satisfied ; whilst, nevertheless, it is only in striving after the further- 
ance of this never-ending lask that man can, and will, attain to his '^ rights/* Thus 
social justice is incompatible with the ends of socialism and of laissezfaire alike. There 
can be no comfortable fruition, whether for the many or for the few, of an achieved 
materialistic paradise in this world. The spiritual rewards of spiritual effort constitute 
the entire prize of those whoso glory it is to ask for no prize. Meanwhile, Western 
civilisation, in so far hs it embodies thio attitude towards the future, is the pioneer of a 
new era in the workrs history. Mr. Kidd labours to show that '^ the ascendency of the 
present'* was the ^* con trolling meaning** of Grseco-Roman civilisation, and that, in 
mediieval and modern times, whenever some "closed imperium ** — be it church, or state, 
or economic system—seeks to render itself absolute, the same spirit betrays itself, namely, 
a spirit intolerant of progress as bound up with a free and honourable conflict of 
opinions. Western Liberalism (as apart from Manchester Liberalism), on the other 
hand, makes for an end which is " beyond the limits of political consciousness ** 
altogether, and which, viewed from our standpoint, appears as the progressive synthesis 
of asymptotic opposites. 

Well, this is at any rate ii sturdy gospel. No fat ease either for labourer or for 
labour-lord, but continual fighting — with arguments, or even, in the last resort, with 
fists — on behalf of " social justice,** *' the species,** ** the spiritual,*' " the cosmic,** *' the 
infinite,** and so forth. And Mr. Kidd preaches powerfully. He composes, it is true, 
somewhat in the style of "This is the house that Jack built.** But, if a moral is to be 
hammered into the popular mind, it is desirable that he who reads as he runs should be 
offered at least ten chances of reading to one of running. Mr. Kidd, however, poses, 
not as a preacher, but as a philosopher. The book announces itself as " the first volume 
" of a system of evolutionary philosophy.** Now surely these are over proud words. 
First as to "evolution.** Mr. Kidd in a single sketchy chapter trias to play off 
Weisniann*s notion that death somehow came into the world at the bidding of natural 
selectiou ac^ainst Darwin*s doctrine that the individual member of a species tends to 
survive "if it vary slightly in any manner profitable to itself.*' But "profitable to 
itself ** is in the mouth of the pure biologist a not unpermissible, because hardly mis- 
leading, metaphor ; and so it is with " natural selection,** and a heap of other Darwinian 
phrases. Darwin is scarcely to blame if naturalistic metaphysics insist on taking 
ex])ressions like the " beneficence ** of natural selection literally. Meanwhile, 
Mr. Kidd*s instinct in protesting against the individualism resulting from crude appli- 
cations of misinterpreted biological formulas to human society is perfectly sound. But a 
" philosophy ** must seek to give the " how ** and " why ** of the laws it alleges. Instead, 
Mr. Kidd is content to refer vaguely to society as an "organism.** This is but 
to combat one Spencerian heresy by the aid of another equally gross. Then as 
to the " necessity ** of the evolutionary process our author believes himself to have 
discovered. Man, he tells us, has no " power peculiar to himself of suspending the 
" cosmic process and of substituting for it another of his own imagining.** On the 
other hand, the salvation of society is to come from a " new condition ** which is essen- 
tially an ideal of the human spirit, and which it is the business of the " scientific 
imagination ** to make explicit. Mr. Kidd seems to have got hold of the half-truth 
that human progress is brought about by a volonU ghierale^ which is something more 
than any volonti de tous, and he is consequently led into belittling introspection and 

[ 76 ] 



1902.] KiAN. [No8. 55-56. 

peraoDalitj and the personal '^ moment** in history. Philosophy, of course, has not 
got to the bottom of these difficulties, and perhaps never will. Rut in the course of 
thinking them out it has gone a long way past Mr. Kidd. Indeed, Mr. Kidd has not 
even mastered the current language of philosophy. Take but one ease — his use of the 
term ^^ uuiversal.'* Social justice, no doubt, is universal. But so is social injustice. 
Good men devote themselves to " principles." So often do bad men — to bad principles. 
Nor is Mr. Kidd even capable of writing what is calle<i a " philosophy of history." 
His historical knowledge is inaccurate, and mostly, it would seem, at second hand. 
Take but one case again — his characterisation of Grseco- Roman civilisation. Is *Hlie 
af^cendency of the present" the '^controlling meaning" of Aristotle^s social ideal? 
(Mr. Kidd, despite himself, had to admit qualifications in the case of Plato.) What 
about £^* ofroy fidXitrra Mix<^rai aOayariiiiy ? Or can the complex phenomena of 
Gneco- Roman religion be fairly lumped together under the head of *' Ancestor-worship " ? 
The only mercy is that Mr. Kidd did not say '* Totemism " at once ! No. Mr. Kidd 
commands a wide audience, and does so in virtue of many solid merits. Let him, there 
fore, be careful to avoid giving offence to the more critical section of that audience by a 
para le of catch-words such as ^' evolution," '^ philosophy," and the like. Such a device 
may be pardonable in the journalist, but in the present case it but detracts from the 
dignity of what is intriusically a thoughtful and suggestive piece of work. 

R. R. MARETT. 



Turkestan. Stein. 

Preliminary Report on a Journey of Archteologicnl and Topngraphical rf\ 
Exploration in Chinese Turkestan, By M. A. Stein, Indian Educational UU 
Service. Published under the authority of His Majesty^s Secretary of State for 
India in Council. London : 1901. 4 to. 17 pp., with 16 plates and 313 illustrations. 

This preliminary report is intended to give a general idea of the results obtained by 
Dr. Stein in his recent exploration of the remains of the ancient civilization now buried 
beneath the sands of the Taklamakan Desert. It is to be followed by a detailed report, 
in which these discoveries and their bearing on the history of ancient Central Asia will 
be fully discussed. The nature and extent of these discoveries justify us in expecting 
from them one of the most notable additions to our knowledge of the ancient world that 
has been made in recent times. From the wooden tablets and parchments bearing 
inscriptions in a modified form of the Kharo^thl character as it appears on the coins of 
the Indo-Scythic princes of Northern India, we may especially hope to recover some of 
the outlines of a lost history ; for these regularly bear the name of the ruling king and 
the year of his reign with the month and day ; and their contents, when fully deciphered, 
can scarcely fail to throw light on the social and political life of the period. The 
artistic objects, too — sculptures, terra cottas, seals, paintiugs, &c. — will raise some 
curious and interesting questions. A glance at Dr. Stein's illustrations will show what 
was scarcely suspected l>efore, that the influence of Gneco-Roman art in the early 
centuries of our era extended even to this remote region, and came into contact there 
with the art of China and Tibet. 

Dr. Stein's purpose was mainly archasological, but, l>oth throughout his journey from 
Srinagar to Khotan and during his stay in the neighbourhood of the latter town, he lost 
no opportunity of studying the people and the country. His linguistic, ethnographical, 
and geographical investigations, which will find a place in his final report, will no doubt 
prove to be of great interest and importance. 

Not the least curious of the problems which this district of Central Asia offers is 
tlic question through what causes a once flourishing country should have become a vast 
desert. Dr. Stein's investigations show that the encroachment of the sand was gradual. 
The various sites were abandoned by their inhabitants in a leisurely manner, which 

[ 77 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 56-67. 

allowed them to take awaj all articles of iDtriDsic value ; anil the coins found in the 
different sites show that thej were abandoned at different dates, extending over a period 
from about 100-800 a.d. 

Dr. 8tein*s scholarly method is as apparent in this report as in all his other writings. 
His minute and systematic record of the circumstances in which his different discoveries 
were made, and of the precise spot in which each particular object was found, gives to 
his results a value which those of a less careful excavator would not have possessed. 

E. J. RAPSON. 



Sociology. Crawley. 

The Mystic Rose : A Study of Primitive Marriage. By Ernest Crawley, r ^ 
London, 1902. pp. xviii-492. Of 

This book is a study of the modes of early thought which underlie marriage customs, 
and of the connection of these with the primitive conception of human relations in general. 
The author believes that there has been too great a tendency to interpret marriage 
customs by the application of legal conceptions which are of much later development 
than the customs they are supposed to explain, and ho endeavours to give a fundamental 
psychological basis to the customs in question. 

The argumeut is directed to show that all relations between human beings are 
re^jarded by primitive man as having an clement of danger, and that this conception of 
danger is intensified whenever there is anything unusual or abnormal in these relations. 
This idea of danger becomes especially prominent in connection with physiological 
functions, and several factors concur to intensify it in the case of marriage. Mr. Crawley 
considers the various measures adopted by primitive man to counteract and neutralise 
the danger, and then attempts to show that the customs and ceremonies connected with 
marriage are designed to obviate the dangers attendant on entrance into the marriage 
state. 

Many of the customs thus explained are commonly regarded as survivals of certain 
stages through which the institution of human marriage is supposed to have passed. 
The custom of taking the bride by violence, which is referred by Mr. Crawley to a 
natural reluctance to enter on a dangerous state, has commonly been regarded as a relic 
of a state of society in which wives were habitually captured from another tribe, while 
various other customs which have been commonly held to be evidence of a condition of 
primitive promiscuity are supposed by Mr. Crawley to be designed to transfer the dangers 
of marringe to substitutes of various kinds. 

The Mystic Rose is far more, however, than a mere attempt to explain marriage 
customs. It is rather an endeavour to formulate some of the fundamental principles 
which regulate all kinds of human intercourse. Among the various methods designed by 
primitive man to counteract the dangers of contact, one of the most important, according 
to Mr. Crawley, is that of inoculation, and especially mutual inoculation, in which each 
of the individuals who stand in the dangerous relation to one another takes to himself 
some part of the other. As a type of this mutual inoculation, Mr. Crawley has, some- 
what unfortunately, chosen an obscure custom existing among the Narrinyeri of South 
Australia, in which the bond between two individuals is a piece of umbilical cord 
(^Kalduke)y the individuals so associated being ngiangiampe to one another. 

The conception of the relation of two individuals to one another, which is typified 
by this ngiangiampe custom, is regarded by Mr. Crawley as being the fundamental 
conception regulating human intercourse, and as having preceded even the conception of 
blood kinship. The habitual close relation arising from a common food supply, or from 
any other cause, is held to be a form of the ngiangiampe relation out of which the idea of 
blood-kinship has developed. The bond or Kalduke uniting two brothers is that of 

[ 78 ] 



1902.] 



KAN. 



[If 08. 57 I 



having the same mother, and this \iOB<i is kelit l.o he the baeia of tho maternnl sjHeat of 
kinship. Marriitge itself is reganleJ us simply one form of the ni/i'tiii/i/tmpc relation. 

An explanation of exogamy is advanced, which is eimilar In that suggested by 
Dr. FrazsT {Forlriii/hlly .Kcitieic.LXV., 841, 18fi9), viz., that it is an institution designed 
to prevent marriage between those loo nearly relatett to one another, or, as Mr. Crawley 
would ratlier put it, betweeQ those closely eonuected by any form of the ngiangiampi: 
relation. Mr. Crawley supposes that parents would prevent snub "an offence against 
ihc harmony of the bougie" us would bo involved in the dimgeroue state of niArnago. 

It LB not possible iiere to criticise Mr. Crawley's views at any length. In general, 
it may be said that the book ia suggestive rather than convincing. There is a lack of 
appreciation of the complexity of the subject and of tho difficulties involved in the 
treatment of unthropologicnl evidoiice. The »uthor's onthitsiasm fur his own point of 
view often makes his treatment very one-sided. For iustanco, he lays grciit stress on 
the custom (which is very rare) of separation of brother ami sister, and passes over very 
lightly the custom (which is very common) of sexual lusity before marriage, a custom 
which affords one of the most obvious arguments against the author's views. 

Mr. Crawley is not content with showing that certain customs which have been 
regnrdeil as evidence of a former condition of promiscuity may biLVO another explanation, 
but he absolutely rejects the whole ideH, and in his ardour against this view allows 
himself to make statements that the maternnl system ia simply a metliod of genealogy, 
and that early man has no property to be inherited. The value of the book is sorioualj 
diminished by the author's dogmatic and partiul attitude towards problems which cannot 
yet be regarded as settled. 

In spite of defeirts, however, The Mi/iilic liiixe is welcome as a very suggestive 
coutrihiition to anthropological literature, and it has the very great merit tbat il is a 
genuine attempt to further one of the chief oims of anthropology, vib., the reference 
of the various forms of human activity to fiiDdaraental properties of tho hniuan mrnd. 

W. H. H. RIVERS. 



Rioe. 

58 



India : Folklore. 

Occatioiml Esftiffi oit Xiitirc SoalA Indinn Life. Ry Stanley P. Ricu. 
London : Longmans. 1901. Svo. pp. vi-223. Price lOif. IW. 

Mr. Rice has been in a position to gather information of interest and value to the 
etymolugiiit. A full account of the Urijus of Ganjam among whom he lived wunld have 
been of much value. What ho has actnully yiven us is rather disappointing. He has 
not been able to find any children's games ; be tells us there is nothing remarkable in 
their religion. In which he does not include "anpernlitiou " ; he has fouud a few 
Mari-hon and given us the gist of tiiem. The imirriage ceremony ia descrilwd iu 
rather more detail, but we are expressly told that much is left unsaid. Tho author 
bus, on the whole, not fully reulided the necesnity of fnlnexs. 

Mr. Rice has not written a work from the anthropological standpoint, but he has 
none the less su'ceedud in giving us some interesting parallels to European and other 
CHStoms. The toddy drawers of South India are at eumity wilh the squirrel, which is, 
however, reganled as favoured by the gods. In the marriage ceremony the bridegroom 
baa to sit ou a flat sione while tho bride's relatives try to dislodge him. There ia a case 
of fire'Walkiog, in this insiuDce an ordeal to be undergone hy a human god. There ore 
beast-tales and stories of werwolves. The Urijas will not kill bears because they may 
be teuanted by the souls of their grandmothers. 

If the author has not collected as much as we could wish, we may hope that he will 
give us auother volume, approach his sabjoct iu a scientiHo spirit, and, above all, give 
us M index, N. W. r. 

I TO 1 



1902.] MAN [Nob. 6»-60. 

Malay: Folklore. Skeat« 

Fables and Folk-Tales from an Eastern Forest, Collected and translated bj p |% 
Walter Skeat, M.A. Cambridge : University Pres.*, 1901. 22 by 18, pp. 92. Xyj 

In this beautifully printed little book, Mr. Skeat has published translations of 
six-and-twenty stories tiiken down by him " from the lips of the Malay peasantry, in the 
" twilii^ht of their own tropical jungle, during the progress of the Cambridge Expedition 
" of 1899 through the remoter states of the Malay Peninsula." It would have been 
easy for him to embellish them with literary ornaments, or to give many of them a more 
artistic turn ; but he has preferred (and rightly, from the scientific point of view) to 
publish them just as they were told. In their present state they are documents of 
value to the anthropologist ; had they been doctored they might have been made more 
charming, but their real value would have been destroyed. 

.Sev(»ral of them are old friends. Mr. Skeat notes one as being in the Gesta 
Rojminorum, "The Pelican's Punishment" is a well-known tale in the Jataka, "The 
King Crow and the VVater-snail " is described as "an old friend in a new dress." The 
old friend in thi?j case is " The Hare and the Tortoise " ; but the dress is not quite new. 
Brer Rabbit found his match in Brer Tarry pin, in exactly the same way as the King 
Crow found it in the Water-snail. "Father Follow-my-Nose and the Four Priests" is 
a widely-spread story in Europe as well as the East. All these and others will be 
interesting to the storyologist. 

Nor will the evidences of Malay superstition and the historical legends be less 
attractive to the student of folklore. Such are the belief in the Gedembai (gigantic 
beings who by the utterance of the name of the persons addressed could turn them into 
wood or stone), the legend of Patau i, and the divination at the tombs of certain saints. 
Mr. Skeat has himself put the powers of the saints in question to proof, and it is greatly 
to be hoped that the result will come true. 

His notes on the tales are useful. He has added a map and an index, for which he 
deserves the student's blessings. E. S. H. 

PROOEEDINQS OP SOCIETIES. 
Proceedlngrs. Conferences Anthropologriques. 

Conferenees Anthropologiques : Association (V Etude ct de Vulgarisation. lift 

A group of members of the Anthropological Society of Paris have recently UU 
formed themselves into an association for the advancement and diffusion of anthropological 
studies. This new association, constituted alongside of the older, more dignified, and 
more ceremonious Society, is to have the especial rSle of popularising the Human 
Sciences, in their more practical application, by free public lectures, which will be 
designed to present the methods and results of recent anthropological research in an 
attractive and intelligible form. 

The subscription is fixed at a minimum of five francs per annum. Ladies are 
eligible as members. The executive consists of Dr. Chervin, president ; M. Lejeune 
secretary ; Dr. P. Regnault, treasurer. The office of the Association is at 49, Rue Saint- 
Andre-des-Arts, Paris. The lectures take place on Tuesday evenings, and the first 
series consists of the following: — 

Fehruari/ 5. — M. Jacques Bertillon : " Le Problome de la Population." 
March 4. — M. Martial Imbcrt : " L'Art decoratif chez nos Ancetres." 
March 11. — M. Leon Gerardin : " A la Conqucte de rAliment." 
March 18. — M. Charles Alluaud : " Madagascar" (with lantern illustrations). 
March 25.— M. P. Nicole : " Les Proto-Chr^tiens." 

The conception would seem to be an admirable one ; and the members of the new 
Association may rest assured of the good wishes of their British colleagues. 

Printed by Btbb and Spottiswoodb, His Majesty's Printers, East Harding Street, E.G. 



MIDDLE ITALIAN 



Man, 1902. Plate F. 
AUSTRALIAN 



FIG. 1 




FIG. 2 




e'^ACHVCEPHAuc 



DOLICHOCEPHALIC 



TRIANGLE OF THREE DIMENSIONS OF SKULLS, 
COMPRISING THREE INDICES, THREE SECTION AREAS, AND CAPACITY. 
OVAL SHOWING NASAL INDEX (WIDTH) AND ALVEOLAR INDEX (HEIGHT). 




96 96 

ORTHOQNATHOUS' 



I04 106 

PROONATHOIM 



FIG. 3-DiAGRAM OF ALVEOLAR AND NASAL INDICES OF RACES, 
EACH RACE MARKED BY SKULL TRIANGLES ^MALE OHLYK 



I90a0 HAK. iNo. fil. 

ORiaiNAL ARTIOLBS. 
Method. With Plate P. Petrle; 

The Use of Diaffram«< By W. M. Flinders Petrie^ D.CL.^ tL.D.^ ni 
F.B,S.y Edwards Professor of Egyptology ^ University College^ London. U I 

Diagrams are so essential, both for research and for expositiou, that it is worth 
while to consider their scope and utility apart from any special subject. A wide 
distinction must be obserred between (1) the expository diagram, which is merely to 
illustrate some distinct correlation, and which seldom presents much complexity ; and 
(2) the research diagram in which it is needful to combine as many variables as possible, 
and which requires some training in the observer before it can be used. The main 
object in such diagrams is to present as many variables as possible in one view, with 
such clearness that the eye can grasp any two at once without being distracted by 
others. 

1. The simplest form of diagram is that of distribution of a single variable, 
generally drawn by a row of dots along a scale. This is very commonly used in any 
subject for observing the middle of a group, for any erratic example whicb may be due 
to exceptional causes, for breaking up into separate groups, or for detecting periodic 
recurrences. 

2. The combination of two quantities is the purpose of most diagrams, either for 
the frequency of different values of one variable, as in the usual probability curve, or 
for the relation of two variables, as in the barometer curves of time and pressure. 

It often happens that two variables are usually combined to form a ratio, as in the 
length and breadth of the skull ; if so, the diagram should be so arranged that the 
resulting ratio is obvious. This was started both in the diagram of the Aberdeenshire 
skulls (Joum, Anthr. Inst,^ XXX., 104), and also in that which 1 designed for the 
Egyptian skulls. In the latter I brought in another element by distinguishing each 
individual by a number, so that reference between one diagram and another was 
practicable. 

3. So far we have only noticed two variables expressed in two dimensions. A 
third dimension is needful for a third variable, and though a cubic diagram would be too 
cumbersome, yet the same end is reached by placing the numerical figure of the third 
variable on the position of the example in the two other variables, like a level on a 
map ; for instance, the diagram of birth-rate in Brazil connected with the ages of 
both parents, as drawn up by Mr. Gal ton. Contour lines of equal height of the third 
variable may well be used. 

In all these simple diagrams some observation is needful to extract the full meaning, 
and the physical sense of each grouping or irregularity must be carefully kept in mind. 
But beyond using the three dimensions for three variables no advance is possible (setting 
aside differences of colour) without bringing in a fresh principle of compound diagrams, 
in which diagrams on a small scale are distributed over a diagram on a large scale. 

4. For this purpose it is needful to form small, compact, and intelligible diagrams 
of two or three variables, the variations of which shall readily catch the eye aud not be 
liable to be confused. A ready way of combining skull dimensions is by three radii : — 
(1 ) upright for the height ; (2) to one side for the length ; (3) to the other side for the 
breadth {see Plate F, Fig. 1). Then, if the ends of these be joined up, they form a 
triangle, the inclinations of the three sides of which show the indices of length : breadth, 
length : height, and breadth : height. Thus the indices can be compared by the slope 
of the sides of the different triangles, e.g^ the brachy cephalic sloping as at the base of 
Fig. 1, and dolichocephalic sloping as in Fig. 2. 

Further, in these triangles the whole area varies with the capacity of the skull, aud 
the area of each of the three triangles within the large one varies with the area of the 

[ 81 J 



1902.] MAN. [Ho. 61. 

three cross sections of the skull, yertical fore-and-aft section being shown by the left 
hand inner triangle, vertical cross section by the right hand, and horizontal section by 
the lower triangle. 

Thus this triangle (which may be regarded as the diagonal view of a cubic solid 
proportioned to the three dimensions) shows not only the three dimensions, but also 
the three ratios, the three secdons, and the capacity, sufficiently for all comparative 
purposes. 

In order to render the variations the more distinct, of course the total dimension is 
not shown, but only the variations on each side of the mean, and this is best arranged 
by taking the mean value of each dimension as a zero and representing that by one 
point of an equilateral triangle, shown in Figs. 1 and 2 by broken lines, then variations 
less or greater than the mean are plotted inside or outside the mean point. (This is the 
principle of '* concentrated errors " which I used in the pyramid survey, 1882.) Thus 
the i7te«o-indices are shown by the equilateral form. Therefore, to start with, a mean 
value for each dimension is needed, and the mean skoll of over a dozen races of different 
quarters of the globe has : — 

Length - - - - 183 mm. (var. 169-193) 

Breadth - - - 140 mm. (var. 131-148) 

Height - - • - 135 mm. (var. 130-141) 

I'he variations, greater or less than these means, are plotted on the actual living 
size inside or outside the points of the equilateral triangles in Figs. 1 and 2. 

5. Having, then, a small compact diagram in which the eye can readily grasp the 
variation of the dimensions and indices of the skull, these diagrams can be compounded 
in a diagram of other variables by placing them as indicators of two other components. 
For instance, in Fig. 3 we have the alveolar index and the nasal index as the two 
dimensions of the diagram ; thin-nosed races at the top, broad-nosed races at the base, 
prognathous races at the right, orthognathous at the left ; and each race is indicated by 
its skull triangle. Let us now learn to read this diagram of five variables : — 

A. The general distribution is in a line from high left to low right, t.e., the broad 

nose accompanies prognathism. The Peruvian and the Eskimo (beyond 
this diagram limits) are exceptional in the narrowness of the nose, but that 
is accounted for by the extreme dryness and extreme cold requiring a narrow 
nostril to render the air fit for the lungs. Otherwise the distribution is in a 
compact line. 

B. The triangles are short on the left at the upper region and run out to the left 

below. I.e., the thin nose accompanies a short head, the broad nose a long 
head. The Peruvian and Andaman showing that the length is connected 
with the nose rather than with the prognathism. 

C. The triangles are longer to the right at the upper region and shorter in the 

lower, i.e., a wide head accompanies a thin nose and a narrow head a wide 
nose. 

D. The height of the triangles is nearly equal throughout, i.e., height of the skull 

does not affect the nasal index, and therefore does not go with a long nose. 
£. The area of the triangles is rather greater at each end of the line and lesser in 
the middle, i.e., a very upright face or a very wide nose accompany a 
large* capacity. 

The special features of some races show very distinctly ; the large left-hand inner 
triangle of the Fijian shows that in vertical fore-and-aft section he exceeds all other 
races, the close similarity in all five constants between the French and Italian, or the 
Egyptian and Japanese, or the Maori and Hindu is striking, and shows how little such 
resemblances are worth for proving an identity of race. 

[ 82 ] 



i^od.) 



MAIi. 



[iTo. 61 



6. Having now shown the ase of compoand diagrams, one superposed on another, 
we can carry this farther by compounding two superimposed diagrams. In Fig. 2 
ao ellipse is placed around the centre. The variation of breadth of this represents the 
variation of nasal index, and the variation of height the orthognathism ; thus the five 
variables that we studied in the last diagram can be all compounded into one figure for 
placing on other diagrams. How this actually works is seen in Fig. 4 where these 
five variables are placed to indicate each race on a sheet of other components, the races 
of the hottest climates being at the top and the coldest at the base, the least intelligent 
at the left hand and the most intelligent races at the right. Here we have seven 




LCACT 



INTCLUOCNCC > 

no. 4.^-DIAO&AM OF CLIMATV AlTD nTTKLLIOEKCE OF BACKS, 
XAOH RACK MARKED BT SKULL TBIAKOLE8 (MALB ONLT). 

nr BAOH tbiavolb oval of basal abd alveola b ikdices. 

I 83 ] 



MOST 



1902.] MAN. CHoJiei 

variables compounded, and can trace any correlation between any two of them. On 
reading this sheet we notice — 

A. The left-hand triangles slope out to the left, i.e., the long heads are of the 

lowest ability. 

B. The middle triangles slope out to the right, t.e., the broad heads are of medium 

ability. 

C. The right-hand triangles are mostly equilateral, t.e., a mean type of skull is the 

most capable. 

D. The long heads have decentralised government, the wide heads highly 

centralised, the mean type enjoy a judicious mixture of rule. 

E. The best types at the right have a well-balanced length and breadth, but have 

even less height than many lower races, e.^., the English 1 33, the Japanese 
136, the Maori 138. 

F. The triangles are smaller at the upper region and larger at the lower, e.e., the 

capacity is least in hot climates and greatest im cold. 

G. There is no clear difference between the sizes of the triangles on opposite sides 

of the sheets, i.e., capacity does not vary with intelligence as between races, 
though it may as between individuals in similar conditions. The hottest 
climate produces the small head of the Hindu, the coldest climate the large 
head of the Eskimo. 
H. Looking now to the ellipses in each triangle they are widest to the left, 
narrowest to the right, i.e., a wide nose belongs to an inferior type and a 
narrow nose to the more intelligent races. But the nose has no relation to 
temperature except in the case of the froeen Eskimo. 
I. The height of the ellipses is greatest on the right and least on the left. 
I.e., orthognathism belongs to the superior races. But there is scarcely any 
relation between height of the ellipses and level on the sheet, i.e., orthog- 
nathism does not belong to climate ; e.^., the mesognathous Maori is in a 
far colder climate than the highly orthognathous Egyptian. 
The exceptions to the general rules may prove suggestive. The Andamans are 
peculiar for the roundness of the head, more upright face, and narrower nose, than any 
people of such low stature and hot climate. They seem like a degraded Chinese type, 
for a long-headed Hindu would never have become round headed by deterioration. The 
Japanese is distinctly superior to the Chinese type, as the triangle is more equilateral, 
the nose narrower, and the face more upright. The orthognathism of the South Italian 
belongs to a higher type, and suggests degradation ; if, indeed, I have not been too 
hard on him in placing him as equal to the Chinese, though we could hardly grant that 
he is a better man than the central Italian. 

However these delicate questions of mental precedence may be settled ; however 
the fuller materials that might be used might change some suggestions here, it would 
be immaterial for the sole purpose of this notice, which is to call attention to the 
methods of compounding many variables for purposes of research and to illustrate 
modes of study. To have made merely fancy examples would not have shown how far 
such methods were practicable ; hence I have used the actual data of races that were most 
readily to hand in the catalogue of the College of Surgeons, and I must disclaim any 
authority for the exactness of the data or results. My only purpose here is to illustrate 
methods, which may, I hope, be applied more fully than my opportunities permit. 

It need hardly be said that further compounding of data may yet be attained by 
other devices, and that I have purposely not touched on the use of colour, or even 
shading, as being trouble80me for reproduction, though such helps greatly extend the 
power of combination in research diagrams. For instance, it might be practicable to 
add a coloured triangle over the black one, to give such variables as the length of body, 

[ 84 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No8. 61-62. 

leg, and arm ; the arm should be a horizontal radius, the leg sloping down, the body 
length sloping up ; then on joining these the upright side of the triangle would varj as 
the whole height, tipping inward if the legs are long, tipping out if the back is long ; 
the lower side would represent the limbs as a whole ; the upper side would tilt more or 
less as the hands come high or low on the thighs. Thus this fresh triangle would show 
relative height, whether due to long back or long legs, whether long arms go with long 
legs, and the position of the hands on the thigh. W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. 



Religion. Lang. 

The Supreme Bolng and T<items In 8ar4iMfak. Bi/ Andrew Qg^ 
Lang. (Cf, Journ, Anlhr. Inst.y XXXL^ pp. 173 ff.) Di^ 

The Journal of the Anthropological Institute, Vol. XXXI., pp. 173-214, 
contains an admirable article by Messrs. Hose and McDougall on ''The Relations 
between Man and Animals in Sardwak.'' An account is given of '' the conception of 
a beneficent Supreme Being " entertained by various tribes of Sarawak. The tribes 
noted by them are in various stages of culture, from the Kenyahs, who cultivate rice, 
work iron, and dwell in substantial houses, to the non-agricultural nomadic Punans. 
All of them, with the dubious exception of the Ibans (among whom Archdeacon Penham 
thinks that the idea '' has been prevalent, but has now almost died out "), reverence 
'' a Supreme beneficent Being.'' Our authors do not think that this conception has been 
borrowed from the Malays (p. 212) ; they incline rather to hold that the idea of ''a 
'' beneficent Supreme Being may be comparatively rapidly and easily arrived at under 
'' favourable conditions such as seem to be afforded by tribes like the Kenyahs and 
'' Kayans — warlike, prosperous tribes subordinated to strong chiefs — and may as rapidly 
'' fall into neglect with change of social conditions, and may then remain as a vestige 
'' only to be discerned by curious research in the minds of a few individuals, as among 
'' the Ibans or the Australian blacks.'' The Kenyah Supreme Being is conjectured to 
have been evolved out of the Kenyah war-god, one of many departmental deities 
(pp. 212, 213). 

This theory is not, I fear, compatible with the facts as given by our authors. The 
Kenyahs have now agriculture, iron work, good houses, and strong chiefs, but it cannot 
be argued that after reaching these conditions they consequently evolved '' the 
conception of a Supreme beneficent Being." It cannot be argued, because the Punans 
'' reverence the Supreme Being as the Kenyahs do " (p. 195), while ''it seems probable 
" that the Punans have merely persisted in the social condition from which the 
" Kenyahs and other tribes have been raised by the adoption of agriculture and the 
" practice of building substantial houses " (p. 204). Thus the Punans have the effect — 
" the conception of a beneficent Supreme Being " — ^without the conditions under which 
the conception is thought by our authors to be developed among the Kenyahs and the 
other prosperous tril>es. But, unlike the Kenyahs (and like the Australians), the 
Punans *'do not seem to practise the rite of sacrifice in any form." Again, as to 
the Australians, if they have "a vestige in the minds of a few individuals of the 
conception of a Supreme Being " (Mr. Howitt and others, of course, credit some tribes 
with very much more), that vestige cannot possibly be a survival of a former age in 
which the ancestors of the Australian tribes worked iron, were agricultural, had 
substantial houses, and were prosperous under strong chiefs like the Kenyahs. The 
Australians never were in such a stage of culture, as Mr. Tylor has argued. The Zulus 
are in that stage, but of the idea of a beneficent Supreme Being it is doubtful whether 
they retain " a vestige." Finally, the Australians, unlike the Kenyahs, have no 
departmental deities from among whom they may select and exalt one god to 
supremacy. For these reasons, among others, the hypothesis of Messrs. Hose and 

r 86 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 62. 

McDougall does not *»eem quite adequate, logically ; imlesSy indeed, they are in a position 
to prove that the Australians are degenerate from a stage of civilisation marked by 
metallurgy, agriculture, and a strong despotism, while the Punans have borrowed their 
Supreme Being from the Kenyahs. Neither statement is hinted at. The hypothesis, 
therefore, presents us with the effect where the alles^ed cause never existed, and we have 
examples in crowds of the alleged cause without the effect. This can hardly be 
reckoned satisfactory. 

As to totemism, our authors conjecture, if I understand them, that the tribes 
are in a state of arrested development. Individuals discover for themselves nyarongsy 
or special animal protectors, in dreams, but the social conditions and higher religious 
beliefs are adverse to the development of these " individual totems." The phrase 
«' individual totems" appears to me to be misleading. A totem is, by its essence, 
the property of a kinship : the nyarong^ or the American animal tnanitou^ is not. 
Moreover, totemism a'ose in a stage of culture infinitely lower than that of the Kayans 
and Kenyahs. They must have passed through that lower stage. Did they fail then 
to develop totems in that stage, when conditions were favourable, and do they only 
now make an approach to totemism — an approach constantly checked by the present 
relatively advanced conditions ? Prima facie that theory seems more improbable than 
the hypothesis that the tribes were once totemistic (though the low Punans are not) and 
retain some vestiges of totemism. It is no objection (as our authors think it is) that 
the wide distribution of totemism is "wonderful." What is nol widely distributed ? 
Nothing can be more " wonderful " than the coincidences which our authors report 
between the Kenyah and Roman systems of augury and auspices. They say, " Unless 
it can be shown that the adoption or development of totemism by any people brings 
with it immense advantages for them in the struggle for existence, every fresh case 
*' in which the evidence compels us to admit its occurrence, whether in the past or as a 
" still flourishins: institution, can but increase the wonder with which we have to regard 
*' its wide distribution." But the takins: of auguries and auspices is of no use, is it, 
in the struggle for existence ? Yet it is wonderfully widely distributed. Staring at a 
pig's liver is of no use in the struggle for existence, yet the Romans did it, the Kenyahs 
do it, and the tribes on the Assam frontier use the liver to provoke veridical hallucina- 
tions, as in crystal gazing — so I am informed. On the other hand, without totemism 
one can hardly see how early human society was ever organised at all, though I have 
not space to develop a theory of the advantages in the struggle for existence which 
totemism conferred, in a roundabout way, it is true. But even if it did not, things 
quite useless in the struggle for existence are widely distributed. How is a people 
aided in that struggle by boycotting its mothers-in-law ? I do not mean to affirm that 
the Kenyahs and Kayans were ever totemistic ; perhaps they were not. The apparent 
survival of totemism may be due to the other causes pointed out by our authors ; but 
if they are right the Kayans and Kenyahs are always climbing towards totemism by 
way of nt/arongs, and are always checked by their present relatively modern conditions. 
When these conditions had not yet been developed why should the tribes not have 
reached totemism ? What checked the development of totemism then ? Again, the 
** wonder" of the wide distribution of nt/nrongs, or their equivalents, is great (America, 
Africa, Australia, Sarawak, at least) ; yet of what conceivable use are nt/arongs in the 
strujfgle for existence ? But out of nt/arongs— quite as useless in the struggle as totems 
— were totems evolved, on that hypothesis which has had advocates in America.* 

As the Punans are apparently very averse to discussing their beliefs, perhaps tliey 
have no Supreme Being after all, and do possess totems. They are too little known, it 
may be, to afford a basis for arguments on any side. ANDREW LANG, 






• For example, in Mr. Hill-Tout's Origin of Tot/fmUm oftJM Ahoriginenof BritiMh Columbia, (1901.) 

t 86 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 68. 

Religion. MoDougrall. 

The Supreme Bolng and T<items In 8ar4%ifakx a N<ite In reply qa 
to Mr. Lanff. Bi/ W. McDougally M.A. DO 

Id the above note Mr. Lang has put his finger upon what may well seem to be. a 
sufficient ground for rejecting the view put forward by Dr. Hose and myself as to the 
origin of the conception of a Supreme Being among the Kenyahs and Kayans of Sardwak. 
The existence of this belief among the Punans does not seem to us an insuperable 
objection to our view for the following reason, which we have neglected to state 
explicitly in our paper : — It has hitherto been possible to come into contact with Punans 
only through the mediation of Kenyahs or others of the more settled tribes, and these 
Punans have therefore always been such as have had some amount of friendly inter- 
course with these more advanced tribes, and whose customs seem to be in part borrowed 
from the latter, e.^., the partial observance of the cult of the omen-birds, as mentioned 
in our paper. We think it highly probable, therefore, that the Punan conception of a 
Supreme Being may also have been borrowed ; but we confess that our knowledge of 
the Punans is most imperfect, and we would preserve an open mind on this subject in 
the hope that Dr. Hose will be able to acquire a relatively complete knowledge of the 
Punans during the next few years. 

Mr. Lang^s second ground for rejecting our view is that he does not consider the 
Australians to be a degenerate race. He has advanced this argument in a note in the 
Athetueum, and I have already briefly indicated the nature of our objection to it. It is 
desirable, therefore, that the essential links of the somewhat complicated chain of 
argument should be fully stated, thus : — 

(1.) The Kenyahs enjoy a social organisation and a system of belief in departmental 
deities which seem to be such as by reaction on one another may very 
naturally have led up to the conception of a Supreme Being. 
(2.) The Australians also believe in a beneficent Supreme Being. 
(3.) The Australians have no such social organisation or departmental deities as the 
Kenyahs, and, on the whole, seem much more primitive in their mode of 
life. 
(4.) The Australians are not degenerate ; 
(5.) Therefore they have not acquired their belief in a Supreme Being in the manner 

suggested in the case of the Kenyahs. 
(6.) The belief in a Supreme Being was either (a) independently acquired by one 
people only and transmitted to others by descent or by borrowing, or (b) was 
independently acquired by different peoples but by the same process of thought 
in every case ; 
(7.) Therefore the Kenyahs did not acquire this belief in the way we have 
suggested. 

Of these links (4) seems to me open to question, but (6) is even more questionable. 
I presume that Mr. Lang accepts it in the second of the alternate forms, but I can see no 
grounds for this assumption, whether a priori or inductive ; rather it would seem 
a priori probable that the conception of a Supreme Being has developed along different 
lines among the different peoples that entertain it. An explicit statement of Mr. Lang^s 
views on this point would be highly interesting, for I do not think any such statement 
occurs in his works. 

In the second place, Mr. Lang criticises our conclusion that we may not regard the 
various animal -superstitions of Sardwak as survivals from a fully-developed totem 
system. We do not, of course, deny that totemism may have fiourished among these 
people in the remote past, but we deny that the present customs of the tribes afford 
evidence that will suffice to make this seem in any degree probable. Mr. Lang points 
out that institutions such as the nyarong or the boyootcing of mothers-in-law can be of 

[ 87 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 63-64. 

110 greater advauta^e to a people than the practice of totemism, and implies that our 
argiiment as to the antecedent improbability of totemiem therefore falU to the ground. 
I answer that the cases are hardly comparable ; in the one class of oaaes we are dealing 
with a direct and simple effect of some idea, some mental association or emotional 
state ; in the other case with a complex social system that affects in a very definite 
and peculiar manner almost every detail of the livee of members of large grou|)e of 
tribes. As to the argument from the absence of toteminn among the Punans wc 
think that much weight may rightly be attached to it, although in the case of the 
Supreme Being of the Punans we take the opposite view, for it is, from the nature of 
the case, much easier to feel sure that there is no totemism among Punans than that 
their Supreme Being is not a borrowed conception ; totemism would express itself in the 
conduct of all individuals of these hunting tribes in a manner hardly to be overlooked by 
us, while we learn of their Supreme Being only through conversation with a few of the 
less wild individuals whose ideas are hasy and whose motives are obscure. 

W. McDOUGALL. 



Egypt. Petrie. 

Excavations at Abydos. By fV. M. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L. qm 

The main result of my work for the Egypt Exploration Fund at Abydos, during O ■ 
the pHSt winter, has been the thorough connection of the prehistoric and historic remains. 
In past years we had explored the prehistoric age, and the system of sequence dates had 
enabled me to briug the various stages of undated remains into their consecutive order ; 
and iu the last two years the royal tombs of the earliest dynasties had yielded material 
which placed the civilisation of some eighteen reigns before us. Now we have the 
connection of the two scales, and pass from years into sequence dates without a break. 

The ground which furnished these results is a town just outside the temple of 
Osiris^ and withiu the great temenos of Osiris of later age. ' This town proves to have 
been started at about the time of the earliest kings of Abydos, three centuries before 
Mena and the first dynasty ; it continued to grow upward by successive strata of rubbish 
and weathered debris through all the history ; but the upper parts have l»een removed 
by the natives for earth, and so we had only the strata of about 5000-4000 B.C. to deal 
with. The town was founded on the clean sand edge of the desert ; and we have only 
worked those parts where we could still reach the basal sand, and so have a starting 
point for measurement. All the things of importance, all the flints, and the pottery, 
were levelled in inches over the sand and recorded. That the town was wide-spread 
and grew regularly is shown by the narrow limits of level at which some objects are 
found ; eight examples of a type of flint scraper, which were found over some 200 ft. 
of ground, were yet all within 15 inches of extreme range of level. Also the pottery 
shows clear limits for several types. 

The present result, from comparing the pottery and stone vases with those of the 
royal tombs and the prehistoric sequence dates, is that we can place as contemporary : — 
Sequence Date. Town Ijcvel. Tomb of King. Approximate Date. 

— ?5000 K.c. 

Ka ? 4870 

Mena 4715 

Zet 4627 

Den 4584 

Qa 4514 

Perabsen 4373 

Turning now to the different classes of objects, the pottery is so varied and frequent 
that it is useless to say anything of it here. 

[ 88 ] 



76 





77 


10 


78 


20 


79 


40 


80 


55 




70 




90 




110 



1902.1 



HAM. 



[No. 64. 



The fliDt tooU arc of many lypes, whiuh I have dividoil iDto knives wit.hont 
li&ndlea ; knives with handles ; hoes ; ecrapera, tailed, round, long, and various ; flakea, 
plain, tipped, worked on edgei, rounded, and Hqnare ; saws ; crescent flints ; animal 
figures ; and comhg. Altogether 327 are levelled and drawn. The working varies from 
the moderately good, irregular flaking of this age, down to rough chipping ; none of it is 
of the precise and regular work of the prehistoric age. The following are some of the 
pecoliar types : — 




3. — cBoooniLB. 



The crocodile i« one of three animal fignrea fonnd here ; other examples known 
were illustrated in Mam, 1902. 14 (PI. B., 17-19). The oreacent flinte seem from their 
associations to have been need as drills, at the end of a stick, for boring soft stones. 
The coml»i are hitherto unknown ; (he teetb are too slender to bear the strain of scraping, 
and the curvature is too varied for use in combing out materials, or for sawiug ; possibly 
they were used in preparing food, for shredding meat, Ac. All of these belong t< 



r half of the first dynasty. 

Fireplaces wore found made in pottery, shaped as a ring, about two feet acros 
four or five iachos high. This ring is decorated with basket patterns (6 and 8), and t 
times shaped as a snake (7), coiled ronnd, with the head turned in toward the fire. 







6, 7.— POTTBRT FIBB-PLACB8. 

[ 89 ] 



1902.] 



[No. 64. 




8,— POTTBET FIBB-PLAOB. 8, 10, 11.— HTOmt VA8B OBINDBRS. 

Stone grindera (9-U) ua«d for mukiDg the stone bowls were often foand, Boraetimea in 
tiie Iwd of aaDd an<l stoneniuBt left by the workaien. The hiatory of glazed pottery was 
conBrraeii by finding piecea of glazed tile with a ribbed pattern, evidently for Hurface 
decoration : the dated pieces found in recent years were still looked on with some donbt 
as regards age, but tbese found in unsliifted strata of the first dynasty are conclusive. 
An interesting series of the history of »n amnlot wan completed by a small worked flint. 
In the prehistoric times forked flint lances are common (see 12). One of those waafonnd 
mounted in a gold handle (13), not for its original use as a lance but as a cutting implcmcnr. 
Nest wo have found the small flint figured here (14), of the first dynasty. Then in the 
sixth dynasty a model appears in sets of funerary furniture (15). In the twelfth 
dynasty this has dwindled to a small amulet, of oarnelian, with gold handle (16). And in 
the twenty-sinth dynasty this amnlet, named pesh-ken or "the cutting tool," is described 
as used for the ceremony of opening the month of the dead that he may speak, and ia 
placed commonly on the mummies (17), modified in form by its similarity to two other 
amulets of the double feather. 




1 : 6. 6000 B.C. f 1:10. 5S00 B.C. ! 1 ; 2. 4700 B.C. 1 : 2. 3500 B.C. I : 1. 2500 B.C. 1 : 1. 500 B.C. 

An important group of eleven un plundered tombs of the first dynasty waa found in the 
town. They contain the bodies contracted and buried like those of the prehistoric people, 
and around the body a number of stone and pottery vases, varying up to 22 of stone and 50 
of pottery. Each grave was planned, and will be set up in original order in a museum. 

Of later times there waa found in this town, and in the temple of Osiris, much 
iasoribed and sculptured stone, from the fifth to the thirtieth dynasty, of historical 
interest ; and in a part of the great cemetery many large burials in inscribed stone 
sarcophagi were opened, serving to show the arrangement of funeral furniture and arauletfl 
in the late times. 

Beside this work a larger part of the excavation was on an enormous royal tomb, 
the largest yet known, and its eurrounding tombs. It bad been plundered in Roman 
times ; but we hope to recover some monuments in the hundreds of tons of dSbrU that 
have yot to be searched. 

The work of the Egyptian Research Account was entirely on the temple of King 
Sety at Abydos. Mr. Canlfeikl's excavations showed a large enclosure wall, and esit 
to the royal tombs on tho desert behind ; and also an enormous inscribed tomb some 
hundreds of feet iu length which still awsita clearing and copying. Mr. Christie was 
engaged in drawing the archaeological detail of the temple sculptures. 

The whole of the results will be issued In July in the annual volumes of the Egypt 
Exploration Fund and the Egyptian Research Account. 

[ » ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 65. 

Malay. Westlake. 

Malay Divining Rods: A N<iteon Dr. Tyioi^s Paper (Man, 1002. 40). ^-i 

By E. Westlake, F.G.S, Ou 

Mj attention has been drawn to an article by Dr. Tylor (Man, 1902. 40, PI. D.) on 
Malay Divining Rods, the details of which are essentially those of the so-called 
" possessed ** rods from other parts of the old world. Towards the oonclnsion of his 
article Dr. Tjlor leaves the folklore point of view to discuss the actual saccess of the 
rod. its modus operandi, and its reason or lack of reason. With his remark that the rod 
has no physical relation with the object sought for, and only follows the seeker's state 
of mind and body, I fully concur ; but when he proceeds to characterise these states as 
abnormal, in the sense of being less than sane, this seems to me to be possibly a mis- 
apprehension. In psychology things are not always what they seem, as when Mark 
Twain thought he must have a great mind because it took him so long to make it up. 
The water-finder, having to make up his mind about water, gets his rod to make it up 
for him. This is the practical use of the rod. It can, of course, only make up the mind 
the dowser has ; and what this is, and how the ideas reach him, is what the psychologist 
has to find out. 

In the hands of an experienced water-finder the rod doubtless delivers an expert 
judgment, which (as the old judge said) will probably be right, whereas the reasons for 
it would probably be wrong. So while the dowser doefr not of course gain knowledge 
by taking hold of a twig, he may conceivably gain guidance, as Socrates said he gained 
guidance from his inner voice about matters already known to him. If genius is definable 
as automatism of the higher faculties, an automatic judgment that proves to be correct 
seems to me more likely to be akin to genius than to insanity. 

Other cases, which possibly suggest more than expert knowledge, are those in which 
the dowser was obviously not an expert and knew nothing about springs, as, e.g., the 
springs Gabriel de Mortillet describes himself as finding by means of a rod when 
a youth — ^for the late eminent professor was himself a successful dowser and published 
a small book on the subject* — or those, again, wherein the expert could not have 
judged from surface signs, because there were none to judge from. A few of the latter I 
have described in an appendix to Prof. Barrett's last paper on the rod (Proceedings of 
the Society for Psychical Research, Part 38). 

Dr. Tylor remarks that " in the civilised world the magical thief-finder has proved 
an Htter failure." But a thing must be known to have been tried more or less extensively 
before it can be said to have failed, and in the whole of divining rod literature I know 
only of two cases of the rod being used in Eiurope for tracing thieves.f There is also a 
detailed account of finding a thief in Bengal, which presents no irrational or inexplicable 
features (Chambers^ Journal for January, 1856). J The Count de Gasparin § would 
explain Jacques Aymar's case as his unconscious perception of sensible signs ; and con- 
versely the feats of the Argentine Rastreador described by Sarmieotojl might be facilitated 
by the use of a rod. The particular purposes for which " magic " is used seem very 
much a matter of fashion. The rod is not used to predict the weather, but one does not 
thence infer its failure for the purpose. Automatism only began to be siudied in the last 
century, and of its limits we know next to nothing. The phantasies of magic have 
arisen from popular misinterpretations of actual psychological phenomena, and to reach 
their true theory requires not merely their sympathetic record as folklore, but skilled 
experiment as in the other sciences. E. WESTLAKE. 

* Hittaire d£ VHydroscapU et dela haquette divinatoire, 88 pp. ChambAry, 1849. 

t Aooonnt« of Aymar, 1692 et teq. Dnfour -1 Revue tawifienne, 1862. avril 15, pp. 84-85. Annecy. 

{ Authenticated by the pabliahers : tee Bev. B. 8. Maitland, False Warship^ p. 830. 

§ Oasparin, A. E. de : Tahlet TbumanteM, torn, ii, pp. 124-140. Paris, 1865. 

q Sarmiento : lAvUizacion v Barharie^ pp. 37-41. Santia|ipo, 1851. 

[ 91 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No8. 66-68. 

Cyprus. Walters. 

Note on Oortain Antiquities ftom Cyprus in the British Museum. QA 

Communicated by H. B. Walters, M.A., F.S.A. OU 

The Keeper of the Department of Greek and Roman Antiquities in the British 
Museum desires that it should be made known that during the re-arrangement of the 
Cyprus gold ornaments, &c. now in progress, the scarab from Enkomi {Excavations at 
Enkomi, Plate IV., No. 760), which had been temporarily mislaid, has been found ; and 
that the cylinder of late style from Curium (tomb 43), to which reference was made in 
Man, 1901. 139, and which has also been for some time missing, was found among a 
series of cylinders from Enkomi. Is is hoped that it will be possible before long to 
publish this cylinder. 



Mexico. Dalton. 

Further Note on Reproductions of Nahua Manuscripts. By 0*7 

0. M. Dalton, M.A., F.S.A. Of 

In a note on "Reproductions of Nahna Manuscripts" published in Ma.n, 1902. 64, 
I omitted to mention that Dr. Scleras Commentary on the Tonalamatl in Paris has 
been translated into English by Professor A. H. Keane, to whom the English version of 
the same au thorns commentary on the Codex Fejervary- Mayer at Liverpool is also due. 
These commentaries are, alike from a linguistic and ethnological point of view, among 
the most important of recent additions to our knowledge of ancient American civilisation, 
and it is therefore a peculiar advantage to the English student that they should be 
introduced to his notice by so able an interpreter. Professor Keane, by making the 
pages of his version exactly coincide with those of the German edition, so that references 
to the one book are also valid for the other, has set an admirable, if arduous, example 
to other translators. O. M. DALTON. 



REVIEWS. 
Art. Hlrn. 

The Origins of Art, By Yrjo Hirn. London: Macmillan, 1900. 23x14, gO 
pp. xi -331. 10*. net. 00 

This is an excellent and valuable work, which will repay all who read it through. 
The author^s command of the English tongue is not a little remarkable ; the knowledge 
which he brings to his undertaking is wide and full, whilst his loyalty to other workers 
and his graciousness in controversy are beyond praise. 

His thesis is not likely to be entirely accepted by all his readers without some 
hesitation and demur. He attacks, for instance, Darwin^s doctrine of sexual selection 
with much force and reason, especially on the ground that it is absurdly anthropomorphic 
to attribute to the hen an eBsthetic judgment. She is too low in the animal scale to be 
able to discriminate between rival shows ; and, at any rate, the gesture and song, the 
colour and form developed in the cock are often ugly and inharmonious. To this an 
objector might reply, first, that there can be no dispute in matters of taste ; it is the 
hen and not the man that has to be charmed. And theii, that Darwin must be taken to 
have meant, what Darwinians certainly mean, that the hen's choice in these matters is 
hedonic — as, indeed, is our own — ^and that the display of the male bird diffuses through 
her organism a thrill of pleasure and kindles in particular the erotic emotion which 
influences her in choosing a mate. 

The author justly points out (p. 5) that art can no longer be deduced from general 
philosophical and metaphysical principles, but must be studied by the methods of 
inductive psychology as a human activity. His endeavour is to prove (p. 302) that the 
art impulse is an outcome of the tendency of every feeling -state to exteriorise itself, the 

[ 92 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 68. 

effect of such a manifestation being to heighten pleasure find to relieve pain. The artist 
finds that he can gain sach enhancement or relief not merely by giving expression to his 
feelings, but also by arousing a like feeling in others. Hence comes his desire to 
transmit his moods to an external audience and to endow his artistic products with 
permanence. 

This perpetuation can be explained (p. 303) only by reference to the enhancing and 
relieving effects which man has experienced as the result of emotional transmission. 

The author lays much stress on the primordial importance of rhythm in movement 
and in music (p. 87) and of those regular recurrences of lines and figures in formative 
arts that may be called rhythm in material (p. 91) ; but he derives them all from 
utilitarian sources (p. 258). As soon as the expression is fixed in rhythmical form, its 
contagious power is incalculably increased. By its incessant and regular return, rhythm 
arrests the aesthetic attention and facilitates the transmission of feeling (pp. 276, 89). 

Beauty, a combination of grace and harmony, is interpreted as an object of human 
longing and a source of human enjoyment (p. 5) ; yet utilitarian production can develop 
grace and form (p. 275). Hence the assumption is not permissible that any work or 
performance which can be proved to serve a utilitarian purpose must on that account be 
rejected as a genuine work of art (p. 7). The dances, the poems, the formative arts of 
savages have a general usefulness, but they possess unquestionable aesthetic value 
also (p. 12). Nevertheless, as regards a dance performance, it is impossible to decide 
whether its effect on the spectators is the result of the movements themselves, as 
originating an imitative impulse, or is caused by the rhythm which regulates 
them (p. 90). Imitation has a fundamental importance for the development of human 
culture (p. 74). The sesthetic activities can be understood and explained only by 
reference to this universal tendency to imitate (p. 75). 

Play and art have much in common (p. 29). By considering artistic activity as a 
kind of play we can account for its attractiveness even when no '' surplus of vigour *^ 
can be shown to exist (p. 27). The aim of play is attained when excessive energy is 
discharged ; the function of art, on the contrary, outlasts the act of production, and 
the play impulse can account for neither beauty nor rhythm. Equally inadequate are the 
explanations of art as *^ a self-exhibiting impulse '* and as ^^ the instinct to attract by 
pleasing " (p. 29). Though it may be true that without a public no art would ever 
have appeared (p. 25), yet the genuine artist does not make it his sole object to 
please (pp. 24, 25). 

The simplest forms of art, such as a lyrical dance or a lyrical song, are direct out- 
bursts of emotional pressure, which if unrelieved would prove dangerous to the system 
(p. 144). Pleasure nurtures itself by expression, pain is increased as inhibition 
spreads (p. 41). Art production fulfils with great efficacy a relieving and cathartic 
mission (p. 70). The most deep-seated motive of all human activity is to enhance 
pleasure or to relieve pain, by the expression of over-mastering feeling. It is the 
fundamental hypothesis of the present work that art is better able than any other kind 
of mental function to serve and satisfy these requirements (p. 73) ; to give complete and 
effective relief from emotional pressure (p. 105). 

On such matters as these the opinion of the artist himself is of little importance 
(p. 114), for to those who teach or learn an executive art it must unavoidably seem to 
be chiefly a power and a skill (p. 135). The element of technical perfection is, indeed, 
the indispensable condition for achieving an embodied feeling (p. 139). 

The true artist is compelled to seek in aasthetic production compensation for the 
deficiencies of life, and the sense of liberation that follows the attainment of artistic form, 
relieves his overwhelming and inharmonious excitement (p. 113). The true artist is the 
man who has found means to enhance his feelings of pleasure, or to relieve those of pain, 
and who seeks to arouse kindred feelings in others, in an ever-widening sphere, beyond 

[ 93 J 



1902.] MAN. [No. 68. 

the limitations of time and space (pp. 302, 90, 84). Hence he Jis constrained to seek a 
response to his emotion from a real, or from a fictitious, public (p. 99). In artistic 
solitude, as in poetic soliloquy, the ego becomes a substitute for an external audience : 
the creator exists also as his own spectator (p. 100). 

Any artistic representation of nature serves the purpose of perpetuating a feeling, 
state (p. 123). The artistes primary impulse is emotional, and aims at making a particular 
mood independent of the accidental and individual conditions under which it arose, so as 
to impress ou spectators this concentrated and isolated view (p. 126)^ 

Professor Hum's chapters on Historical Art, Erotic Art, Art and Magic, are of 
especial interest. In pictorial as well as in dramatic art the purely commemorative 
purpose belongs, probably, to the later stages of culture (p. 174). Tribal, like individual 
memory, is dependent for its development on favourable external influences that stimulate 
the attention (p. 178). Bygone events are preserved in history and art chiefly for their 
effect in enhancing national pride. Of pride, history has been born. The great monuments 
are all records of glory. It is this emotional element that makes history an art (p. 181). 

The aim of religious instruction has been to convey with the utmost distinctness a 
thought-content ; and this has influenced artistic representations of life and nature ; 
though when it first began to do so, there are no means of ascertaining (pp. 183, 184). 

Sexual selection is one cause, but it is not the only cause, of erotic art (p. 242). 
The strong emotional tension that accompanies pairing demands some method of relief 
by sound or movement ; and those manifestations will revive, by association, the pleasur- 
able feelings with which they have been connected (p. 243). All forms of art have their 
unity in the essential unity of all feeling (p. 139). 

The chief non- aesthetic factors that have favoured the development of art are the 
utilitarian motives to give information ; to propitiate (that is, to flatter the senses by a 
display of beauty) ; to stimulate (that is, to heighten vital energy) ; and to work magic 
(p. 301). 

Such, then, in brief, and mainly in Professor Hirn^s own words, are his persuasive 
doctrines of the origins of art. In considering the value of an explanation it is useful 
to compare it with an alternative. The human organism, reacting upon its environment 
by movements of approach towards the beneficial or of aggression against the injurious, 
finds that the advantage gained, increased good or lessened evil, is associated with action, 
and a pleasurable sense of power is originated. The love of power thus becomes a 
fundamental impulse ; not strength nor skill, but their exercise ; power over one's limbs 
and organs ; over one's words and modes of speech ; over the elements of music and the 
symbols of thought ; over material, the pliant osier, the plastic clay, the rigid stone, the 
luminous pigment ; and over other living creatures, in strife, in games, in intellect, in art. 
The child who plays in solitude is a despot to her dolls, is a martinet to his tin soldiers ; 
'^ make-believe " is always imperious. 

An artist is one who has by nature, or who seeks to acquire by practice, a special 
power over his limbs or organs, and over material, and this power he cultivates that he 
may be able to influence other men, to excite in them the same emotion that moves 
himself. His autotely is ever merging into socialism. His art impulse is the love of 
power to reproduce his own feelings in others, but a part of his anticipated reward 
is an enchancement of his otvn emotion and not a catharsis. It is the inventor, 
whether in art, physics, or mathematics, who after prolonged gestation and the final 
pangs of birth, experiences a cathartic joy when his conception, in a concrete form, is 
at last born into the world. But this is an intellectual rather than an emotional 
relief ; it is the thought-strain that suddenly comes to an end. 

If there are men, whether potters, painters, or poets, who make things without a 
love of dominion, first over material, and then over the human heart, they are workmen 
and not artists. 

[ w ] 



1902.] MAK. [Km. 6^70. 

If there are men who, like misers, fill their studio with hidden manuscripts and 
sculpture, then it is sweet to them to hold these means of influence in secret possession. 

The musician whose audience is inattentive to him loses all interest in his own 
performance. But he is roused to an ecstasy of delight when his hearers are entranced, 
when his baton not onlj swajs the orchestra but roles the assembly. The common 
aim of him and them is to redouble and not to discharge emotion ; to fill the cup of 
their longing. And if, as a result, their attention is diverted from painful thoughts 
or feelings, certainly that is *^ a relief, *' but the word is ambiguous, and in this case has 
a non-cathartic meaning. 

Mr. Stout shows* that the pleasures of sense, after satiety has passed away, give 
rise to a craving for renewed stimulation. If these pleasures are interrupted before 
satiety is reached, a tension is experienced, ^^ an unsatisfied conation.'' Is Professor 
Hirn's cathartic eflect, after all, the same thing as Mr. Stout's attainment of satiety ? 

HY. COLLET MARCH. 

Teolinology. White. 

How to Make Baskets. By Mary White. New York : Doubleday, Page & Co. aq 
190L Do 

Although this little book is intended for the instruction of children and amateurs in 
the art of basketry it has a certain utility for those who are interested in the subject 
from our point of view. In order to study the comparative technique of basketry some 
practical knowledge is necessary, and this can be acquired from the book. The con- 
cluding chapter on *' What the Basket means to the Indian," by Neltje Blauchan, is a 
reprint of an article in a popular magazine, although this fact is not stated in the book. 
The subject is a fascinating one, and with a little more method the chapter could have 
been made of real value. Those who desire further information about the technique 
of this art will find it in the three following admirable papers : — Basket- Work of the 
North American Aborigines^ by Otis T. Mason ; Report^ Smithsonian Institution^ 
1883-84 [1890], Pt. II., pp. 291-306, plates I.— LXIV. ; The Technic of Aboriginal 
American Basketry^ by Otis T. Mason ; American Anthropologist^ N.S. III., 1901, 
p. 109 ; String f and other Forms of Strand : Basketry^ etc., by Walter E. Roth ; North 
Queensland Ethnography^ Bulletin No. 1, January 1901. Home Secretary's Depart- 
ment, Brisbane, C.A.N.— 1901. A. C. HADDON. 

Prance: PreMstorio. WorsfolcL 

" The French Stonehenge " .• An Account of the Principal Megalithic TfH 
Remains in the Morbihan Archipelago. By T. Cato Worsfold, F.R. Hist. Soc., ■ ^ 
F.K.S.L. London: Bemrose & Sons, Ltd., 1902. 8vo. 44pp. Plates 17 pp. Price bs. 
Under this title Mr. T. Cato Worsfold gives a brief account of the principal 
megalithic remains round Carnac and Locmariaker, with occasional references to 
Avebury, Stonehenge, &c., which, as a conveniently-arranged statement of facts with 
some very good iUustrations, will be useful to those who are beginning to collect 
information and material upon the subject. There is not much theorising in the book, 
and what there is the student will do well to ignore. Such suggestions as that ^' the 
*^ great stones at Avebury may have been set up as a memorial to the Saxons and Danes 
*'*' who perished in the battle of Ken net, a.d. 1006,** are not worthy of the 20th century, 
and it is difficult to believe that anyone who had seen and studied the details of con- 
struction of Gavr Inis, New Grange, and Maeshowe could suppose that they had all 
been ^^ designed and carried out by the same master hand.*' The height of the 
supporting stones of the ^^ Dol ar Marchant " is stated at 16 feet, wmch is probably a 
misprint for 6. A. L. L. 

• AmUytic Piychology^ VoL II., 804. 



1903.] MAN* [Nob. 71-73. 

PROOEEDINQS OF SOCIETIES. 
Ppooeedings. Folklore Society, 

Ordinary Meeting y 2Srd April ^ 1902. Mr. W. Crooke read a paper on Bride- Tf^ 
lifting. He dealt first with the rite practised iu the North of Eugland of lifting i' I 
the bride after the marriage cerenionj over a stone placed iu the church porch, aud kuowu 
as the " Petting " or " Pettin Stone." This, considered in the light of other ceremonies 
of the same character, was classed as a fertility charm. Secondly, the wcll-knowu 
rite of lifting the bride over the threshold was regarded as of similar origin, though iu 
some cases the idea may have been that the bride, who — for instance, being, under 
the law of exogamy, a strunger to the uew family — was regaitled as taboo. Iu this 
connection the speculations of Mr. Crawley in his recei.t book. The Mystic Rose^ were 
considered. Lastly, came the cases of lifting of women at certain periodical festivals, 
especially at the New Year, Easter, and harvest. These were regarded as survivals of 
the saturnalia which so commonly accompany the seasons of sowing and harvest. 
The paper will he published in an early number of Folklore. 

Proceedings. Anthropological Institute. 

Ordinary Meeting ^ 29th April, 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon. F.R.S., President. ^f^ 

The president reported the decision of the council to send a congratulatory I ^ 
letter to Professor Baldwin Spencer and Mr. Gillen ou the safe return of the Baldwin- 
Spencer expedition to Central Australia. 

The Secretary read extracts from a letter from Mr. H. H. Risley, Census 
Commissioner of India. 

The following exhibits were laid on the table : A surgical knife, Queensland, 
presented to the Institute by Mrs. Fisher, of Yepoon, Queensland ; a collection of 
photographs of natives of Australia and South Africa, presented by the Colonial Office ; 
a photograph of an object of unknown use from Queensland, exhibited by Mr. R. D. 
Darbishire. 

Mr. U. Balfour read a paper on The Goura^ the Musical Instrument of the 
Bushmen and Hottentots. The paper was discussed by the president, Mr. C. H. Read, 
Mr. Walsh, Dr. Garson, and Mr. Hutchinson. 

Ordinary Meeting^ 13ih May 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. The 
election was announced of Sir Heiury Evan Murchisou tiames, K.C.I.E., C.S.I., 
Hon. Robert Fiunemore, Dr. P. G. Edgar, Dr. H. A. Haviland, and Mr. C. Hayavadana 
Rao, as ordinary Fellows of the Institute. 

The following exhibits were laid on the table : Dolls from the Egyptian Soudan, 
exhibited by Dr. Gates ; a series of earrings of turtle shell collected by Mr. M. Dauncey 
from the Koiari tribe of the central district of New Guinea, exhibited by the president. 

Mr. A. I'. Lewis exhibited lantern slides of rude stone monuments ou Bodmin 
Moor, Cornwall. 

Mr. T. H. Holland read a paper on The Kanets of Kulu and Lahoul, illustrated by 
lantern slides. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Gray, Shrubsall, Garson, Seligmann, 

and Myres. 

Ordinary Meeting^ 27th May, 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. The 
election was announced of Dr. Windle, F.R.S., aud Mr. Cecil Boden Kloss as ordinary 
Fellows of the Institute. 

Mr. D. G. Hogarth read a paper ou his Excavations in the Dictcean Cave and at 
Zakro in Crete. 

Professor Boyd Dawk ins read a paper on The Animal Remains found in the 
DicttBun Cave and the Skulls from Cave Burials at Zakro in Crete. 

The papers were discussed by Prof. W. M. Flinders Petrie, Mr. Pusey, Mr. 
Gowland, Mr. Myres, and Dr. Myers. 

Printed by Etbs ahd Spottiswoodb, His Majesty^s Printers, East Harding Street, K.C. 





IMPLEMENTS AND ORNAMENTS OF THE YAHGANS OF FUEGIA. 

IN THE COLLECTION OF THE 50UTH AMEfllCAN M;35ION«nV SOCIETY. 
NOI. I-e •>CVT t SOLE^ No, 7 ABOUI 1 SCA' 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 73-74; 

ORIGINAL ARTICLES. 
South America. With Plate Q. Mlddleton : Myres. 

Implements and Ornaments of the Yahsrans of Fuesrla : with i.Q 
Notes by R. Morton Mlddleton. Communicated by J, L. Myres^ M.A,, f y 

F.S.A.y Secretary of the Anthropological Institute, 

The objects represented in Plate G. are the handiwork of the Tahgans of South 
America. The Yahgans are a Fuegian fishing tribe who occupy the islands south of the 
Beagle Channel in lat. 55°-o6° S. and long. 67°-69° W. They are believed to be the 
most southerly group of human beings in the world, and the stress of their inclement 
climate and of recent contact with civilisation have reduced them now to less than 
200 in number. At the time of their discovery they appear to have been unacquainted 
with the use of metal and even with the art of working in stooe ; and they are still 
wholly dependent upon the outer world for all but the barest necessaries of life. 

The objects shown in the plate are in the collection of the South American 
Missionary Society, ClifEord^s Inn, Fleet Street, E.G., and may be briefly described 
as follows : — 

1. Necklace composed of segments of the radius and ulna of a shag or cormorant 
(Phalacrocorax magellanicus), decorated with incised lines. The pendants are 
composed each of four segments of the humerus of the same bird, strung on parallel 
threads. Diameter, as shown, 5^ inches. 

2. A necklace of segments of the trachea of the wild swan {Cygnus mgricollis, Gm.). 
This type of necklace is rare and much prized. Diameter, as shown, about 8 inches. 

3. An aged specimen of mussel-shell {Mytilus magellanicuSj Chemnitz), for use as 
a tool for cutting and polishing. Size, 4| by 2g inches. 

4. Another specimeo of the same shell, chipped into shape. The rounded end is 
ground down to a hard sharp edge, for cutting bone and similar substances. Length, 

4} inches. 

o. Another specimen of the same shell, lashed, for convenience of handling, by 
means of a carefully plaited cord of whale's sinew, to an unwashed beach-pebble of a 
common variety of andesite. With this tool, the Yahgans make smooth and beautifully 
cut spear-heads, harpoons, &c., from the bones of whales, and these are the only cutting 
tools which are of indigenous make. Length over all, 9 inches. 

6. Another tool like No. 5, with blade of shell lashed with a leather thong 'to an 
unworked pebble. Length, 7 inches. 

7. A very fine harpoon head made with tools like Nos. 5 and 6, as above described, 
from a bone of a whale. Length 24 inches. 

The interest of the above series will be evident at once, for they illustrate a stage 
in the scale of culture in which not merely the art of metal working, but even of stone- 
working, has not yet been acquired at all. Bone and shell are the only hard substances 
on which a point or a cutting edge can as yet be fashioned, and stone is only used at 
all when it occurs in a shape which is naturally adapted for handling ; and even then 
only for the haft of the implement, in the absence of suitable wood or bone, and not for 
the blade. The Yahgans, in fact, might fairly be described as persisting in a '* Bone 
Age ** culture antecedent to the Age of Stone. J. L. MYRES. 



India. Rlsley. 

Note on Some Indian Tatu-Marks. By H. H, Risley, CJ.E.^ 'JM 
Director of Ethnography for India. ' ■ 

It may be of interest to readers of Man and may suggest further lines of inquiry if 
J offer a few suggestions as to the probable significance of the tatu-patterns figured by 

[ 97 ], 



1902.] MAN. [No. 74. 

my friend Mr. Fawcett in his paper on The Ddmhs of Jeypur (Man, 1901. 29). I agree 
with him in thinking that the Ddmbs of whom he writes are akin to the Panos or Pans 
who live in a sort of ghetto outside the Khond villages, weave cloth, and cultivate on 
the mkayer system for their Khond landlords. In old times the Pans of the Khond 
country used to kidnap and otherwise procure children for the Meria sacrifice, and were 
taxed with selling their own offspring for this ghastly purpose. These helot Pans are, 
however, only a fraction of the entire Pan community, which numbered in the 1891 
Census 341,740, nearly all in Orissa and the adjacent district of Midnapur. The 
evidence of the tatu-marks, as I shall show below, enables us to connect the D6mbs or 
Dombas of Madras (74,249 in 1891) not only with the Pans of Orissa but also with the 
Doms* of Upper India, numbering 1,257,826 and distributed as follows : — 

Bengal ------ 453,359 

North- West Provinces - - - - 331,242 

Assam - - • - - - 205,053 

Kashmir - - - . . 130,985 

Punjab * - 68,971 

Central Provinces - - - .. 68,216 

In the census statistics of 1891 the Doras are thrown in with the sweepers (Haris, 
Mehtars, Chuhras, &c.), an arrangement which obscures the essential differences between 
the two groups. Doms handle dead bodies freely, act as hangmen, and assist at post- 
mortem examinations, but will have nothing to do with nightsoil. Sweepers remove 
nightsoil, but will not touch a corpse. Each looks down upon the degrading occupation 
of the other, and claims a superior status on this account. In large Indian cities both 
castes discharge important duties, and the sweepers in particular have flourished 
exceedingly since sanitation came into fashion. When plague appeared in Calcutta in 
1898, some miscreants got up a scare about inoculation and stampeded some 100,000 
people within a few days. Had the sweepers joined the stampede, as they threatened 
to dO) about 60,000 privies, which have no connection with the sewers and must be 
cleaned daily by hand, would have been left in statu qtio^ and the city would have 
become uninhabitable in a week. About the same time one of the Doms employed in 
the hospitals got pricked by a bit of bone while assisting at a plague post mortem and 
died of plague. As Doms are immune from ordinary blood poisoning, and handle 
dissected bodies in the most careless fashion, this disaster gave the fraternity a great 
fright, and their pay had to be raised in consideration of the risk they ran. The 
consequences of a strike would have been appalling. In the country districts Doms 
are weavers of baskets and mats, which they regard as their original occupation ; makers 
of discordant music at marriages and festivals ; and cultivators. They also superintend 
the burning of the dead and charge a fee varying with the rank and circumstances of the 
deceased for the wood and straw which they supply for this purpose. The Magahiya 
sub-caste in Behar are professional burglars. The religious aspect of their vocation will 
|je mentioned below. 

With this sketch of the large community we are concerned with, let us now turn to 
the tatu-marks, the representations of which, given in Man, 1901. 29, are reproduced 
herewith. 

If No. 1 is a scorpion it is difHcult to see how No. 3 can represent the same creature, 
for there is no sort of resemblance between the two sets of marks. But No. 1 is certainly 
not a scorpion. The wavy lines in the middle represent water in the conventional 
manner which may be observed in the borders of some Indian carpets. The dots at 
either side depict what passes for a garden in India, a wilderness of trees planted in 
straight lines with no attempt at grouping or effect. 



* The usual spelling is Ddm. D6mb or D6mba is a ^uth Indian variant. 

[ 98 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 74. 



No. 2 maj be *' flowers/' but this is just the sort of random explanation that people 
are apt to give of things which they do not understand. May it not be ^ funeral pjre, 
with the ^ve logs sticking out at one end and the corpse's head at the other, while the 
dots represent the relations standing round ? 

No. 3 is a rather indifferent scorpion, and compares verv badly with a most realistic 
tatu of the same animal which has come to me from Gujrat in the Punjab. I suggest 
as an alternative solution that No. 3 represents the curved knife used by the Doms in 
making baskets. The handle, of course, is clumsy, but handles are apt to be so iu India, 
where symmetry is at a discount and nothing is made to fit. 

No. 5 is the katar or Indian dagger, which is held by the crossbar inside the 
flanges of the handle, the stroke being delivered from the shoulder as in boxing. The 
connection of the katar with the Doms is obscure. It may arise from ttheir burglarious 
tendencies, or from their employment as village watchmeu, though the katar as figured 



• • # 
/N/VA 

• • • 



2 



• • • 







4 • 



o 



• • 





8 "^ 
















• • • « ••• 




o 



; I ^l; 



X\/WW\ 



• • 



II 



• ■ 



f I 



^ 



U u 



; : '^^.:: 



/\/^/VAA/\ 



/2 



• • 



• • 



here is rather a fancy weapon, less adapted for rough work than the sword, spear, or 
long iron-bound staff usually carried by the chaukidar. In Behar the name katari is 
applied to the curved knife used in basket making. It is curious that one of the 
exogamous sections of the Babhans, a high landowning caste in Behar, bears the name 
Domkatar and ranks low, so that members of the other sections, though they will marry 
Domkatar women, will not give their daughters to Domkatar men. 

No. 6 seems to be an insect of some kind cut in half through the middle. The 
Pans of the Orissa hills, with whom Mr. Fawcett identifies the Doms, have the wood- 
louse as one of their totems, and perhaps this may be some kindred creature. It has too 
many legs to be a spider, which is a fairly common tatu-mark in Upper India. Nor are 
the legs long enough ; a spider conventionalise<l into a tatu-mark would probably be all 
legs. That a totem should be tatued on the body is an intelligible and widespread 
practice, and would explain the wood-louse. If the spider is not a totem, as for all I 
know it may be, its use as a tatu-mark may be a case of imitative magic which, as 
Mr. Frazer tells us, seeks to transfer to man the useful qualities which some animals 
are supposed to possess. Thus some Bechuanas wear a certain insect, mutilated but 
living, because ^^ being vefy tenacious of life it will make them difficult to kill '* ; and 

[ 99 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Ho. 74. 

certain people of the Malaj country think that if you rub the ashes of roasted spider on 
your fingers when you play the lute this will make them ^ as lithe and nimble as the 
spider^s legs/* Or again, if the animal is merely poisonous and disagreeable it may be 
worn as a tatu to curry favour with it, on the principle which leads people to speak 
respectfully of snakes and tigers, even when they are dead. 

No. 9 appears to me to represent the grim worship which I have elsewhere 
{Tribes and Castes of Bengal^ i. 247) described as characteristic of the Magahiya 
Ddmb of Behar. 

Systematic robbery is so far a recognised mode of life among the Magahiya 
D6ras that it has impressed itself on their religion, and a distinct ritual is ordained for 
observance by those who go forth to commit a burglary. The object of veneration on 
these occasions is Sansari Mai, whom some hold to be a form of Kali, but who seems 
rather to be the Earth-Mother known to most primitive religions. No image, not even 
the usual lump of clay, is set up to represent the goddess. A circle one span and four 
fingers in diameter is drawn on the ground and smeared smooth with cowdung. 
Squatting in front of this the worshipper gashes his left arm with the curved Dom 
knife {Katari), and daubs five streaks of blood with his finger in the centre of the 
circle, praying in a low voice that dark night may aid his designs, that his booty may 
be ample, and that ho and his gang may escape detection. 

^* Labra movet metuens andiri : pulchra Laverna, 
Da mihi fallere, da justo sanctoque videri, 
Noctem peccatis et fraudibus objice nubem.** 

The whole of this business was acted before me in the Buxar Central Jail by a 
number of Magahiya Doms undergoing sentence there. Several of them had their 
left arms scarred from the shoulder to the wrist by assiduous worship of the tribal 
Laverna. In the tatu-picture the five streaks of blood and the enclosed space are 
clearly shown, and the curved knife used to draw blood is depicted lying in front of the 
circle, which, I admit, is not so circular as it might be. 

No. 10 it is suggested might be a centipede, one of the totems of the Pans. It 
might be almost anything. 

Nos. 11 and 12 represent a classical scene in Dom folk-lore, the story of King 
Haris-Chaudra, who was so generous that he gave all he had to the poor and sold 
himself to a Dom at Benares, who employed him to watch his cremation ground at 
night. While he was thus engaged, his wife, who had also been sold for charitable 
purposes, came to burn the body of her son. She had no money to pay her fees, and 
Haris-Chandra, not knowing her in the darkness, turned her away. Fortunately the 
sun rose ; mutual recognition followed ; the victims of promiscuous largesse were at 
once remarried, and Vishnu intervened to restore the son to life. Tatu No. 11 shows 
Haris-Chandra watching the burning ground by moonlight ; the wavy line is the 
Ganges ; the dots are the trees on the other side ; the strokes on either side of the king 
are the logs of wood which he is guarding Wood is scarce at Benares and thieves are 
plentiful. In No. 12 we see the sun rising, its first ray marked with a sort of fork, and 
the meeting of the king and queen. 

Now what bearing have these tatu marks on the various explanations of tatuing 
that one finds in the literature of the subject ? It has been held by various authorities 
that tatuing is mere ornament signifying nothing, or at most intended to frighten the 
enemy ; that it indicates the tribe and family of the tatued by displaying their totems ; that 
it records success in battle, the loss of near relatives, and similar personal occurrences ; 
and that it is connected with the attainment of sexual maturity by males and females, 
so that the former are tatued as a sign of their promotion to the rank of warriors 
entitled to bear arms, while the latter are not accorded this distinction until they have 
justified iheir existence by getting a husband or bearing a child. The most recent 

[, 100 J 



1902.] MAN. pfos. 74-75. 

writer od the subject, Joest, is particularly strong on denying to the custom any 
religious or mystical significance and scoffs at Waitz-Gerland^s explanation as an '* orgy 
of fantasy." His conclusion, independently arrived at by Westermarck, is that the 
main object of tatning on the part of either males or females is to enhance their 
attractions in the eyes of the opposite sex and ^ thus to stimulate desire. Tatning, in 
thief view, is merely an incident of courtship and has nothing to do with religion or 
totems, while its association with puberty arises solely from the fact that savage 
people set about their wooing betimes. 

1 have no intention at present of entering the field with a new theory. We have 
only just now begun to investigate the subject in India ; the data collected are as yet 
scanty, the custom itself seems to be dying out, and our iuquiries may come to nothing. 
Nevertheless, these D6m tatu-marks seem, so far as they go, to support the Waitz- 
Gerland hypothesis of a religious or quasi-religious origin rather than the matter of 
fact view put forward by Westermarck and Joest. In the first place, they are not 
ornamental in themselves. The argument, I admit, does not come to much, as we have 
no means of gauging the standard of taste among the Doms. But the designs certainly 
compare most unfavourably with the simplest type of line-tatu figured in Joest^s 
elaborate book. Secondly, if I have identified them correctly, four out of the twelve 
designs are pretty closely related to the religion and mythology of the tribe ; two are 
totems and two have reference to their traditional avocations. Surely there is more in 
this than mere ornament. H. H. RISLEY. 



Totemlsm. Powell. 

An American View of Tetemlsm. By J, W. Powell^ Director of the iyp 
Bureau of American Ethnology^ Washington, {Cf. Man, 1902. 84. below.) f U 

In this country we usually call the ancient inhabitants of America '' Indians,^* but the 
term is a little ambiguous in Europe, and we are beginning to realise that a better term 
may be employed, so the term Amerinds is sometimes used. A group of Amerind tribes 
occupying a limited part of the Dominion of Canada and the United States are known 
as Algonquians ; they belong to a distinct linguistic stock in which many languages are 
spoken. Among these tribes the word '^ totem ** or its variant is used, and these are the 
languages from which the word comes. The word is derived from a root which signifies 
clay. Among the Algonquian tribes clay was used to paint the face and body with the 
heraldic devices of a group of persons. Should an Algonquian Indian ask another, 
" What is your clay ? " that is, what is your colour, or what is your escutcheon, or what 
is your heraldic device, or what is your coat-of-arms ? he would use to express this idea 
the term totem. The group is composed of such persons as reckon consanguineal kin- 
ship only through the mother ; thus the mother and her brothers and sisters, and their 
mother with her brothers and sisters, belong to the group, and the kinship may l>e 
reckoned in the same manner through an indefinite number of generations. This group 
we call a clan, but the Algonquians call it a totem, thus clan and totem are 
synonymous. 

In most of the tribes of North America the clan is the group next higher to that of 
the family. There are other tribes in which the clan group is replaced by what we call 
the gentile group. This group is like that discovered among the Latin tribes, and 
embraces those persons who reckon kinship through the father, with his brothers and 
sisters, including their father and his brothers and sisters. Thus the mother^s group and 
the grandmother^s group are excluded. This group is well known in Latin literature 
as the agnatic kindred. When the second group is found we call it a gens, and the 
agnatic organisation the gentile organisation. Where the clan organisation prevails all 
other kindred are recognised, together with the clan kindred as belonging to the tribe, 

[ 101 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 75. 

for a tribe is always a body of kiDdred real or conventional. In the same manner, where 
the gentile organisation prevails, the gens, together with all other kindred, constitnte the 
tribe, while the confederacy is a group of tribes united for offensive and defensive 
purposes with artificial kinship established as a legal fiction. 

In America we call the name of the clan and also the name of the gens its totem, 
and totemism is considered a method of naming. Among some tribes the child on 
coming to puberty takes a new name, and this name is called its totem, and totemism 
still means a system of naming. 

In every tribe among the Amerinds societies are organised which wore formerly 
called " medicine societies " and then " religious societies." To understand their nature 
it becomes necessary to understand the cosmology and religion of the Amerinds. We 
may not enter into this subject fully, but certain explanations are necessary in order to 
understand how the word totemism is used in this country. 

All the tribes believe in ghosts, but they believe that everybody, whether animal, 
plant, spring, stream, river, lake, or sea, and every drop of water, together with every 
star in the celestial firmament has a ghost, and the milky way is the path of ghosts. 
Every body or corporate existence has a ghost. These ghosts can leave their bodies 
and wander at will while they perform thaumaturgic feats. The agencies oF all 
phenomena are ghosts ; ghosts rule the heavens, and preside over the movements of the 
stars ; ghosts rule the waters and preside over the floods, droughts, and storms ; ghosts 
rule over the rocks, hills, and mountains, and preside over their activities ; ghosts rule 
over the plants, and provide for their growth and decay ; while ghosts rule over the 
animals — humnn animals and all — and control their activities. In this theory of universal 
animism and inert bodies informed with ghosts, all the Amerinds believe. Bodies are 
inert and of little consequence, but ghosts are the practical agents of all things. By 
the intensity and universality with which these doctrines are held they are impelled to 
the organisation of bodies of men whose function is the control of ghosts. These 
societies are also named, and the names of the societies are their totems, so that totemism 
pertains to individual names, to clan names, to gentile names, to tribal names, and also 
to society names. 

The name which the individual assumes at puberty is the totem name of the 
individual ; it is also the name of the thing for which the individual is named. Now, 
the individual assumes the name of the thing which is revealed to him in a dream, or 
of a thing that is revealed to him in a state of ecstasy produced by fasting in solitude, 
as among some of the Siouan tribes ; or it may be the thing which is revealed to him in 
a state of intoxication, as among some of the Muskhogean tribes, who, for the purpose, 
drink a decoction which is known among white men as the " black drink." When 
shamanistic societies are organised, their names are also their totems, and apply to the 
societies as well as to the things to which they are devoted. This is the Amerindian 
custom, and is also the custom of American students. 

In tribal society we find very interesting superstitions about names, for the name 
is held to be an inherent attribute or property of the thing ; again, the object from which 
the puberty name of the individual is taken becomes his tutelar deity. In like manner 
the totem name of the clan, the gens, and the tribe severally become tutelar deities of 
these bodies. It may be that the name of the society becomes its tutelar deity, but of 
this there is yet insufficient evidence. Such are the customs and superstitions of the 
Amerinds about names, and we call this doctrine of naming " totemism." 

In the April and May numbers of the Fortnightly Review (1901) Mr. J. G. Frazer 
discusses the subject of totemism as if he were discussing the nature of shamanistic 
ceremonies. Here we must explain how we use the term shaman. The shaman is the 
head man of the society which is organised to promote good and avoid evil. The good 
and evil of this world are multifarious ; health and disease are good and evil, plenty and 

t 102 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 75. 

want are good and evil, peace and war are good and evil. As the ghosts are agencies 
of all classes of good and evil, so the shamanistic societies are organised to control good 
and evil of all kinds. The function of such societies was first seen to be medical, and 
the shamans were called ** medicine men.** Then it was discovered that the societies 
were also organised to control moral good and evil, and they were called " priests.'* At 
last it has come to be recognised that these societies are organised to control every good 
and evil, and that particular societies are organised to control special sources of good 
and evil, and that in every confederacy in America there are a number of these societies, 
every one of which has charge of some particular class of the sources of good and evil. 
We call them all shamanistic societies. 

It will thus be seen that what Mr. Frazer calls totemism we call shamanism, and 
we use the term totemism to signify the system and doctrine of naming. The name of 
the society is also a name of every member of the society. Thus, John Smith and 
James Jones may be Presbyterians, and they may also be Democrats and AmericanSi 
and yet retain the names John Smith and James Jones, though their children address 
them as fathers and their parents as sous. Now all the diverse methods of naming 
people Mr. Frazer confuses with the functions of the societies to which they belong. 
Since Howitt and Fison gave us the original account of some of the peculiarities 
of tribal society in Australia, we have not failed in America to follow subsequent 
discoveries in the same field made by Englishmen and other Europeans, and have 
rejoiced in the revelation which they give about the social organisation of Australian 
tribes. 

Shamanistic societies must not be confounded with clans, gentes, tribes, and con- 
federacies. The confusion in distinguishing these organisations is found in much of the 
literature relating to Australian tribes, so tliat the materials gathered there can be but 
imperfectly assimilated by students in America to the concepts which they are developing 
in the study of the Amerinds. Such at any rate has been the experience of the writer. 

in savage society the shamanistic bodies pervade the clans, tribes, and confederacicp, 
but they do not constitute governmental units. One of the important distinctions which 
we make between savagery and barbarism consists in the relation of these societies to 
the governmental units. In barbarism the societies, or ^* brotherhoods ** as they are 
almost universally called, become integral parts of the governmental organisation, like 
the phratries in Hellenic tribes. Every shamanistic society is a brotherhood, and its 
chief is their father. When the father of the brotherhood is the elder man ot the gens, 
and the elder man or chief of the tribe, and the elder man or chief of the confederacy, 
then the civil and religious control of the people is consolidated in the head of a 
hierarchy of patriarchs. As soon as this is accomplished there comes about a con- 
solidation of ecclesiastical functions with governmental functions in all the units in the 
hierarchy of government. The extent of this consolidation in barbaric tribes varies 
greatly, but it is always manifest to a greater or less degree, so that the phratry is 
recognised as one of the units of governmental organisation. To the student of Roman 
society this will be apparent. I hope that my European co-labourers in the study of 
tribal society will pardon me when I express the opinion that this discrimination is at 
the present time of prime importance. What we now know of Australian tribal society 
seems to be in confusion, and this confusion can be largely cleared up by studying the 
Australian tribes both as clans and as societies. 

Mr. Frazer describes the churinga of the Australians, and attempts to show how 
they are used by Australian tribesmen. In America we call these paraphernalia of the 
ceremonies '^ sacred objects." It is very instructive to note from time to time in this 
language or that by what name the stfme things are called. In the Zuiiian language 
they are called te-Uhl-na-wc {te = regions, Uhl or ihlea = to carrry, na-we = things). 
The entire sentence word therefore signifies things that carry to regions. On some of 

[ 103 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Vo.'75. 

these tbiDgB inscriptions iind varions other ornaments and devices are plaeed. These 
inscriptions the Zoni call avM^thlea-p^^na-we (fivM = their, thlea^ which is the ^thl in 
the former word, = to wear or to bear, and p^-na-we ^ speech) ; the whole collocation 
of sounds signifies speech-bearing possessions. It is thus that from time to time we 
obtain linguistic evidence that the Amerinds consider the sacred objects or churinga to 
be speech bearing. 

Let us consider the nature of the ceremonies which thej perform in order to 
influence the ghosts. Fundamentallj they must do something to please them. That 
in which savage men take most delight is music and dancing, and all their shamahistic 
societies perform terpsichorean ceremonies. When the ghosts are pleased then is the 
time to induce them to act. This leads to altar representation. The altar of savagery 
is a spot cleared on the ground on which to place certain paraphernalia, or it maj be a 
table erected for the purpose. On this table a variety of things are displayed, and with 
them a variety of ceremonies are performed. These ceremonies constitute a gesture 
speech, and the paraphernalia of the altar consists of objects which may be used in 
this gesture speech to represent and illustrate the ideas which the performers desire to 
convey. 

For example, a rain society is organised among many of the tribes of North 
America. This society has charge of the methods of producing rain through the 
influence of the ghosts that control the rain. On the altar they place emblems or 
picture-writings of clouds, with vertical lines from the cloud symbols to represent 
raindrops. Witii these rain-symbol tablets they arrange ears of maize of the colours 
which they admire, and crystals of quartz with other beautiful gems, and a vase of 
honey — which they consider a luxury — and wooden birds painted and adorned with 
feathers ; many such objects are devised. Then they make prayers and perform 
ceremonies in which they invoke the ghosts potent in producing rain, and as their 
invocations proceed perform some ceremony which will express the thoughts of their 
prayers. They sprinkle the altar to show that it is rain which they desire ; they refer 
to the ears of corn to show that it is rain to produce corn which they desire ; they 
refer to the jewels to show that it is hard com which they desire ; they refer to the 
honey to show that it is sweet corn they wish ; they refer to the birds on the altar to 
show that it is spring rain which they seek, when the birds are in full plumage. 

Savage men are quite familiar with the phenomenon of a multitude of languages ; 
they recognise that usually tribes or confederates speak different languages. The 
primeval disparity of languages is better known to the savage man than to the civilised 
man. The Algonquian knows that the Iroquoian speaks another language, and he 
believes that every species of animal, plant, water, rock, or star, speaks a different 
language. He is accustomed to communicate with other tribes of men by gesture 
speech, and he invents a gesture speech for ghosts. This is the significance of the 
ceremonies and altar paraphernalia discovered in the worship of shamanistic societies. 
Such facts we discover from tribe to tribe in every instance where a shamanistic society 
is found among the Amerinds. Perhaps similar facts will be found in Australia. In 
fact, we are led to believe that they have already been found, and that Mr. Frazer is 
setting them forth in the review which he gives of the work of Baldwin Spencer and 
F. J. Gillen on The Native Tribes of Central Australia, I have not yet seen this 
work, but I hail its coming with expectant pleasure. 

Let us quote from Mr. Frazer : — 

*' in order to ensure a plentiful supply of a certain grub known as the witchetty 
grub, which is a favourite article of diet with the natives, and only appears for a short 
time after rain, the men of the Witchetty Grub totem repair to a shallow cave in a ravine, 
where lies a large block of quartzite, surrounded by some small rounded stones. The 
large block represents the full-grown grubs, the small stones stand for the eggs. On 

f 104 ] 



1M2.] 



HAN. 



[No. 76. 



reitchiug tUe cave tbe^lie&tl miin of tbe totem group begins to eiDg, wbile be taps tbc large- 
bloclc witb u woodeo trough, suob as is used fur Buooptug tbe earth out of burrowa. All 
tbe ottier meu ut the aume time tap it with twigs of a particular gum tree, clianting the 
while. The burden of their soug ih au inTitntiou to the iueect to go aoJ lay eggs. 
Next, the lender takes up oue of tbe smaller stonea, represeiiting an egg, and strikes each 
man lu the Mlomacb with it, sayiiig, ' You have eaten much food,' after which be butts 
ftt the man's stuiaacb with hia forehead. When this ceremouy is over, they all descend 
from tbe cave into the bed of tbe raviue, and atop under a rock, at which a great leader 
of tbe Witcbetty Grub totem iu tbe far past \e eaid to have cooked, pulverised, and eaten 
tbe grub. Tbe bead man of the party strikes this rock with bis trough, while the older 
men again chant invitations to the animal to come from all direcfious and lay eggs. Cere- 
monies of tbe same sort are performed at ten different places. When the round bas been 
completed tbe party returns borne. Here, at some distanoe fnim tbe main camp, a long 
narrow structure of boughs baa meanwhile been got ready ; it is designed to Represent 
tbe chrysalis from which the full-grown insect emerges. Into ibis structure the men, 
every oue with the sacred design of the totem painted in red oohre and pipeclay on his 
body, enter and aiug of the grub in tbe various stages of its development. After 
chanting thus for a wbile, they shuffle out of the mock chrysalis one by one with a 
gliding motion, singing all the time about the emergence of tbe real insect out of the 
real chrysalis, of which their own performance ts clearly uu imitation. The whole of 
these ceremonies, from beginning to end, must be performed by [he men fasting ; not 
until the whole is over are the performers allowed to eat and drink." 

TbiH is clearly a ceremony analogous Co those which we are studying in America, 
We call tbein rituals, and speak of the ritualism of sbamaiuBtic societies, ticores of 
them have already been studied, hundreds of tbem have already beeu witnessed, aod 
they all have the same fundamental characteristics as being sign-language ceremonies 
or gesture-speech prayers. Mr. Frazer makes a diatinotion between magic and religion ; 
this may bo properly discriminating when by religion we mean civilised ceremonies, and 
wish to distinguish them from tbe ceremonies of tribal men, then these ceremonies may 
be called tbe practice of magic, but we must not Forget that these inugicul ceremonies of 
tribal men are religious ceremonies to tbem, aud that they are jiisl as earnest in tbeir 
performance aud as tirmly believe in tbeir ellicacy as do civilized men. 

I hope that 1 may be albwed to express an opinion about other sources of confusion 
which I tiud in the reported observations about Australian tribes. 

Among all tribal people we discover strange prohibitions ; thus, a man is prohibited 
from marrying a woman of his clan, but this he may avoid by being adopted into 
another clan, and there are various other methods by which it may be avoided. He is 
often prohibited from eating certain kinds or portions of food, and he is often prohibited 
from killing certain animals. We call tbe thing prohibited a iaiiu, and the prohibition 
of tabu and tbe doctrine of tabus — which is quite an important subject, aa it reveals the 
ideas of tribal men — we call tabuixm. 

Many years ago M'Leonau propounded a doctrine of Axogamy and endogamy iu 
terms which since have led many students astray. As we tind it among the Amerinds, 
the exogamic group is always the incest group ; this group is the clan of savagery, and 
it is tbe gens of barbarism. While iu theory it is cousauguiueat, in practice it ia often 
something more. Persons are included in the group by adoption. In the clan, adoption 
is preceded by some ceremouy, and tbe mother of the clan makes the adoption. In 
barbarism ceremony also is necessary, but tbe adoption ia by tbe father or patriarch. 
If a man is adopted into another clan he may marry in bis former clan. The tribal 
peoples cannot be divided into those which are eiogamoua and endogamoua, but every 
tribe is exogamoua in some oue of its groups, aud eudogamous iu the others. Exogamy 
and endogamy are, therefore, correlative phases of oue iusiltution iu every tribe in 
[ 1(J6 J 



19020 MAN. pros. 7fiH76. 

America. The failure to recognise this leads to much of the confusion in our knowledge 
of Australian tribes. 

The great philosopher, Herbert Spencer, early expounded a doctrine of the origin 
of religion. He found it in the posthumous regard and worship paid to great chiefs, 
especially when their superiority consists in military achievement. Thus, directly and 
indirectly he made religion to be the child of war. The study of this subject among the 
Amerinds leads to the conclusion that religious association begins in the organisation of 
shamanistic societies founded upon cosmological doctrines, chief among which is the 
doctrine of ghost.''. This error has vitiated many of the observations made in Australia 
and elsewhere. Men see the facts through the glasses of their theories — which is good 
if theories are good, but bad if theories are bad. J. W. POWELL. 

Since the al>ove was written I have read Spencer and Gillen's book, and my 
anticipation of its value from the review of Mr. Frazer have been more than realised. 
It is a great contribution to our knowledge of tribal men. J. W. P. 

\_For a discussion of Mr, PowelVs view of totemism see Man, 1902. 84. below, "] 



Thessaly. Bosanquet. 

Prehistoric Villaires In Thessaly. By R. C, Bosanquet, M.A,, Director "Tp 
of the British School of Archfeology in Athens, ■ ^ 

Important finds were made in the summer of 1901 by MM. Staes and Tsountas, 
Ephors of the National Museum in Athens, at two sites in the fertile plain which 
extends from the foot of Mount Pelion round the shores of the Gulf of Yolo, the ancient 
lolkos. It was the discovery of a large ^' beehive-tomb *' on the hill of Dimini, three 
miles N.W. of Volo, that led M. Staes to excavate there. The tomb had been robbed 
soon after its construction, and there remained only a few trinkets of gold and glass 
paste, enough to mark it as contemporary with the Mycena3an tholoi of Attica. In 
probing the neighbouring slopes M. Staes found that the tomb had been cut in ground 
largely composed of the dihris of an earlier fortified village, which had covered the 
whole hill-top, about 100 yards in diameter. Except that the huts were rectangular, 
the plan of the whole, with its three concentric ramparts and two entrances, was that of 
many British hill-forts. Later in the summer M. Tsountas discovered and excavated a 
similar settlement at Sesklo, some miles further west. No trace of bronze was found 
and stone implements were abundant, but the pottery of both places was of a more 
advanced kind than that usually assigned to the Neolithic Age in Greece. It is 
hand-made ware, with a polished buif surface covered with geometric patterns in a 
slightly glossy brown-black paint. The commonest vessel is a bowl, more broad than 
deep, with straight sides converging to a narrow base. The handle is a mere pro- 
tuberance with a pierced string-hole. The design, which covers both inside and outside, 
is a patchwork of geometric motives, chequers, zigzags, spirals, and irregular key-like 
figures. As a rule only one pigment is used, contrast being obtained by the isolation of 
important figures, especially large single spiral coils, reserved in the buff ground colour 
within a darker field, which is varied by the employment of stripes, hatching, cross- 
hatching, and solid black. An efifective use is made of red on one large jar with a 
nearly spherical body and low cylindrical neck ; it is covered with a bold strapwork 
pattern, the bands of which, crossing on the shoulders, enclose almond-shaped spaces 
which are coloured a bright red. 

Of neolithic pottery with incised ornaments there was comparatively little at 
Dimini, though the excavation was carried down to the rock. At Sesklo, where the 
excavation is still unfinished, a good deal of incised ware has been found ; while a still 
earlier stage is illustrated at the neolithic station of Marmariani to the east of Larissa, 
where trials showed incised sherds far outnumbering the painted. Incised or painted, 
the patterns have a family resemblance, though the painted ware has in many cases been 

[ 106 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 76-77. 

influenced by basket work. The excavators have classified upwards of sixty different 
geometric motives which appear in innumerable combinations and permutations. 
Numerous " idols " were found ; some of marble, in form surprisingly unlike those of 
the Cyclades — one, for instance, is shaped like a bolster with tied-in neck and adorned 
with meander- patterns in red; others skilfully modelled in clay, for the most part 
»teatopygous female figures with an exaggerated abdominal fold ; others acrolithic 
with a stone head affixed to a clay body. Implements of stone, including a fine oval 
mace-head pierced through its louger axis, flint and obsidian flakes, bone needles and 
gouges, stores of figs and grain, complete the picture of a vigorous local culture, the 
affinities of which are rather with the Thracian than with the Cycladic area. 

The explorers have detected sites of the same character in other parts of Thessaly, 
»nd M. Tsouutas has now resumed work there. Their account of the excavations, a 
quarto volume with fifty plates from photographs and from drawings by E. Gillieron, 
will be published by the Greek Archseological Society and is expected to appear in 
1903. R. C. BOSANQUET. 

Religion. Lang:. 

The Supreme Bolng and Totems In Sarawalk: A Nete In Reply ^"f 
to Mr. McDoui^all. Bt/ Andrew Lartff, M.A. {Cf. Max, 1902. 62-63.) I I 

Mr. McDougall invites me to express an opinion as to whether *' the belief in 
" a Supreme Being was either (a) independently acquired by one people only and 
" transmitted to others by descent or by borrowing, or (6) was independently acquired by 
*^ different peoples but by the same process of thought in every case.*^ He supposes me 
to accept the second alternative for which he sees no grounds, thinking it ^ a priori 

probable that the conception of a Supreme Being has developed along different lines 

among the various [leoples that entertain it.*' 

A categorical answer cannot, I think, be given to this question. We know that in 
very many cases the conception of a Supreme Being has been borrowed from Christian 
or Islamite teaching, while wo have little evidence as to any vestige of it which may 
have existed before, in each case, say, among the Pagan Irish. Again, I could not 
venture to deny that the conception may have been developed '^ along different lines,*' 
among different peoples, and even among different individuals. How can I know for 
certain how Moses and Mahomet evolved their idea of a Supreme Being, whether by 
returning to and reviving, with the force of genius, an archaic notion nearly obliterated, 
or by dint of speculation unaided, or by borrowing ? Nobody of sense will give a 
dogmatic reply, in each case, where evidence is so scanty and obscure, though in each 
case a man may have an opinion. 

All that I have said, I think, is that a current theory of the development of the 
conception of a Supreme Being as the last stage in *' animistic ** speculation, appears to 
me to be thwarted by the occurrence of the conception (if the evidence for it is admitted) 
among the very lowest races, who are not worshippers of ancestral ghosts and are not 
known to believe in departmental deities out of which one may be elected as supreme. 
In such cases (granting the evidence) we find the effect without the supposed causes, as 
in other races we find the supposed causes without the effect. That is all my contention, 
and in the instance of very low and isolated peoples, without the social and animistic 
conditions often regarded as causes of the conception, I conjecture that the spectacle of 
things suggested the inference that there was a Maker of things. This is only a 
conjecture in lack of a better. I cannot possibly pretend to say that the Greeks — Plato, 
for instance— or that Mahomet, or that the Masai reached their conception of a Supreme 
Being with the idea of a Maker of things as a starting point. My coi^clusions are rather 
negative than positive. However the Andamanese or the Australians got at their idea, 
it was not, I think, by adoring ghosts, promoting them to godhead, and selecting one 

[ 107 ] 






ldOJi.3 MAN. tNoB. 77-78. 

god out of the multitude as supreme. I sball be glad to consider any proofs that the 
Australiaus, for example, have declined from a higher culture, but at present I am not 
aware of the existence of any such proofs. 

I think that the existence of nyarong ('* individual totems ") is so closelj analogous 
to totemism (some even think it the germ of totemism) that the wide diffusion of totems 
is not at all more " wonderful " and, a priori^ improbable than the wide diffusion of anj 
other superstition. But the sense of wonder differs in different individuals. As to the 
Punans, since " our knowledge of them is most imperfect," I prefer to wait. My cousin, 
the late Mr. J. J. Atkinson, had long been familiar with the tribes of New Caledonia 
before an accident proved to him that they had, if not totems in the fullest measure, yet 
certainly kindred and protecting animals — lizard, pigeon, mouse, and so on — regarded as 
" fathers." 

I would not assert that the Kenyahs have not acquired their belief in the way 
suggested by Mr. McDougall and Dr. Hose ; I only point out that, taking their original 
paper as it stands, there seems no proof that the Kenyahs must have followed that 
path. A. LANG. 

REVIEWS. 
Race-Contaot. Bryoe* 

The Relations of the Advanced and the Backward Races of Mankind^ being ^mQ 
the Romanes Lecture, 1902. By the Rt. Hon. James Bryce, D.C.L. Oxford : f O 
Clarendon Press, 1902. 8vo. pp. 46. 

Mr. Bryce has chosen for his Romanes Lecture a most opportune subject. Whether 
viewed from its social or its political side, the question of the relations of the advanced 
and the backward races of mankind never before loomed so large in the face of the 
civilised nations. To the nations directly addressed by the lecturer, Britain and the 
United States, it has become of special urgency, for they have recently taken upon 
themselves new and difficult tasks. Nor could anyone be found combining in so ample 
a measure scholarship and statesmanship and a wide personal acquaintance with other 
lands and other peoples than his own as Mr. Bryce, to direct their serious attention to 
the problems involved. 

Of course it was impossible within the limits of a single lecture exhaustively to 
treat a theme so vast. All that could be done was to point out the crisis in the history 
of the world at which we have arrived, when the globe has been in effect portioned out 
among the advanced races, to enumerate in general terms the possible results on both 
the advanced and the backward races of this ubiquitous contact, and to indicate briefly 
the possible solutions of the difficulties which are certain to arise. To this task 
Mr. Bryce has accordingly addressed himself ; and this he has succeeded in performing 
with extended knowledge and equally extended sympathies, in a manner calculated to 
appeal to the earnest consideration of all thoughtful meu, to whatever school, creed, or 
nation they belong. 

Scientific anthropologists will read the lecture with unusual interest. The backward 
races of mankind have occupied an overwhelming share of their attention. They are 
convinced that even of those of which we know most there is more yet to be learned than 
is already known. Though science is not political, they are satisfied that even for a 
political purpose racial questions are imperfectly understood, unless they are studied from 
the scientific side. They will find support for this opinion in Mr. Bryce's observations 
as the troubles likely to be caused wherever contact arises without fusion of races, and 
in the various suggestions for minimising the evils and reducing the friction. To take 
the particular instance of South Africa, all the troubles referred to are likely to be expe- 
rienced in dealing with the Bantu nations. The Bantu are, perhaps, the most prolific 
race on the face of the earth. This characteristic is due quite as much to their institu- 

[ 108 J 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 78-79. 

tions as to their phjaical qualities. Though as jet there is plenty of room on the 
continent for their expansion, the pressure of their increase has already made itself felt 
in the more settled districts ; and it must extend. 

Modification of the habits of the race must be a slow process, even where Christianity 
and education come in to hasten it. The more rapidly, on the other hand, education and 
Christianity spread, the more will the difficulties be accentuated. Social and political 
inequality will be more keenly felt by both sides. Dissimilarity of character and 
institutions, of modes of thought and feeling, will not change so readily as the nominal 
religion, and in some respects they will be emphasised by a varnish of civilisation. 
Suspicion, distrust, race-hatred, discontent, violence will naturally ensue. These 
consequences are not matter of conjecture. They have already recurred over and over in 
the history of South Africa, as elsewhere. It is the business of statesmen to prevent 
their recurrence in the future by assuaging and (if that may be) wholly removing the 
causes of discord. How to do this will tax their utmost powers. They must begin by 
taking a full account of all the conditions. Among the conditions the racial characteristics 
and the racial and tribal customs, beliefs and institutions of the backward peoples are of 
prime importance. Here it is that a systematic investigation on scientific lines can help 
them. The course of such an investigation may do much more than ascertain the facts. 
It may suggest the lines along which the backward people ought to be conducted in 
order most surely to reach the goal of civilisation, and the means by which the period of 
transition may be most securely bridged. 

Mr. Bryce does not thus insist on the case of the Bantu. His observations are 
applicable to all the lower races, though it may be permitted to us to suspect that the 
imposition on this country of additional responsibilities in South Africa was among the 
chief causes determining his selection of the subject. Nor does he refer to the services 
which the scientific study of anthropology has rendered, or is capable of rendering, to 
statesmen engaged in the consideration of the immense problems sketched in the lecture. 
I cannot help regretting the omission. I hope, however, it may be ascribed to some 
other cause than failure on the part of so distinguished a statesman to recognise the 
practical value of anthropology, at a time when the governments of India, of our various 
colonies, of Holland, Germany, and the United States are becoming more and more fully 
convinced of the importance of exact and official inquiries into the physical, mental, 
moral, and social peculiarities of the alien races under their charge. 

E. SIDNEY HARTLAND. 

Britain. Maoklnder. 

The Regions of the World, 1. Britain and the British Seas. By H. J. ^g^ 
Mackinder, M.A. London : Heinemann, 1902. 8vo. Pp. xv-377, with 138 f w 
maps and diagrams. Price 7s, 6d, 

This is a difficult book to review, owing chiefly to the wide extent and variety of 
the subject and the enormous mass of facts and learning on which it is founded. It 
would be nearly impossible to epitomise any part of it ; though the author has attempted 
a general summary in his last chapter. It is a geography of Britain in the very widest 
sense, taking in not only its historical and descriptive geology, but its climate, its 
ethnology and ethnological history (in which he follows Green perhaps too faithfully), 
its industrial and economic, and even its strategic, geography. Nor can it be said that 
any of these subjects are perfunctorily or unsatisfactorily treated. Perhaps, sometimes, 
there is even a little too much of the play of poetical imagination on a subject which 
scarcely needs it, as in the latter part of the following quotation : '^ To the Teutons — 
^' Easterlings and Norsemen — England owes her civil institutions and her language ; to 
^^ the peoples of the west and south her Christianity and her scholarship. Two distinct 
^^ streams of ethical and artistic influence converged upon the island from the Rhine delta 
^^ and from the estuary of the Seine ; and the balanced English character has therefore 

[ 109 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 79. 

" a physical counterpart in the symmetry of the eastern and southern shores pivoted on 
" the Kentish forelands.^"* But his descriptive bits are always true, terse, and graphic. 
Thus of Norway, " Narrow fiords penetrate far up the valleys, which are deeply scored 
'' into the surface of the plateau. Here and there a sill gives space for a meadow and 
" the home of a Norseman — half farmer, half fisherman — whose only road is by boat on 
" the fiord." Of the Biscayan abyss — " The Bay of Biscay is a fundamental feature of 
^^ the map of Europe." Again, '^ No adequate explanation can as yet be given of the 
" origin and meaning of the Norway Deep ; but two facts are suggestive ; the deepening 
'^ of the channel inland is analogous to the similar deepening of the fiords of Norway 
*'*' and Scotland in their upper reacbes ; and the position of the deep off the plateau edge 
" of Norway is analogous, though the contrasts are less emphatic, to the position of the 
" Biscayan abyss along the Cantabrian front of the Spanish tableland." 

On page 44 is an interesting passage on the relation of the migrations of fish in the 
North Sea to the fluctuations of marine currents. 

The distinction between eroded tableland and mountain ranges, dwelt upon in 
p. 59 and elsewhere, is rather geologically than politically or otherwise important. Thus 
the Grampians and the Pennines are far more like continuous mountain ranges than 
Snowdonia is. 

At p. 67 the contrast between the structure of Scotland and that of England is 
very well given ; and so is the comparison between central Scotland, the Alsatian 
valley, and the great rift-valleys of East Central Africa. . 

The chapter on the physical history of Britain seems to me extremely good, 
clear, and succinct. But those on racial and historical geography will be most 
interesting to the anthropologist. They contain short and lucid summaries of what we 
know on these subjects, and, indeed, of a little that we do not yet know. Thus the 
author is, perhaps, a little too positive as to the uniformity with which the long-skulled 
type predominates in all parts of Britain. I do not mean to express much doubt about the 
existence of this uniformity ; but it certainly has not been quite proved as yet. ITaddon 
and Browne, Gray, Turner, Venn, Muffang, and I are, so far as I know, the only observers 
who have published anything of value on the subject ; and we certainly have not covered 
the whole of the ground. Turner's observations — which, however, were not numerous, 
— included a fair proportion of brachykephali. By the way, the author calls brachy- 
kephali rotimZ-skuiled. Though this expression is in pretty common use, it is a pity it 
should be so : either " short-skulled" or " broad-skulled " would be more truly applicable, 
as anyone must see who has either read Sergi or observed for himself. '^ Round " does 
not rightly include the sphenoid, beloid, or trapezoid forms, the Sarmatic type of Yon 
Holder, &c. 

Some other of the author's generalisations are worth quoting. Thus, after citing 
Rhys and Morris Jones on non -Aryan syntax in Brito-Celtic languages, and noting a 
probable correlation with the dolichocephaly of our Goydels and Brythons, he adds : — 
'' It would appear, therefore, that while Britain has been subjected to overpowering 
" Celtic influence, the amount of Celtic blood is probably not very great. In the main, 
" the races of Britain are either Teutonic or aboriginal and pre-Celtic," 

He notes, as a proof of the completeness of the Norse occupation of Caithness, 
Sutherland, and Dumfriesshire, that "there alone in all Britain the river names are 
" Teutonic, and not Celtic." Here we should read " some of the river names," and add 
after Dumfriesshire, " English Cumbria and parts of Yorkshire." The Evenlode and 
the Isbourne, if not the Windrush, in the Cotswolds, appear to have Saxon names ; the 
population thereabouts is of Saxon type. The phenomenon does probably imply that 
these tracts had been, or had been made, waste and void. 

He also remarks on the predominance of short dark types in the West Biding, due, 
he conjectures, to the preservation in the forest of Elmet of a percentage of the 

[ "0 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 79-80. 

aboriginal population. I think he bases this remark on one of mj own maps, borrowed 
by Riplej for his great work on the Races of Europe. My subjects were mostly towns- 
men, Sheffield grinders and the like, and probably degenerate. But the native breed in 
West Yorkshire is, or was, very generally big and fair. I myself think that Anglian 
blood predominates there, and that Elmet and Loidis were swept pretty clean by Ethel- 
frith ; but more facts are wanted, and I have long been trjing to get them. 

The following is an exceedingly good statement, one of the many jewels embedded 
in this book : '* There may still be distinguished some nine several provincialisms in the 
British population. There is (1) the Catholic Irishman, essentially a pre Celt, even 
when he does Celtic Erse into English ; (2) the Ulsterman, not quite Teutonic, however 
Protestant ; (3) the Scotsman of the far north, almost a Scandinavian ; (4) the High- 
lander, pre-Celtic and mercurial, yet with elements in his character very different from 
the Irish ; (5) the Lowlander, Teutonic in the main, but descendent neither of Norman 
nor of Dane ; (6) the Welshman, with a strong pre-Celtic infusion, dark, and of emotional 
temperament ; (7) the Englishman of the north and east, an Anglo-Dane ; (8) the 
'^ Englishman of the south and west, a Saxon, verging, especially towards Cornwall, on 
^' Celtic and pre-Celtic ; finally (9) the Londoner, the Cockney, originally East Saxon 
'^ or Kentish, but now a cosmopolitan/' 

These divisions could hardly be mended unless by minute subdivision. Of course, 
the Cornishman is very different from the Berkshireman, and the Ayrshireman from the 
man of the Merse. 

The maps, some borrowed, many original, abound wherever they are needed by the 
text, and generally merit very high praise for their ingenuity and clearness ; in fact, it 
wonld be difficult to name any book so well and appropriately illustrated. 

J. BEDDOE. 



Teclinology. Paprand : Dixon. 

The Jesup North Pacific Expedition (Mem. Am, Mus, Nat, Hist,^ 11 April |m 
1901). OU 

American anthropologists are fully alive to the importance of a careful study of 
their native baskets. Probably few anthropologists in this country have any idea 
of the immense variety of form, technique, and decoration that is to be found in the 
aboriginal basketry of North America. Two important papers have been published 
recently which deal with the ornamentation of North American baskets. They are : 
Basketry Designs of the Salish Indians^ by Livingston Farrand {Mem, Am, Mus. Nat. 
Hist.y Vol. II. (the Jesup North Pacific Expedition) April 1900), and Basketry 
Designs of the Indians of Northern Calif omia^ by Roland B. Dixon (Bull. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist. Vol. XVII. (the Huntington California Expedition), February 1902). 
Both of these memoirs are admirable examples of the modern method of studying 
primitive art, and the illustrations are profuse and excellent. Dr. Dixon supports the 
view enunciated by Dr. A. L. Kroeber in his Decorative Symbolism of the Arapaho 
(Am. Anth.y N.S., Vol. III., p. 308), that in the mind of primitive man realism and decora- 
tion are not differentiated, and that it is only with increased cultural development that 
a gradual differentiation of these two tendencies is brought about, until, in the end, they 
may become almost, if not quite, distinct ; but other factors also come in and eomplicate 
the problem. The Californian designs appear to occupy a place about midway between 
the somewhat preponderant realism of the Salish designs and the decorative coDven- 
tionalism of the Arapaho. 

Since the above was in type a valuable little paper. Directions for Collectors of 
American Basketry^ has been published by Otis T. Mason in Part P. of Bulletin^ U.S. 
Nat. Mus.^ No. 39, 1902, which is a valnable mtroduction to basketry technique. It is 
illustrated by 44 figures. A. C. H. 

[ "1 ] 



1902.] MAN. [SO0. 81-82. 

PROCEEDnrOS OF SOOIETIE8. 
ProoeedingB. Folklore Society. 

Ordinary Meeting^ May 28. Mr. M. Loogworth Dames read a paper on Baioeki Q4 
Folklore. The Balocb race is one of the old Iranian stock extending from the O I 
Indian frontier to S.E. Persia. This paper related to the tribes on the Indian frontier 
which fftill speak the Balochi language, among whom a great amoont of old heroic poetry 
is still orallj preserved, which has of late jears been collected by the author of this paper 
and others. This poetry relates to the migrations of the Baloch race, and to the wars of 
the 15th and 16th centuries, which are treated in an epic spirit. The manner of 
singing thefie Ijallads with musical accompaniments was described, and some account given 
of the principal legends dealt with in them. The central event is the thirty jears war 
between the Rindn and Laftbaris, caused bj the competition of their chiefs for the hand of 
the fair Gohar, the Helen of the legend. The historical element in these stories was 
allude<l to, and also a possible mythical element as shown chieflj in the legend of 
Nodhbandagh, the typical generous man, whose name is almost a literal translation of 
" cloud-compeller.'' 

Some account was also given of the mythical origin of the Baloch race, and of the 
balla^ls which deHcribe their wanderings previous to the great wars, and of the derivation 
of the tribes from eponjmic founders ; a verj modern example of this practice. Legends 
were given accounting for the origin of the names of several tribes. Some appear to be 
niftknames ; one or two possiblj totemic. 

Legends of the saints were then described, most of which are connected with the 
popular shrines of the north-west frontier of India. Some of these are pre-Islamitic, 
possibly Buddhist. 

The ordeal by fire, divination, omens, the casting of lots, and witches were alluded 
to and the superstition regarding the '^ mamm " or were-bear described. Some account 
of customs relating to eating and the erection of tombs and cairns was also given. 

The position of women among the Balochis was discussed, and the general respect 
shown to women and children in war. Insults to women and abductions or elopements 
form a frequent ground for blood feuds. Love is often romantic in its nature ; specimens 
were given of popular love poems in illustration of this ; also of those of a comic nature 
directed against the obnoxious husband. 

The severity of the Baloch code of honour, the murder of wives and lovers by 
injured husbands, and the doctrine of hospitality which prevents the surrender even of 
such fugitives when they take refuge with another tribe, the blood feud and the methods 
employed in settling such feuds were then dealt with. 

The paper concluded with a description of a tribal jirga or council called together 
to deal with outstanding feuds and disputes, and with the merrymakings and feasting, 
the dances and singing which celebrate the reconciliation of the contending parties, and 
with some quotations from poems illustrating the spirit of the freeborn mountaineer. 



Prooeedings. Anthropologioal Institute. 

Ordinary Meeting ^ June 10, 1902, A. C. Haddon, Sc.D., F.R.S., President. Q|| 

The election was announced of the following as ordinary Fellows of the 0£ 

Institute : — Major P. Molesworth Sykes, F.R.G.S., Mr. S. Hazzledino Warren, F.G.S., 

Mr. Dudley D'Auvergne Wright, F.R.C.S. 

Mr. Myres, Secretary of the Anthropological Institute, read a paper *' On an Archaic 

Bronze from Southern Persia." Major P. Molesworth Sykes read a paper entitled 

'^Anthropological Notes in Southern Persia," illustrated with lantern slides and an 

exhibition of ancient bronze implements. • 

The paper was discussed by Messrs. Hogarth, Long worth Dames, Read, Myres, 

and Garson. 

Printed by Etbe akd Spottibwoodx, Hii Majesty^B Printers, East Harding Street, E.C, 



1902.] MAN. [No8. 83-84. 

ORiaiNAL ARTICLES. 
Egrypt, With Plate H. Petrie. 

Prahlttorlo Bsyptlan Pottery. By W. M. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L.y pq 
LL.D,y Edwards Professor of Egyptology in University College, London, OU 

The earliest class of pottery knoivn in prehistoric times in Egypt was the red 
polishel ware, and on almost the earliest examples of this (sequence date 31-34) are 
found the paintings in white line, which belong therefore to the oldest civilisation known 
in the country. Animal figures are not very common on these designs, and the examples 
here shown (Plate H.) are some of the best that I have seen. All the figures are on 
the scale of one third. 

1. Jar with figures of goats on it, drawn in the usual manner. This class of cross- 
lined pottery with very thick white lines has not been found in any of our excavations 
north of Thebes ; it is said to come from Gebeleyn. 

2. Jar with two animals and plant pattern up the side. 

3. Jar with two rows of objects around it, which are otherwise unknown. The 
upper figures might be adzes or hoes, the lower figures are curiously like lictors* fasces, 
but no such forms are known in Egypt ; they may, however, be a form of stone axes set 
in handles. Certainly neither can be the hieroglyphic neter sign, as ihat had double 
projections down to dynastic times. 

4. Jar with a deer and a hedgehog, and plant pattern up the sides. 

6. Large dish with a crocodile filling the bottom of it, and three hippopotami on 
the upper edge. Below the crocodile is a cross pattern which might be intended for 
water ripples. 

6. Small dish with ^ve hippopotami round the sides ; the dish is tilted to show 
o le side completely, and thus the other side is foreshortened. In the middle are three 
fishes. W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. 



Totemism. Hartland. 

An American View of Totemlem: a Note on Mi^or Powell's QM 
Article. Man, 1902. 75. By E. Sidney JlarUand, F.S.A. 0*r 

I entirely agree with Major Powell in the conviction, which evidently underlies his 
remarks, of the necessity of defining oar terms if we would make any progress in the 
study of Totemism. In some respects I am inclined to go farther than be does. For 
example, I demur to uning the terra totem, even when qualified as individual totem, for 
the name assumed by a youth at puberty, or for his protecting spirit or being revealed 
to him during ecstasy. It may be that in the Algonquin languages the olan-totem and 
the individual totem are both called totem. But we have not yet determined the 
relationship between these two orderi of superior beings ; and until we do so I think 
it would be well to denominate them by distinctive names about which there can be no 
confusion. Is there any objection to the word Manitou as the designation of what has 
been called the individual totem ? This word is, I think, actually used by some of the 
American tribes for the purpose ; and its provisional employment by us would tend to 
clearness of expression and of thought. 

Similar observations apply to the presiding genius, or deity, of a shamanistic 
society, and that of a tribe. Confusion must result if we do not keep them separate 
and distinct from those of the clan and the individual, by means of terms which wii 
not prejudge the question of their relations. Major Powell does not refer to what have 
been called sex'totems. They are not an American phenomenon. It seems to me they 
have as much — and as little— claim to be considered totems as the deity of a Qbamanistic 
society. 

[ 113. ] 



1902.] MAN. [Ko. 84. 

I am not clear what Major Powell means when he writes : " Where the clan 
'^ organization prevails all other kindred are recognized, together with the clan kindred 
" as belonging to the tribe, for a tribe is always a bodj of kindred, real or conventional. 
''In the same manner, where the gentile organization prevails, the gens, together with 
" all other kindred, constitute the tribe, while the confederacy is a group of tribes 
'' united for offensive and defensive purposes with artificial kinship established as a 
'' legal fiction/* It has become the practice on this side of the water to use the term 
tribe to mean a local or territorial group, without reference to the question of kindred. 
The reason is this. A band of savages is usually found to consist of more than one 
kindred. Some of the kindreds of which it is composed often acknowledge a kinship 
with one another. A closer kinship, however, may exist between them and kindreds of 
other bands or local organizations. A clan, or a gens, may extend over an indefinite 
area, and may comprise members of many tribes. Peoples organized on the basis of 
mother-right, or of clan, as Major Powell defines the word clan^ are specially liable to 
this scattering of the kindred, because as a rule men do not go to live with their wives 
and their wives' kin, they rather take their wives to live with them and their own kin. 
When the organization is on the basis of father-right, or of the gens, the tendency is to 
concentrate the kin in the local group, though even then the concentration is not always 
complete. The test of kinship is found not merely in the totem or symbol of the kin. 
The right of marriage forms a still more certain test. From whatever cause arising, 
savages have a great horror of incest. To them, incest means marriage or sexual 
relations between persons recognized as belonging, even though remotely, to the 
same kindred. Where totemism exists in full force, marriage and sexual relations are 
absolutely prohibited between members of the same totem. If the tribe consisted of '' a 
body of kindred real or conventional,'' marriage within the tribe would be prohibited. 
If it comprised all the kin, marriage would be permitted with any kin of other tribes. 
But this is very rarely the case. Usually marriage is permitted both within and without 
the tribe. In both cases it is restricted to persons not belonging to the same kindred. 
Moreover, two or more distinct kindreds, whether clans or gentes, are frequently 
recognized as related to one another. This is what I suppose Major Powell means 
when he says : " Every tribe is exogamous in some of its groups, and endogamous in 
" some of the others." For he adds : " Exogamy and endogamy are, therefore, 
" correlative phases of one institution in every tribe in America." In other words, if I 
interpret correctly, the clan or the gens cannot marry into itself, but it has the right 
of connubium with the other clans or gentes within the local group. A given people is 
thus exogamous as to the clan or gens, endogamous as to the local group. Now if the 
kindreds between which a right of connubium exists were recognized as akin to one 
another, the law of incest would apply, and there would be no right of connubium,^ 
There could then be no endogamy of the local group, and the students who have been 
led astray by misunderstanding M'Lennau's doctrine would be right. But it is because 
the inter-marriageable kindreds are not recognized as akin that they have the right of 
connubium. 

The kindred may of course be, as Major Powell says, a mere fiction or convention. 
But as wo in this country use the word tribe the kindred has no necessary connection 
with the tribe. I do not quite understand whether he means to suggest that the kindred 
has such a connection with the local group, that the local group is always recognised as 
consisting of more or less closely related kinsmen. If so, I think, with deference to his 
great authority, that this definition goes beyond the facts. I would submit that the 
term tribe should be used solely in the sense of a local group, and that the terms of 
Major Powell's definition should be modified so as to indicate that there is no necessary 

* I am, of course, writing in general terms ; and there may be exceptions, though I do not recall 
any at the moment. 

[ 114 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 84-85. 

connection between the kindred and the tribe. In advancing this I do not deny that 
sometimes a whole local group may be recognised as akin. I have already said that 
there is a tendency in this direction where the organisation is on the basis of father- 
right. What I want to emphasize is that tribe and kindred have no necessary connection 
either in idea or in fact. 

I am much interested in Major Powell's observations on the practices of the Arunta. 
He rightly describes certain of their ceremonies as analogous to those of the shaman is tic 
societies of America. Two years ago I ventured to call attention to some aspects of 
this analogy, and expressed the opinion in my Presidential address to the Folklore 
Society (Folklore^ Vol. XI., p. 75) that the Arunta organisation was undergoing a slow 
transformation from totemism into something more like the societies of British Columbian 
tribes. There are reasons for believing that the Hopi ceremonial societies have grown 
out of clan-totemism. Among the peoples of the western deserts of North America, 
however, the totemistic system has been to a great extent preserved alongside of the 
ceremonial societies. Among the Arunta, on the other hand, the ceremonial societies 
seem to be absorbing the totemic organisation. The impression left on Major Powell 
by the j)erusal of Dr. Frazer's articles in the Fortnightly Review is that the Arunta 
groups are not totemistic societies at all but shamanistic societies. This cannot be a 
definitive judgment because he had not at the time of writing read the book itself. 
Now that he has done so, as we learn from the postscript, it would be interesting to 
know whether the impression has been confirmed. Perhaps it has been modified. 

The convenient use of the words clan and gens to signify organised groups of 
cognates and agnates respectively, and the important point of the relation between 
savage ceremonies and gesture-language, are deserving of careful consideration, but to 
discuss them here would be to extend this note to an undue length. 

E. SIDNEY HARTLAND. 



85 



Totemism. Thomas. 

An American View of Totemism. (Cf. Man, 1902. 75.) Note by 
N, W, Thomas, 3f.A. 

Major Powell's article makes it clear that terms, whose meaning is compara- 
tively well established in Europe, bear a totally different meaning in America. 
Totemism is, according to him, a system of naming ; shamanism is made equivalent 
to totemism in Dr. Frazer's sense, and a tabu is not a prohibition but an object whose 
use is prohibited. It is true that the works of Dr. Frazer do not seem to be known in 
America, and we may perhaps feel legitimate doubts as to whether the perusal of two 
articles in the Fortnightly Review entitle Major Powell to criticise Dr. Frazer' position. 
But let that pass. 

The mere fact that Major Powell's terminology differs in toto from that in use 
over here is not in itself a condemnation of it, nor yet is the fact that he does not 
understand the European view of totemism an adequate reason for denying the validity 
of his classification. Totem is originally an Algonquin word, and the Americans are 
prima facie the people to whom we should look for an authoritative exposition of 
totemism as it exists in America. The word is used with apparent looseness in Europe ; 
it means, e.g., a system in which the totem is hereditary and which includes exogamy ; 
and it is nevertheless applied to the Arunta system, where neither heredity nor exogamy 
are found. Dr. Frazer even uses the term of such a purely personal and non-collective 
relationship as that between a man and his so-called individual totem. This extended 
use of the term totemism cannot be justified by reference to externals, for in this case 
we should have to regard as totems the cattle of the Bechuanas, in spite of the fact that 
the Bechuanas have a clan system, while the whole tribe, irrespective of clan, seems to 
respect cattle, and that no clan seems to have cattle as its totem. If, therefore^ the 

[ 116 ] • 



1902.] MAN. [No. 86. 

appIicatioQ of the term totetnism to all the claaftes of facts enumerated above is to be 
justified, it must in the end be on the ground of identical meaning. Dr. Frazer takes 
this line of argument, but the attempt to include the individual totem is hardly 
successful ; therefore, until the homogeneity of the three classes of facts above men- 
tioned is established, it would be better to limit the use of the term to one well understood 
meaning, be this what it may. 

Major Powell^s view is, it is true, rather a revolution than a reform in nomenclature 
from the European poiut of view. The real meaning of totemism being, however, still 
a matter of dispute, we may discuss the American view on its merits. The discussion 
will fall naturally into two parts : in the first place, we mpst inquire how far the proposed 
terminology is in itself logical and consistent ; we may then, if necessary, go on to 
discuss (1) how far the definition covers all the facts which it professes to include, and 
excludes the remainder, and (2) how far the classification on which it is based is a 
logical one. 

An examination of Major PowelFs nomenclature shows that he proposes to use the 
word ioiem to mean the following things : — (1) A mark or" clay ; " (2) a body of people 
organised into exo^amous clans ; (3) the name of a body of people ; (4) the name of an 
individual acquired at puberty ; (o) the object from which an individual takes his 
puberty name ; and (6) the object from which a shamanistic society takes its name. 

For the sake of uniformity Major Powell might just as well have iucluded iu the list 
of meanings that of the object from which a clan takes its name (or is the omission acci- 
dental ?), his arrangement would then have had a certain amount of symmetry ; as it is 
I am afraid one cannot even say that for it. It is difficult to see the advantage of a 
system of nomenclature where everything is called by the same name. 

If totem originally meant a mark it might be applied to the object which the mark 
represents ; little or no confusion would arise. But the term cannot be used in scientific 
terminology as the equivalent of clan without the risk of grave confusion. The meaning 
^' clan ^* may well have arisen from a European misinterpretation, the mark being mistaken 
for the clan, because the Amerinds said, ^^ What is your mark ? " when they meant 
" What is your clan ? ^* But it might just as well be maintained that dance in the Bantu 
languages means " clan ^^ because the equivalent inquiry was, " What do you dance ? ^* 
Whether this is so or not the double meaning has no place in anthropological 
terminology. 

Major Powell's terminology being what it is, we need hardly go on to discuss how 
far his definition fulfils its function, nor need we ask how far the facts which he selects 
for the basis of his definition have been wisely selected. So far as the definition goes, 
my grandfather may be my totem if I am baptised at fourteen and named after him. 

By some extraordinary chance Major Powell has selected as the basis of his theory 
of totemism precisely those persons or classes of persons to whom, though with certain 
variations and greater strictness of definition, the European turns in order to study 
totemism. If totemism is merely a system of naming it is difficult to see on what 
principle individuals, clans, and bodies of persons to whom are attributed special powers 
over certain realms of nature and an intimate connection or rapport with the objects 
which they control, can be grouped together. This course is, as we have been, justi- 
fiable only on the supposition that this special rapport is believed to exist, not only in 
the case of the last, but also of the other two classes. How far such a rapport is 
believed to exist in all or any of the classes of facts which Dr. Frazer and, following him, 
many other European students group together as totemism, and what is the nature of 
this supposed rapport we may now proceed to inquire. 

The central idea of African fetichism is that a spirit, which inhabits temporarily a 
stone, bone, or other object, becomes for the time being the servant of the possessor of 
that object. The magioal apparatus is sometimes cpmposed of a bag made of the skin 

* r 116 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No.|S5. 

of 8ome rare aaimal which ooQtaiQS parts of yarioas other animals, sach as dlried monkeys^ 
tails, claws, &c. Amongst other gifts these bags are believed to confer invulnerability ; 
sorcerers are said to carry in them the snakes and other noxious auimals which ttiey 
send out to harry their enemies. The animal thus attached to a sorcerer (his familiar) 
is sometimes regarded as another form of the man himself (it is a world-wide belief that 
sorcerers can assume the form of any animal they choose), sometimes as a species of evil 
spirit infesting him, and sometimes as his only messenger. This same diversity of view 
meets us in the werwolf superstitions. The werwolf is ^ometimcs a transformed man* 
sometimes a form that can be assumed by man at will ; sometimes it is the double and 
sometimes no more than the messenger of the werman. Bearing in mind that the 
sorcerer in animal form can barely be distinguished from the werwolf, it seems that the 
wer-animal was originally the familiar of the werman. (It may be noted in passing 
that the werwolf is frequently believed to return to the corpse of his victim.) 

We may now turn to totemism and consider how far we find analogous beliefs to those 
just cited. It can hardly escape attention that the medicine bag of the Amerind is the 
exact analogue of the fetich bag of the negro, it consists of a bag the contents of 
which are the skin, feathers, or other part of the totem animal. It is carried as an 
amulet and is believed to confer invulnerability on its owner. The basis of individual 
totemism seems to be the same as that of fetichism — the association, permaneut in this 
case, of u spurit with a human being whom he possesses or accompanies. This view is 
borne out by the close relationship between the methods by which the youth obtains his 
totem and the sorcerer his familiar ; in each case the dream is the main factor in the 
operation. So close is this connection betwtren the familiar and the individual totem that 
Dr. Frazer regards them as identical. 

The view that the totem is regarded as an indwelling spirit is also borne out by a 
fact narrated by the Prinz zu Wied {Reise^ II., 190), the importance of which seems to 
have been overlooked. Many Indians, h6 states, believed that they had an animal (bisou, 
tortoise, &c.) in their bodies. 

The wide distribution of individual totemism in America makes it possible to 
explain this as referring to the individual and not the clan totem. But in Australia the 
individual totem seems to be confined to the medicine man. If, therefore, we find a 
similar belief in Australia we may infer that, in chat continent at any rate, it is a part of 
the creed of clan totemism. It is stated of the Geawe-Gal tribe (^Kamilaroi and 
Kurnai, p. 280) ^' apropos of their generic names the Geawe-Gal had a superstition 
'^ that every one had within himself an affinity to the spirit of some beast, bird, or 
reptile ; not that he was sprung from it in any way, but that the spirit which was 
in him was akin to that of the creature.** This belief suggests that the interpretation 
suggested for individual totemism can also be applied to clan totemism. 

It has been mentioned above that the werwolf is believed to return to look at the 
body of his victim. In North Queensland when a sorcerer is suspected of having killed 
a black man, the corpse is placed on a frame and dust or ashes strewn around, if the 
track of some animal or bird is found the next morning the totem of the malefactor is in- 
ferred from it (Journ, Anthr. Insi., XIII., 191, n. 1 ). Elsewhere the spirit of the offender 
was believed to return {loc, ct/.), and in New South Wales the flight of a bird over the 
corpse was believed to indicate the direction in which the enemy would be found (ibid.y 
XIV., 362). These facts seem best interpreted if we suppose that in North Queensland 
the sorcerer is bt lieved to return to animal form and that the form is that of his totem, 
for in no other way does it seem possible to identify the man*s totem by observing the 
footsteps. But if a man is believed to have the {K>wer of assuming the form of his 
totem, the totem is prima facie to be explained like the werwolf and tbe familiar of the 
sorcerer. The werwolf is, as we have seen, in its origin conceived as a spirit obsessing 
a man or associated with him as the familiar is associated with the sorcerer. These 

[ "7 ] 



4i 
i4 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 85-86. 

Australian beliefs, therefore, fall into line with those already cited and confirm the 
suggested view of totcmism. On this theory the essential difference between the totem 
and the fetich is that whereas the human being is regarded as specially associated with 
an individual fetich or totem, totemism also implies a relation between a human being 
and a species. How far this distinction is of importance need not be discussed here. It 
is not difficult to see how totemism, interpreted as I suggest, might, as appears to be 
the case in South Africa, be transformed into a system of animal worship. These 
and other questions, such as the applicability of the theory to group totemism, I leave 
for subsequent consideration. N. W. THOMAS. 



Malay Peninsula, Annandale : Robinson. 

Anthropolofficai Notes on 8ai Kau, a Siamo-Malayan Viliai^e Qg% 
in the State of Nainfnchik (Tojan). By Nelson Annandale and Herbert Qu 
C Robinson, 

The state of Nawnchik (called Tojan by the Malays) is the most northerly of the 
Siamese Malay States, properly so called, on the east coast of the Malay Peninsula ; 
for in Senggora, though there is a large Malayan element, the Siamese are the dominant 
as well as the regnant race. 

The village of Sai Kau is situated on the interior of Nawnchik, about ten miles 
from the coast. The population, is roughly speaking, 600, divided almost equally 
between "Siamese" (Kong Tai) and Malays (Orang Malagu); the two races, if they 
may be called so, do not live together, but inhabit separate hamlets of about twelve houses 
each, divided from one another by rice fields. Each hamlet is under a headman, who is 
called ** eh-ban " ; the different ^^ eh-ban " are responsible to a *^ Tuan eh-ban,^^ who is 
subordinate to an official called " 'Toh Blat " or head of the district. The 'Toh Blat^ 
who in the case of Sai Kau is a Malay, is directly under a Siamese magistrate {hakim). 

The office of '7b/« Blat is purely gratuitous, no salary or special privileges being 
attached to it ; whilst the jurisdiction is strictly limited to minor offences against the 
person, which can be punished by placing the offender in the stocks for not more than 
one day. The duties attached to the office are principally connected with the system of 
forced labour in vogue in the Siamese Malay States. 

The occupations of the people are almost purely agricultural, consisting of the 
cultivation of rice, cocoanuts and betel, and the raising of cattle. Both sexes take part 
in the field work and the women are skilled weavers, there being a loom under nearly 
every house. The men occasionally search for jungle produce on an adjacent mountain 
called locally Bukit Besar (the Great Hill). 

During a residence of three weeks in the house of the ' Toh Blat at this village we 
had excellent opportunities of observing the people and of collecting their implements, 
&c. They made no objection to our taking measurements of their heads and bodies if 
approached in a judicious manner, and we obtained a series representing nearly a 
hundred adults, in most cases with specimens of the hair.* 

Preliminary analysis of these measurements shows no difference between " Malays " 
and " Siamese," but there is evidence of the admixture of an element derived from a 
third, curly-haired race, probably allied to the " Negritoes " of the Peninsula. 

As regards the colour of the skin we could observe no special feature in the case of 
any one type at Sai Kau, the tint depending largely on the relative amount of exposure 
to the sun. As very little clothing of any kind was worn, on the whole it was fairly 
uniform, ranging from a yellowish to a dark reddish-brown. 

A small proportion of the people had fairly abundant hair on the body. 

* In returning the proofs of this paper Mr. Aunaudale adds that these measurcmcuts wore taken 
with proper anthropometrical instrumentSi and that the inBtructions given in Ant hropnUtg leal Sotc* ami 
Queries were followed exactly. — Ed. 

[ 118 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 86. 

• At Sai Kau a boy is considered marriageable at 15 and a girl at 12, but the 'Toh 
Blat and the Tuan eh-ban assured us emphatically that there were girls in the village 
who had borne children at 10 years of age. Twins are considered a rarity, but are not 
looked upon with any suspicion. 

Juvenile mortality is said to be high and to result chiefly from worms, fever, and 
'* diseases of the eyes and stomach.*' Many old people die of pulmonary affections 
and of fever (i.e., malaria). Skin diseases are common, especially among the smaller 
children. 

The marriage customs of the Siamese appear to have become assimilated to those 
of the Malays, and certain articles of ceremonial use, such as the ornament called 
" Bunga-nasiy''^ which is placed on the top of the rice that the bride and bridegroom 
partake of together, and the racks for " sireh '' leaf that they exchange, are used in 
identical forms by the two peoples. 

The bride is sold by her parents for from 10 to 20 dollars or their equivalent in 
kind, but she cannot be forced to marry a man whom she does not like. If her parents 
refuse to permit her marriage with the man of her choice she frequently elopes. 

The bridegroom goes, as a matter of course, to the house of the bride^s father^ but 
he need not stay there^ unless he wishes to do so, for more than three or four days. The 
bride camiot be forced to leave her parents' roof, but if she refuses to accompany her 
husband home he can divorce her, and receive back the dowry in full. Neither 
unmarried girls nor married women are secluded in any way, and they even eat with 
the men. 

The Malays are buried in a cemetery adjacent to the village in which tomb-ports 
of the ordinary type are to be seen ; the Siamese practise cremation, possibly with 
preliminary tree burial.* 

The general intelligence of the people appears to be of a low type, many of the 
adult males being unable to count up more than ten at a time ; and we found it necessary 
in settling accounts to reckon up every ten cents separately. A few cannot even count 
so high as ten, and one man actually sold us some fowls for 12 cents (^^dua blasduit "), 
which his wife had told him to sell for 20 ('' dua puloh "), without knowing that 
he had made a mistake. However, we found that three Malay coolies from the village, 
who spent a mouth in our service, were capable of picking up the little that was 
requised of them with a fair degree of rapidity ; while one of the three was an excellent 
jungle guide, being looked upon as a honey *'^pawang " (magician), whom the bees 
would not sting. 

The clothing worn by the men consisted of a waist cloth and a loose wrap occa- 
sionally worn over one shoulder. As a rule the head is bound round with a fillet of 
palm-leaf or a wreath of flowers, and a brilliantly coloured blossom is sometimes worn 
behind one ear. The women dress in a short Malay " sarong " and a wrap that usually 
covers the breasts, and except when carrying weights they wear no headgear. 

All the home-made cloth we saw was decorated with simple check patterns, not 
unlike those of Highland tartans ; indigo, a kind of logwood, and yellow were the 
favourite dyes. 

The common language of both peoples is the Senggora dialect of Siamese mixed to 
a certain extent with Malay words, which when dissyllabic are pronounced rather as if 
each syllable were a distinct word. Sometimes a word is taken over from one language 
to the other without change, c.^., tudn^ lord or master, but " kris " becomes " An/," and 
*' rehaly'^ an Arabic word, meaning a reading-stand, is changed to ^^jehdlJ*^ All the old 
Malays, and many of the younger men, can speak a dialect of Malay which appears to 



* Mr. Annandale adds, on this point, " We have discovered that tree burial (preliminary to tree 
" barial, or not, as the energy of the deceased's relatives may decree) does occur in villages south of 
** Sai Kau, as it also does in the more northern states." — Sd. 

[ 119 ] 



1902.3 MAN. CNo. M. 

be no more affected by Siamese influences than that spoken in the adjacent States to 
the south ; but it is very rare for a Siamese to learo Malay. 

The art of the village, which is more elaborated than in many parts of the Malay 
Peninsula, is largely Siamese, but many of the patterus in common use are derived 
directly from flowers and animals ; we found it was impossible to distinguish between 
the articles made and used by the Malays and those of the Siamese. The Mahommedans 
here have no scruple in producing as realistic representations of living things as is in 
their power. The bamboo shuttles especially are elaborately decorated with incised 
patterns, many of which are named after different kinds of flowers and creepers ; but 
representations of the rafters of a house and other artificial products also occur. In 
addition to a pattern called " gambar orang ^^ (images of men) that is scratched on one 
of these shuttles, and consists of a vertical straight line with two pairs of slanting 
lines meeting it and a small arch at the top, it is possible to distinguish two types of 
anthropomorphic design. The one- that was chiefly found on children's toys was 
almost realistic, but was embellished with purely decorative lines ; the other, confined 
entirely to the wooden heads of adze-handles and the sheaths of jungle knives, was 
much conventionalized, and often degenerated into a mere knob representing the nose. 

The only musical instruments we heard were bamboo flutes, toy whistles made of 
clay or bamboo, a Jew's harp, and various forms of drums, but there was said to be at 
least one stringed instrument (^' rebat '') in the village. Old flint locks and converted 
^* Tower'' muskets are in use, the people making their own powder. Saltpetre and 
charcoal are obtained locally, and the sulphur is said to be brought from a ^' sulphur 
mountain " in the interior of Seuggora. The kris is worn by Siamese as well as Malays 
when travelling, the form of hilt in common use being that known as **" hulu tqjang " 
(sometimes called " hulu ptrhaka^'* or kingfisher handle). The favourite weapon of both 
peoples is a knife with a curved blade and no sheath, also used as a jungle knife and 
household implement ; but at least one form of this weapon is becoming obsolete, 
murders being rare and local warfare extinct under the Siamese administration. A 
simple form of pellet bow is used for shooting birds, the missiles being either seeds or 
pellets of baked clay ; we also collected a rat-trap in which the principle of the bow 
and arrow appeared. 

A marked feature of the ethnography of the village is the number of children'^ toys 
that are made. They are mostly either wooden copies of weapons or brightly-coloured 
figures of animals, and we also obtained a toy palanquin used by children for carrying 
" tireh " leaf when playing at weddings. 

Fire is produced either by a flint and steel, or, more rarely, by a fire syiinge. The 
fire drill appears to be quite obsolete, and Japanese lucifer matches, which could he 
bought in the village two years ago, have gone out of use in consequence of the imprison- 
ment for murder of the local Chinese trader. Live embers are often carried from house 
to house in cocoanut shells* 

Among the household articles in common use we may mention a machine used for 
separating the seeds from cotton ; were it not of a type common in the neighbouring 
£ast Coast States it would appear to demonstrate a higher degree of mechanical 
knowledge in the shaping of the cogs than might be expected at Sai Kau. 

The weighing-beam may also be noted. In form it somewhat resembles the 
Scandinavian '' bismar," having no moveable weights ; but as no scale is marked upon 
the beam it is designed rather to weigh out a fixed quantity than to ascertain an 
unknown weight. No specimen of this type that we saw was adapted to weigh out 
more than two quaniities, one a sixteenth part of the other, this being effected by the 
use of two fixed suspending strings. 



120 



1902.] Man. [Not. 87-4S. 

REVIEWS. 
South Africa. Theal. 

Progress of South Africa in the Century, By George McCall Tbeal, D.Litt., Q"p 
LL.D. Loodon and Edinburgh : W. & R. Chambers, Ltd., 1902. Price 5*. 01 

But little of this profoundly interesting book relates to anthropological studies. 
Two of the introductory chapters describe the Bushmen, the Hottentots, and the Bantu 
in general terms, including a sketch of their customs and institutions. A history of the 
dealings of the white population with them occupies of course a large part of the book. 
It is necessary to an understanding of the present position of the ^' native ^' races in 
South Africa. It does not, however, throw much light directly upon the problems 
presente<l by the social and religious institutions and the mental characteristics and 
attainments of the population. Yet to those readers to whom Dr. TheaPs larger works 
are inaccessible, and who desire to gain an insight into the most difficult questions in 
South African politics, the story of the relations between the white and coloured peoples 
will prove of much value. The urgency of a thorough consideration of our future 
policy towards the '^ natives " is evident on the most superficial view of the facts. 
The Bantu race is ^^ probably the most prolific on the face of the earth.^^ Since its 
destructive wars were brouj^ht to an end it doubles its numbers every 25 years. The 
racial feeling on the part of the Bantu is very strong, and it seems to be aggravated by 
education. ^' To keep the large number of Bantu in order e'VQvy possible effort,** says 
Dr. Theal in his final chapter, *^ is made to treat them justly and kindly, and to interfere 
*' no more than is prudent and necessary for their own good. So far it has always been 
'* possible in cases of emergency to oppose one tribe to another, but their old feuds are 
^' now rapidly dyiug out, and this system, even if it were advisable to continue it, can 
*'*' no longer be depended upon. As they are subject to excitement and liable to commit 
'^ themselves to hostilities without any sufficient reason apparent to Europeans, it is 
^' necessary to keep an armed force in reailiness to suppress any outbreak before it has 
*' time to spread.** These statements emphasise the wisdom of an immediate inquiry 
upon scientific lines into the native customs and conditions, recently urged upon the 
Government by the Anthropological Institute and the Folklore Society. The war is 
now at last over, and it is to be hoped that some serious attention will soon be paid to 
the matter by the Colonial Office. 

On the questions between the Dutch and English populations, fully treated in this 
volume down to the outbreak of the war, this is not the place to offer an opinion. 

E. SIDNEY HARTLAND. 



Philippines. Eoeze. 

Crania Ethnica Philippinica^ ein Beitrag zur Anthropologie der Philippinen, qQ 
Von G. A. Koeze. Haarlem : H. Kleinmann & Co., 1902. OO 

In Man, 1901. 149, an abstract was given of the first part of Koeze*s treatise on the 
crania of the Philippine Islanders, in which the general purport of the work was 
stated, and a summary of the characters of the tribe named Visayas was given. In this 
part the author completes the description, partially given in the first part, of the tribe 
known as Igorrots, The skulls examined some years ago by Virchow and ascribed to 
these people were mesocephalic with a marked tendency to be dolichocephalic. The 
twelve skulls measured by Koeze were in no instance actually dolichocephalic, seven were 
mesocephalic and five were markedly brachy cephalic, so that the mean length-breadth 
index wah 80*5. Nine of the twelve crania were hypsicephalic. The mean cubic capacity 
of the males was 1,460 c.c, of the females 1,335 c.c. The face was long, leptoprosopic. 
The nose showed much variety, the index ranged from 41*5 to 56*8, with the mean 
of 50*1. In four4he nose was platyrfaine, in four mesorhine, in three leptorhine. The 
general asi)ect of the face was prognathic, but in six of the skulls measured only two 

[ 121 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Vos. 88-89. 

were strongly prognathic, two were mesognathic, and two orthognathic. The type of 
skuH in the Igorrots is regarded by Koeze as hypsimesocephalic, leptoprosopic, 
mesorhine, hypsophthalmic, mesognathous, and leptostaphyline. They are not pure 
Malays, though they have Malayan characters, such as the occurrence of hrachy- 
cephalism. He regards them as being of an Indonesian type. 

Koeze also examined thirteen crania of the Ilocanos^ who occupy the provinces 
Ilocos Norte on the coast, I locos Sur, Abra, and La Union. They are mingled with the 
Igorrots. All the crania, with one exception, were brachycephalic, and the exceptional 
specimen had an index 79. The maximum length-breadth index was 88*3 and the 
mean was 83*8, which is the highest in the series of Philippine crania. Twelve crania 
also were hypsicephalic, the mean index being 7b*6. The mean cubic capacity of the 
male skulls was 1,495, of the females about 160 c.c. lower. The face was usually 
leptoprosopic. Three skulls were prognathic, six mesognathic, four orthognathic. In 
eight skulls the nasal index was strongly platyrhine, three were mesorhine, and only 
two were leptorhine. Koeze makes the following general statement regarding these 
crania : brachyhypsicephalic, leptoprosopic, mesognathous, strongly platyrhine, meso- 
ophthalmic, leptostaphyline. He considers them to be the purest stock of Malays in the 
Philippine Archipelago, although doubtless they have a measure of intermixture with 
other races. 

Koeze gives a partial description of the crania of the TagbanuaSy a tribe as yet 
but little known to Europeans, but defers the remainder to the next part of his memoir. 
Both parts 1 and 2 are illustrated by a number of figures of skulls reproduced in 
phototype. WILLIAM TURNER. 



Crete. Boyd Dawkins. 

Skulls from Cave Burials at Zakro in Eastern Crete, By W. Boyd Dawkins f%fk 
(in Annual of the British School of Archceology^ 1900-1, pp. 150-155). Ou 
Loudon: Macmillan. 8vo. IO5. 6rf. 

It is not often, we imagine, that the readers of the Annual of the British School 
of Archa)ology in Athens are confronted with a paper on skulls ; but both the authorities 
and the supporters of that admirable institution are to be congratulated ou the wide and 
liberal view of its scope which is exhibited in the current volume of its publications. 
With the elaborate, though still admittedly preliminary, monograph of Dr. A. J. Evans 
on his excavations in the prehistoric Palace of Knossos, and with Mr. Hogarth^s 
archa3ological discoveries in the east of Crete we are not at the moment concerned ; but 
it seems worth while to make prompt recognition of a brief but very valuable addition to 
our knowledge of Mediterranean man on his physical side, which is contributed by 
Professor Boyd Dawkins in his paper on Skulls from Cave Burials at Zakro (pp. 150- 
155, with Plato VI., reproduced, by permission, herewith). 

The skulls in question, three in number, were found in cavea in the steep sides of 
the Zakro gorge, which runs down in a sheltered cove on the east coast of the island, 
and contains numerous other traces of Neolithic (?) and Bronze Age settlements, which are 
described elsewhere in the volume. One of the skulls, apparently that of a woman, and 
very perfectly preserved, came from an untouched cist grave, showing contracted buriai 
and containing a clay vessel of primitive style with incised rectilinear ornamentatioi: 
The others were from shattered cists bard by, and one of them was too fragmentary to be 
measured in full. All three skulls are typical examples of the common early jEgean 
type ; with breadth index, •752-*740 ; height index, "691 ; alveolar index, •900-'98l ; 
nasal index, •480-'478 ; and orbital index, •871-'815. These characters Professor Boyd 
Dawkins shows to be closely comparable to those of the skulls from Hissarlik, Menidi, 
and Cumre {cf those from Erganos in Crete, published, as the editor of the Annual notes, 
by Sergi xnAmer, Journ, ArchceoLy 2nd series, V .3, p. 315), and of some from the more 

[ 122 ] 



a..rk Me.lit« 



rNoB. 89-90. 




1902.] MAN. 

mongrel Bcries troni Ilanai Tepe in llie Troinl (Virt 
p. 130 ff,), HO thai these skulls represent ilie "an 
ure iiboriKinn! in Crete 
as ID the nClier IsIildUa 
of the Meiii terra utiftn. 

Ill oontrwt with 
this lioliclioPL- p h a I i o 
series (of which Diu 
full details are given in 
tabnlar form, p. 1-'>2) 
HrofuHBor Boyd Daw- 
kins coiteels details nf 
nine examples of a quite 
distinct hmchyi-'ephnlli; 
type with hreadlh iii- 
des, ■782--«67, whidi 
ia ftlmoBt equally wi'lolv 
distrihiited iu the 
JEgetin. at Uiesiirlik in the Troad, Spata, and the Dipylou in Attica, Nauplia am 
Mykeuffi in Argolis, and Autiparos in the Cyclades, and whose presence in the Troad ii 
further indicated by the 
higher indices ('780, 
•776, -774) among thn 
mixed series from Hanai 
Tepe already montioued. 
This brae hy cepha- 
lic series the author is 
iuclineil to correlate 
(with Sorgi and Kipley) 
with the rouud-hiiaded 
peoples of Central 
Europe ; and to regard 
as intrusive iu the 
JEgean area about thi; 
period oF the iniroilur 
tion of bronze. In this 

eveul, llie specimens from Htssarlik and Antipuros would be very early examples of itij 
occurrence, for they both belong to strata of the earliest days of metal use, wheu mere 
impure copper was still far commoner than tme bronze ; and in view of recent specula- 
tions on the ethnological history of the JEgean, it will be important to keep in mind 
the existence of this evidence for a very early admixture. In these parts, of a uou- 
Mediterraneau type and not neceaaarily from the European side. J. L. MVKES. 




I 



Bellgrlou. Lang*. 

Magic and Religion. By Andrew Lang. Loadou : Longmans, Green & Co., qm 
1901. 8vo. pp. vii, 316. Price 10». 6d. uU 

Mr, Lang is an iudefati(;able con tro vers laliat. Not content with having demolished 
the solar school of mythology he now tume his attention to the vegetarians — the Covent 
Garden school he happily designates them — and protests against the theory iliat the 
majority of the pantheon are only sublimated com spirits, 
t 123 ] 



I90lj MAN. [Ko. 90. 

The greater part of the present volume is an attack on Dr. Frazer^s Sacaea-Zagmuk- 
Purim theory. Most anthropologists are agreed that Dr. Frazer*8 '* light bridges of 
hypothesis^* have broken down. Mr. Lang would probably have been more effective 
if be had not been quite so lengthy. The moral of the 130 pages devoted to the 
demolition of Dr. Frazer is, in brief, that complete monographic treatment of the 
component elements should precede the building up of gigantic hypbotheses like 
the Golden Bough, This moral is emphasised by the criticisms brought forward in a 
later chapter on the " Ghastly Priest/* in which Mr. Lang dissents from Dr. Frazer*8 
presentation of the facts with regard to the Golden Bough itself ami the Grove of 
Nemi. 

Mr. Lang's treatment of Dr. Frazer's theory of religion is less happy. The 
question is at the bottom an abstract one. Dr. Frazer has definetl religiou in such a 
way as to exclude from its scope certain mental states which Mr. Lang regards as 
religious. Criticism of Dr. Frazer*s position would have been none the less effective for 
being entirely on abstract lines. Mr. Lang has, however, preferred to drag in Baiame 
and other *' high gods '' of Australia to enforce his point. His object in so doing is a 
double one ; he wishes first of all to refute Dr. Frazer's *' selfish " theories of the origin 
of religion by showing that there are gods who receive neither prayer nor sa<:rifi(e, and 
secondly to put forward once more his own hypothesis that the most backward races 
known to us have, by the light of reason, arrived at a conception of a lii^^her power who 
sanctions conduct, and is a father, and a loving one, to all mankind. Now, Mr. Lang 
admits} that Twanyirika, the great spirit of the Aruntas, is very probably uothing more 
than a bugbear invented to keep the women and children in order. Inasmuch as the 
knowledge of many of the other '' high gods '* was religiously kept from the women, 
the unsophisticated mind would be disposed to come to the conclusion that they, too, 
were originally bugbears. IF, therefore, any Australian gods do answer to Mr. Lang's 
description above quoted it is at most a mere hypothesis that they were in the beginning 
anything more than bugbears. Dr. Frazer is attacked for transforming his hypotheses 
into axioms. In the case before us Mr. Laug's hypothesis, when it appears before us, 
is already in the axiom state. He does not even consider the possibility that the *' high 
gods ** are, or were, mere bugbears. But, in the absence of proof that they are not 
bugbears, Mr. Lang's criticism of Dr. Frazer is harmless. A bugbear god is, perhaps, 
not foreseen in Dr. Frazer's statement of his theory which affirm the *'*' selfish '* origin of 
religion but the belief in one in no way invalidates the theory ; a bugbear god cannot 
well have been created for any but selfish ends. If Mr. Lang has not succeeded in 
shaking Dr. Frazer^s position in this portion of his argument he has also not done 
anything to strengthen his own position. It is no part of his theory that a bugbear 
has been evolved into a moral and benevolent governor of the universe ; but his own 
statements suggest that the " high gods ** of Australia have come into being by this 
process. 

There is no denying that a certain glamour is cast over an author^s theories if he 
puts them forward in a wholly different controversy in which he himself is in the right 
and his opponent in the wrong. There is another side to the chapter under discussion, 
and here Mr. Lang scores. As we have already mentioned, the question is at the 
bottom one of definition. Most people will be with him in his criticism of Dr. Frazer's 
definition of religion. But it is one thing for a critic to be right on the general issue 
and another thing for his arguments to be free from fallacies. If Dr. Frazer is wrong 
it does not follow that Mr. Lang proves it by his arguments, still less does it follow that 
Mr. Lang, in overthrowing Dr. Frazer, proves his own position to be right. In the 
interests of truth it is unfortunate that Mr. Lang should have been successful in giving 
a different impression ; from his presentation of the case it might be imagined that, the 
" selfish " theory done with, rothing remains but to believe in the " high gods." 

[ 124 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 90-91. 

Into the question of the '* otiose creator ^' in America and elsewhere space will 
hardly permit us to enter at length. It would be interesting to learn what Mr. Lang 
means by speaking of the '* cult '* of Ahone and other beings who receive neither prayer 
nor sacrifice. Mr. Lang might be asked to show that these beings are anything more 
than mythological Mrs. Harrises, invented to explain how things came to be ; even if 
they are sometiiing more they need stand no higher than the coyote and other animals 
who figure as creators in savage myths. Or will Mr. Lang, who insists in the value of 
ctontradictory instancei*, tell us that the latter myths are not religion ? 

In the chapter on "Taboos — Firstfruits," we have a curious sidelight on Mr. Lang^s 
views on totemfsm. Savage tribes must have had names, he says (^but why so universally 
animal names, we may ask ?). The name suggested a mystic connection between clan 
and animal. This mystic connection was explained on the theory of kinship, and common 
decency suggested that it was improper to eat the animal relative. This theory of 
Mr. Lang's does not appear to explain much ; but it may be noted that it assumes the 
local totemism of the Arunta to be the primitive form. But the singular thing about 
his theory of totemism is that it appears in a chapter the main point of which is that 
the eating of firstfruits is not ritual ; among the Arunta the eating of the totem of the 
clan was, according to Mr. Lang, merely a sign that the close season for the totem 
animal was over ; it was not a religious ceremony. In Mr. Lang^s view, therefore, 
"common decency** does not prevent the totem clan from committing cannibalism once 
a year in cold blood, merely pour encourager les autres and as a sign that the close 
time for their relatives was over. Is this really Mr. Lang's ideal of social morality ? 

The book contains other chapters, some intimately connected with the main theses, 
some remotely and some not at all. Miscellanies of this sort can hardly be anything 
but ephemeral literature. Perhaps, too, if Mr. Lang were a little less fond of a running 
fight with any adversary who comes across his path the net result of his works would 
be greater. It would certainly be easier to judge of the precise value of his criticisms 
and his theories. N. W. T. 



Egrypt. Wiedemann. 

The Realms of the Egyptian Dead, By K. A. Wiedemann, Ph.D., Professor Q4 
of Egyptology in the University of .Bonn, No. J. of "The Ancient East" Series. w I 
London : David Nutt, 1901. Pp. 84. Price, Is. 

The "oeuvre de vulgarisation " has not hitherto found much favour in Germany, 
the land of the " Gelehrter." But the publication of the series " Aus dem alten Orient,** 
of which " The Ancient East ** series, now being published by Mr. Nutt, is a translation, 
shows that the idea of popularisation has at last " caught on ** in Germany. The English 
translations of the German originals are announced as " a series of short, popular, but 
thoroughly scientific series by the leading scholars of Germany, setting forth the 
recent discoveries and investigations in Babylonian, Assyrian, and Egyptian history, 
religion, and archseology, especially as they bear upon the traditional views of early 
Eastern history.** The first volume amply beans out this description. Professor 
Wiedemann is the first German authority upon Egyptian religion, and his conclusions are 
the more valuable from the fact that he is a conservative scholar, and is by no means 
prone to the fault of constantly running after some new thing. The anthropologist 
especially will find his little book very useful, as Professor Wiedemann has, in a short 
compass, succeeded in briefly touching upon almost all the points of Egyptian belief 
which are of most importance from the anthropological point of view. 

The following passage may be especially commended as giving a most admirable 
summary of the main peculiarities of Egyptian religion (p. 17) : — *^ • . the entire 
" absence of systematic thought that characterised the Egyptians . . . permitted 
'* them to write and to believe the most contradictory doctrines at one and the same time. 

[ 126 ] 



4i 

U 
44 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 91-92. 

" Thej never made any attempt to put their own religion into systematic form, to reject 
'^ what was contradictory to the main dogmas, and to make these consistent with one 
*' another. On the other hand, they faithfully retained all that their ancestors had once 
^* helieved, together with all that later generations had added, uutrouhled hy the various 
'* modes of thought that existed side hy side and mingled together. In this religious 
^^ conglomerate the people received first all the various local cults which, arising from a 
'^ common basis, had in different city and village temples gradually attained an indepen- 
^' dent and often very peculiar development. There remained also the ancient faiths in 
'^ their original forms as once held among the various tribes from which the Egyptian 
" people had sprung in primitive times, so that primitive Semitic, primitive Lybian 
" (sic ! presumably a fault of the printer), and many other conceptions present themselves 
" side by side in bewildering variety. Nor is this all. Within historic times many 
" systems of religious thought were borrowed from neighbouring nations and added 
" without modification to the Egyptian stock, so that the Semitic Baal and Astarte, 
" together with their companion deities, found equally accredited places alongside the 
^' native gods of Egypt. It was long believed that this confusion of religious ideas was 
" to be found in later texts only. Since the inscriptions in the pyramids of the Fifth 
<^ and Sixth Dynasties have come to light we know that this chaos is as old as any 
" literary Egyptian tradition. No doubt it must have come about gradually, but the 
" period of its development lies beyond our knowledge of the Egyptian people. Hence 
" it seems useless to indulge in hypotheses regarding its course, which may be shattered 
" by any stroke of a spade, any new discovery of a text. In the present state of our 
*' knowledge a cautious student will confine himself to stating the separate dogmas, 
" examining their changes during Egyptian history, and inquiring (sic) into their 
" meaning. The question of their origin and of their age is better left on one side." 

Professor Wiedemann has, however, left undiscovered two points which are closely 
related : the henotheistic tendency of the Egyptian worshipper, which is evident in 
many hymns and prayers, though not in the volume of garbled and misunderstood spells 
which we call the Book of the Dead, and the undoubted existence of an Egyptian idea 
of TO Osloy, p-nutiry a divine unity underlying the confused crowd of gods, and give us 
an idea which often rises to the height of a monotheistic tendency. It may further be 
very much doubted whether the hymn quoted on p. 8 can really be taken to imply the 
existence of an Egyptian deluge-tradition. The sentence, " The lands would be [even 
" now] the dominion of the flood (sic^ a badly-chosen word) were they not under thy 
" sway " refers simply to the primeval watery chaos, not to a " flood." 

The translator's work has been well done, but the bibliography is incomplete : 
Dr. Budge's recent books on " Egyptian Religion " and " Egyptian Magic " are not 
mentioned, for instance. H. H, 

Arabia. Nolde. 

Reise iiach Inner-arabien, Kurdistan und Armenieny 1892 . By Baron Edward QA 
Nolde. pp. xv-272. Brunswick : Vieweg, 1895. w£ 

It is somewhat late in the day to notice this book. Our excuse must be that it is 
so little known in this country. The Royal Geographical Society does (or did 
recently) not possess a copy, and the present writer, though aware for some years 
of the outline of Nolde's achievement, has never seen his final account till now. 
Nolde was the last European to reach High Nejd, and his account of his visit to Hail 
and Mohammed ibn Bashid^s camp in the spring of 1893 alone breaks the silence which 
has brooded over Central Arabia since Huber's murder in 1885. Now that European 
attention has once more been turned thither by the warfare of Mohammed^s nephew and 
successor with Kuweit, and most recently by the news that Riadh has once more freed 
itself from Hail, from which event will result in all probability a revival of Wahabism, 

[ 126 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Ko. 92. 

we may be allowed to dwell a momeDt, however belated, on the only Western report 
made on the country at first hand for nearly 20 years. 

Nolde. who had been a volunteer in the Carlist and Chilian Wars, besides fighting 
for his own country in 1870, set out from Damascus on New Year's Day, 1893, for Hail. 
He travelled very much en prince^ in fact, like a great noble of the Middle Ages, 
himself mounted on a superb Arab steed, to which he often refers as having gained 
him distinguished consideration in the eyes of every Nejdean. His personal retinue was 
36 men, and his Turkish escort as far as the frontier at Jauf consisted of 25 troopers. 
Some 70 camels bore his attendants and baggage. This was no doubt the way to gain 
the heart of the great Bedawin Emir, and secura such a reception as no previous 
European had ever experienced at his hands ; but it was not the way to share Arab 
life or come very near the people. 

Nolde travelled by Bozra and the Wadi Sirhan to Jauf without incident. There 
he had some difficulty in convincing the Emir's lieutenant, the ex-slave Johar, of his 
bona Jides, but on sending back his Turkish escort was received, well entreated, and 
shown a new way across the Nefud, easier than that taken by Palgrave and the Blunts. 
On this route water is last drawn from the pool of Hoa, some 40 miles S.E. of Jauf, 
and found again at the Emir*s fort of Haianieh, about 180 miles distant. This desert 
tract was passed in five days' march, during which a heavy snowfall was experienced. 
Immense herds of camels, belonging to the Roala, were found grazing about Haianieh, 
proving the hold that the Emir of Hail then possessed over this great tribe. In fact, 
more than one branch of the Anazeh was helping him at that moment to suppress the 
revolt of the Wahabite oases and Bedawins of Southern Nejd. 

Arrived at Hail, Nolde found the Emir absent, and had some trouble at first with 
his viceroy, Hamud. Latent Wahabism tended to show itself in face of the giaur ; 
but the fame of his horse, the advent of rain, news of a great victory of the Emir, and, 
finally, a cordial invitation received from the latter, set things right, and the stranger 
was even invited into the Hail mosques and schools. After a short stay, he proceeded 
through Kasim to the Emir's camp between Aneiza and Riadh, and some 40 miles from 
the latter. There he was treated as his own Emperor would like to have been treated, and 
saw all the chivalry of the desert and the greatest army of Shammar, Anazeh, and Harb 
warriors ever collected. After 10 days of constant intercourse (through interpreters, 
presumably) with the Emir, Nolde was sent on his way rejoicing to Meshed All, Kerbela, 
and Bagdad. 

He thus had a great opportunity ; but not only the way in which he elected 
to travel but his own predilections did not dispose him to use it to the best advantage. 
Arms, rather than the man, interested him ; if the latter at all, then mainly in his 
military aspect. Of the Arab horse and the camel he made some study, as noble beasts 
for war. Of manners and customs of the people, either in the waste or in the oases, we 
hear very little, and of that little not all is credible. For instance, the stories of the 
prohibition of smoking in Hail do not tally with what we know of its auti Wahabite 
spirit, and sound like interpreters' scares. Though desert travelliug is monotonous, it is 
not so devoid of incident and interest as Nolde found it. But it is evidently not merely 
his sympathy that was there at fault, but his eyes and his power of description. 
A Crusader could hardly teach us less in proportion to the ground he covered. 

We have to thank Nolde, then, so far as concerns Arabia, for some account of Hail 
in 1893, containing, however, nothing new ; for a passing notice of Aneiza, a description 
of a Bedawin war camp on a great scale, a superficial study of the greatest Arab of the 
century, and some light on the course of Central Arabian history as exemplified in the 
struggle of the oasis religious spirit with the Bedawin indifierentism of Jebel Shammar, 
but for practically nothing else ; and, when he is come to Kurdistan, for the local history 
of the wars between Tarkish soldiery and the Hamawand robber hordes. That he should 

[ 127 ] 



1903.] MAN. [IToB. 93-04. 

have passed through so much and told us so little about it is much to be regretted, but 
we have to do evidently with an extreme type of an adventurer, who was insensible to 
quieter interests than fighting and kept moving meteoricallj from one intense personal 
excitement to another, till the end came bj his own hand in London in 1895. D. 6. H. 



Mythology. Hewitt. 

History and Chronology of the Myth-making Age, By J. F. Hewittt, late QQ 
Commissioner of Chutia Nagpur. London : James Parker & Co., 190L Pp. wU 
xlvii + 682. Price 15*. 

Those who have studied the author's previous work,TAc Ruling Races of Prehistoric 
Times^ will know what to expect from this volume, which is, in the main, a restatement 
of his views. Like George Eliot's Mr. Casaubon, he has a theory which attempts to 
co-ordinate and explain all the mythologies of the world. This ia a task which obviously 
requires qualifications different from those which Mr. Hewitt possesses ; in fact, it is 
quite certain that with our existing knowledge such a synthesis as he attempts is not 
possible. Further, he does not possess that grace of style and capacity for a well- 
ordered statement of his conclusions which would render the argument intelligible. 

The main position appears to be that the village community and ultimately much 
of the world's social economy and mythology took its origin from the Dravidian forest 
tribes of Central India. The early beliefs of these people are said to have started with 
the worship of *' the Pole Star in the North and the central starless void in the South," 
and they began their year with the time when the Pleiades first set after the sun on 
1st November. Then followed an age of ** Lunar-Solar " worship, the world being 
regarded as '^ an egg laid by the great cloud-bird," and apparently this cosmogony was 
introduced by immigrants from India to the valley of the Euphrates, where they joined 
forces with the Ugro-Finn races from the north. 

These conclusions, and much more of the same kind, rest on a series of explanations 
of the names of gods and analogies of myth and ritual, much of which is obviously 
disputable. In fact, all speculations such as these which assign the development of 
the world's culture from one definite area are open to the gravest suspicion. It seems 
more reasonable to suppose that human nature being much the same everywhere, the 
first gropings after a social and religious life may have taken place indefinitely on more 
or less analogous lines. 

But though Mr. Hewitt's method may be mistaken, it is impossible not to admire the 
courage with which he has attempted the solution of a problem such as this, and the 
ingenuity with which he has reared so vast a fabric on such very slender foundations. 
He has a good practical knowledge of the forest races among which a large part of his 
life was spent, and if he would abandon for the time the attempt to find a '^ key to all 
the mythologies," and devote himself to a monograph on the social and religious life 
of those little-known people, he might produce a work of permanent interest and value, 

W. CROOKE. 



PROOEEDINGS OF SOOIETIES. 
Proceedings. Anthropological Institute. 

Summer Excursion to Cambridge, — On Saturday, July 5, at the invitation of €%A 
Dr. Haddon, the President, the Fellows of the Anthropological Institute visited w i 
Cambridge. Visits were paid to the Fitzwilliam Museum, the Museum of Archaeology and 
Ethnology, where the members were received by Baron Von Hflgel, and the Anatomical 
Museum. After tea in the Fellows' gardens at Christ's College, a visit was paid to the 
Torres Strait and Sarawak collections, brought home by the Cambridge Expedition to 
the Torres Strait. The Fellows then dined together in Christ's College Hall. 

Printed by Etbb avd Bpottiswoodk, Hit Majestj't Printers, East Harding Street, E.G. 




Man, 1902. Platb I-J. 



VERTICAL INDEX 



<y 71 yy 9X 




Z «: 



i( 9 



12 i 



M •* 



m 19 M a» 



n ts §0 9$ 




n n t» Bs 




t « 



n %» 99 





il^^Jl U. £1. 



» nr 4» M- 




n rs u 99 



<7 n rr M 



m 




ft « 



7# xs i« «r 




ft « 



M7 79 «« «f 





ft % 



It ;» 



^ % 



n IS 9* 99 



n 79 to t$ 



70 7S 





y» TS 99 9S 



en 




X 



"n rs 99 »s 




n 7s 90 »s 





<y y 7 " 



» )y «» i» 




T9 7s 90 $r 




n fs 9» 99 



THC TOPS or THE 89UARCS REPRESENT THE VERTICAL INDICES 
- BOTTOMS - . . . CEPHALIC • 

• LEFT SlOeS ... . ALVEOLAR • 

• RIGHT SIDES* • - •> NASAL 

GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION OF SIR W. FLOWERS 

TABLE IN THE CATALOGUE OF THE ROYAL COLLEGE 

OF SURGEONS OF ENGLAND. 



CEPHALIC INDEX 




ft n 99 tf 



1902.] MAN. [No. 96. 

ORIGINAL ARTIOLES. 
Method. With Plate I-J. Thomson. 

The Use of OlagrAm9 for Cranionfietrical Purposes. H^ Arthur qp 
Thomson J M,A,j Professor of Human Anttomy in the University of Oxford, 5JU 

The highly iDgenious and suggestive paper by Professor Flinders l^etrie which 
appeared in Man, 1902. 61 (witli Plate F.), is of especial interest to raa, since I have been 
working along somewhat similar lines, and have obtained results which were submitted 
to several of ray colleagues prior to the publication of the paper above referred to. 

As any attempt to interpret or simplify the elaborate statistics which now cumber 
the field of craniometrical enquiry is not only desirable but absolutely necessary before 
we can report further progress, it becomes a matter of much importance to devise some 
method by which this object can be attained. 

With this intention Professor Petrie has suggested a system in which he represents, 
by means of triangles, the variations in the indices and capacities of the skulls which 
are under examination. These triangles are constructed on fundamental equilateral 
triangles of which the radii, though actually of equal length, are, in the application of 
this method, supposed to represent the various measurements of skull length, breadth, 
and height, which are assumed to be of the mean value of 183 mm., 140 mm., and 
135 mm. respectively. The extremities of these radii, which correspond to the angles of 
the fundamental equilateral triancrles, are taken as the zero points, to which or from 
which are added or subtracted the absolute measurements of the variations in these 
dimensions; or, as Professor Petrie expresses it, "The variations greater or less than these 
" means are plotted on the actual living size (the italics are mine) inside or outside the 
" points of the equilateral triangle." The reason for doing so is, as he explains, to 
render the variations more distinct by not representing the total dimension, but only the 
variation on each side. Professor Petrie then states that the whole area of these triangles 
varies with the capacity of the skulls. Such, no doubt, is the case ; but be it noted that 
this statement is not the equivalent of saying that they vary as or in proportion to the 
capacity of the skull, although such a conclusion is certainly suggested by the opinion 
subsequently expressed, *"' That this triangle shows not only the three dimensions but 
" also . . . the capacity sufficiently for all practical purposes." The truth is, the 
figures represent a comparison of differences^ not of absolute values^ and for this reason 
I am inclined to regard the results as not only misleading but open to criticism. 

To illustrate the misleading nature of the diagrams it is only necessary to refer 
to Figs. 3 and 4 (Plate F. and p. 83), where anyone who compares the size of the 
triangles there set out cannot fail to be struck with the remarkable differences in 
size between the triangles representing Anglo-Saxon, French, English, and Italian 
skulls, and those illustrative of such races as the Andamanese and the natives of 
India. The cranial capacity of mixed English as stated in Flower^s Catalogue of the 
Collection of the Royal College of Surgeons of England (the source from which 
Professor Petrie himself derives his figures) averages 1,151 ccm., that of the Andamanese is 
given as 1,266 ccm., thus showing a difference of only 245 ccm. between the averages of 
the two races. If, however, we are to gauge the cranial capacity of the two races from 
a comparison of the sizes of the triangles representative of each group, as figured in the 
plate, we would be bound to conclude that the average capacity of the English skull 
was quite three times that of the Andamanese, to judge by the areas of their respective 
triangles — a conclusion which is surely justified by the Professor's own statement, that 
the triangles display the capacity of the skulls they represent '• sufficiently for all 
comparative purposes." 

It may here be pointed out that Professor Petrie gives us no standard of size for the 
drafting of the fundamental triangles, so that any observer who wishes to make use of 

[ 12«> ] 




1902.] MAN. [No. 95. 

this method, for expressing his own results, will find himself at a loss to know of what size 
to construct his figures, for, unless the constant in each radius is the same throughout the 
whole series, the variations represented by the addition or subtraction of the absolutes 
will not be comparable. Although Professor Petrie states that he does not show the 
total dimensions, jet he does not tell us what proportion, if any, he employs. To obtain 
anything like accurate results the measurements of the variations must of necessity lye 
plotted on the radii in proportion to the mean employed, though of course such a 
procedure is open to the objection that the characteristics displayed by the skulls are not 
rendered so apparent to the eye. 

Further, we are led to believe that the indices of length-breadth, length-height, 
and breadth-height are expressed by the slope of the sides of the triangle. The sides 
of the triangle, therefore, or their slope, which practically comes to the same 'thing, 
indicate a proportion, i.e., an index ; but the sides of the triangle vary with the length 
of the radii, and since, as will be shown presently, the radii are not proportionate, the 
estimation of the index by this means is erroneous. 

This may be proved as follows : — Take the triangle ABC, of which the sides AB 
and AC each measure 120 mm., and include at A an angle of 120°. 

A AB represents the mean skull 

length, 183 mm. {see Man, 1902. 
61, page 82). 
^ AC represents the mean skull 

breadth, 140 mm. {ibid., page 82). 
BC represents the mesoce- 
C phalic index. 
The skull with which this is to bo compared measures 173 mm. long and 120 mm. 
broad, yielding a difference in millimetres between the mean of length 183 mm. and the 
absolute 173 mm. of 10 mm. Similarly the difference between the mean of breadth 
140 mm. and the absolute 120 mm. is 20 mm. From the zero points B and C these 
measurements of the variation must be subtracted from the radial length, giving the 
points X and y, the slope of the line xi/ representing the index. If, now, the sides 
AB and AC of the triangle ABC be halved, the sides AD and DE of the triangle ADE 
will each measure 60 mm. in length. D and E are now taken as the zero points from 
which the measures of the variation in the dimensions of length and breadth are plotted 
on the radii yielding the points x' (10 mm. from D) and y' (20 mm. from E) respec- 
tively. The slope of the line x'y' is supposed to represent the index, but in the 
triangle ABC the distances arB and yC form respectively proportions of one-twelfth 
and one-sixth of the length of the radii AB and AC. In the triangle ADE, however, 
the distances x'D and y'E form respectively proportions of one-sixth and one-third of 
the radii AD and AE Such being the case, the triangles Ax'y' and Axy are not 
similar, and thus the lengths xy and x'y' are not parallel, since the sides of the triangles 
of which they form the bases are not proportionate ; in consequence the slope of the 
base, being determined by the lengths of the sides or radii, cannot be taken as an 
accurate estimate of the index unless the absolute measurements taken from or added to 
the sides of the triangle are proportionate to the lengths of the assumed radii. 

For these reasons it seems to me that until Professor Petrie modifies his system 
there is little chance of its universal adoption, since the results obtained by its use can 
hardly be considered reliable where accuracy is desired. 

The method which I have been employing has for its object the collation of certain 
facts which, in the past, have either been expressed independently, or if compared, the 
comparison has been efi*ected by means of curves, numerical averages, medians, or types. 
Hitherto a difficulty has arisen whenever it became necessary to compare more than two 
factors, and anyone who has had much to do with the measurement of skulls knows full 

[ 130 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 95. 

well that it is . Imost impossible to carry in oue's mind a clear appreciation of the varying 
values of the several indices. Even when these indices are grouped so that descriptive 
terms may be employed, instead of giving them a numerical value, it yet remains a 
difficult matter to form a clear conception of the shape of the skull from the terms 
employed. It occurred to me that if sume graphic form of comparison could be adopted 
the mental process whereby these measurements and indices were compared might be 
agreeably simplified. After considerable experiment I found that the method here 
described was the most convenient. Whilst I find it useful for my own purposes I must 
leave it to others to judge whether it may prove generally serviceable. 

On millimetre paper, or, if that cannot be obtained, on ordinary surveyor's paper 
(which is ruled in squares), construct a square. The sides of this square are each taken 
to represent the range of whatever indices are chosen for the purposes of comparison. 
Thus, supposing we wish to compare the cephalic, vertical, alveolar, and nasal indif'es of 
several series of skulls, we assign a side of the square to each one of these indices. The 
length of the side is then measured off to correspond with the range of the index with which 
it agrees. Thus, if we assign the lower side of the square to the cephalic index we may 
divide it up into 25 or 30 parts ranging in numerical value from 60 or 65 to 90, thus 
covering the probable range of the index. Similarly the upper side of the square may be 
allotted to the vertical index, whilst the sides may be assigned to the alveolar and nasal 
indices respectively, the range of variation being estimated by the numerical values of 
the extreme indices. It will further be found a matter of some convenience if the meso- 
indices are made to correspond to the middle fifth or so of the sides of the square ; in this 
way we can conveniently subdivide the sides of the square into three parts, each corre- 
sponding to the lower, the meso, and the higher indices of the four series of indices, in 
conformity with the descriptive terms commonly employed to signify these subdivisions. 

If we are comparing a series of skulls we may take the arithmetical mean, the 
median, the maximum of frequency or " type " of each of the indices which -we have 
chosen. (Let me here express my preference for the " type," by which I mean the index 
which recurs most frequently in a given series, this does not necessarily correspond to 
the '* median," though frequently they closely agree ; and to my mind is preferable to the 
arithmetical mean, which is so apt to give misleading results, owing to the inclusion of 
extreme examples.) Having made the selection according to individual taste, or the data 
supplied in the tables we are analysing, then mark off on each side of the square the 
numerical point which corresponds to the averages, medians, or types. By connecting 
these four points by four lines a quadrilateral figure is formed disposed within the square — 
the shape of this figure necessarily depends on the position of its angles and the lengths 
of its sides, which are determined by the position of the points which have beiBn plotted 
on the sides of the square. 

Much, of course, will depend on the indices selected for comparison, and the resulting 
figures will vary accordingly. Experience alone can teach us which are the indices of 
greatest ethnic value, and in making any such selection it will be well to choose only those 
which display the greatest racial constancy. There is no reason why a greater number 
of indices might not be compared by increasing the sides of the including figure so as to 
form a pentagon, hexagon, or other equi-sided figure ; but this temptation must be 
avoided, since my experience is that the more complex the figure becomes, the less the 
eye can take in the variations and the greater becomes the difficulty of retaining a 
mental picture of the result. I had hoped that by placing two squares together, and 
thus forming an oblong, it would have been possible to construct a six-sided irregular 
figure within the oblong, the upper part of which would display the variations in cranial 
form whilst the lower part would serve to indicate the differences in facial shape, but I 
was reluctantly compelled to discard this arrangement for the reasons above stated. It 
would seem better, then, to construct a series of simpler figures within squares, varying, 

[ 131 ] 



1902.] HAN. [Nm. 9S-96. 

it may be, the indices selected, thttn attempt to show too much in the same figure hy 
rendering more complex its form. Id order to illustmte this method I have taken the 
well-known table prepared by the late Sir W. Flower and published in the Osteologieal 
Catalogue o[ the Royal College of Surgeons. This I have rendered in graphic form, 
selecting for representation the cephalic, verticat, alveolar, aatl nasal indices simply 
becanae they came first in the lists of indices given. The results are embodied in Flal« I-J. 
For purposes of corapariaon the range of the indices which are more tommouly associated 
with lower types is rendered in solid black, whilst the meso-indioee correspond to the 
clear spaces in the middle of each side of the square. As an inspection of the plate will 
show, the figure contained within the square generally assumet a wedge-shaped form. 
Thus in the white races the wedge is ao disposed that its narrow end ia directed 
upward and to the left, in the yellow races upwards and to the right, whilst in the black 
races it is turned downward and to the left. Ah will be seen, there are intermediate 
forma suggestive of a fusion of different stocks. Without entering now into the 
question of hyhridity, it is certainly curious that by taking a median between the typo 
of figure representative of Burmese and that of mixed Negroes we get an outline closely 
resembling that of the Andamaneae ; whilst by compounding the Guanclie type with 
that of the mixed Mongolian the resulting figure recalls that of iliu mixeil Mulay. It is, 
however, as a ready means of comparison between different series that I liave found this 
method useful, for it enables us more readily to recognise afBnities which a mere inspec- 
tion of the tables may have failed to demonstrate ; and it seems to me not improbable 
that by adopting some such method as this, aud plotting out the various types on a 
map, we may, perhaps, be able to follow streams of migration in different directions by 
uoting the constancy of the type, and ohserving also where by confluence with other 
stock intermediate forms have arisen. AETHITR THOMSON. 

N«t« on an iKsaan Vas* in the Salfbrd Musaum. By John L. qq 

jtfyre*, M.A., F.S.A. OO 

The subject of thia note is a one-handled jug standing about 7 in. high (Fig. 1), which 
ia exhibited in the Rojal Museum, Peel Park, Salford. It is of a rather coarse, ill-refined 
clay, in colour between cream and pink, 
hand-made, and covered with a pale cream- 
white slip, on which are painted a few bands 
and simple curvilinear ornaments in a lustre- 
less umber paint. The spout is a little 
^^^^^ chipped at the end, hut otherwise the vessel 

j ^^^^^^ ^^- '" '" S*""* coiilit'on. 

i .^iSCBi. ^ ^''^ ^''"^ fahriu, style, and ornamcnta- 

I ^S^S^^^m^t * ^'°'' °^ ^''^ ^^^'^ identify it as a good example 

i Jf^W '"^^^ //\m ^' ^^ graceful *' Cyiiladic " stylo which 

I ^ i'' h ■ « precedes, in the South .*:go8n, the full- 

I V X^ J^ 'J flown " Mycensean " art, and is well illua- 

j ^ ^tf ^ trated hy the contents of the prehistoric 

1 j _._^^ r y' settlement in Thera (Dumont, Ckramiqucii 

1 '^B^U^^mr '^^ '" ^'■*<-'* propre. Vol. I,, p. 29 ff. 

^^^^^^^r ^'^^^ 'I-)> ^"(l ^7 the later prehistoric 

L ."^^^^^^ cemeteries of Amorgos (Uiimiuler, Athen- 

itc/tc Mitl/ieilungen, XI., 1886, Beilage i,, 

KiQ. 1.— £OEAH vasb: salfobd mubeum, 11. BliukfsuheTg, Antig'uites Fremi/cSmennes, 

p. 31, Fig. 10 (esp. Nos. G. 1, 2, 5)), Syros 

{PappadopouloB, Bivue Archeologique, 1862, p. 244 fi"., and speeimena in the National 

[ 132 ] 






1902.1 MAN. [Nob. 96-97. 

Museum, Athens), Siphnos (Tsountas, Ephemeris Archaiologike^ 1899, Plates 8, 9), and 
other islands of the Cjcladic group. 

Though in itself merely typical of one of the commonest and most characteristic 
vase-forms of its period, the Salford example deserves separate notice for two peculiar 
circumstances. The first is that, though its provenance is not known for certain, it 
reached Salford in a miscellaneous collection of definitely South Italian origin, and is 
the only object in that collection which might not quite easily have been acquired on 
any South Italian site. This, of course, by itself proves nothing, but it is remarkable 
that this is the third vase, to my knowledge, which has come to light in a South Italian 
collection. The others are: — (1) The vase in the Louvre (Salle D, 5), which was 
definitely acquired in South Italy ; (2) the vase in the Fitzwilliam Museum in 
Cambridge, which comes from the Leake collection, has a similar history, and is 
retained by Prof. Ernest Gardner in the Italian section {cf, his Cat, of Vases in 
Fitzw, Mus.). 

All three vasas are of almost identical fabric and of very similar ornamentation, and 
the inference is strongly suggested that they may really come from some hitherto 
unknown site or sites and may represent ^gean exports of prehistoric date. That such 
exportation did occur is known already from examples even further aHeld, at Syracuse 
(Orsi, Monumenti Anlichi, II., Plate i., 8) and at Marseilles (Dumont, Bulletin des 
Correspandances Helleniques^ VIII., p. 188, Plate xiii.). The latter vase is in the 
Marseilles (Bor^ly) Museum, No. 1321, and is of the same 
general form as the three Italian specimens. And, besides 
. these actual exports, a whole series of vase-forms, both in 
Sardinia {Mon. Ant, XL, Plate xviii. 16, 18) and in upper 
Italy (e.^., vases from Falerii (unpublished) in the British 
Museum), suggest definite contamination with ^gean 
'* Cycladic " forms. 

The other noteworthy detail about the Salford vase is 
the occurrence, immediately below the lower root of the 
handle, of the symbol represented herewith (Fig. 2) deeply 
and vigorously incised in the clay while still wet. Both the 
symbol itself an<l the style of incision have every appearance 
of belonging to the linear variety of that " ^gean script " 
which has become so famous recently through the researches ^^^' 2-— i^ll sizb. 

of Mr. Arthur Evans at Knossos ; and, though it cannot at 

present be deciphered and is at the best but a potter^s memorandum or a mark of owner- 
ship, it is of some importance here as additional evidence that we are dealing not with 
an independent Italian fabric or with a local imitation, but with a genuine export from 
the ^gean. J. L. MYRES. 

Stonehengre. Lewis. 

Stoneheni^e : An Enquiry respeetini^ the Fall of the Trillthons. gM 

By A. L, Lewis^ F,C,A.^ Treasurer of the Anthropological Institute. \j/ 

The fall of the central trilithon, of which the leaning-stone formed one upright, has 
generally been attributed to the digging of the Duke of Buckingham in 1620. This 
seems to have been the opinion of a certain Mrs. Trotman who lived at a farm at West 
Amesbury, and who communicated it to Aubrey about 1665. Aubrey, having no reason to 
doubt her statement, believed and published it, and it has been believed and published 
ever since. The trilithon w&% of course, a^ likely to have been upnet by the Duke of 
Buckingham as by anybody else ; but, as a m^itter of • fact, it was not, as the views I 
have now to show will prove. 

[ 133 ] 





W20 MAN. [Ko. 97. 

The upper view is photographed from a copy carefully taken by me from a drawing 
I a manaacript book uow in the Britieh Museum, bearing date 1588, and tinmbered 
SI. (Sloans) 2596. It is called The Particular 
Detcription of England, with the Portraituret of 
certaiite of the Ckieffette Cittiet and Toumet, aad 
woe written by W. Smith, Rouge Dragon, who is 
stated to have died id 1618. This view shows 
four objecLs which are probably intended for 
barrows, and the spire of Salisbury Cathedral, and 
a building on a hill, perhaps intended for Old 
Sarum, the ditch is represetit«d as being cloje to 
the stones instead of a hundre<l feet away from 
them, and there are fewer of the latter in some 
places than now exist ; yet, badly as they are 
drawn they can mostly be identiSed, and in parti- 
cular the leaning stone and other fragments of the 
great trilithon, although they are placed in an 
entirely wrong position. 

Caradon is said to have copied a drawing of 
Stonelienge signed "B. F., 1575." This drawing 
I have not seen, but it is reasonable to suppose 
that the plate in the 1607 and 1610 editiona 
of his Britannia, which I have seen is copied 
from or founded upon it. That plate is very much like the lower of the two views 
shown here, but is not so good or clear, but with the help of this the leaning stone 
can be identified npon it. In Gibson's edition of the Britannia, dated 1695, an 
enlarged and somewhat more artistic view of the plate of 1610 is given, in which 
the leaning-stone is omitted altogether, although, on any supposition, it had then 
been leaning for three-quarters of a century ; but a curious mistake in the outer 
circle is repeated. The lower view given here is from Gougli's edition of Camden's 
Britannia, dated. 1806, and is there said to he altered from Camden and Gibson, It 
is, perhaps, a pity that Gough did not copy Inigo Jones's view, which is a very 
good one, but I suppose he wished to adhere as closely as possible to Camdeu and 
the view before us has not only been altered from those of 1610 and 1695, but 
altered for the better, for the mistake which occurred in them has been eliminated, and 
the leauing-stoDO which Gibson omitted has been restored, although in this, as in the 
view of 1588, it is made to lean the wrong way. The fact that it is so drawn in both 
shows that it is the leaning-stone and not any other that appears in Smith's view of 
1588, and that, instead of ihe fall of the great trilithon having been caui^ed by the work 
of the Duke of Buckingham in 1620, it ha<l certainly fallen some time before 1588, and 
probably before 1575, 

Someone writing in the Time* of April 9, 1901, stated, upon what authority I 
know not, that a catastrophe occurred at Stonehenge in the 16th century, at a date not 
ascertainable, but before the year 1554, The fall of the great trilithon may have been 
the catastrophe referred to, and may have been the result of some unrecorded researches 
under the " altar stone " in the reign of Henry VIII., when diggings were made in the 
uetghboiirbood, and, as C)amden tells us, " there was found neere tliis place a tabic of 
" mettall, as it had been tinne and leail commixt, inscribed with many letters, but iu so 
" strange a character that neither Sir Thomas Elliott nor Lilye, Schoolmaster of 
" I'aules, could read it, therefore neglected it." 

It is worthy of note that in all these views the only stone now standing of the 
north-western trilithon is the only stone represented as standing when they were mode, 
[ 131 ) 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 97-98. 

aod that by bad drawing it appears to belong to the outer ring ; but that trilithon had 
evidently also fallen before these views were taken, and it is possible that both it and 
the great trilithon fell many centuries ago, though whether at the same time or not is 
uncertain. 

A comparison of these old views with the plan and views of Inigo Jones (1620- 
1655) leads to the conclusion that the south-western part of the outer circle was nearly 
as incomplete 300 years ago as it is now, and so far tends to support the idea that it 
tnay never have been completed at all. A. L. LEWIS. 



XTganda : Folklore. Millar, 

On the 8laui^hter-place of Namui^onim Ui^anda. By Tefiro qq 
Kisosonkole, Translated j with NoteSy by the Rev. Ernest Millar^ M.A.j F,Z.S. wO 

Now King Eyabagu* had a son named Bengo, who became very strong, and his 
father wished to kill him, but could not find anyone to do it as they thought the king 
was jeering at them when they were told to kill his son. 

But afterwards a man named Kikabizi consented to kill Prince Bengo. He was 
only a poor man of Kago*8,t and lived at Buwate ; and he took him. When they got 
to the stream Eatabusolo the Prince Bengo threw into it his bracelets, and to this day 
the river is called '^ the river where the bracelets were thrown away,^' and the execu- 
tioner took him on to Namugongo. The chief of that place was called Sebugulu, and 
Kikabizi told him to go and cut firewood, and they collected it and made a framework, 
and put Bengo on it and roasted him. Then they returned singing : — 

<< We did not destroy Bengo, we hung him up ; 
We did not destroy him, we hung him up at Namugongo.*' 

And after that, Kikabizi became one of the regular executioners, and always went about 
with a slow match, and they called him Senkole. After they had killed Bengo, his 
spirit haunted King Kyabagu and made him ill, and so he asked the medicine men for a 
meilicine that would kill the spirit as well as the body, and the medicine men gave him 
two kinds, the one to mix with beer and the other to put in a pipe ; and he also got 
from them a charm, and in this charm was a frog, and the name of the frog was the same 
as that of the charm, Gabogola " the Crier." 

When they took prisoners there to be slaughtered they made them sit down in 
front of the shrine near the place of execution, and they pleaded against them : ^' These 
have abused the king, and therefore he has sent them to Gabogola and Bengo to plead 
their cause." 

If the frog did not come out of the shrine they took the prisoners back, saying, 
*' These are too few, Gabogola refuses them, let them bring more," and they went and 
caught three or four hundred more, and brought them and made them sit down in rows, 
and Sebugulu, the chief of the place, pleaded as before, and Gabogola, the frog, came 
out of the shrine ; and as soon as it was seen, they said, '' He is pleased with them," 



* Kyabagu was a former King of Uganda, the sixth back from the present King Chwa, thus : — 

Kyabagu 

Junju Semakokiro 

Kamanya 

I 
Suna 

Muteaa (visited by Speke and Stanley) 

Mwanga (now exiled to Seychelles). 

Daudi Chwa (the present King), 
t Kago one of the twenty territorial chiefs, ruler of the country of Kyadondo. 

[ 136 ] 



1908.] 





mill every prIsoDer lioil tn tttnoke 
!i litUe. The UBtiie of ibe pi]>e 
wne KikiitHiide (" What hrouf^bt 
yoii here"), lint if any priHoner 
ri^fiiHed tlie beer or 
Selnigiilii, Ibe iliief nf die pUct-, 
kille.l him. 

After tliiH, Sebugiilu iiseil 
iti bring a grenl n^at out of ibe 
sbi'iiie nnd weot uuil coniiteil the 
prisnnera, airikiiig ihem on the 
bc.'ii] with the upear, " ooe," 
"two," "throe," "four." iiiitil 
lie hull couuteil nil ; and nfter 
lie bad counted them t.hey took 
ihem to the place of execution, 
wliich wna quite neur, aud nmJe 
there a framework, and cut them 
into pieces and threw them ou 
to the framework, nnd made a 
Kfeut tire underneath ; others 
ibey did up in bundleB of fire- 
wood and threw tbem ou to the fire, bo that they becaino ashes : but they di<l not kill 
tbom all olf, hut left one, who, after seeing all his uompaiiions killed, was let oif, and 
bo waH called Kawonawo, *■ tbe man who escaped." 

But the CbriHtian« who were killed at Namugoiigo at the time of the Unnyouyo 
perseculioiiH* were not forced to smoke Kikutiiiide, Iwcaiisa the chief of the plane aud 
the abriui' were not there and there was no prini^e with them, beenuae if there was no 
prince among tbe priwoDcrs tboy used to kill them ut another place to the side, because 
there wuH uo prince, aud the spirit of tbe place was Prince Bengo, and tbr»i wuf an 
houourable slnnghter-place, the slaughter-place of princes. 

There used to he many alangbier-placeB in Uganda, tbe method of death in each 
place boiug different: — A'amttpo/ij?o, eliceil up into pieces and burned; Nktimba, dis- 
membered aud the memhors thrown alniut, or if many they clubbed them ; Damtm /., 
fuBteneil to eUkes lo lie eaten by crouodileu ; Hfulitkula, drowned in the lake, after lieing 
tietl hands and feet. 

The pot aud pipe were given to me, together with the history which 1 have 
tranBlatoil, by Tefiro Kiaosoukole, in who^e terrilory Namugongo is situated. He beard 
that the things were still there aud so hail ibem fetched ; the spear had been destroyed 
previously. Tbe pot and pipe are now in the British Museum. ERNEST MILLAR, 



■ Tbei* exet-at 



liHik (ilace m liiHS, wbea Uwnnga nttempttd to itamp nut ChriBtianiCj. 



lOOd.] 



UAN. 



[No. 99. 
Edg-e -Partington . 

By J. Edt/r-ParliiiijIoii. QQ 



New Zealand. 

Ancient Maori Houses : their Use and Abuse. 

In the N<-w Zs&lHtiii eeutioti of llio C'llonial iinil IiiUlik 
exhibileJ a Miiori r.Lirvud house aoii " lite tomb, or lemporiir; restiTig-pIa<;e, of ilie ^tvv.1 
Aniwa Cliiuf, Waala Tarunui," l>otli mar ve lions spenimens of native workmanship. Tlie 
tomli VA^ the property of Sir Wulter Biiller, hniI has since been prasenied bj him to the 
French GovcrumeiU anil now forms a prominent feature io the Trovadero Museum. Tbe 
carved honse hiis disappearad froin public view ; origjimlly intended for onr national 
(lollectionK, it wn» olTered to the TniAtees of tlie British Museum, antl hy tliem refusetl, 
tht^re being no sp&ce under cover where it could he eshjhiled. It was next henrd of as 
a shed for the electric light engine at the South Kensington Musaiim. Some years ago 
thix »hed was titken down, and, as far as I am aware, has not lieen erected elsewhere. 

Mr. Percy Smith, the secretary of the Polynesian Society, writing i« me from Now 
Plymouth, says that hy far the Kneal of these enrved hooses lately stood at KoloruA, in 
the Hot I^ke distrii t it was known by the name of Rnurn, utter the inventor of Maori 
carving. This house has lately been purcha»L<l liy the f erman Government lor t!,f)00 
and will, DO doubt, shortly l>e added to the national colioctioiin in Rprlin as the l>tle 
nwner is on his way there to assist in i(a erection 

Another carved house is Lftrefully prcserted in the Colonial Miiieiiin Hellinglon, 
New Zealand, This is used as an txhibitiou room for the Maori collection The IhIh.1 
which hanga 'in it fiilU dcs<.nl>os Iiow this has been larried out nilh u full description of 
the house itself. It is as follows This house was built by the Ngatikaipnha Inlic 
of Taiirsnga, Poverty Bav 
(wlio were always noted 
througlioiit New Zealand 
for the 6\oelleijce of their 

to the memory of Tumatu 
W>iaka Tuangere the 
elder brother of Baha 
mbi Rukupo. the pre^ieot 
chief of the tribe. Ihe 
work was Iwgitn in October 
Itt')2 and finished in the 
March following; it wa* 
designed by Ralinnihi Ru 

"The following IS a list 
of the carvers employed 
(a li^l Bf \>i namei) 

"The figure on die post 
oniherightof theeutrnnco 
represents Raharnhi Rn 
kupo and the renuiuing 
figures are inlcndol to re 
present tbe most celebrated 
uueestors of the tribt- (a 
lixl of »8 name*)." 

At the close of the East Coast campaign in 1866 this house was purcUaseil by the 
(■nvernment, and, having lieeu transferreil to Wellington, was ereci^ as part of tbe 
Colouiat Museum in March 1868. The valuable specimen of uative art has been reatorud 
t 131 ) 




1902.] MAN. [Nob. 99-100. 

in such a manner that, while it is carefully preserved from decay bj an exterior covering 
of wood and iron, its interior presents as much as possible the original character which 
its designers intended. The only marked innovation has been the elevation of the carved 
walls on a plinth two feet above the original level, so that the eye of the visitor, when 
standing up, may be at the same elevation as if he were sitting on the floor of the house 
in its original state, according to the usual native custom. For the purpose of lighting the 
interior the reeding which originally filled the spaces between the pillars at one end of 
the house has been removed and replaced by stained glass.* The total interior length of 
this house is 43 ft. 8 ins. and the width 18 f t. ; the original height of the walls was 
4 ft. 8 ins. and the apex of the roof 12 ft. above the floor, but now 7 ft. and 14 ft. 6 ins. 
respectively. 

The side walls contain 82 figures elaborately carved in solid Totara wood, 
4 ft. 6 ins. high, 2 ft. wide, and 6 ins. in thickness. The end walls, of 20 pieces of carving, 
are of a difierent character and size according to their position, the central carvings, 12 ft. 
in height, supporting the ridge pole at each end, being the most elaborate in the building. 
The ridge pole is a huge triangular beam of wood in two pieces, with one end projecting 
six feet beyond the building and over what originally formed the porch. Besides the 
supports at each end there were originally two posts supporting this beam in the interior 
of the house, and from each side panel a plank, with a carving at the lower end, reaches 
to the ridge. The interspaces were originally filled in with the Kakaho or toe-toe grass, 
and this has been supplied by an imitation in wood of the fluted surface as being more 
durable and cheaper of construction than the original material. The position and 
form of the original window and door have been preserved, and the entrance to the 
building from the museum has been eflected by swinging one of the panels in the side 
on hinges. 

In this house occurs a peculiar form of figure which has not, I believe, been published 
elsewhere. When going over the house with Sir James Hector in 1897 he drew 
particular attention to this. I have figured two of these from a photograph kindly 
taken expressly for me by Mr. Percy Smith. It will be noticed that these ancestors 
are depicted as passing their hand throngh the back of their heads and out of their 
mouths. This is a feat which no ordinary man could accomplish, and it was Sir James 
Hector's opinion that consequently these particular ancestors were tohungas or priests, 
and that the carvers had adopted this plan of distinguishing them from the rest. 

J. EDGE-PARTINGTON. 



Religion. Lang. 

Buifbear Qods. By Andrew Lang^ M,A, 100 

In Mr. N. W. Thomas's review of my Magic and Religion (1901) in lUU 
Man, 1902.90, he says that I have "dragged in Baiame and other * high gods' of 
Australia to enforce my point." My point, or one of my points, was that Baiame and 
Co., and the evidence as to them, could not be ignored in a discussion about Australian 
religion. That is why I "dragged them in," just as I would "drag in " the Deity if 
a writer on Catholic religion ignored Him. Moreover, I shall continue to " drag in " 
such evidence as to " high gods," or anything else, as writers whom I am criticising 
may be ignorant of, or, knowing, may ignore. 

Next, as far as Messrs. Spencer and Gillen tell us, Twanjirika, the "great spirit" 
(so styled by them) of the Arunta, is regarded by the adult males of the tribe as a 
bugbear to frighten the women and children — a thing on a level with our old friend 
Mumbo Jumbo. The women are told that the sound of the bull-roarer is his voice, and 



♦ This is of a dull yellow colour, so as, as nearly as possible, to give to the interior it.s original 
appearance. — J. B,-P. 

[ 138 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 100-lOt 

that ho carries off the young initiates. We are told no more about Twanjirika. 
Mr. Thomas suggests that, as to my other Australian superior beings (Baiame and the 
rest), " it is at most a mere hypothesis that they were in the beginning any more than 
bugbears," and he observes that I — in Magic and Religion — ** do not even consider 
the possibility that the high gods are, or were, mere bugbears." Now, elsewhere., and 
earlier, I did "consider the possibility" {Fortnightly Review j June, 1899, pp. 1017, 
1018). 

As I do not believe, any more than Dr. Durkheim does, that the Arunta are 
"primitive," or represent "man in the chrysalis stage," and as they have a special and 
very neat meta physic, which leaves no room for a maker, like Baiame and Co., I rejected 
in my own mind the notion that Twanyirika is the pristine form of Baiame, and in 
Magic and Religion I did not discuss the question. I regret the omission, and bow 
to the rebuke of Mr. Thomas. But how does this invalidate my argument, that 
believers in Baiame have in their creed an unselfish element ? They Aave, if we believe 
Mr. Howitt, Mr. Ridley, Mrs. Langlon Parker, and others. I do not in the least hold 
that Baiame was originally a bugbear, and that Twanyirika represents the pristine 
form of Baiame. But it is a theory worth discussing, when we know more about 
Twanyirika. As to my theory of totems, Mr. Thomas, 1 hope, will presently have an 
opportunity of criticising it, as set forth in a new work. A. LANG. 



REVIEWS. 
Psychology. Hobhouse . 

Mind in Evolution. By L. T. Hobhouse. London : Macmillan <& Co., 1901. iHi 
23 X 15, pp. vii-406. 10*. net. iU I 

Mr. Hobhouse has already — in his Theory oj Knowledge — thrown ninch light 
on what may be called the " inner " side of mind ; in the present work he takes it up 
from the other standpoint, its "outer'* side, what it does in the world, how it shows its 
presence, how it grows in the individual, the species, the race, and what is the perfection 
or end towards which it is tending. The work is a valuable contribution to comparative 
psychology, giving us in the place of the scattered pamphlets and detached writings on 
mind in this or that species of animal, or in animals as a whole, in this or that race of 
savages, or in the uncivilised world as a whole, a consistent view of the evolution of 
mental life from its first conditions (pre- or sub-conscious), in reflex action, to its highest 
expression in the philosopher's ideal of human progress. The detailed working out of 
this plan could not well be brought within the limits of a single volume. What is done 
in the present one is to sketch the main lines of the evolution, and to fill in the picture 
so far as lower animal " intelligence" is concerned, and the transition from that to human 
thought. Order, system, harmony, these are invariably the products of mind, and by 
them its presence is known. It brings things together " so that they have a bearing 
" upon one another," organises action, adjusts it to certain ends, on the basis of rela- 
tions which in past experience it has discovered or established. So, the growth or 
evolution of mind proceeds always towards greater comprehensiveness in the relations 
observed, fuller consciousness of the ends pursued, greater concentration of forces, and, 
therefore, increased definiteness in the actions by which the ends are attained. 

The earlier chapters treat in an interesting way of the conditions of mind — " Organic 
" adaptability," " Reflex-action," and " Instinct." Mr. Hobhouse refuses to regard the 
behaviour of organisms as purely mechanical ; they differ from all possible automata by 
their self-maintenance ; so the reflex-action, the congenital response of a part of the 
organism to a definite stimulus, is not independent of the state of the organism as a 
whole ; and " Instinct " is a term applied to various forms of behaviour, from the com- 
pound reflex to more plastic modes of adjusted action, in which pure instinct is 

[ 139 ] 



1903.] MAN. CVo.101. 

'* sudTdsed with iatelligence." la iastioct there is always '' a « persistent interual 
dispositioQ *' which persists throughout the whole reaction, and accordingly gives an 
opening for individual modifications of what is in the first instance definite, fixed, 
almost rigidlj mechanical. Intelligent behaviour thus arises out of instinctive, with 
which it is continuous in actual evolution, — intelligence acts from within instinct, gives 
it plasticity, the ends of intelligence (even in the human race) are posited for it bj 
instinct, jet the two in their '^ idea '* are absolutely distinct. 

In chapters 5-10 the appearance and gradual development of true animal intelli- 
gence are described, and widely illustrated bj examples from natural history as well as 
bj a series of interesting experiments on cats, dogs, elephants, monkeys, &c. carried out 
by Mr. Hobhouse himself. At the lowest stage instinct begins to be *' defined ^* by 
experience, the marks of the corresponding object, special food, mate, and the like, 
that call it forth are more clearly grasped ; its conditions, things that are connected 
usually with it, are '' assimilated '' to itself. We have not yet separate, distinct ideas, 
memory-images of tlie past, for example, but the scene presented to the animal's senses 
affects it pleasantly or painfully through the subconscious infiuence of past experience. 
It is the first, step in ^^ correlation,^' the evolution of mind beyond instinct, and is found 
in practically all classes of animals — inaects, molluscs, fish, &c. Next follows the stage 
of '^ concrete experience '' at which for the first time purposive, intentional action really 
occurs ; animals which learn to do novel actions through a perceived connection between 
an event and its consequence, as that the pulling of a certain rope brings food within 
reach — which do not merely learn by being put through the action required (habituation) 
— cannot be said to act blindly, they guide themselves by a remembered series of relations 
a '^ correlation of relations,'' an inference. As contrasted with lower animals the monkey 
makes use of ideas which are both more ^ elaborate " and more ^ articulate " ; it has 
greater choice of means, greater freedom of action, is less the slave of instinct or habit. 
Below man, tbere is no evidence of the use of language for the communication of 
knowledge rather than feeling, but the universal judgments and abstract ideas which 
language at once presupposes and helps to create, are only extensions of the particular 
judgments and more concrete images of the animal mind. There is no breach of 
continuity. 

The later chapters contain admittedly a sketch merely of tbe further development. 
The immense difierences in mental power l>etween the man and the monkey, the philosopher 
and the savage, are difierences in comprehensiveness of aim, in degree of organisation of 
action towards that aim ; but *' as the scope and clearness of mind increase, certain 
" points are successively reached at which quite new achievements become possible," 
with far-reacbing consequences which raise a successful species or race into a higher, 
world than one that only just falls short of the point. Mr. Hobhouse ventures even 
from the course of the development to form a notion of its consummation, viz., the 
acceptance of the humanitarian principle, that the perfect and free growth of humanity 
as a whole become '' the end and aim of all human effort," and that the prevailing 
notions of right and wrong be judged, accepted, and rejected thereby. '* The goal of 
" the movement, as far as we can foresee at present, is the mastery by the human mind 
'^ of the conditions, internal as well as external, of its life and growth." This is the 
only true upward ('^ orthogenic ") development ; in method and in results it is opposed 
to biological evolution, by way of natural selection, which may result in the survival of 
degenerate types. 

One looks forward with interest to the promised completion of the work by a 
further volume on the human mind in evolution. J. L. McINTYRE. 



[ 140 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 102. 



East Africa. Gregory. 

102 



The Foundation of British East Africa. By Professor J. W. Gregory, D.Sc. 
London : Horace Marshall & Son, 1901. 21 x 14, pp. 84, 267. 



The English people as a nation have good reason to feel interest in the great 
commercial companies which have done so much in the past to extend England's sphere 
of influence in distant parts of the world. The Indian Empire is a monument to the 
spirit of enterprise which spurred on the founders of the old East India Company, while 
the results of the foundation of the Chartered Company in Rhodesia are fresh in every- 
one's memory. In East Africa, however, this policy has proved a failure, and the 
history of the British East Africa Company, short as it is, is a chronicle of failure and 
disaster, though none the less interesting and instructive. 

In The Foundation of British East Africa Professor Gregory has principally 
occupied himself with the history of the British East Africa Company, and their 
successor, the Foreign Office, but the earlier history of the country is not neglected. 
As Professor Gregory points out the history of British East Africa is threefold — 
geographical, political, and administrative — the result being that the material with 
which the author has had to deal is of an extremely complicated character. He is to 
be congratulated on the manner in which he has succeeded in combining the diverse 
elements into one coherent whole. Naturally, with so limited a space at his command, 
the author has had to sacrifice much in the way of detail, but the result has been a net 
gain in clearness, and this is of the greatest importance in a book which in its scope is 
popular, as is the case with the present work. 

It might be said, however, that this tendency, admirable as it is, has been carried 
too far in dealing with the geography and ethnography of the country. Professor 
Gregory only touches upon these subjects in so far as, in his opinion they have had any 
influence on the history of the country, but his account of the natives would have gained 
in clearness and value had he shown how far the physical formation of the country was 
responsible for the difierences in character exhibited by the various races inhabiting 
this territory. The difierences which exist between the Masai, the Nandi, and the 
Kavirondo, for instance, are largely due to the influence of climate and cannot be 
attributed to racial peculiarities alone. This would surely have fallen well within the 
scope of this work. With archseological and ethnological problems as such. Professor 
Gregory does not profess to deal. They are stated, and the conclusions at which Hobley 
and other investigators have arrived are given but without criticism or discussion. 

Starting from the earliest time with the Akka dwarfs in Egyptian sculpture, the 
author gives a rapid review of the references in the Bible, Herodotus, the Periplus, &c., 
which may be taken to refer to this district. The geographical history of the country 
then follows, terminating with the explorations of Teleki in 1887-8. The last and 
most important section of the book deals with the rule of the British East African 
Company, describes ^' How Lugard saved Uganda," and closes with an account of. the 
administration under the Foreign Office up to the date of Sir Harry Johnston's appoint- 
ment as Commissioner in 1899. 

Dr. Gregory concludes with a chapter on '' The Future of East Africa," the most 
important part of which consists of an analysis and summary of the material of which 
the book is composed. It is a recommendation rather than an adverse criticism to say 
that this chapter is hardly necessary. The facts of the case are placed before the reader 
with such clearness and impartiality that he who runs may read the lesson taught by the 
history of East Africa. Up to the end of the period with which Professor Gregory 
deals the administration of East Africa was of an experimental character. The British 
East Africa Company was not a company in the ordinary sense of the term, but an 
organization which had its origin in a philanthropic ideal. The result would, perhaps, 

[ 141 1 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. lOa-103. 

lead oae to prefer the methods of a compauj whose primarj aim was business pure and 
simple. And in the case of the Foreign Office the same remark applies, although in a 
lesser degree, for under its rule a more definite poVicj has been formulated and better 
means taken to carry it out ; but it is no exaggeratiou to say that the rule of the Foreign 
Office is experimental to this extent, that in so far as our policy in dealing with the 
natives of East Africa succeeds or fails, so must our policy in dealing with subject races, 
in general stand or fall. 

The disasters which occurred during the reign of the Company and in the early part 
of the Foreign Office rule may all be traced to one fundamental cause. This was the 
ignorance displayed by officials and others of the native character. There were excep- 
tions, but they were rare. The Company was hampered, too, by the ill-directed zeal of 
the rival missions in Uganda who in the " race for converts " intrigued in political 
matters to attain their end, and that, too, without acquiring anything like an adequate 
understanding of the native character and modes of thought. Of early missionaries such 
as Krapf one can hardly speak too highly, but it was the intolerance of his successors 
that gave rise to the factions which have proved so great a check to the progress of the 
country. 

The same cause, although in a lesser degree, is to be seen at work under the rule of 
the Foreign Office. An attempt was certainly made to grapple with the problem, and 
the officials were no longer men unacquainted with the handling of subject races, but 
Indian officers, with whom as a class the idea of caste is so deeply engrained, were 
hardly fitted for handling a race of natives such as these, who were coming into contact 
with the ideas and forces of civilisation for the first time. This was shown even in the 
rebellion of the Soudanese, who were disciplined troops. The ill-advised attempt to 
suppress the mild form of slavery which existed on the coast in the early days of the 
Company is another case in point where a little patience and understanding would have 
averted a grave crisis. 

A more hopeful note was struck with the apj)ointment of Sir Harry Johnston as 
Commissioner, primarily as an African expert ; the lessons of the Indian Mutiny had 
not been entirely forgotten. If native races are to be handled with any degree of succepp 
by Europeans, it is essential tbat they should be men who understand the responsibilities 
of their position, and eiiher possess a keen insight into the native modes of thought, or 
be prepared to acquire a thorough knowledge of the habits and customs of the people 
over whom they have to rule. It is in this way alone that we can hope to introduce 
civilised ideas to the advantage of the native population, or produce anything more than 
the veneer which destroys the virtues of the savage without cultivating those of the 
civilised man. This is especially the case in Uganda, where we have a large and 
vigorous population which, until a few years ago, had never come into contact with 
civilisation, and uncontaniiuated by the vices which it introduces, under an intelligent 
administration, might be preserved rather than destroyed. E. N. FALLAIZE. 



England : Stonehenge and Avebury. Harrison. 

The Wiltshire Archceological and Natural History Magazine: Stonehenge 4AA 
Bibliography Number^ December 1901. Devizes: C. N. Woodward. 8vo. lUu 
170 pp. Plates, 4 pp. Price 05.6rf. (A Bibliography of the Great Stone Monuments 
of Wiltshire, with other references. By W. Jerome Harrison, F.G.S.) 

The valuable publications of the Wiltshire Archteological and Natural History 
Society respecting the world-renowned monuments of that county have now been 
increased by the addition of a very exhaustive bibliography by Mr. Jerome Harrison, 
who has spared no effort to make it complete. The descriptive list, in alphabetical 

[ 1*2 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 103-105. 

order of authors' names, lacludes references not only to separate books and papers 
printed in archaeological journals, but to newspaper correspondence and caricatures, and 
to such things as the full-size model set up at Wood house Park, Shepherd's Bush, about 
1894, and destroyed two or three years later to make way for the generating station of 
the " tube " (fortunately, perhaps, since it was in contemplation to remove all but the 
outer ring and erect a bandstand in the middle of it). The drawing in William Smith's 
MS. description of England of 1588 is mentioned, but the author is certainly mistaken in 
saying that it shows five of the great trilithons as then erect and complete. The list 
also contains many references to papers, &c. on other circles, and even on matters only 
remotely bearing on the subject, which are nevertheless all useful in their way. The 
account by Mr. A. E. Pass of his explorations at Silbury Hill io 1886 has, however, 
escaped Mr. Harrison's notice, which is the more remarkable since it was printed in The 
Wiltshire Archceological and Natural History Magazine itself (Vol. XXIII., p. 245). 
The alphabetical list is brought quite up to date (4th January 1902), and is followed by 
brief but useful summaries and classifications. It will be much valued by all interested 
in rude stone monuments. A. L. L. 



East A£rioa: Llngniistics. Madan. 

English' Swahili Dictionary, By A. C. Madan. 2nded. Oxford: Clarendon iH^ 
Press, 1902. 7 X 4^. pp. xv-462. Is. 6rf. net. IUt 

The second edition of Mr. A. C. Madan's English- Swahili Dictionary (Clarendon 
Press) will be welcomed by aU students. It has been enlarged from 415 to 462 pages, 
and thoroughly revised. At first sight it might seem unnecessary to include words like 
"potentially," "loquacious," "fatigue," which have either to be paraphrased or reduced 
to simpler synonyms before they can be rendered in Swahili ; but their presence is at 
once explained when we find that one of the author's objects is to enable native students 
at Zanzibar to understand English books. A complete Swahili- English Dictionary^ 
by-the-bye, seems to be a desideratum. The vocabulary contained in Steere's Handbook^ 
though avowedly only provisional in character, is, for practical purposes, quite as useful 
as Krapf's Dictionary. The Safari za fFasuaheli contains a good many words to be 
found in neither, but it is only fair to add that a number of these are Arabic, while 
others, as mbogo (a buffalo), ngara (a skin, hide) appear to belong to various inland, 
languages. A. WERNER. 



Art, Qposse, 

Les Debuts de I'* Art, Par E. Grosse. Translated from the German by 4#%f 
E. Dirr. Paris : Felix Alcan, 1901. 22 x 15, pp. 139. 6*. lUu 

This well-known work has been translated into French and now forms a volume of 
the Bibliotheque Scientijique Internationale. As it appeare<l in German in J 894 and has 
been translated into English no prolonged notice is called for. A large number of foot- 
notes, mostly quotations from recent authors, have been added. These have kept the 
book up to date and have broadened its outlook without taking anything from its value 
as a collection of facts. This is the view taken in the preface to the French translation 
written by the late L6on Marillier, who points out that in 1894 it was necessary to 
collect and arrange a large number of facts before considering the relation of primitive 
technique to the more highly-finished intentionally-artistic productions of Europeans. 
Among the latter, differentiation — brought about by fashion and by great teachers — has 
proceeded too far to allow of the link between given forms of social development and 

[ 143 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nof. 105-107. 

artistic production being clearly discerned. Above all the personality of the artist bulks 
too largely, and ethnic differences tend to he obliterated. It is here that Marillier ceases 
to follow Grosse. The latter, struck by the similarity of psychological processes aiiion|2C 
tribes in identical stages of economic development in different parts of the world, would 
consider art mainly dependent on the economic position of its creators and little 
influenced by race. Marillier, on the contrary, held that artistic differentiation, was 
mainly racial in origin. It is noted that among the factors producing esthetic manifes- 
tations Grosse does not lay sufficient stress on magic. Perhaps the same might be 
said of religion, though, considering the number of profane ornaments and designs which 
have had a religious significance road into them by literary workers, the omission is 
almost pardonable. C. G. SELIGMANN. 



India. Rao. 

Sofne Questions of South Indian Ethnology. By C. Havavadana Rao, B.A., ^AA 
Reprinted from the Madras Christian College Mngazine. Ma<lras, 1901. lUD 

It is satisfactory to find from this collection of papers that there is an educated 
native public which interests itself in such questions. In his first paper the writer 
disputes the Negrito origin of the Dravidians : in his second he attempts to fix the 
" Date and Nature of the Aryan Immigration into South India " : in the third he 
denounces the hjrpothesis of a Turanian element in the Indian races. He has thus been 
lx)1d enough to attempt to solve the most thorny question of Indian ethnology. He 
has read a good deal of the current literature of the subject, and his papers were 
doubtless interesting to the audience which he addressed. But it is hardly necessary to 
point out that native students of anthropology in Madras would do well to postpone the 
discussion of questions such as these and devote themselves to the kind of patient work 
which Mr. Thurston is carrying on with such success. What we want now, in short, 
is not discussion of problems such as those treated of in this pamphlet, but enquiries into 
the physical anthropology, manners and customs, folklore, and popular religion of the 
South Indian races which educated natives like the writer, with » taste for the study 
of man, might investigate with advantage. W. CROOKE. 



Africa. Grogran : Sharpe, 

From the Cape to Cairo, By E. S. Grogan and A. H. Sharpe. New and 4f%^ 
rDvised edition. London : Hurst and Blackett, 1902. pp. xix + 412. lUf 
Price Is, 6</. 

It is to be regretted that the author of From the Cape to Cairo has only touched 
incidentally upon the customs of the natives with whom he came into contact on his 
walking tour through Africa, the more so as the information that he has given us on this 
hubject shows that he has the "observant eye." Mr. Grogan includes a chapter on the 
native (juestion, and although his views are rather crudely expressed, it cannot be 
gainsaid that at bottom there is much in what he says ; but it is unfortunate that he is 
unable to see that there is a place for a just and impartial view of the question lying 
U)ldway lietween the view of the " shrieking sentimentalist " and that view which regards 
I ho native as no higher than a beast of burden. As might be expected, from his point 
of vi<»w, the author contrasts the German colonial policy favourably with our own. The 
nicturu ho draws of the lack of control in the districts under the Congo Free State is 
appalling and worthy of consideration of all who have the interests of the native 
pdpulation at heart. E. N. F. 

l*rlnt4Ml by Ktbe akd Bpottibwoodb. His Majesty's Printers, East Harding Street, E.G. 



M*((, iWi. Platb K 




Mouthpiece (Side view) Muzzle (Side view) 




Muzzle (End view) Mouthpiece (lind view) 





Spatula and dartn; Quivei' 

Malay Blowpipe 



1902.] MAN. [No. 108. 

ORIGINAL ARTIOLES. 
Malay Peninsula. With Plate K. Skeat. 

Blowpipe ftom kuantan (Malay Peninsula). By W. W. Skeat^ 4 An 
M.A. lUO 

A rare aud interestiDg form of blowpipe has recently been presented to the British 
Museum by Mr. F. W. Douglass, of the Malay States Service, who obtained it on the 
east coast of the Malay Peninsula in the Kuantan (or northern district of Pahang, 
during October 1897, from a man belonging to one of the jungle tribes dwelling on 
the borders of Pahang and Kemaman. Its measurements are as follows : — 

Total length - - - - - - 5 ft. 2 in. 

Interior diameter of tube at mouthpiece - - ' ^ » Of 99 

Interior diameter of tube at muzzle-end - - - ^ » Oy'a n 

Hence the bore of the tube at the muzzle-end is a fraction less than it is at the 
mouthpiece, so that we have here an instance of a wooden blowpipe imitating the 
natural proportions that obtain in the bamboo blowpipe, from which it was copied ; for 
in the bamboo blowpipe it is always the root-end which is placed nearest the mouth, so 
that the bore at the muzzle-end is generally a fraction less than at the mouthpiece ; in 
other words, the bamboo blowpipe has naturally a slight " choke " in the bore. 

The illustrations here given (Plate K.) are full-size. They show the muzzle-end 
and the mouthpiece in two positions, the mouthpiece having been chipped in transit. I 
had it photographed to show the binding before it was mended. 

This particular blowpipe is made of some very hard wood, probably of " pSnuga^' 
(calophyllum). The tube consists of the two halves of the cylinder, carefully split down 
the middle and grooved on the inner side throughout their entire length, so that when 
fitted together again the two grooves form a perfect tube. This tube, which forms the 
blowpipe, is bound round from end to end with a long thin strip, probably of some kind 
of cane (calamus)^ over which is deposited a thick incrustation of a gutta-like substance, 
the object of which is evidently to protect and prevent the bands from being loosened. 
The thickness of this deposit is increased to about half-an-inch at the mouthpiece. 

In Vaughan-Stevens (ed. Griinwedel)* a very similar blowpipe (collected among 
the ^' Benua ** of East Johor) is described. It is not absolutely identical with Mr. 
Douglass's specimen, since it is much longer (about 9*0 inches), and its two half 
cylinders of ^*pSnuga** wood are protected by a bamboo casing. Mr. Douglasses 
specimen, on the other hand, corresponds with remarkable fidelity to a Peruvian tjrpe of 
blowpipe, such as is described in the second volume of '* Reissund Stuebel's '* Ar///ur und 
Industrie Sudamerikanischer Volker, This Peruvian specimen came from the Huallaya 
river, and was described as consisting of ^^ the two halves of a palm-stem carefully 
'* grooved and fitted together and bound round with 9ipo, which is covered besides with 
** a layer of black wax. It is fitted with a short bone mouth piece.""!' 

Since the above was written Mr. Douglass has very kindly forwarded to me (also 
for presentation to the Museum) the quiver which belongs to the blowpipe I have just 
described, and this, too, like the blowpipe, presents several new and interesting features. 

The body of the quiver is made from a bamboo internode measuring 11^ inches in 
length, and of great diameter (four inches). It is covered with a fiattish four-peaked 
cap made of woven pandanus-leaf, which is made fast to a double ring of plaited rattan 
or calamus (which encircles the body of the quiver) by means of a short cord of 
plaited tree-bark {artocarpus ? or eugeissona tristis ?). The usual waist-cord of twisted 



• VeroffrntlichuHgen a, d. hOnigl. Mv4t, f. Volkerkunde. II. Band, 3/4 Heft. Pp. 102 (Berlin, 
1892). 

t Cp. Otis T. Mason, Origin of InrfntiaiL, p. 208. 

[ i« ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 108-109. 

troe-bark is attached to the same rattau-riugs. The exterior of the quiver is decorated 
throughout bj the usual incised patterns, which are, however, roughly aud irregularly 
executed) and there are traces of rosin at the bottom of the quiver. 

The interior is fitted with the usual rolled-up reed-bundle, the number of reeds being 
sixty-five. Of these, however, only five contain darts, and there is one loose dart of 
which the butt-end has been lost, making six darts iu all. All of these darts have broken 
or (as I think more probable) blunt points and have very probably been used for knocking 
over small birds. Only one (the loose one) has traces of a coating of poison upon it, and 
even of this one the extreme tip of the point is blunt like the rest. 

The butt-ends of the darts, one of which (the longer ones) measure 7| iu. in length, 
and others (the shorter) about 7^ in., are made of some very light pith-like wood and are 
of irregular length, two having long butt-ends (about 1 in.), the other three being only 
half that length. But they are all very incompletely rounded, are all cut off square at 
the lower end, and are all of pretty much the same diameter throughout, instead of 
tapering towards the shaft, as is the case with the better made darts used by the Sakais, 
Besisi, &c. Another point is that in two of them the upper end of the dart-shaft projects 
beyond the upper end of the butt, a peculiarity which may be seen in the blowpipe darts 
of Borneo. 

The only other contents of the quiver were two rolled up pieces of old chintz cloth, 
and a spearhead-shaped spatula, still coated with poison. 

In view of all the evidence, and in spite of slight differences, I think there need be 
no hesitation whatever in identifying both the blowpipe and quiver as a variety of the 
*' Benua '^ blowpipe and quiver which Vaughan Stevens obtained in the eastern part of 
Johor, in spite of the fact that this specimen was obtained iu Kuantan, north of the 
Paliang, a fact which disagrees with a statement made by Vaughan Stevens elsewhere, 
viz., that this type of blowpipe is not found (in the Peninsula) north of the river in 
question. This particular specimen, at all events, has the additional interest of more 
nearly approaching (it is, in fact, practically identical) the blowpipe of Peru than any 
other yet recorded from this part of the world — a fact which should be of special interest 
in connection with problems of distribution. W. W. SEEAT. 



Torres Straits : String Figures. Rivers : Haddon. 

A Method of' Rooordln^: String: Figurem and Trieks. Bi/ fV. H. R, ^AQ 

Rivers, M.D., and A, C. Haddon, Sc.D.y F.R.S. lUU 

Many travellers have stated that various peoples, more or less primitive, amuse them- 
selves by making string figures to which the general term of ** cat^s cradle ** is usually 
applied. We are informed that these figures are much more complicated than are ours, 
and that they represent various natural and artificial objects sometimes in a state of rest, 
sometimes in a state of motion. 

Occasionally a list is published of some of the figures made by a particular people, 
perhaps with illustrations of the completed figure. So far as we are aware. Dr. Franz 
Boas* was the first to publish a descriptive account of the method employed by a 
primitive people in making any of these figures ; unfortunately he gives descriptions of 
but two of the five Eskimo figures he represents. 

Mr. Harlan I. Smitht published sketches illustrating the various stages in the 
making of a couple of string figures of the Thompson Indians of British Columbia. 

These two records are the only descriptions we have seen of the method of making 
such figures ; the paucity of the available material must be attributed to the considerable 



♦ F. Boas, •• The Game of Cat's Cradle," Int^nationalf* Archivfur Ethmgi-aphie, I., 1888, p. 229. 
t Mem. Am. Mut. Sat. Hist., Vol. II.; Anthropiilogy, I. ; The Jesup North Pacific Expedition, IV. ; 
" The Thompson Indians of British Columbia," by James Teit, April, 1900, p. 282. 

[ 146 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 109. 

difficultj usually experienced in learning and recording these figures. In order to 
minimise this difficulty we have devised a system of nomenclature and descriplion 
which renders it possible to describe any operation in comparatively few words. 

We have found that certain sentences are spoken or muttered either during the 
manipulation of a fignre or trick, or on its completion. Those will be printed, together 
with all the string figures and tricks that we collected in Torres Straits, in Vol. IV. of 
the Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Expedition to Torres Straits. 

The existing data are too slight to indicate how far these string figures are of value 
in .ethnological study. Indeed, until some progress has been made in any branch of 
study it is impossible to gauge its importance. 

Indications are not lacking, however, that some at least of these string figures have, 
or have had, a definite significance or utility amongst several peoples ; but at present it is 
not our intention to enter into a discussion of the subject. Our object is to try to induce 
field workers to pay attention to the subject and to record the method of making the 
figures, and to assist them in this we offer the following nomenclature and method of 
description. We have little doubt that those who interest themselves in these simple 
amusements will find that their labour has not been in vain. 

We employ the term ^ string figures ** in those cases in which it is intended to 
represent certain objects or operations. The ** cat^s cradle ** of our childhood belongs to 
this category. ^^ Tricks *' are generally knots or complicated arrangements of the string 
which run out freely when pulled. Sometimes it is difficult to decide which name should 
be applied. 

A piece of smooth, pliable string should be selected which is not liable to kink. 
A length of about 6 ft. 6 in. (2 metres) is usually the most suitable ; the ends should be 
tied in a reef knot, and the ends trimmed. A spliced, knotless string would be best of all. 

Terminology, — A string passed over a digit is termed a loop. A loop consists of 
two strings. Anatomically, anything on the thumb aspect of the hand is termed ^ radiaV^ 
and anything on the little-finger side is called ^^ ulnar,*' thus every loop is composed 
of a radial string and an ulnar string. By employing the terms thumb, index, middle- 
finger, ring-finger, little -finger, and right and left, it is possible to designate any one of 
the twenty strings that may extend between the two hands. 

A string lying across the front of the hand is a palmar string, and one lying across 
the back of the hand is a dorsal string. 

Sometimes there are two loops on a digit, one of which is nearer the finger-tip than 
the other. Anatomically, that which is nearer to the point of attachment is *' proximal,*' 
that which is nearer the free end is ^ distal." Thus, of two loops on a digit, the one 
which is nearer the hand is the proximal loop, that which is nearer the tip of the digit 
is the distal loop ; similarly we can speak of a proximal string and a distal string. 

In all cases various parts of the string figures are transferred from one digit or set of 
digits to another or others. This is done by inserting a digit (or digits) into certain loops 
of the figure and then restoring the digit (or digits) hack to the original position, so that 
they bring with it (or them) one string or both strings of the loop. This operation will 
be described as follows : — '^ Pass the digit into such and such a loop, take up such and 
such a string, and return." In rare cases a string is taken up between thumb and 
index. A digit may be inserted into a loop from the proximal or distal side, and in 
passing to a given loop the digit may pass to the distal or proximal side of other loops. 
We use these expressions as a general rule instead of '' over and under," '^ above and 
below," because the applicability of the latter terms depends on the way in which the 
figures are held. If the figures are held horizontally, '^ over and above " will correspond 
as a general rule to the distal side, while '* under and below " will correspond to the 
proximal side. In some cases when there is no possibility of confusion, we have used 
the shorter terminology. 

[ i« ] 



1902.] MAN. CNo. 109. 

A given string may be taken up by a digit so that it ilies |on the front or palmar 
aspect of the finger, or so that it lies on the back or dorsal aspect. In nearly all cases 
it will be found that when a string is taken up by inserting the digit into the distal side 
of a loop, tbe string will have been taken up by the palmar aspect, and that the insertion 
into the proximal side of the loop involves taking up the string by the dorsal aspect of 
the digit. 

Other operations involved are those of transferring strings from one digit to another 
and dropping the strings from a given digit or digits. 

The manipulation consists of a series of movements, after each of which the figure 
should be extended by drawing the hands apart and separating the digits. In some 
cases in which this would interfere with the formation of the figure, a special instruction 
will be given that the figure is not to be extended. Usually it is advisable to keep the 
loops as near the tips of the digits as possible. 

There are certain opening positions and movements which are common to many 
figures. To save trouble these mtiy receive conventional names ; the use of these will 
soon be apparent, but it is better to repeat descriptions than to run any risk of obscurity. 

Position /. — This name. may be applied to the position in which the string is placed 
on the hands when beginning the great majority of the figures. 

Place the string over the thumbs and little fingers of both hands so that on each 
hand the string passes from the ulnar side of the hand round the back of the little finger, 
then between the little and ring fingers and across the palm ; then between the index 
and thumb and round the back of the thumb to the radial side of the hand. When the 
hands are drawn apart tbe result is a single radial thumb string and a single ulnar little 
finger string on each hand with a string lying across the palm. 

This position differs from the opening position of the English cat^s cradle in which 
the string is wound round the hand so that one string lies across tbe palm and two across 
the back of the hand with a single radial index string and a single ulnar little finger 
string. 

Opening A. — This name may be applied to the manipulation which forms the most 
frequent starting point of the various figures. Place string on hands in Position I. 
With the back of the index of the right hand take up from proximal side (or from below) 
the left palmar string and return. There will now be a loop on the right index, formed 
by strings passing from the radial side of tbe little finger and the ulnar side of the thumb 
of tbe left hand, i.e., the radial little finger strings and the ulnar thumb strings 
respectively. 

With the back of the index of left hand take up from proximal side (or from below) 
the right palmar string and return, keeping the index with the right index loop all the 
time so that the strings now joining the loop on the left index lie within the right index 
loop. 

The figure now consists of six loops on the thumb, index, and little finger of the two 
hands. The radial little finger string of each hand crosses in the centre of the figure to 
form the ulnar index strings of the other hand, and similarly the ulnar thumb string of 
one hand crosses and becomes the radial index string of the other hand. 

The places where the strings cross in the centre of the figure may be termed the 
crosses of Opening A. 

All the string figures that follow are made by Melanesians. We obtained Nos. 1, 2, 
5, 6, 7, 9-12 from Mer (Murray Island), and Nos. 2, 5, 7, 11 also at Mabuiag in Torres 
Straits. No. 8 was obtained in Eiwai, at the mouth of the Fly River, British New 
Guinea. Kos. 3 and 4 were taught to us by a native of Lifu, Loyalty Islands, south- 
west Pacific, who happened to be residing in Mabuiag. There is no doubt that they are 
true Lifu figures. Kamut is the name for these string figures in the Murray Island 
language. 

[ 148 ] 



1902J 



MAN. 



[JXo. 109.. 




Fig. 1.— Baur, " fish tpear." 
a. Thumb, b. Middle finger, c. Little finger. 




1. Baury "fish-spear" (Mer). — Position I. — ^Take up with the right index the trans- 
verse string on the left palin from its proximal side, give it one twist and return. Pass 
the left index through the right index 
loop from the distal side and take up 
the transverse palmar string of the 
right hand from the proximal side and 
return through the loop. Drop the 
thumb and little finger loops of the 
right hand and pull the hands apart. 

(Fig. 1.) 

2. Ti meiOy " the nest of the 
Ti bird " (Mer) ; Gul, " a canoe " 
(Mabuiag). — Opening A. — Insert 
each index into the little finger loop 
from the distal side and pass it on 
proximal side of radial little finger 
string and bring it back to its previous 
position by passing ic between the ulnar thumb string and the radial index string. Let go 

little fingers. There are now two loops on each 
index and a large loop passing round both 
thumbs. Insert the little fingers from the 
distal side into the index loops and pull down 
the two ulnar index strings. Let go both 
thumbs gently and insert them into the same 
loop in the opposite direction to which they 
had been previously (t.e., change the direction 
of the thumbs in their loop). With the 
dorsal aspect of the thumbs take up from 
the palmar side the strings passing obliquely 
from the radial side of the index fingers to 
the ulnar little finger strings and extend the 
figure. The inverted pyramid in the centre 
represents the bird's nest. (Fig. 2.) 

3. Tim, " a well " (Lif u).— This figure 
is precisely the same as Ti meUi, but in this 
case the inverted pyramid represents a well. By slightly twisting the right wrist to the 

right and the left wrist to the left the 

apex of the pyramid is brought to a level | 
with its base. The original condition is 
spoken of as the well being full of water, 
in the latter the well is said to be dry. 

4. Sihnagy " the fence round the 
well" (Lif u).— Tim.* With the dorsal 
aspect of the thumbs take up the two 
radial index strings and bring them 
through the thumb loops. Drop the little 
fingers and pull tight. Release the index 
fingers gently. Insert the little fingers 
into the thumb loops and extend the 
figure. (Fig. 3.) 




Fio. 2.— Ti Meta : a somewhat conical 
bird'fi nest. 




Fia. 3.— SiHHAO, "a fence. 



* This means that the Tun figoiQ is to be made first, the new figure being a continoation of it. 

( U9 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 109. 




Fio. 4.— Lbm Babaioida, " setting sun/' 



5. Lem baraigida, " setting sun." (Mer) ; Degai^ '' a star" (Mabuiag).*— Opening A. 

— Pass little fingers over the index loops and insert into the thumb loops from the distal 

side and take up with the back of the little fingers the radial thumb string. Release 

the thumbs, i he index fingers have each one loop and the little fiagerfi two loops. 

Passing the thumbs under the index loops, 
take up the two radial strings of the little 
Rngers from the proximal side and return, 
passing under the index loops. Release little 
fingers. By this movement the little finger 
loops have been transferred to the thumbs. 
Pass little fingers distal to the index loops, 
and take up from the proximal side the 
two ulnar strings of thumb loops. (End of 
" Lem opening.") 

Transfer loop of left index to right index 
and loop of right index over the left index 
loop to left index. Pass right middle fingerf 
from the distal side through index loop and 
take up from the proximal side the two ulnar 

strings of the thumb loop and return through the index loop. Do the same with the left 

hand. Release thumbs and index fingers. Pass the thumbs from the proximal side into 

the middle finger loops and withdraw middle 

fingers, thus transfferring middle finger 

loops to thumbs. Extend the figure with 

thumbs towards the body. (There will then 

be a St. Andrew's cross in centre of figure. 

Insert index fingers from the distal side into 

the lateral spaces of the cross, and into the 

central inverted triangle from the proximal 

side and take up the arms of the cross and 

return).^ Pass right middle fingers through 

the index loop from the distal side and lake 

up from the proximal side the two ulnar thumb strings and return through the index 

loop. Release the thumbs and index fingers, and with the thumbs manipulate the figure 

so as to make an approximate semicircle 
with four diverging loops (rays). Drop 
middle fingers and draw out and the sun will 
sef. (Fig. 4.) 

6. Aresy '' Murray and Dauar men 
fighting " (Mer). — Lem opening. — Insert 
tbe index fingers into the central triangle 
from the proximal side and take up the 
radial thumb strings. Loop the proximal 
index string of each hand over the two 
Fig. 6.->Abes (b). distal strings and over the tip of the index 

* This Hgure requires a specially loog btring. 

t This operatiou may be done limultaneously with both middle fingers, but it is somewhat difficult 
and it is rather more easy to manipulate each middle finger separately. 

X An alternative descriptiou is as follows : There is now a triangle in the middle of the figure, the 
apex of which is towards the body aud it^ base is formed by the ulnar little fiuger strings. On either 
side of the triangle is a space. Insert the index fingers into these spaces from the distal side, keeping 
to the ulnar side of the short strings which cross the figure transversely, and with the backs of the 
index fingers take ap the strings forming the sides of the triangle. 

[ 160 ] 




Fio. 6,— ares (a), " fighting." 




1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 109. 




ou to its palmar aspect. Let go thumbs. Twist the index fingers three times and drop 
the index loops. Insert the four fingers into the little finger loops and draw slowly 
apart. The two index loops will approach each other and become entangled. One 
represents a Murray man and the other a Dauar man ; they *^ fight, fight, fight,*' and one 
loop eventually remains. When done carefully this loop can now be drawn to one hand 
along the two strings, it represents the Murray man carrying off the Dauar man's 
head. (Figs. 5 and 6.) 

7. Geigi, "King fish " (Mar) ; Dangal, " Dugong " (Mabuiag).— Opening A.— 
Drop right index, loop left index over string from thumb to little finger, drop left thumb 
and little finger, draw tight, left hand as at beginning with Position I. 

Loop left index from above over trans- 
verse cord of right hund and draw back, 
twisting once ; loop right index from above 
over the ulnar thumb string and the radial 
little finger string and return ; loop right 
little finger over ulnar tbumb string of 
same side, inside the triangle formed by 
the last movement, and loop the left little 
finger over the ulnar index string ; drop 
the thumbs and stretch the figure ou the 
index and little fingers of each hand. 

Another person puts a hand into 
central diamond, the manipulator lets go 
the right hand and pulls with the left 
hand, and the fish will escape ; if he lets 
go with the left ^nd pulls with the right 
hand the fish will be caught. (Fig. 7.) 

8. Kokoway " crab " (Saguane, Kiwai Island). — Ti mela. — Put the little fingers from 
the proximal side into the thumbs loops. Release thumbs. Put thumbs into little finger 
loops and take up through that loop the double strings on the palms. Release little 
fingers. Put little fingers from the proximal side into thumb loops and release thumbs. A 
straight string passes from one index to the other ; take up this string from the proximal 
side with the thumbs and release indices ; put indices into thumb loops in opposite 
direction and release thumbs. A loop passes 
from the centre of each palmar string to the 
outer angle of the centre lozenges ; take up 
with the thumbs from the proximal side the 
string of this loop that lies nearest to you. 
Exchange loops on thumbs, the left passing 
under the right. Pass the middle fingers 
distal to the index loop and take up the 
ulnar thumb strings from the proximal side. 
Release thumbs. Pass the thumbs into the 
middle finger loop from the distal side and 
take the ulnar middle finger string from 
the proximal side. Release middle finger. 
With the thumbs take up from the 
proximal side the radial index strings and return through the thumb loops. Release 
indices. Pass indices from the proximal side into thumb loops and release thumbs. 
One of the two radial little finger strings of each hand goes across the figure and crosses 
the corresponding string from the other little finger in the middle within a central 
triangle. (If not apparent this triangle will become so by a slight manipulation.) Take 

[ 151 ] 



Fio. 7.— Gbioi, "king fish.'* 
a, h. Index fingers, r, d. Little fingers. 




Fig. 8.~Eokowa, " crab." 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 109; 



up these strings from the proximal side at the point at which thej cross in the triangle 
with both thumbs. With the thumbs from the proximal side take up the radial index 
strings and return through the thumb loops. Release indices. Extend to form the 
crab. (Fig 8.) 

9. Pagiy " a sea-snake " (Mer). — Opening A. — Pass the right hand round the left hand 
so that all the strings cross the back of the left hand from the radial to the ulnar side. 
Pass the left hand and its strings from the distal side into the loop of the right index, 
and bring it out proximal to the ulnar string of the index. Let go the right index. 
Unwind the left hand. Let go the left index. There is then a single transverse string 
on the right palm, and a single transverse string on the back of the left hand. With 
the index finger of the left hand take up from the proximal side the transverse string on 
the right palm. Transfer the string from the back of the left hand to the palm of the 
left hand and draw tight. Let go left thumb. Transfer the loop of the left index to 
the left thumb. Put each index into its little finger loop from the distal side, and take 

up the ulnar string with the back of the 

I index. Hold the hands pointing away from 
the body with the index fingers upper- 
most. Disengage the left thumb. Gentljr 
jerk the right index and the snake will 
swim. (Fig. 9.) 

10. Tup, "a small fish" (Mer).— 
Hold a portion of the string between the 
thumb and the index of each hand and 
make a ring and insert the index fingers 
into this ring so that the crossed strings 
are away from the body. Separate the 
hands. Each index finger has now two 
loops and the strings from the ulnar side 
cross one another. 




Fio. 9.— Paoi. Note the sea-snake has a flat, 
not a thin pointed tail. 



End of Tup opening. — Pass the thumbs of each hand into the proximal loop from 
the distal side and take up the ulnar string of that loop with the dorsal aspect ; repeat 
with the distal loop. Pass little finger of each hand over the radial distal string of the 
index and take up from the proximal side the proximal radial index string. Each little 
finger is now in a triangle. Pass each index finger from the distal side into the triangle 
of its own hand, and take up the distal radial index string which forms the side of the 
triangle nearest to you. Drop tnumbs and hold the index and little fingers widely apart. 
Four fish will then be seen. 

Release the distal loop of each index, drop the little fingers, draw the hands apart 
and the figure resolves itself into four strings. 

11. Monan, " lizard " (Mer) ; Maita, " intestines of a turtle " (Mabuiag). — Hold the 
string in the left hand so that a long loop hangs down from it. Pass the right hand 
through the loop away from the body, sink the hand from the wrist and tivist it towards 
the right, then pass it backwards behind both strings and forward to the left of the left 
string, then raise the right hand from the wrist and bring it back between the strings 
and pull the hands apart. The right hand is then released. 

12. Kehe mokeisy "the mouse" (Mer). — Hold left hand with the thumb uppermost 
and the fingers directed to the front. Put whole left hand through the string, letting 
the loop fall down its dorsal and palmar aspect from the radial side of the thumb. There 
will then be a pendant palmar and dorsal string on the left hand. Pass index of right 
hand beneath the palmar string, and between the thumb and index of the left hand, then 
pass it round the pendant dorsal string bringing it between the thumb and index. Give 
the loop thus made a twist clockwise, and place it over the index of the left hand. Pull 

[ 152 ] 



1902 J MAN. CNoB.109-ttI; ii 

tight the pendantr strings. -Again pasff right index beneath the pendant palmar string 
and between the index and -middle fingers, hook it over the dorsakratriog'a? before. 
Bring it through as before, twist the loop clock wise^ and put it over the middle finger. 
Repeat so as to make similar loops over the ring and little fii)g.ers. 'Pull all the strings 
tight. Remove the loop from the left thumb, hold it bet\yeen the left .thumb and indexL 
With Fight hand pull the palmar string, and make a squeaking noise as the loop 
disappears from the left hand. W. H. R. RIVERS : A. C. HADDON. 



Japan. Aston. 

Qohel and Inao. A Note to an Article on the Japanese *'*' Gohei '** and the 44 f^ 
Ainu ^^ InaOy'' contributed .to the ^^ Journal of the Anthropological Institute,'*'^ |IU 
XXXLyUXff. By fV. G. Aston, C.M.G. 

Since writing this article my attention has been drawn bj Mr. F. V. Dickins to 
some further evidence as to the character of the Kedzuri-kake, collected bj a Japanese 
scholar who signs himself in Sanskrit, Vajra Samadhi Nagarjuna. It appears from the 
facts adduced by him that the Kedzuri-kake were, at least in some cases, phallic 
emblems, thus confirming a suspicion I had already entertained from their form, their 
function (in promoting procreation), and the date of the woman- beating ceremony! 
namely, the full moon of. the first month, which is also that of the festival of the phallic 
Sahe or Sai no Kami, 

Mr. Nagarjuna agrees that the Kedzuri-kake and the Incto are identical. He 
knows, however, that the latter have no phallic quality, and wonders how the A in us 
came to use them as general offerings to their deities. He refers to a practice in eastern 
Japan of boys of twelve offering phallic Kedzuri-kake to the gods (the Sai no Kami f) 
on the first full moon of the year. But this scarcely explains the Ainu practice. Why, 
again, should the Ainus call the Inao by the Japanese name nusay that is to say, 
offerings ? Nor does the Kedzuri-kake ceremony at Gion appear to have any phallic 
character. The subject requires fuller elucidation. W. G. ASTON. 



REVIEW. 
Armenia. I^noh. 

Armenia : Travels and Studies. By H» F. B, Lynch. 2 vols. 197 illustra- ^<< 
tions and numerous maps. pp. xxvi.-982.. London : Longmans, 1901. 1 1 1 

These are the most ambitious travel volumes that have been issued in English for 
some years. The author took every preliminary measure possible to justify the scale of 
his publication. After familiarising himself with eastern travel in Mesopotamia^ Persia, 
and Georgia, Mr. Lynch made two journeys,, each of many months* duration,^ up and 
down Russian and Turkish ^^ Armenia," t.e., the Arn^nia Major of antiquity. The 
Armenia Minor of Roman Imperial days, however, he hardly touched, and the Lesser 
Armenia of the Crusaders and the Roupeniau dynasty is outside his range altogether. 
Mr* Lynch, has also worked up local history with a thoroughness from .which all 
travellers might take example, and has gone through not less exhaustively . th^ 
European literature bearing on the country. We do not gather that he is able to read 
native writers in the original Armenian,, but the collaboration of Mr. F. C. Conybeare 
has supplemented his deficiency in that respect. Finally, he has been in no undue hurry 
to publish ; his first. Armenian journey was made in 1893, and his second was oyer ii^ 
September 1898. , 

The result is this magnificently printed and illustrated mixture of travel notes and 
impressions, historical and^urclueological research^ political ratiocination, and geographical 

[ 153 ] 



1998.] MAN. [No. m. 

informatioD. There is a great deal, in fact, of almost every tblug for which one would 
look in a reference book on Armenia, presented in a more comprehensive aod.'Jfltauled 
form than elsewhere. The notable exception, unfortunately for the Deadses df Man, is 
anthropology. Either Mr. Lynch felt little interest in thn jhtt |iranttive life and custom 
of the people, or he travelled too much g»/wuwT(iii ^|fet into touch with the lower strata 
of society. In his book one hwiii ■ gtmt dniil of officials of all sorts, of the higher 
clergy, of beys, uai^BfJAiuwu^lnA nrery little indeed of the common peasant ; and from 
iMidiraillBUMd^ anthropological inquiry Mr. Lynch took great care to exclude himself 
%ylns prejudice against all sorts and conditions of Kurds. 

One must, therefore, let anthropology go and review the author as traveller, 
geographer, archaeologist, historian, and politician. But at the outset we cannot refrain 
from expressing regret that the results of his investigations in all these capacities have 
been confounded in one book. The example of Lord Curzon has, we fancy, deter- 
mined his scheme of publication ; but, unfortunately, Mr. Lynch to his industry and 
comprehensive view does not add Lord^s Curzon^s power of selection and arrangement, 
clearness and terseness of style, sense of proportion, discrimination in the use of 
authorities, and impartiality of judgment : and it cannot be said that his laudable 
ambition to improve on the dryness of the Viceroy's Persia by the introduction of 
elaborately written descriptions of scenes and men has been crowned with great success. 
As a record of travel the book is somewhat marred by these '^ purple patches *' and by 
the evident aloofness of the traveller from the life among which he moved. 

Geographers, however, owe Mr. Lynch a great debt for his general map of the 
Armenian plateau (to be bought separately, and the best yet compiled from Russian, 
British, and German data\ and for his most admirable photographic reproductions of 
the scenery. The letterpress adds less from the geographical point of view than might 
have been expected, and in dealing with geographical features the author shows, an 
indifference to the usual methods of scientific statement, a tendency to novelties of 
expression, and a diffuseness which often obscure his meaning. His chapter on the 
Binglul Dagh, however, supplies much new information and corrects previous ideas 
as to the character of this cardinal point in Armenian orography, and his descriptions of 
the great Van volcanoes, Nimrud and Sipan, may be regarded as final. The simplicity 
of the plateau geology has never been so well stated, and for that kind of investigation 
it was as happy a thought to enlist the services of Mr. F. Oswald as it was to secure 
those of a skilled photographer like Mr. £. Wesson, of the London Polytechnic. To 
this fortunate collaboration we owe the superb views of Ararat from many points, and 
Mr. Lynches description of his ascent supplies an instructive supplement to those previously 
published, if it lacks some of the vividness and force of Mr. Bryce's famous record of 
the same achievement. 

Mr. Lynches routes did not take him through districts where an archaeologist has 
very much to do. Had he lingered longer in the Lesser Caucasus or included the 
Dersim in his investigations he might have had much more to record ; but in such 
antiquities as he did see — mainly in the province of Armenian art — his interest is great 
and his competence very considerable. We should certainly turn to his book among the 
very first when desirous of studying the remains of Armenian ecclesiastical architecture. 
On this matter, as on the history of Armenia since it became, and since it ceased to be, a 
nation, Mr. Lynch is so well informed that it is much to be desired that he should give 
continuity to the archaeological and historical notices scattered up and down these volumes 
and reissue them as a connected illostrated history df Oreater Armenia. But if he does 
so he might fitly render more justice to elements in the population that are not Armenian, 
and to their history. When dealing with places and events off the plateau he is evidently 
less well informed. A study of the history of Roupmiian Armenia, for example, would 
show him that it resisted successfully all Seljuk attack and was finally overwhelmed by 

[ 154 ] 



1903.] HAN. [Nob. Ul-llS. 

the Egyptians. Lastly, in the field of modero politics, which plaj the maiD part in the 
Russian volume and a large part in the Turkish, Mr. Lynch shows himself veiT* well 
infonned, very observant, and possessed of most clear and decided views of his own. 
Perhaps he is less an impartial judge than an advocate who weakens his influence on the 
jury of European opinion by repeated evidence of partisanship. He will hardly believe 
that anyone but an Armenian, whether he be Turk, or Russian, or, least of all« Kurd, 
can do any good. But he is fully entitled, of course* to all his opinions, and, fortified as 
those are by exceptional knowledge of the history and literature of Armenia as well 
mB «f tbe «i|perfiiual features of the. land itself, they must always carry weight if not 
necessarily ooliTiQlian. JDL G.JEL 



PROOEEDINGS OF SOCIETIES. 
Prooeedlngs. British Association. 

The Anthropological Section of the British Association for the advancement of 4f A 
science met at Belfast on September llth-17th, 1902, in the Anatomical Depart- 1 1^ 
ment of Queen*s College. For the use of these rooms, and for untiring personal super- 
vision of the local arrangements, the Section is indebted to Professor J. Symington, M.D., 
F.R.S.E. An instructive loan exhibition of Irish antiquities, and of numerous specimens 
sent in illustration of papers read at the meeting, was installed in the adjacent dissecting 
room and anatomical museum. 

The president of the section. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., took as the subject of his 
address the question of *^ Totemism.'* The address will be found printed in full in the 
Proceedings of the British Association (Belfast) 1902, and in a current number of 
Nature^ and a full abstract is given in the Times of September 12th. 

The papers and exhibits were more numerous than usual ; and the discussions of 
them were well sustained, and of more than average value. In the summary which 
follows, every paper is given by title ; wherever it has been possible to ascertain in 
what form a paper is to be published in full, a reference has been added, and the 
summary of its contents curtailed or omitted ; and in other cases, where it is not clear 
whether the full text will be published in the form in which it was communicated at 
Belfast, an abstract, more or less ample has been added. All '^ Reports ** will be found 
printed in full in Proc. Brit, Assoc, (Belfast) 1902 (London ; Murray : to be issued 
early in 1903), where also will be printed official abstracts of nearly all the papers. The 
principal papers and discussions are summarised in the Times of September 12th- 18th, 
and a general review of the meeting is given in the Times of September 22nd. 

Method and Organization. 

Report of the Committee on an Ethnographic Survey of Canada, — The Committee 
reports that the Royal Society of Canada has appointed a strong committee to approach 
the Dominion Government and the Provincial Governments, with the object of placing 
the ethnographic survey of Canada on a permanent basis. Report of progress is made 
by the secretary, Mr. C. Hill Tout, in regard to his study of the natives of British 
Columbia. (See Ethnoorapht below.) 

Report of the Committee on the Registration of Anthropological Photographs. — 
An interim report of progress in organization during the past year. 

W. H. Holmes. — On the Classification and Arrangement of the Exhibits in an 
Anthropological Museum, To be printed in full in Journ, Anthr. Inst,y XXXII. 

E. N. Fallaize. — Suggestions for the Classification of the Subject-matter of 
Anthropology. To be published in full in Man. 

[ 166 ] 



19020 MAN. [No. 112. 

Anthropographt. 

Professor D. J. Cunxingham, M.D., F.R.S. — Cornelius Magrath^ the Irish Giant, 
The skeleton of Magratb was exhibited, by special permission of Trinity College, Dublin. 
Magrath was bom in Tipperary in 1736, and died in Dublin in 1760; his stature was 
7 ft. 5 in., but he seems (in spite of some contemporary advertisements) to have been 
decrepit, knock-kneed, and nearly blind. Professor Cunningham discussed the question 
of the relalion of giantism to the disease known as acromegaly, in which the face, hands, 
and feet become enlarged ; and supported Dr. Woods Hutchinson's view that the two 
abnormalities' are closely allied. ' If the morbid process begins before the skeletx)n is 
consolidated, the result is general hypertrophy of the skeleton, and a " giant " results ; 
if, however, the skeleton is already consolidated (about the twenty-sixth year) the 
symptoms are those of acromegaly. The paper will shortly be published in full in Man. 

Professor A. F. Dixon, M.B., D.Sc. — Ori a Skull modified by Acromegaly, The 
skull was exhibited, and the inferences from it agreed with those of Professor Cunning- 
ham's paper. Comparison was made with the skull of the Egyptian King, Hen Nekht 
(Man, 1901. 127), who appears to have been attacked by acromegaly. 

. Report of the Committee of Anthropometric Investigations among the Native 
Troops of the Egyptian Army. This committee was appointed at Glasgow, 1901, and 
has enabled Dr. C. S. Myers to carry out extensive anthropometric observations, with 
the full approval and active concurrence of the Egyptian Government. Sufficient data 
have been collected to permit of the preparation of a report on the physical efficiency of 
the Egyptian Army, which will be not only valuable to anthropologists, but also of 
great practical utility. The report describes the methods employed, and the area covered 
by the operations, and will be printed in full in the Proceedings (abstract in the Times 
of September 16th) ; but the publication of the results is postponed. 

J. Gray, B.Sc. — Measurements of the Indian Coronation Contingent, This paper 
will shortly be published in full in Man. 

Report of the Committee on a Pigmentation Survey of the School Children of 
Scotland, This is an interim report, and describes the methods of procedure and 
organization which are adopted in the survey. 

J. F. Tocher, F.I.C. — Note on some Measurements of Eskimo of Southampton 
Island, Man, 1902. 115 (below). 

C. S. Myers, M.D. — Note on a Method of Radial Craniometry, The instrument 
employed permits the measurement of radial lines from the ear-holes to the points usually 
chosen, and of the angles made by these with the horizontal plane. To be published 
in full in Man. 

Professor J. Symington, M.D., F.R.S.E. — Exhibit illustrating Physical 
Anthropology, This exhibit is a printed but unpublished work by John Grattan, 
printed about 1860 in Belfast by Marcus Ward & Co. It is illustrated by numerous 
plates, and contains an ingenious method of measuring skulls. To be published more 
fully hereafter in Man. 

Professor J. Symington, M.D., F.R.S.E. — Demonstration in the AncUomical 
Museum of Queen s College^ Belfast, This demonstration, which took place con- 
currently with the ordinary session, was a new departure intended to afford additional 
facilities for the treatment of detailed questions of anthropography. The demonstration 
was well attended, and led to profitable discussion ; and provides a precedent, for the 
relief of a congested programme, which might be followed with advantage in future 
years. 

Ethnography. 

Ethnographical papers were fewer than usual, but those -which were read were 
distinctly above the average level. 

[ 156 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 112. 

Augustine Henry. — On the Lolos of Western Szechuan. The paper describes 
the various aboriginal, Shan, and Tibetan tribes on the western border of Szechuan. 
The peculiar script of the Lolos is described and discussed. The paper will be published 
in full in Journ, Antkr, Inst. 

T. N. Annandale and H. C. Robinson. — The Races of the Malay Peninsula. 
This paper will shortly be published in full in Journ. Anthr. Inst. 

W. H. Furness, M.D. — On the Ethnography of the Nagas of Eastern Assam. 
To be published in full in Journ. Anthr, Inst. 

C. Hill Tout. — Ethnological Studies of the Mainland Halhomeletny a division 
of the Salish of British Columbia. To be printed in full in the Proc. Brit. Assoc. 
(Belfast), 1902, as an appendix to the Report of the Committee on an Ethnographic 
Survey of Canada. {See Method, &c., above.) 

PSTCHOLOGY. 

W. Graham, M.D. — On the Mental and Moral Characteristics of the People of 
Ulster. The main elements which have gone to the making of the Ulsterman are as 
follows : — (1) The foundation of lowland Scotch. (2) A very considerable English 
leaven which coalesced with the Scotch settlers. (3) An infusion of French blood, due 
to the revocation of the Edict of Nantes, for it was under Louis Crommellin, the 
Huguenot leader, that the linen industry was established, which has lain at the root of 
Ulster prosperity. Here we may find the source of a certain vivacity which distinguishes 
the Ulsterman from the lowland Scot. Two qualities the Ulsterman owes to his Scotch 
blood : (a) bis self-reliance and independence ; {b) his ultra-religiousness. He differs, 
however, from the Scot in other points, being more genial and human, not particularly 
clannish, and more adaptable. He is to be distinguished from the Celtic Irish in modes 
of speech and habits of thought ; the Celt being a poetic and unpractical person ; the 
Ulsterman nothing if not utilitarian. 

Insanity from religious causes is, in Ireland, peculiar to Ulster; and epidemics of 
this form of brain disorder have swept through the country at intervals ; notably in 1859. 
From a study of the asylum statistics, the author concludes — (1) that religion as a factor 
in the causation of insanity is confined to the Protestant population ; (2) that general 
paralysis of the insane is practically unknown in the rural communities of Ulster, though 
found in Belfast ; (3) that in County Armagh religion as a cause falls into the back- 
ground ; (4) that in Belfast insanity increases in proportion as trade prospers ; though 
the contrary holds good of the country districts ; (5) that one of the main preventible 
causes of insanity in Ulster is the lack of amusements and recreations. To be published 
hereafter in full or in Man. 

Miss A. Amy Bulley. — A Study in the Psychology of Primitive Man. Sufficient 
information is now available with regard to primitive man to afiord a general view 
of the trend of his ideas. By ascertaining the limits of primitive man's intellectual 
powers we can rule out theories as to his beliefs which are incompatible with his actual 
stage of development. If found weak in certain mental processes he cannot be reason- 
ably credite<l with conceptions implying their free working. Investigation does not 
warrant us in attributing any absolute mental deficiency to primitive man. His most 
conspicuous failing was inability to differentiate, and the results of this deficiency 
were : 1. Inability to generalise. 2. No distinction between essential and non-essential 
characteristics. 3. Imperfect understanding of cause and effect. 

On applying this argument, e.g.^ to certain theories of the origin of religious ideas, 
it becomes doubtful whether either (1) the worship of one supreme God, (2) phallic 
worship, (3) ghost-cults can be regarded as within the capacity of primitive man ; and 
Dr. Jevous' theory of a continuum in religion presents similar difficulties. It is, in fact, 
imnrobable that any single idea is to be regarded as the origin of religion. 

[ 157 ] 



I90i8.] MAN. [Nb.ll2. 

until tb3 Toof' can be ex>mpleted by large flagstones laid aeross. in some cafics their 
very small dimensions s!>ipport the tradition that they were built* for a dwarfish race. 

Hon.' John AbercroMby. — The Oldest Bronze^A^e Ceramic Type in Britmn^ 
its Close Analogies on the Rhinty and its Probable Origin in Central Europe^ To be 
published in full, with photographic plates, and a summary of the discussion upon it, in 
Journ, Anthr, l7ist,,^^lL\\, 

Geo&ge* Coffey. — On th^, OccurrencCyin Ireland^ of Objects of Hallstatt Types, 
Bronze swords occur freqirently in Ireland of the type of PI. V. 7 of von Sacken's 
Grdberfeld von Hallstatt. Scabbard chapes also Occulr, like that in de Mortiilet, 
Mnsee Fi^ehistorique, PI, XCVI. The Irish examples of caldrons like von Sacken, /.c. 
' PI. XX., wore probably imported, and appear to have influenced the forms of the pottery ; 
round-bottomed caldrons also occur. Pointed rivet-heads, and twisted stay -rods, like 
von Sacken, /:c., PI. XXI II.-XXI v., aiKl embossed and ^ corrugated - metal work, often 
with concentri6-circle ornament, supply further- correspondences ; so also certain pins, 
chains, pendants, and otl>er miscellaneous objects. Iron was probably known before 
the close of the Hallstatt period in Ireland ; and early " La Tone " monuments have 
been noted. The paper will be published in full hereafter. 

P. J, O'Reilly. — On the Survival of Certain Pagan Symbols on Early Christian 
Monuments ^n Ire la7id. To-be published in full in Max. 

Ref()RT of the Oomniittee on Excavations in the Roman Fort at Gellygaer^ neat 
Cardiff. The excavations are completed, and a full' memoir is in preparation. To be 
j^ubllshed by the Cardiff Naturalists' Society. A summary of this and other Roman 
excavations in 1902 will appear shortly in Man. 

Report of the Comrhittee on Excavations in the Roman City of Silchcster. 
Insula XXYII. was completely excavated, and also a triangular patch forming an 
eastward extension of Insula XXII. (excavated in 1899). Insula XXVII. contained 
three houses, two of which had been subsequently enlarged, and showed traces of a 
timber-framed cotastruction of a type which slirvives in the neighbourhood of Silchester. 
The minor objects found were exhibited at Burlington House in the summer, and are 
deposited, as before, in the Reading Museum. A full account of the excavatioms will 
appear in due course in Arvhceologia, in continuation of the reports already printed 
there. • " ' 

Report of the Committee an Excavations at Knossos in Crete, A summary 
aei^ount of the canipaign of 1902 t 6f which preliminary accbunts have appeared iilready 
(Man, 1902, 53 ^ Ti/»c*, 1902, May 20; July 2: Aug. 15), while a fuller report will 
be found in the forthcoming Annual of the Rritisli School of Archa3ology, Vol. VIII., 
1901-2. 

R. C. BosAN<^UET. — ^Excavations at Palceohastro in Eastern Crc/e, 1902. The 
site, which includes *tho remain's of a town afad an extensive necropolis, probably repre- 
sents an early capital of the eastern district of Crete; ' For the first time in Cretan 
excavations, considerable remains of the inhabitants themselves 'were found, and it is 
matter for congratulation that the British Association has seen its way to make a 
substantial grant irr aid of systematic study both of the ancient and of the modern 
population of this part of the island. The paper will be published in full in the same 
Annual. 

R. A, Stewakt Macalister; F.S.A. — Prclimiiiary Note on a Preltistoric Ceme- 
tery' Cave iii Palestinv. * '16 be published in Man. Cf. Pal. ExpL Fundj Q.S., 
October 1902. - ^ 

F.' P. Me!^nell, T.G.S.-^0>i the "Khami Ruin's^ near Bulawayoy Rhodesia. To 
1)6' published, latetj in' Man. ' ' * 



4 • 



t . 



Ptiiitod by Eybk AND SpottibwOodA, His Majesty's I^interd, East Harding Street, E.G. 



Mn^, 1901. Plate L. 




1902.] HAN. [9o. 113. 

ORIOaNAL ARTICLES. 

Egypt. With Plate L. Petrle. 

Prshlaioric Isyptlan Oarvlnffs. ByffF. M. FUndtrt Petrie, D.C.L., 44A 
LL.D., Edwards Prafetsor of Egyptology at University College, London. 1 10 

Tlie accompanying pbotograpba of carvings have not yet been published, and such 
work is so rare tbat it needs to be put on record. Each object ia shown ou one side in 
the upper half with Arabic figures, on the other side in the lower hall with Roman 
figures. All the objects are five-sixths of actual size. 

t. A unique slate carving, bought in Cairo some years before prehistoric work in 
slate w)ts discovered. The head has a lump on the forehead, which has the outline of a 
clenchod fist, but without any detnils of the fingers. The reliefs upon this cannot be read 
as hieroglyphs, although some might be identified ; the birds are indeterminate, like most 
of those in early use ; the second sign might be neb, the third maa. The incised signs 
on the back difier from the others, but none can be read with certainty, though the last one 
might possibly be amiut. From the style, compared with what lias since been found, I 
should refer this to a date shortly before the age of Mena. 

2. Another carving in slate, of a fish form. The combination of the tail of the fish 
developed into the head of some other animal is what is now familiar to us in the 
prehistoric slate palettes, though this was bought in Cairo before those were known. 
The relief signs are linked together from opposite sides by the serpent which passes over 
the top edge : on No. 2 are two birds and the neb basket, with half the serpent ; the 
remainder is ou No. II. with a hoe, a tub basket, and another bird. From the work 
this appears to be of the same age as the previous object. 

' 3. Carving in ivory, apparently the handle of some object. Fig. .1 should be turned 
with the hole end downward ; then is een a figure of the hippopotamus goddess Taurt, 
standing on two long thin legs, with i. brief tail, grasping a crocodile by the hind leg in 
her right bund, and in her left hand holding the tail, which she is apparently devouring ; 
the head of the crocodile hangs downward. No such scene of Taurt and a crocodile is 
known elsewhere. Fig. III. shows a dog chasing a deer. The cross lining of these 
figures belongs to the earlier prehistoric time, and is not found on the late carvings. 

4. This small flint knife is of the usual work, one side ground, the other flaked. It 
is the smallest knife that I have seen highly finished. The handle appears to belong to 
it origioBlly, as it agrees in size, and it is very unlikely that such a small knife and 
handle should be found independently. On Fig. 4 are two cerastes serpents twice 
crossed, caduceus-fasbion, and between them two six-leaved rosettes. On Fig. IV. is a 
liou, a leopard, and a hedgehog. The character of this side is much like the Pitt-Rivers 
knife hsndle {Xa^ada, pi. Ixxvii.) with rows of animals; but the serpents are an 
entirely now grouping, only coiled figures of single serpents being known before from 
prehistoric times. 

5, 6, 7, I'endants of aliell, apparently to be worn on the forehead. Uany pendants 
are known of plain oval forms, made of shell, marble, and copper, but decorative ones are 

A few have a hook on the inner side of the lower eud, as is seen here in 

'he mat-work pattern of 5 suggests that these pendants may have been made 

fibre lathed together. The pendants in form of a standing female, 6. and a 

', seem from their material and nature to belong to the same age as 5, 

tliey were sold by a travelling dealer as being of one group. The bole for 

jui-t below the head, and the figure has naturally broken down at so 

The long robe is already known to us as being worn in the earliest 

orobalily before Mena, on some ivory figures of girls from Hierakonpolis, 

)f Meua on the ivory figure of a girl in the tomb of Bcner-ab. 

object!! were face pendants ia shown by actually finding an oval example 

by all of tbem fitting well to the forehead, the hook coming in over 

[ 161 ] 




1S03.] 



MAN. 



[Nob. U3-U4. 



the bridge of the oose. The use nt fuire-peuilunU lieloiig? to the lat«r [iiirt <if lUe pre- 
blstoric age : Aud the well-ronned fi^iirea here niny well 1>elong to the djiiastio nice who 
broQfcht in artistic work. The iim of a book at the lower end clenrly pointd to a faoe 
veil bein^ suspended from it, and in<Iieutes tliat tlie latter prehistoric people wore time 
veils, which have been re- in trod need by the Arabia into modern Egypt. The ehiaing 
pendaut of white shell or polished copper is evidently nkin (o the burnished gilt metal 
oroament now woni on the forehead by Egyptian women, from which the foee veil ia 
anspended. W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. 



114 



Crete: Fauna. Boyd-Dawkins. 

Remains of Animals fttund in the Otcttean Oave in 1001. 

ProJeMor If. Hoi/d- Dawkina. M.A., D.Sc, F.U.S. 

The remains of the auimnls discn^-t.reii by Mr. Hogarth in the DieUean Cave in 1901, 
and Bent to me for ideiitilicatioii, present points of uuiifliderable iuteresi. They belong 
partly to animals which have been sacrificed in the .Sanctuary of Zeus jind partly to 
animnis whivb have been eaten and left in ii lower Btnitaui to form a rofnse heap similar 
hi every respect lo llione invuriahly found in caves which have been occupied by man. 
They form eui imi>ortant contribution to onr knowledge of the wil<l and domestic 
animals in Crete in the Mycenean and early Greek periods. 

The conditions of their discovery were as follows : The larger specimens were 
obtained from an untunched deposit in the atrium of the cave {Journal of IMlenie 
Studies, Vol. XVII., p. 355) three feet in thickueBs, which restcil upon a layer of gravel. 
Tliey were associated with fragments of charcoal and of pottery. Three fragments seat 
aloo^ with the bones belong to throe flat-bottomed bowls similar to thoae described by 
Dr A. •!. Evung in the aiiove paper- One of these, covered with stalagmite, is of thick 




or refuse- heap 
bones, were derived from the lower stratum, and are therefore of higher antiquity than 
those obtained from the andiaturbed layer above. 

The folhiwing species have been identified: \. Bos domestkuii^vmely creticua — 
A frontlet (Fig, 1) with two perfect horncorea, from the upper deposit, belongs to a small 
domeatio bull. It has l>een hacked off the rest of the skull and has probably Ijeeu Hsed 
to one of the sides of the shrine or to the altar, as a Bucriinium. 

It presents the following measurements : — 

Length of horncore - - 180 

Basal cironmference of horncore - 167 
Between tips of horncoros - - 490 



Aulerior v 


idth betwe 


en horncores - 


190 


Middle 






170 


Posterior 






144 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 114. 



The homcores are short, straight, and stout, and do not project hejond the plane 
of the frontal hones. The frontal s are convex between the bases of the horncores, 
flattened and convex below. The horncores differ from those of Bos frontosuSy deBcrihed 
by Nilsson and Riitimejer, in their shortness, and from Bos hrachyceros (^B. longifronsj 
Owen) bj their thickness and straightness. Thej belong to neither of these domesti- 
cated breeds. They are, however, identical with those of the head of a bull on the 
coins of Phocis, of Thessaly, and of Samos (Ridgewaj, Early Age of Greece^ Vol. I., 
p. 334). The upper of three oxheads (Schuchardt, Schlieman^s ExcavationSy p. 282) 
figured along with the head of an ape, and with cuttle-fishes on a gold ring, found in 
Mycense, bears similar though larger horocores, and probably belongs to the same 
breed as the specimen under consideration. The other two, with doubly curved horns, 
belong to the larger oxen of the type of the wild urus, the hunting and the taming of 
which is represented so well in the famous golden cups from the Vaphio tomb. 

This frontlet undoubtedly belongs to a breed largely kept in ancient Greece, which 
for purposes of identification may be named Bos creticus. 

The following remains, from the refuse heap in the lower stratum, may probably 
be referred to the same domestic variety of oxen. Fragments of a lower jaw, three 
lower jaws of calves with milk teeth, five broken long bones, two phalanges, and a 
broken metatarsal. Some of the bones have been scraped. One left upper maxillary 
with te^th was also found, and three upper teeth* : — 

2. Capra cBgagrus^^ the wild goat, formerly abundant in the wild state in the 
Mediterranean, but now found in Europe only in Crete and some of the Cyclades, and 
in^the higher mountains of Asia Minor, is represented by one frontlet and two perfect 
horncores belonging to males, a skull of a young female, and the frontlet of a kid, and 
one horncore of adult cut off from the head. All these are probably domesticated 
varieties, the sole difference between wild and domestic being a question merely of size. 

In the following table the principal measurements of the horncores will be found in 
millimetres : — 





He Goat. 


She 
Goat. 




He Goat. 


She 
Goat. 


Anterior width between 


16 


22 


32 


34 


Distance of tips - 


290 


^_ 




100 


homcores. 

Podtenor width between 
homcores. 


63 




— 


53 


Baflal measurement for 
front to back rounded 
angle. 


64 


63 


60 18 

i 


Length of homcores 

Basal circumference of 
homcores. 


4O0 
165 


400 
156 


420 -»• 
160 


150 
73 


Measurement at right 
angles to this. 


36 


36 


45 





The goat, Capra isgagrus, indigenous in the district, is frequently represented in 
Cretan gems, as may be seen in Figs. 26 and 67b of Evans* Cretan PictographSy and in 
Fig. 16, p. 269, of Joum. Hell, Stud,^ XVII. (A. J. Evans). In all these the long 



* The teeth present the following measurements in millimetres : — 




1 M3 


1 M2 


1 M 1 


1 Ml 


1 Pm 4 


Antero-posterio length - 
Antero-transverse width 
Postero-transrerse width - 


25 26 
21 1 21 
23 20 


2(» 
21 
21 


20 
20 
20 


1 

15 

20 



t Blasius, Fauna der WirbeUhiere JJeutichlandtf und der angrenzenden Landex ton Mitteleyrvpe, 
Braufuchioeig, 1857, p. 485. 

t 163 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[N0.U4. 



simply recurved horns (lefine the species from the Capra hircus^ a goat with doubly 
twisted horns figured on a coin of Delphi (Ridgeway, op. ciL^ p. 281). 

3. Ovis aries (Blasius, op. cit,, p. 467). — One large twisted homcore, with a basal 
circumference of 150, and a length of 312 mm., belongs to the horned domestic sheep. 
Six upper and eight lower jaws, and numerous refuse bones broken for food, occurring 
in the lower stratum, may belong either to the goat or the sheep. 

4. Cervus dama, — Two antlers of the fallow deer, each torn from the head, and 
consisting of the two lower tynes and a portion of the flattened palm, were found. The 
smaller of these has been hacked off the head.* 

The palm is broken off in both specimens. The flattening of the base of the second 
antler and the flattening of the upper part of the beam above it differentiate these two 
antlers from those of red deer (^Cervus elaphus), with which in other particulars it bears 
a superficial resemblance. 

0. Sus scro/a. — Three skulls of boar, found in the upper stratum, in the atrium, 
and very nearly perfect, present the following measurements : — 

Measurements of Skulls of Domestic and Wild Boab. 



Boar, Cave of 
Psvchro. 



1. 



2. 



3. 



Wild Boar. 



Garson. 



Riitimeyer. — 



(1) Occipital cre«t to alveolar point 

(2) Basion to alveolar point 

(3) Basion to occipital crest 
(4)' Inter- orbital width 

(5) Length of canine alveolar pro- 

cess. 

(6) Length of palate 

(7) Breadth of palate 

(8) Length of molar aeries 



352 


340 


350 


400 


308 


298 


300 


357 


126 


110 


124 


132 


80 


82 


83 


84 


48 


45 


44 




21G 


204 


216 


— 


36 


27 


32 


— 


112 


111 


108 


118 



98 
49 

268 
120 



— 


Manchester 
Museum. 


— 




350 


350 


340 


— 


340 342 


320 


— 


144 140 


1^4 


96 


202 


113 


91 


48 


63 


53 


42 


250 


243 


242 


262 


— 


33 


44 


37 


137 


112 


116 


112 



Measurement or Teeth of Boar. 



M 3 . 

Length - 
Antero-transverse 
Medio-transverae 
Postero-transverse 

M2 . 
Length . 

Antero-transverse 
Postero-transverse 

AM. 
Length - 

Antero-transverse 
Postero- 1 ransverse 



Cave of Psychro. 1 


1. 


2. 3. 


31 


30 


33 


18 


18 


20 


16 


17 


17 


11 


11 


13 


18 


17 


19 


16 


16 


16 


17 


17 


17 


16 


14 


14 


14 


13 


14 


14 


14 


15 



Cave of Psychro. 



1. 



2. 



Pm4. 



Pm 3. 



Length 
Breadth 

Length 
Breadth 

Length 
Breadth 



Pm 1. 
Molar series to alveolus of Pm 1 
True molar series, length - 



Pm2. 



14 
13 

12 
10 

10 
7 



117 
62 



12 
12 

10 
10 

11 
6 



114 
63 



8. 



12 
13 

11-6 
10-6 

11 
10 



111 
66 



* These measurements arc as follows :• 
Basal circumference - 144 

Length of brow tyne - 206 



128 Brow tyne to second tyne - 
170 Circumference of beam 


160 
100 


170 
78 


[ 164 ] 







1902.] MAN. (Sob. U4-U5. 

On a comparison of these skalls with those of wild boar described by Riitimejer 
(Fauna der Pfahlbauten der Schweitz^ V., pp. 28, 56) 1 find that they are smaller 
and without the strong muscular ridges and crests which differentiate the wild from the 
domestic variety. The tusks, too, are proved by the small size of the canine socket to 
be considerably smaller, although unfortunately the canines themselves have been 
removed. This conclusion is confirmed also by the comparison of the measurements 
of the typical wild boar selected by Dr. Garson {see Pitt-Rivers' Excavations in 
Cranbourne Cfiase^ II. : Tables of Test Animals) and with three skulls of wild 
boar in the Manchester Museum, Owens College. They may therefore be referred 
to the domestic boar, which occurs, as Dr. A. J. Evans notes, among the Cretan 
pictographs. 

The remains of the domestic hog also are represented in the lower stratum of gravel 
by a lower jaw with three molars, a lower canine, an incisor, two broken bones, and the 
shaft of a long bone belonging tp a sucking pig. These are in the condition of ordinary 
refuse bones. 

6. Canis familiuris. — The last animal to be added to the above list is a small 
variety of dog, represented by an upper jaw with an abnormal upper true molar, 
discovered in the lower stratum of gravel. 

The remains of all the animals found in the upper stratum, the domestic ox, the 
goat, the horned sheep, the fallow deer, and the hog were parts of offerings to Zeus, 
while the dog from the lower stratum may belong to an earlier period in the history of 
the cave, when it was used as a habitation and before it was used as a shrine of the 
Dictffian Zeus. The perfect condition of the offerings contrasts strongly with the 
fragmentary remains of the refuse heap. W. BOYD-DAWKINS. 



Eskimo. Tooher. 

Note on some Measurements of Eskimo of Southampton Island. 11 11 

A Paper read at the Belfast Meeting of the British Association^ September I Iw 
15M, 1902. By J. F. Tocher, F.I.C. 

In the following note the results are given of an analysis of the measurements of 
35 adult male Eskimo taken at my instigation by Captain A. Murray and Mr. W. J. 
Tocher of the whaler " Active " at Southampton Island, Hudson's Bay, on the 24th 
August, 1901. These figures will be useful for comparison with the numerous measure- 
ments of Eskimo skulls, while they are interesting in themselves, being confirmatory to 
a large degree of former measurements of the living head. The measurements recorded 
were those of stature, maximum head (glabello -occipital) length, and maximum head 
breadth. The colour of the hair and eyes, the shape of the nose and face, and the 
appearance of the lips and cheek bones were also recorded. Observations were made on 
eight male children, one half-breed male, and one female, but are not dealt with here. 
The average of each dimension, the mean cephalic index, and the standard deviation 
have been calculated and contrasted where possible with former results. The standard 
deviation of a group from the average — a method of ascertaining the purity or otherwise 
of race already applied in a former paper — is exceedingly valuable, as the smaller the 
deviation is, the nearer the group approximates to the average characteristic. The 
average stature of the 35 Eskimo was 1,620 mm. The stature varied from 1,486 mm. to 
1,740 mm. The greatest individual deviation was 134 mm. below the mean. The 
standard deviation amounted to 68*4 mm. or 4'2 per cent. The average head length and 
breadth of the group amounted to 192*4 mm. and 148*5 mm. respectively, the standard 
deviation in each case being 6*3 mm. and 4*84 mm. or 3*3 per cent, in both cases. 
The head lengths ranged from 179-205 mm., and the breadths from 140-161 mm. 
The cephalic index of the group was 77*2, with a standard deviation of 8*36 or 2*89 
per cent. The cephalic index of individuals ranged from 69 to 82, 

[ 165 1 



1902.] 



[■a.lIS. 





Tablx op Mean Ubasubeukkts 


-ESXIHO. 




ATCT»Ke*. 


Eskimo, South- 
ampton Island, -65 
Malea. (Tocher and 
Muirar, I'JOl.) 


KAimo ot 

Ubrador 

(from Deniker). 


Btkimiot 

OreenlamI 

(from Deniker). 


RaUmo of 

AlaBha 

(from Deniker). 


BUtuie 


1,620-0 mm. 


1,575 mm. | 1,621 mm. 


1,630 mm. 


8. D. - 


68-t „ 


1 




8. D. per cent 


*a » 






R«Dg« - - . 


1486-1 7M-0 „ 






Sitting height - 


ses-o „ 


1 




S. D. - 


*0*i „ 






8. D. per cent. 


*'t „ 


1 




Range . - . 


736-911-0 „ 






Head length - 
S. D. - 

8. D. per cent - 
Bange 


192-4 „ 

6-3 „ 

3-S „ 

179-206-0 „ 


Mean Mai. U 

194-6 mm. 1 

(Virchow.) I 

191-1 mm. ' 

(Duckworth.) j 




Head breadtii 
8. D. - 

B. D. per cent • 
Rouge - 


148 -5 „ 

*-B „ 
3-3 „ 

140-161-0 „ 


Mean Max. Bi. 
144 -3 mm. 

(Virehow.) 
147-6 mm. i 
(Duckworth.) 




Cephalic index - 
8. D.. - . 

B. D. per cent 
Range 


77-2 C.I. 
8-4 

a-9 

69-82-0 


74-1 C.I. 
(Virchow.) 
77-0 C.I. 
(Duckworth.) 


76-8 C.T. 
72-6 (Crania.) 
71-4 C.I. 

(Crania- 
Turner.) 


74-8 CI. 
(AIuits.84-8.) 


Colour of hair - 


Black 








S. D, per cent 











Colour at ejes - 


Brown 








B, D, per cent - 











Shape of nose - 










Straight - 


48-6 percent 








Flat - 


51 '4 „ 









The otiservere have r 



^T^T^^^^WW^Sf^^B 



FIO. 1. DIAOKAH or HKU>-FOBM, 



deil that while the nose is verj much flattened, 18 out of 
the 3o (31-4 per eeut.) are distinctlj flat 
uoHed.and 17 (48*6 per cent.) may be clasBod 
as straight. The coloar of the eyes does not 
vary from brown, while the colonr of the 
hair is universally black. It will be inter- 
eetiiig Co compare these resnJta with former 
obHervalioriM. Virchow (^ZettscArift fur 
Ethnologie, 1880, XII., 272) gives the com- 
plete meaauremeatd of five Eskimo from 
Labrador. The mean stature was 1,596 mm., 
the mean head length 194*6 mm., and the 
breadth 144*2 mm. Duckworth and Pain 
(B-oc. Cara. Phil. Soc, Vol. X., Part V., 286) 
d a party of 27 Labrador Eskimo In 
The mean principal meaenrements 
were as follows : — Stature, 1,577 mm. ; hetHl 
166 ] 



^■^ 



1902.] 



HAN. 



[Bos. US-U6. 






lengtb, 191'1 mm. ; head breadth, 147'6 mm. Deoiker gives the mean stature of 
614 Eskimo of Greenlaad as 1,621 mm., and the mean cephalic index aa 76-fi. The 
mean stature and cephalic index of the group under consideration correspond cloaelj to 
Che foregoing fignres — stature, 1,620 mm.; index, 77*2 ; while the moan head leugtfa 
and breadth approximate very closely to Duckworth and Pain's figures. Now on 
referring to skull measurements, the mean 
cephalic index of the crania in Sir William 
Flower's catalogue is 72, while Sir William 
Turoer gives 71'4 as the mean index of 
22 adult Eskimo crania in the Anutomical 
Museum of the University of EdinI urgh 
Duckworth (Joum. Anlhr. Inst., XX\ 
1900,137}giveB the mean cephalic index of 
ten EslciTDo akulls from Labrador and dreen 
land in the Anatomical Museum at Cam 
bridge aa 71-H. The index for Greenland 
crania alone was 72'6. Denikcr'it figure is 
72-4 and for Western America 74'8 On 
examining the stature curve (which is pretty 
regular) in diagram No. 2 one observes that 
the mode is considerably above the mean 
This seems to point to an admixture of two 
types. This is borne out by the nose tjpee 
and by the head lengths and brnadths maxima occurrmg in the lengths at 189 and 
193 mm. and in the breadths at 143 and 150 mm (Fig I) Without entering into a 
discussion as to the original home of the Eskimo or Inouit it is interesting to not« that 
Boas concluded the district around Hudson's Bay as the most likely In these observa- 
tions we have the inhabiiants of that district, the birthplaces being stated as Rowes 
Welcome, Hudson's Strait, Repulse Bay, and Foxes' Channel J i TOCHER, 




Fia 2 DiAoa^H c 



Brain. Cunnitierham. 

RiiTht-HandMlnass and L«ft-BrainMln«aa. An Abstract of the fftixley 't'tti 
Memorial Lecture for 1902. by D. J. Cwimingham, M.D., D.C.L., F.R.S. (cf. \ ID 
Man, 1902. 124). The fall text of the Lecture ictth plates and other illustrations mil 
be found in Joum. Anlhr. Inst., XXXII., p. 273. 

In introducing the subject which he had chosen for the address. Dr. CuDningham 
pointed out ihe great general interest it presented to the studont of anthropology, no 
■natter what branch of this many-sided science he might specially be engaged in. The 
physical anthropologist could not lay claim to the subject as one which concerned him 
alone. Language, social and religious rights, and man's handicrafts through the whole 
period of his existence, had been profoundly affected by the supremacy of the right hand 
— an attribute of man which bad unquestionably been alike useful in times of warfare 
and in times of peace. 

It was easy to prove that the characteristic was one of vast antiquity ; of this there 
was the clearest evidence, not only in historical records and pictorial representation, hut 
also in ancient mythology and in the structure of almost all languages. 

So far back, then, as history took us right-handedness would appear to have been a 
common birthright of mankind. But if we probed the dim obscurities of the past to 
still deeper depths, and extended our inquiries to periods anteceilcnt to those of which 
we had historical knowledge, there was evidence, although perhaps not so cicsr, that the 
same preferential use of the right arm had even then been a characteristic of man. 

The general conclusion arrived at was that, in early times, before manipulative skill 
was greatly developed, there was every reason to believe that the difference between the 
[ 167 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 116. 

two limbs was DOt nearly so accentuated as it was at present, and that there was a much 
stronger tendency towards reversion to true ambidextry, or the condition which we 
regarded as being an original characteristic of the stem-form of man. 

It was a matter of common knowledge that the more extensive use to which the 
right upper limb was put reacted upon its development and caused it to assume more 
massive proportions than its fellow of the left side. 

Dr. R. Lehmann-Nitsche had found that the bones of the right upper limb of 
prehistoric man of Southern Bavaria were distinctly heavier and more massive than the 
corresponding bones of the opposite side. This might be regarded as affording proof 
positive that these early individuals were right-handed. 

It appeared probable that right-handedness had assumed form as a characteristic 
of man at a very early period in his evolution and most likely at a time before he had 
become endowed with articulate speech. It was a characteristic of all communities, no 
matter how isolated they were, that it was always the right arm which was raised to the 
place of higher power and importance. There were few who would dispute that it was 
an inherited quality ; and, further, that left-handedness also appeared to be hereditary to 
some extent and to run in families. 

The information afforded by the experiments of Professor Mark Bald win on his own 
child in regard to the period in the evolution of man at which right-handedness became 
a fixed and permanent characteristic was dwelt upon. 

These experiments were interesting from another point of view. In the early 
months of infancy the motor paths in the brain and the spinal cord had not attained 
their full functional capabilities. Until this was effected and the paths were practised 
by continuous effort, impulses originating in the brain could not flow with any degree 
of freedom to the lower motor centres in the spinal cord from which the nerves which 
supply the muscles of the limbs proceeded. At first, therefore, muscular efforts in an 
infant were more or less purely automatic, and it was not to be expected that a 
characteristic such as right-handedness would become manifest until the paths which 
connected the higher and lower motor centres were fully established and had been 
systematically practised. 

Right-handedness was an inherited quality in the same sense that the potential 
power of articulate speech in man and of song in the bird were inherited possessions. 
Every normal child was provided with the complicated brain and nerve mechanism 
which was required for the successful acquisition of speech, and yet unless these 
nerve-centres and nerve-paths were brought into play and practised by the education 
which every generation gave to the succeeding generation no outward manifestation of 
his potential power would result. The song of a bird appeared to be established on 
a precisely similar footing ; and showed how marvellously the nerve and muscle 
mechanism of certain hereditary powers was arranged and how even in the most 
distinctive functions of a species education and practice were necessary for calling these 
functions into play« 

The conditions which led to the right hand having been advanced by the selective 
force of evolution to the place of pre-eminence was next discussed. There could not be 
a doubt that, as Dr. Buchanan had pointed out forty years ago, the right side of the body, 
in so far as the operations of the right arm were concerned, possessed certain mechanical 
advantages. Yet, as Pye Smith and others had shown, the occasional transposition of 
the thoracic and abdominal viscera in the majority of cases caused no disturbance of 
dextral superiority as manifested in the right upper limb. 

Right-handedness was a character which had been attained in the ordinary course 
of the evolution of man by the subtle process of natural selection. Although the 
matter had not been investigated so fully as to place the question outside dispute, the 
evidence at our disposal favoured the view that at birth the two upper limbs started 
upon their individual duties equally endowed in so far fts strength of muscle and size 

[ 168 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. U6-U7. 

of bones were coDcerned. Both in mass and weight the two limbs were, to all intents 
and purposes, similar at birtb, and tbe preponderance in bulk and strength, which later 
on distinguishes tbe right arm. was acquired during life, and was caused by the greater 
amount of work it was called upon to perform. 

All the evidence at our disposal went to show that right-handedness was due to a 
transmitted functional pre-eminence of tbe left brain, and that this was the factor which 
prevented an oscillation of tbe condition from one side to the other when the viscera 
were reversed. 

The motor paths which took origin in tbe cortex of the two cerebral hemispheres 
crossed to opposite sides of the body as they proceeded to their ultimate destinations. 
But it was not only in this respect that the left cerebral hemisphere stood out pre- 
eminent. The active speech centre was located in the left brain. A still fuller 
significance was given to this arrangement by tbe fact that in left-banded people the 
predominance of the right cerebral hemisphere was still further accentuated by the 
transference to it of the active speech centre. 

The functional pre-eminence of the left brain was not a haphazard acquisition which 
has been picked up daring the life of the individual. There could not be a doubt that 
the superiority of the left cerebral hemisphere rested upon some structural foundation 
which was transmitted from parent to offspring ; and further, that the exceptional cases 
of right-brained ness and left-handed ness, which we every now and then observed, were 
due to the transference of this structural peculiarity from the left to the right side, or 
more probably to a transposition of the two cerebral hemispheres in the same way 
as transposition, either partial or complete, of the thoracic and abdominal viscera 
occurred. 

The last part of tbe lecture was devoted to a study on the two sides of the brain, 
of the development and growth -changes of the portion of cerebral cortex which has 
recently been mapped out by Griiubaum and Sherrington as being that which presides 
over the voluntary movements of the upper limb. 



Method. Petpie. 

The Use of Dla^rrams. A Note in Replt/ to Professor Arthur Thomson 44^ 
(Man, 1902. 95). By fV. 3f. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S. \\( 

As I see that in one instance (Man, 1902. 95) the main point of my paper (Man, 
1902. 61) seems to have been overlooked, the same may occur in other cases. I would 
therefore repeat here that the system and treatment of research diagrams (which I dealt 
with there) is entirely different from that of expository diagrams. In research general 
correlations are sought for and exactitude is not wanted, but only the clearest system 
to use in searching. In expository diagrams, which I did not touch on, the exactitude 
of a few relations has to be shown. 

I purposely did not expatiate on the obvious lack of equality of scales in the form 
of diagram I proposed, as that is of no consequence in research diagrams ; and 
I carefully used the words '^ varies with " instead of '^ as *' in writing to avoid any 
misconstruction ; further, I said that the diagram showed ratios. &c., *' sufficiently for all 
comparative purposes," that is, where mere comparison is needed, and not absolutely 
accurate relations. Thus I bad guarded already against any suppositions that final 
accuracy was attained in such preliminary work ; though whether any more minute 
accuracy is of use in present problems is very doubtful. 

The exaggeration of variations, which seems to offend Professor Thomson, is a 
point of great value in such diagrams, and has to be brought into the design for the sake 
of clearness. It is not in the least of a '^ misleading nature '* to anyone who under- 
stands the principle of ^' concentrated errors," which is tbe soul of diagram study of 
variations (see Pyramids of Gizeh^ p. 238) ; without that no graphic reduction of 
triangulations could be carried out. 

r 169 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. U7-119. 

I hope these notes will suffice to show that Professor ThomsoD^s objections do not 
concern the case of research diagrams (which was the object of mj paper), but are 
details which I did not point out as they were so geometrically obvious. It would be a 
great mistake to burden research diagrams by enforcing that equality of scale in all c-ases 
which it is supposed that I had overlooked. W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. 



Method. Thomson. 

The Use of Dlai^rams. A Rejoinder to Man, 1902. 117. By Arthur ^^q 
Thomson, M,A,y Professor of Human Anatomy in the University of Oxford. 110 

I have little to add to what I have already stated. I may, however, point out that 
in his original article (61) Professor Petrie defined the research diagram as one in 
which the main object ^' is to present as many variables as possible in one view, with 
such clearness that the eye can grasp any two at once without being distracted by 
others." Furthermore, he subsequently stated (p. 82) that the results obtained by his 
system of triangles were sufficient for " all comparative purposes." Professor Petrie in 
his present note now says that in research diagrams ^' general correlations are sought for 
and exactitude is not wanted," a statement which is certainly not a repetition of his 
former views as expressed in his previous article (61). The Professor further adds 
that bj '^ comparative purposes " he meant '* when mere comparison is needed, and not 
absolutely accurate relations," an interpretation of his meaning which is certainly not 
conveyed by the words employed in his original paper. The object of my criticism of 
his method was to render this clear and so warn others against falling into the possible 
error of supposing that the results obtained were sufficient for ^^ all comparative 
purposes." This, and this alone, must be my justification for the use of the expression 
" misleading nature " employed in my previous communication (95). 

If the exaggeration of variations be the object of Professor Petric^s method, then 
there is much to be said in its favour. At the same time it should be borne in mind 
that correlations which are based on a system in which exactitude is sacrificed are 
themselves liable to be inexact. ARTHUR THOMSON. 



Crete. Bosanquet. 

A Mycenaean Town and Oemeterles at Palalokastro. By R, C, 44 q 

Bosanquet, M.A., Director of the British School of Archaeology at Athens, 1 19 

During April and May 1902 the British School at Athens undertook preliminary 
excavations at Palaiokastro. I was accompanied by the architect of the School, 
Mr. Heaton Comyn. The plain of Palaiokastro, the largest plain on the east coast of 
Crete, measures three miles from east lo west and two from north to south. It lies north 
of Zakro, and north-east of Praesos, the sites explored last year by Mr. Hogarth and 
the British School respectively. (Man, 1901. 147-148.) 

'1 here seems to have been no large settlement here from Mycenaean times until the 
middle of the nineteenth century ; but in that early age it was one of the principal 
centres, perhaps the capital, of Eastern Crete. The excavations were rewarded by the 
discovery of a Mycenaean town extending over an area of at least five hundred by three 
hundred yards, and of cemeteries which throw new light on the burial customs of the 
earliest inhabitants. 

The most conspicuous feature of the plain is a steep table-topped headland called 
Eastri, which juts out into the sea midway along the low, and in parts marshy, beach. 
In spite of its acropolis-like form it does not seem to have been fortified. The scanty 
remains on its summit are those of a very late Mycenaean village. Beneath them we 
found a few fragments of much earlier pottery, including some Kamarais ware. At the 
foot of Kastri, and sheltered by it from the north, lies a sandy crescent-shaped bay, 
the natural harbour of the plain. A small promontory forms the southern horn of the 

I 170 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. U9. 

(■ref-feiil, and from tliiit poiiii wmthwurd mid wonl ward lie lUe extenBtvc> mitts of liio 
MyceDieau town. A building on tfao southeTn promontory, conatmiMotl of onormoiiH 
limestone lilocks, may be thn " PHJaioknstro " wlticb gnve its nurne la the; pluoe. The 
{irinuipal ruin field is ealled HoiiSdol&kkav, the red AottoWf on accouDt of tlie rod earth 
formed by tbe disintegmtinn of (ho Uyoonipnri brickwork. It is out io two by n r'niite 
runuiug north aud aoutb on which are the c-nrUest oemeteries. The hnna«B ucur the 
sea are built on the gravel oliff and are humbler in chamcier aud apparently older 
than thoite lying iDlniuI. One of them yielded evidence of a primary tind Bevondary 
occupation, fine |Htttery of ihe Knnei'inn I'alai^e style heiiiK fuund beneutli the higher 
lloor level. Another contained wliole vasea iif die Kamdrais etyle, but nothing Mycomean 
ill the Htrict Reuse. 

The largeat of the houBce which were examineil lies inland, in n group of wh»t 
appear to Ixj spacious nppur-olass hoiiaex : tfaey are conslrncted partly in the "megH- 
lithic " style, eharacleristir. of the Mycenffian homeatcnds eo common in the limestone 
distrioti* of Crel«, partly in regular aAJilnr masonry ; the upper slorey, where one esiBted, 
was of brick. The plan of thi» house ix perfectly iutelligible, and in 8oin<^ nwpoetH 
anticipates that of the Greek house of claHsical times. The entrance is from a large 
courtyard into au L-uhaped twgaron tweuty-five feet long, the roof of which wan 
sup|>orted on four colnmus placed round a cemented impluiriam, six feel st^uare. The 
mtyaron can have had no windows and derivnd its light almost entirely from this 
hjrpHJtbral opening. Four doorways give access from the megarnn into iithor living- 
rooms, one of them couUiuing a nunken bath-room, a reproduction in miniature of those 
found in ihe pulaces at Knoesus aud Phaestos. In all thirty-six rooms were exc-avated 
here, of which Iwenty-two lie within the megalithic walls of the original mansion, aud 
the remainder round a second courtj'ard. The house was originally oue-Jitoreye<I. Later 

ii2M»35iJN '<• ; ; 

• • J 

+ ^ - +. 



PALAIOlUSTBu: eCfflAL BSCLOSUER t^tce dtjcripdon m 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. U9-120. 

an upper storey was added iu brick, with two staircases leading to it, one of them over 
six feet wide. This principal staircase ascended to a richly decorated megaron ; the 
rooms below it were full of fallen masses of fresco, and of wall-revetments of polished 
schist ; and in one of them there was found a large column base, fallen from the upper 
floor and lying in the earth some feet above a smaller column base in situ in the ground 
floor. At the time of the construction of the upper storey some of the ground floor 
rooms were converted into magazines. One of them has a plaster floor painted in colours, 
and a stone bench against the end wall. This and an adjoining chamber yielded over 
500 vases. Among the smaller ''finds" are a well-preserved tablet inscribed with 
characters in a linear script nearly related to that of Knossos, a pair of '' sacred horns " 
in stucco, and jars containing wheat and two kinds of pease. 

Still more important results were obtained in the cemeteries. Hitherto we were 
very imperfectly informed as to the method of sepulture practised by the Cretans of the 
Kamarais period ; and graves containing Kamarais pottery were practically unknown. 
Of the beehive tomb, the typical tomb of Mycenasan times on the mainland, only one 
example was discovered. It is cut in the clay subsoil and approached by a passage 
twenty-five feet long. It yielded six late Mycenaean vases and three bronze implements, 
a dagger, a knife, and a razor. As a rule, the Mycenaean inhabitants seem to have laid 
Cheir dead in small family burial-places near their homesteads. Groups of two or more 
earthenware larnakes^ shaped like bath-tubs or coffers with gable-lids occur in many 
parts of the plain. These had contained not complete corpses, but bones which were 
removed from the earth, when time sufficient to decompose the body had elapsed after the 
original interment. A similar custom still prevails in the ibiand. A still older form of 
this practice was illustrated by a very remarkable enclosure discovered on the ridge which 
cuts the town site in two. It is a rectangle (see diagram, p. 171) measuring twenty-seven 
feet by thirty -two, enclosed by a wall of rude limestone blocks, and subdivided by similar 
walls into five parallel compartments, within which were packed skulls, bones, and vases, 
principally cups. The date of the deposit is given by the vases, many of which are 
good examples of Kamarais ware, with a brilliant decoration of white and red on a black 
ground, and by a three-sided seal bearing pictographic characters. There was also an 
unique series of miniature vessels carved out of marble, steatite, and alabaster, and of 
earthenware vessels painted in imitation of them. The bones were in heaps or bundles, 
not laid in their natural order. The skulls had been transported from their previous 
resting-place with some care, but for the other bones there was no rule ; in some cases 
the heap beneath the skull seemed to represent a complete individual, in others the minor 
bones were almost wholly wanting. Sometimes the principal bones were formed into a 
kind of bed on which several skulls were laid. A second and apparently similar bone 
enclosure has been discovered and will be excavated next spring, when it is hoped that 
a physical anthropologist may form one of the exploring party, and report on the skulls 
found in both seasons* work. A full account of the excavations, with plans and 
drawings by Mr. Comyn, will appear in the Annual of the British School at Athens^ 
Vol. VIII. R. C. BOSANQUET. 



REVIEWS. 

Persia. Sykes, 

Ten Thousand Miles in Persia. By Major P. Moles worth Sykes. London : 4|%#% 
Murray, 1902. 24 x 15. Pp. xv -f- 481. Price 25s. net. IZU 

This is one of the most interesting records of Oriental travel which has appeared 
for many years. Persia has been described from many points of view, and Lord Curzon^s 
monumental volumes will long be referred to as a storehouse of information on that land ; 
but Major Molesworth Sykes has traversed routes as yet undescribed, and shows a 
knowledge of the people and an appreciation of the nature of the country not to be easily 

[ 172 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 120-13L 

matched among modern travellers. No work on Persia- has been so well illustrnted ; the 
views and groups being mainly taken from the author^s own photographs. Persians, 
Parsis, Turkomans, Arab nomads, Baloches, and gypsies figure in th^se groups, which 
are of the greatest interest. 

Students of geography, history, and ethnology will find new and important matter 
in these pages. The conclusions arrived at by Major Sykes as to the routes of Alexander 
and Marco Polo are based on original research and personal {knowledge of local conditions, 
and they probably will be generally adopted. His unique and remarkable enqiiiry into 
the history of the game of polo, also, cannot be passed by without mention. 

To the ethnologist the information given will prove of the greatest value. The 
manner in which tribes of diverse origin are scattered over modern Persia is vividly 
brought before us. For instance, we find Turkoman tribes, such as the Afshar and Kara 
Koinlu, in the very south of Karman province (p. 428) side by s^'de with nomads of true 
Persian descent, Baloches, and dark BashakirdT aboriginals who suggest the natives of 
Southern India (p. 308) ; while far to the north in Kain (p. 404) we find a community 
of Arab descent, still speaking Arabic. It does not, of course, follow that such tribes 
may not be mainly Iranian in blood, as the Turkish-speaking AzarbaijanI Tatars have 
been shown to be, but the persistence of foreign languages among tribal communities 
is not a factor to be neglected. 

Major Sykes deals very fully with Sistan ; no such accurate account of the country 
or its people is to be found elsewhere. Few travellers have taken the trouble to record 
all the tribes, their subdivisions and their affinities, and the information on such points 
in works like Eastern Persia and From the Indus to the Tigris is fragmentary and 
unsatisfactory. The province of Karman is naturally very fully dealt with, and the 
Baloches receive special attention, many details being given as to their tribes in 
Persian Balochistan which have not been hitherto available. Major Sykes confirms the 
conclusions I have already arrived at independently* as to the derivation of the Baloch 
tribes from the neighbourhood of the Caspian Sea ; although he gives more importance 
than I am inclined to do to the Arab element among them. It is clear from his obser- 
vations, and those of Sir T. Holdich, that there is in Mekran and Persian Balochistan a 
distinction between the upper and lower ranks of Baloches which I have not observed 
among the tribes near the Indian frontier. This may possibly be explained by the great 
migration of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, which drew off towards India the 
greater part of the true Baloches, leaving behind only a fraction who maintained their 
supremacy over a non-Baloch, indigenous population, darker than themselves and with 
features rather of the South Indian type. This element is hardly to be found among 
the tribes of the Sulaimans, where chiefs and tribesmen are all much of the same type. 

Many other questions of interest, with which it is impossible here to deal, are 
suggested by the facts recorded by Major Molesworth Sykes. Ten Thousand Miles in 
Persia is a storehouse of information on all such points, and it is also, it must be noted, 
a most animated and well-written record of travel and adventure. 

M. LONGWORTH DAMES. 



Africa, East Fiilleborn. 

Authropologie der Nord-Nyassa- Lander, By Dr. F. Fiilleborn. Being 4|%4 
Vol. VIII. of Doutsch Ost-Afrika. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer. 1902. Price, 40 m. IZ1 

This monograph is of the greatest importance to all who are interested in the 
physical characters of the races of Africa. It is in portfolio form with 64 plates, 
comprising over 300 photographs of natives. 

The author has followed the method of Prof. v. Luschan with regard to the various 
measurements enumerated in the text, and great care has been taken to ensure accuracy 

* In a paper recently read before the Royal Asiatic Society. 

[ 173 ] 



1902.] 



MAN. 



[N0.12L 



in the minatest details. The area iu which Dr. FiLllebom has worked is the 
corner of Grerman East Africa bordering on Lake Nyasa, consequently his observations 
tend to complete the forging of the chain of knowledge commenced by the labours of 
Dr. Fritsch, Count von Schweinitz and Sir Harry Johnston. North Nyasaland contains 
a great variety of tribes, the stronger occupying the more fertile plains while the weaker 
have been driven into the Livingstone Mountains and the plateau between lakes Nyasa 
and Tanganyika. Several pages of the text deal with the history of this part of Africa 
prior to the European occupation, the origin and migrations of the various sections of 
the populace being traced as closely as possible. The author points out which groups 
are comparatively pure blooded and which are composed of members of various scattered 
tribes fused into a political entity by the personality and prowess of powerful chieftains. 
The Wakinga and Wamahassi belong to the former and the Wahehe to the latter category. 
The Wahehe have not like the Wangoni any claims to Zulu ancestry, as has been 
supposed by some, though even among the latter Zulu blood exists in any purity only 
among the aristocracy. Customs and weapons cannot be taken as a test of origin for 
tribes overthrown by wandering Zulu hordes have in many cases adopted much of the 
social organisation and methods of warfare of their former conquerors. The measure- 
ments of Dr. Fulleborn seem to point to a fundamental unity among the peoples of 
this territory as is shown by a serration of the cephalic index constructed from his data. 



Cephalic 
Index 


Wanyak- 
yassa. 


Wasaako, 

people of 

the Konde 

Plains. 


09 


1 


2 


70 


3 


1 


71 


— 


— 


72 


2 


4 


73 


4 


2 


74 


13 


5 


75 


12 


7 


76 


4 


4 


77 


6 


3 


78 


7 


6 


79 


— 


— 


80 


— 


3 


81 


2 


1 


82 


— 




83 and over 


2 


— 



Wantali. 



1 
2 
6 
2 
5 
3 
1 
4 











Fisherfolk 

on the 

Shores of 

Lake Nyasa. 


People 

of the 

Plateau 

between 

Nyasa and 

Tanganyika. 


Wahehe. 


Wabena. 


1 


■ ! 


1 
4 


1 


— 


1 


2 


1 


3 


3 


3 


2 


2 


2 


3 


4 


4 


3 


1 


5 


4 


4 


3 


3 


3 


2 


2 


1 


2 


1 


2 


4 


1 


I 


1 


3 


3 


1 


5 


1 


2 


— 


1 


2 


2 




— 


2 


— 


— 


1 


— 


— 


— 


— 



The data in the present monograph may advantageously be contrasted with those of 
other observers by means of a table of percentages. 



Tribes. 



North Nyasa tribes (FUlleborn) 

Banta tribes of Central German East Africa 

(Schweinitz). 
Bantu tribes of Uganda (Johnston) 

Bantu tribes of the Middle Congo (Mense) 



Dolichocephalic. 

40-1 
54 

GO • 8 
59 



Mesaticephalic. 



51 • » 
31) • 5 

35 • S 
38 



Brachycephalic. 

8 
6-6 

3-5 
3 



[ 174 ] 



1903.] MAN. [Nob. 131-133. 

This shows not only an increased frequency of dolichocephalj as one passes north- 
ward, but also the absence of the broad-headed element in Southern Africa. 

Similar results follow a study of other indices and although in these somewhat 
greater variations occur, in all, homogeneity rather than heterogeneity is the dominant 
note. Should subsequent observations confirm those at present available, we may look 
on the Bantu peoples as a physical as well as a linguistic uuity. F. C. SHBUBSALL. 



Caucasus. Merzbaolier. 

Aus den Hochregionen der Kaukasus. By G. Merzbacher. Leipzig : Duncker <f%f% 
and Humblot, 1901. 2 vols., 8vo., pp. xxxvii, 957 ; ix, 963. Price, £2. liLiL 

The greater part of this excellently-got-up work is devoted to geographical 
questions. Only two chapters are devoted to some of the ethnographical questions of 
the Caucasus region, and the author does not profess to give anything like an exhaus- 
tive discussion even of those questions on which he touches. In the first volume some 
70 pages are devoted to the inhabitants of the highlands. The chapter opens with a useful 
four-page bibliography of the more important works on the ethnography of the district 
(the general works will be found in the preface, pp. xxvi and xxix), and deals very 
briefly with a large number of different tribes. The author concludes that the peoples 
of the southern slopes of the Caucasus are of Karthwelian race, while those of the 
northern slopes are partly of Ural-Altaian, partly of unknown origin. 

The second volume contains a quantity of information about the customs and 
beliefs of the Chewsures and allied peoples. Amongst other items are details on the 
blood feud and wergeld and other legal customs, and a description of the house. The 
marriage customs are described in some detail ; according to the author the bride remains 
a whole year in her parents' house after the marriage, and during this period the husband 
may not even enter the village. The custom which insists that the newly-married 
couple shall only meet in secret till the birth of their first child is also observed, and it 
is held to be disgraceful if the first child appears on the scene less than three years after 
the marriage ceremony. There is also information regarding the priesthood, and a class 
of female soothsayers known as 3fesulias, who are said to derive their information from 
the souls of the departed. The dead are unclean, but the uncleanness is only inherent 
in the boily, the soul itself is clean ; the mourning and funeral feasts are described in 
some detail. There is a brief account of the ideas as to a future life, some of the details 
of which seem to be derived from Islam. In addition to the two chapters, whose contents 
are here briefly indicated, many other facts will be found in the narrative chapters. 
For the benefit of those who do not care to tackle a book of nearly 2,000 pages, the 
author has provided detailed headings to the chapters and an index. One cannot too 
highly commend the index to these volumes. It is a truly monumental work ; nearly 
120 pages with double columns of text cannot be called short measure. Would that 
other authors were equally painstaking ! Unfortunately the list of errata is on a 
somewhat similar scale ; it occupies ten pages. 

The print is good, and most of the illustrations are excellent. If there is a fault to 
be found with the volumes it is that they are too heavy to be convenient, and the backs 
are hardly equal to the strain. N. W. T. 



Malay : Ipoli Poisons* Oeigrer. 

Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Ipoh-Pfeilgifte. By Paul Geiger. Basel : M. 4|)a 
Weruer-Riehm, 1901. 24 x 17. Pp. 103, with three plates and map. XlA 

Under this beading Dr. Geiger has brought together and thrown into the form of 
a Ph.D. thesis many of the hitherto scattered records of the use of blowpipe dart 
poisons in Malaysia. He also records the results of his own investigations of the 
chemical composition of a number of these poisons. 

( 175 ] 



Y0n:^ 



ii • 






\wi 



i 



H 1 1 . I 
11 . • • 



l<N».) MAN. [Hofcl» 

Hi, h»'0 imi^fh ••! *»liJ-li flit* Hiirk oon»ifi(ii *n^ »iivii^ed into nine MCtwos. 

♦i.-i !«,. oi ilii.«i' .H» ill* liJ*lnM mill |iif'|wrKl ion of ilit ^loison* in n«*e in the; 

...I,-, .svi I. Hi. fit. H».i^« H.i.'.jimiis nihil' ihr lihh wTiioi.. iit^oifil to the mmnai 
, .■«-. ii ]\.iiN.Mi.>.l .Im«i> mikI III ii|)|wi'iilii»i i^^muvtiM ^:ii liifir U9€im ifi, perM 
. . . r.-.N-fu,. Ml.,', i»ti>ili.».l> III iiMiifj I In- j»»^i>*oi; .»' ;«ii:>.»ns- — fftr the aatbor 

• • • 

^ • j*» "III ^ ^^ 

'>rt.. ■''' ' ' ^, ^, „, ,.„ ,i,*,i..»n ^li> ii«,> III ()ii^ lukiiiif- > ^ :^~» i.»ra*. I4UC Bwnn* 
>' >'• '^ '■ , ,1,. \|, ,,.,„,,, iNiHH.t n.i iIn Noiiifci;;. .r p.»-:!it*-x I'fiTfck : iii< 

•^*''* ^ ' .»:•»» ill. )Hto.*ii:\ i«.o«.sMii««: ivvp, ,^ ) ^ M.:- • '-1I -r !»c»w trfc] 

*'•• ......kif, til, \li*ii H* Hi)i< .InkiHi^ «^' il** i*. '- :>».-■:• 

•. . :». ., .H.I,, .Km. I )«, Ih.**^ i»k» • **'l:'*.' T" 1-r . •* iill^t- 






«■ •»%!.« •Vxvv-V^ * ■*. ^^\^ 




■. , . \ * . . • X : ^ • ^ •■.*•■. ■ ■*■ • ■ "*■■■■ • — *■ 






^v^V^ww.-x.V^:^ C^ 



y 



\1 



1902.] MAN. [Nob. 123-124. 

The 103] pages of which the work consists are divided into nine sections. The 
first two of these-'-on the history and preparation of the poisons in use in the region 
referred to — are the most adequate, while the fifth section, devoted to the manufacture 
and use of poisoned darts and of apparatus connected with their use, is, perhaps, the 
most interesting. Three methods of using the poison or poisons — for the author under- 
stands the word ipoh in no narrow sense — are recognised : — 

(I.) As a hlowpipe dart poison. 

(2.) As an arrow poison. (Its use in this manner is verj local and seems limited 
to the Mentawi Islanders and the Semang of northern Perak ; the latter, 
according to Wray, also using blowpipes.) 

(3.) To poison the laterally projecting point of a simple form of bow trap in use 
among the Mintras and Jakuns of the Peninsula. 

Many forms of darts, varying according to their provenance and purpose, are 
described and figured, as well as quivers and palettes for spreading the poison when in a 
pasty condition. Particular attention is paid to the substance wrapped round or threaded 
on the butt of the dart in order that the latter may accurately fit the blowpipe. 

The blowpipe or sumpitan is rather hastily passed over ; it is certainly inaccurate to 
say (p. 33.) ^' most sumpitans . . . possess a removable mouthpiece,'^ while it is generally 
recognised that the inner tube of the blowpipe of the Peninsula if not made of a single 
interuode of Bamhusa longinodis^ or a species of similar habit, is made by splicing two 
suitable internodes and not as is here (p. 32) suggested by carefully rubbing down the 
nodal septum between two adjoining internodes. The geographical distribution of 
poisoned darts and of Antiaris toxicaria is discussed and illustrated by a map. The little 
known uniei poison of Mentawi is derived from this celebrated tree, found also in Ceylon, 
where there is no evidence of its properties being known, or at least made use of, by the 
Veddahs. A list of plants which have at one time or another been described as entering 
into the constitution of dart poisons of the Malay Peninsula or Archipelago is then 
given, and the work concludes with a full description of the chemical investigations already 
alluded to. An excellent list of references is appended, while the three plates illustrating 
the thesis are so excellent that they should be studied by daylight, much of the finest 
detail being invisible even by strong artificial light. C. G. SELIGMANN. 



PROOEEDINQS OP SOCIETIES. 
Huxley Memorial Lecture, Anthropological Institute. 

The third Huxley Memorial Lecture of the Anthropological Institute was <i%M 
delivered in the Lecture Theatre of Burlington House, on Tuesday, 2 1st October |£^ 
1902, at 5.30 p.m. ; the President of the Institute, Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., in the 
chair. 

The lecturer was Prof. D. J. Cunningham, M.D., D.CX., F.R.S., of Trinity 
College, Dublin, who took as his subject. Right- Handedness and Left-Brainedness, 
An abstract of the lecture will be found above (Man, 1902. 116), and the full text with 
plates and other illustrations in Joum, Anthr, Inst.^ XXXII., p. 273. 

At the close of the lecture a vote of thanks proposed by Mr. Thomas Bryant, M.A., 
F.R.C.S., and seconded by Dr. Pye Smith, F.R.8., was tendered to Prof. Cunningham 
for his lecture, and the Huxley Memorial Medal of the Institute was duly presented. 

Mr. J. L. Myres, secretary, exhibited a palm leaf copy-book and praying flag from 
Darjeeling and an example of Benares brass work. 

Special Meeting^ 28th October 1902. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., president. 
Dr. W. H. Furness read a paper On the Ethnology of the Nagas, The paper was 
discussed by the President, Messrs. Lewis and Gomme. 

Printed by ExBB and Spottiswoodb, Hia Majesty's Printers, East Harding Street, £.C. 



Man, 1901. Platb S 




1902.] MAN. [No. 125. 

ORIGINAL ARTICLES. 
Malay Peninsula. With Plate M. StefTen : Annandale. 

Olay Tablets flrom Oaves In Siamese Malaya. By A. Steffen. With ^qp 
Notes by Nelson Annandale. \tm\3 

Last May at Kantang I obtained about forty clay plaques for the Oxford University 
Museum from Mr. Steffen, who also gave me the following notes. Togetlier with the 
plaques were the cooking-pot from Kao Sai that is referred to in the notes, some 
fragments of very coarse and gritty pottery, and a number of Buddhist statuettes and 
engraved copper plates from Kao Wat Han. The statuettes, which are of bronze and 
wood, are of rude design and workmanship, but Mr. Steffen, who is well versed in 
Siamese Buddhism, does not consider them ancient. The plates have one or more 
Buddhist figures of the current type rudely scratched or engraved upon them. None of 
them are more than about three inches high, and they have probably been fixed to small 
wooden obelisks as is still done with similar plates in many of the temples of Lower Siam. 
There is, then, no reason to believe that these purely Buddhist votive offerings have any 
direct relation with the clay tablets described in Mr. Steffen's notes. The fact of a 
Buddhist temple having fallen into disuse and neglect docH not necessarily argue any 
great antiquity, as this commonly happens in Lower Siam when oiiy untoward accident 
befalls the monks connected with it. I have myself seen a temple that had been left 
unfinished owing to some occurrence of the kind though a new one was being built a 
few yards distant. Sheep and goats often make a resting place on the altars of small 
country shrines that are theoretically still in use. NELSON ANNANDALE. 

** During my sojourn in Trang, one of the Siamese provinces on the west coast of 
the Malay Peninsula, clay images, which I recognised to be of Hindu origin, were shown 
me by natives, and later I found an opportunity to visit Ban Hui Yot, a village about 
thirty-two miles north of Trang, the capital of the province, and about six west of 
the limestone cave in which the images had been discovered. The entrance to this is 
sit^uuted in thick jungle in the face of a rock called Kao Wat Han, which is hardly taller 
than the surrounding trees. I found that most of the natives had never penetrated into 
the interior for fear of /?i, or spirits, thongb they had seen heaps of broken images 
outside. 

*^ An open donie-tike cavity forms the entrance to the inner chambers of the cave, 
being closed by a low breastwork of bricks with a narrow doorway scarcely three feet 
high. On the left there is a gigantic statne of Buddha attaining Nirvana^ with his 
disciples in attendance round his couch. A raised platform on the right is occupied by 
several more or less antique bronze statues ; a large quantity of smaller images in wood 
or metal are to be found standing at the foot of the larger figures or partly buried in the 
ground or in the rocky cavities of the walls. Past the row of buddhas to the right 
there is a dark recess in which the clay figures arc found. Half of the floor of this 
cavity had been excavated by Chinese pepper planters, who nse the deposit of bat-guano 
as manure. When digging guano they work right down to the rock and afterwards 
remove stones and the like by sifting the guano through coarse baskets. This explains 
the broken images at the entrance to the cave. Half of the floor of the cavity, however, 
was as yet undisturbed, and here the smooth surface of the deposit gave no indication of 
anything underneath, although the loose soil that had been exposed by digging consisted 
almost entirely of fragments of clay images. The more perfect specimens were found 
lying layer upon layer to a depth of almost two feet, one touching the other. Originally 
there must have been many thousands of them. Having Wen covered for a long period 
by guano, and having become saturated with its moisture, they were very soft and fragile^ 
and in some cases the deposit showed greater cohesion than the images. Out of over a 

I 177 ] 



1902.] KAK. [No. 125^ 

hnndred specimeas that were dug up I onlj succeeded in getting about two dozen in a 
fairly perfect condition. 

^*In this cave there were three different kinds of images, each kind placed 
by itself." [There is at least one other type (Fig, 4), hut there are only 
two specimens in the Oxford collection, and both are very much obliterated. — N. A.] 
" The largest kind (Figs. 1, 2), which was about the size of u small human hand, 
was generally found in pairs, face to face, as shown in (Fig. 1), and was thus better 
preserved than the others. The images, or rather tablets, were made of oblong lumps 
of clay flatted and drawn out to a point at one end, so as to be pear-shaped. They had 
been worked by hand, as is proved by the finger-marks still clearly visible upon the 
backs and sides. The material is rather coarse and gritty, but broken specimens show 
that a finer substance has been spread over the surface, doubtless to ensure sharper 
outline in the figures, which have been produced by pressure upon the inner side of the 
tablets. A wooden mould could not have produced the minute detail that some of 
the figures exhibit, and probably a metal die was used. The largest tAblets show 
nine figures in an attitude similar to that in which Buddha is usually represented at the 
present day ; the other types are purely Hindu. They represent a seated figure with an 
elaborate head-dress or halo ; or a twelve-armed deity holding a captive on either side. 

'* All these tablets have stamped upon their back inscriptions in some Indian 
language." [Mr. Wichreme Singhe, of the Indian Institute, Oxford, who has only had 
time to make a cursory examination of the plaques, gives the following information 
concerning them. All the inscriptions are in the Nagarl characters, and probably consist 
of the Buddhist creed, " Ve dhama betuppabhava^'' &c.* They are not earlier than the 
tenth century. Numbers of votive offerings of this kind have been found in India and 
Ceylon. — N. A.] 

^' The current idea of the Siamese that these images, which they call Pra Pithm 
(corrupted from Pra Pi tam, " Idols made by spirits "), are of supernatural origin is 
not so absurd as it seems, for when first removed they are of a dark yellowish colour, as 
if they had just left the maker^s hands. On being exposed to the air they sooa become 
harder and assume a paler colour. As they are evenly distributed and constantly met 
with in the places where they are to be found, the Siamese are convinced that, however 
many are taken away, an equal number will replace them, and that those which are 
taken will return of themselves to the cave," [Somewhat similar images, but on 
rectangular tablets, and of purely Buddhist design, are found in the limestone caves of 
Jalor and Pahang, and are there attributed by the Malays to the Hnntu Parai or Peris, 
whom they regard as spirits of the crags. An intelligent Siamese nobleman, who was 
well acquainted with the East Coast Malay States, informed me that the tablets were 
undoubtedly deposited in the caves by the Siamese armies who invaded the Malay 
Peninsula in the eighteenth and the beginning of the nineteenth century, and who made 
them as votive offerings, because they were afraid of being surprised by the Malays. In 
Jalor the Malays believe that those on which figures holding their hands in front of 
their faces are stamped render their finders invulnerable if worn on the person. I have 
not seen specimens of this type. Inscriptions are said to have been noted on some 
specimens, but I have not myself been able to find any that were not almost entirely 
defaced. — N. A.] 

" Some time after visiting Kao Wat Han, I visited another cave in a mountain 
called Kao Sai, west of the Trang river. Here I found images of a different kind 
(Figs. 9, 10, 1 1), with an inscription surrounding the upper part of a single figure and with- 
out stamps on the back of the tablets. The face of the tablets is sunk very deep, and the 



* The foimula is an abbreviation of that ou the Wat Han figures. Mr, Singhe believes them to be 
synchronous.— N. A, 

( "8 3 



190d.] MAN. [No. 125. 

figure, which stands out boldlj, is not so high as the edges. The design and execution 
are superior to those of the Hui Yot figures/' [The greater sharpness of some of the 
Kao Sai figures is only due in part to the fact that thej have been protected from 
rubbing against the backs of other tablets. Their attitude is that in which modern 
Siamese buddhas are represented, but they have each four arms, and their features are 
Indian. Thej have not all been made with the same stamp. — N. A.] 

^* These figures were found mostly in a small inner cavern approached by a low 
and narrow passage from a larger cave, which was dark, and did not contain Buddhist 
statues. It had been one of the first worked for guano, and so the few figures that 
remained in the larger compartment were broken, the majority having been reduced to 
small fragments. Those in the inner chamber were more perfect, though they had 
been thrown down in heaps, apparently in great haste, and many of them were broken. 
I succeeded in getting about fifty specimens, together with a small cookiDg-pot that was 
found among the debris. The shape of the latter is unmistakeahly Indian, and I have 
never seen examples of antique or modern Siamese or Malay pottery of a material so 
coarse. £ven to the naked eye it seems to consist principally of tiny pebbles/' [The 
first part of this statement is rather bold. I agree with Mr. Stefien, that this pot differs 
in shape, ornamentation, and material from modern Malay and Siamese pottery, but the 
material is only a very little more coarse than that of a handmade pot which I collected, 
fresh from the workman, in the state of Nawngcbik, near the East Coast. — N. A.] 

^* The Malays on the coast occasionally dig up jugs, dishes, and basins, which in 
shape and material scarcely admit of any doubt as to their being Indian antiques, 
resembling the remnants of pottery occasionally found by me in the caves of the 
interior.'' [From Mr. Stefien's verbal description, I cannot help thinking that some of 
these dishes found on the coast must be either Chinese or Cambodian. — N. A.] '* In 
the interior of Trang I found a short stone pillar that carried some animal on the top 
and was recognisable, even in its mutilated state, as a fair representation of the pillars 
near temples in India. In the north-west part of the province, near a fairly large lake 
called Taldh Song Hong, or * Lake of the Two Chambers,' there are still, on the banks 
of a small river, heaps of large bricks overgrown with vegetation. Neither Malays or 
Siamese are known ever to have used bricks of a similar shape, but they are common in 
Indian buildings. On the mountain range Kao Chawaprabh, which separates Trang 
on the east side from Lakon on the west, and is at present very difficult of access, tin 
has been worked at some period in such an efficient manner and on so great a scale that 
the workings must have 1>een made by thoroughly experienced miners. This fact points 
again to India. 

*'*' In Lakon, again, we do not depend on possible or even probable suppositions. 
Siamese history, verified by undeniable proofs, mentions some Indian race as having 
invaded Lakon from the west, and the traditions of the descendants of these people, still 
living on the east coast, will have it that Trang was where their ancestors landed." 
[Until recently there appear to have been families in Trang itself who claimed descent 
from Pram or Brahmins. There are still several Pram villages in the adjacent state of 
Patalung, and the Prams are said to have a temple at Lakon. The Prams of Siam are 
a religious caste, professing Buddhism and regarded as sacred by all classes. In Pata- 
lung and at Bangkok they take a leading part in all important religions ceremonies. 
Their Indian blood, if it ever existed, has become so diluted by constant marriage with 
Siamese women that it would probably be impossible to diagnose it by physical 
characters. I believe that they even allow adoption into their caste. — N. A.] 

** To conclude, I will give a free translation of the facts as mentioned in the old 
palm-leaf scriptures of the Siamese : — ' In the year 687 of the Maha^ or *' Great " era 
*' (a.d. 765), great political disturbances took place all over India, and the inhabitants 
' finding it impossible to make a living, were forced in large numbers to leave their 

[ 179 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No8. 13tf-126. 

home and conntrj and settle amongst other nations. ... At that time foar tribes 
of Brahmins, consisting of a considerable number of persons, made their wa j eastwanls 
from *' Wanilara ** to Burma, Pegu (then independent), the Laos States, Siam add 
Cambodja. Those coming to Siam went partly to tiie north-west and settled in 
Sukotairajatani and Lawo (the present Lopburi), others went from Pegu to Tana- 
wassi (Tenasserim) and across to Pechaburi, and Htill others came to Lakon (at that 
time called Sai Pet or Kai Pet), where they built a temple and erected their sao ching 
cha or posts for the swinging ceremony. These pillars still exist in the town as 
a proof that the Brahmins came to Lakon before they reached Bangkok.' As to 

there being no descendants of these Indians in Lakon: 'In the year 1130 of the 
Chula era (a.d. 1766), Phya Tak usurped the throne of Siam and founded a new 
capital, calling it Tanaburi Sri Ajuthaja.* (Part of the present city of Bangkok on 

the west bank of the Menam occupies the site of this capital.) *He then collected an 
army and went to war against Lakon. ' The country was vanquished and the inhabi- 
tants taken to Tanaburi in the year 1 131 (a.d. 1769).' 

^' It may be supposed that a certain number of the inhabitants made their escape." 

A. STEFFEN. 

India : Qypsles. Risley : Sinclair. 

The Origin of the OypslOS. Extracts from Correspondence relating to i AQ 
the Origin of the Gypsies, communicated by H, //. Risley, CLE., Census m£M 
Commissioner for India. D.O., No. 627. 

A. — Extracts from a semi-official letter from Mr, A, T. Sinclair, of Boston, U.S.A., 
to His Excellency Lord Curzon of Kedlcston, dated 2\st July 1902. 

Para 5. — Baluchistan gypsies are called Luri. Their numbers are uncertain, 
perhaps 1,000 or 2,000 

7. India. — A large number of Europeans and natives, scholars, officials, merchants, 
tradesmen, &c., who have lived in India many years, or were born there, all write or tell 
me they never saw a single gypsy in India. So many Englishmen there have been 
interested in this question, and nobody yet has found there even one gj^sj. There are 
many tribes, gypsy-like in their habits, trades, and tricks, but their languages are all 
either the vernacular of the district where they roam or whence they come, a kind of 
thieves' jargon, but never gypsy. Curiously, when their dialect varies from the 
vernacular, it always seems to differ from gypsies' more than that does. Dr. Grierson, 
who has been of much service to me, put the thing admirably (and he is a gypsiologist 
himself) : " There are numbers of so-called gypsy tribes in India. The best known are 
" the Doms (whose language is not gypsy). Most of the other ' Indian gypsy ' 
*' dialects are not languages at all, but are perversions of other well-known Indian 
" languages, much as ' thieves' Latin ' is a perversion of English." 

8. We have, then, 500,000 gypsies in Old European Turkey speaking a pure 
gypsy tongue in words and grammar. Between that and India thousands of gypsies, 
their language growing more corrupt, until on the confines of India it is nearly gone. 
Still, everywhere, everybody, Vambery, General Ivanhov, General AminoflF, Major 
Sykes, and hundreds of others, at once recognise them as gypsies just as you do a 
gypsy in England. As soon as we cross into India nobody can find a gypsy. . . . 

10. As to how you can aid me : — 

{a,) I should like your own views on the gypsy question as to origin and any 
suggestions about it. I should value them as the judgment of a scholar who has 
investigated similar questions with enthusiasm, vigour, and success. It will not do to 

[ 180 ] 



1902.] MAN. [No. 126. 

trust entirely to laDguage, history, ethnology ; the whole situation must be considered 
with good judgment and strong common sense. 

(6.) I desire facts to link up to the Central Asian Lull and Baluchi Luri. 

(e.) Do these wander into India ? Do Indian gypsy-like tribes roam abroad ? I 
know Afghan horse-dealers come down even to Southern India. Arc they gypsies ? 

(d,) Is there any trace in India particularly on the border in the Punjab of these 
Luli or Luri ? Or any tribes there that can be identified with them ? 

(e.) We find all about the north-western adjoining countries this distinct gypsy 
race. It seems as if there must be the same race across in India. If not, this is a most 
important fact. 

(y.) Of course I cannot expect you yourself to devote time to such a matter. I 
know you will l>c interested and so have written at length to explain myself fully. You, 
however, know who in India will be interested in such matters, and those most 
competent to consider them. I realise fully the difficulties of the subject, and all 
investigations of the kind, particularly in the East. Time, tact, the happy faculty of 
getting at things right, an interest in snch subjects ; all are necessary. In requesting 
favours of this kind I often hesitate, but I have received so much courtesy and unlimited 
kindness everywhere, I felt compelled to write you after reading your Persia, Northern 
India is a vital spot to unravel the gypsy riddle. It can be done only by those there on 
the ground. 

All I can expect of you is to hand my letters to the one who in your judgment will 
be most competent to consider the matter. Of course, I cannot expect any one to spend 
time on the matter except at their entire convenience, and as an interest in a scientific 
question will lead them. Your suggestions to them I also should value highly. 

Simla, 28th August 1902. 

B. — To A, T, Sinclair J Esq, 

D.O.I., No. 596. — Mv dear Sir, — I am desired by the Viceroy to reply to your 
interesting letter of the 21st July, addressed to his Excellency, on the subject of the 
gypsy (| nest ion. 

2. The problem of the connection of India with the people usually known as gypsies 
in Europe can, I venture to think, be approache<l by two methods — by philology and by 
ethnography, or anthro{K>logy. We are in a position in India to apply both of these on 
a large scale and in a systematic fashion. 

3. The Linguistic Survey has, I understand, collected a large number of specimens 
of gypsy dialects, but this material has not yet been digested, and Dr. Grierson writes to 
me that he ir* unable to say as yet what is the real basis of each. Some are simply 
thieves* patters, made up by altering the order of the letters in good Hindi words. 
Dr. Grierson is, as you mention, a keen student of the gypsy ([uestion, and he will no 
doubt bring out interesting results when he has completed his analysis of the material. 

4. The Ethnographic Survey of India, which is now being undertaken, can work 
two lines of cn(|uiry. It can record customs, religion, folk-lore, traditions, &c., and it 
can measure beads and determine physical characters. If you or any other specialists in 
gyi>sy ethnography will let me know what particular {)oints you wish to have emjuired 
into I will add them to the Manual of Ethnography already in circulation, of which I 
enclose a copy, and will direct special attention to them. In case you should not have 
seen the papers relating to the survey, which was sanctioned by Lord Curzon last year, 
I send you a set for reference. I can also have measurements taken of Bedias, Doms, 
Kanjars, Nats, &c. This is easily done, as there are always plenty of them in gaol. It is 
just possible that the examination of tattoo marks, which I started last year, may throw 
some light on the affinities of Indian and European gypsies. A reference to my article. 
No. 74 in the July number of Man [1902], dealing with the tattoo marks of the Doms^ 

[ 1«1 1 



1902.] MAN. [Nos. 126-127. 

who are supposed to be tbe original gypsies, will dhow that this notion is not so fanciful 
as it seems to be at Hrst sight. People are surprisingly conservative in the matter of 
patterns of all kinds, whether of tattoos, or shawls, and carpets. 

.5. I do not quite follow what you say about there being no gypsies in India. In a 
note on the languages of India, which will eventually be published a8 the language 
chapter of the Indian Census Report, Mr. Grierson says that in its grammar Romany 
'' presents many remarkable points of similarity with the languages of the outer circle," 
Kashmiri, Sindhi, Marathi, Bihari, &c. And it is, I believe, settled doctrine among 
philologists that grammatical structure, and not vocabulary, is the test of linguistic 
affinity. The evidence of language, therefore, so far as it goes, tends to show that the 
ancestors of the European gypsies were Indians. But in India the gypsy people have no 
generic name. They are Doms, Nats, Bedias, &c., and arc lost in the crowd of castes 
and tribes which make up the population of India. ^' Dom," by the way, is probably a 
tribal name of the same type as Kol, Ho, &c., raeaoing " man." In Europe the gypsies 
are practically still a caste, intermarrying mainly among themselves, living in a peculiar 
fashion, and bearing a specific name, derived, I believe, from the account some branches 
of them gave of themselves as coming from " Little Egypt " — according to Professor Uopf, 
the Peloponnesus. There is therefore no difficulty in distinguishing them from the rest of 
the population, while in India there are at least a dozen castes who live a more or less 
gypsy life, and may be described in popular phraseology as gypsies. If our inquiries are 
to proceed on systematic lines it will be necessary for gypsiologists to explain exactly 
what they mean when they speak of gypsies in India. To be more precise, we must 
know by what tests, ethnographic or anthropometric, the gypsies are to be distinguished 
from other more or less nomadic tribes who wander about in search of pasture, in pursuit 
of trade, or as carriers of other people's goods. 

6. I do not iiud much evidence in the census reports of the presence of Luris or 
Lulls (paragraphs 5 and 10, 6, c, and d of your letter) in India. There is an Afghan or 
Pathan tribe called Luni, numbering 2,600 in Baluchistan and 240 in the Punjab, but 
they call themselves Durrani, they have the standard Afghan genealogy, and it is not 
suggested that they are in any sense gypsies. Among the Brahuis again we find Loris 
or blacksmiths, who, according to Mr. Hughes-Buller, Superintendent of Census, 
Baluchistan, "are looked upon as a subject race with whom no self-respecting tribesmen 
'* will intermix." But the Loris are supposed to be Jats, and are so spoken of by the 
Brahuis, and it seems more likely that their name is connected with loha, '* iron," than 
that they are immigrant gypsies from Persia. It is not clear to me whether you would 
connect these Lulis and Luris with the Lurs described in his Excellency Lord Curzon's 
book on Persia, but I gather that the Lurs are only seasonal nomads within the limits of 
their own hills, which are a very long way from Baluchistan, and that they have no gypsy 
proclivities. — Yours sincerely, H. II. Risley, Census Commissioner and Director of 
Ethnography for India. 



Japan: Religion. Aston. 

Kaempfer as an Authority on Shinto. Bt/ W. G. Aston, C.MM. ^qi^ 
As Kiempfer's History of Japan is to this day quoted freely as an authority lilf 
on Japanese religion by our most eminent anthropologists, it may be useful to examine 
briefly how far this well-known work is deserving of reliance. 

The author's stiiy in Japan lasted for two years and two months only. He lived in 
the Dutch Settlement at Nagasaki in a sort of captivity, varied by two journeys to 
Yedo in the suite of the chief of the Dutch factory. The Japanese authorities took 
every possible means of preventing intercourse between the Dutch residents and the 
inhabitants of Nagasaki, and Kasmpfer had to obtain his information partly from the 
native interpreters, but chiefly from a young man who was appoiuted to wait on him as 

[ 182 ] 



1902.3 MAN. [No. 127. 

his servant and at the same time to be instructed in physic and surgery. He was wholly 
if^norant of the Japanese language. 

It is not surprising that under those circumstances his knowledge of the difficult 
subject of the Shinto religion was defective. Truth to say, his ignorance is colossal. 
To give a few examples : — 

He defines Shinto as idol-worship, an aspersion which has the slenderest foundation 
in fact, and speaks of a (non-existent) idol of Tenshodaijin (the Sun-goddess). 

He thinks that this deity, the principal one of the Shinto Pantheon, is of the male 
sex, aqd has no suspicion that she is identical with the sun. What weight of authority 
should we allow to a writer on Greek mythology who made Phoebus a female, and knew 
nothing of any connection between him and the sun ? Ka^mpfer had before him her 
other name, Ania teru no Don garni (Heaven-shining-great-august-deity), which he 
renders ^' a great spirit streaming out celestial rays ** ; but even this did not excite his 
suspicions, for he speakn of Ise as the province where " he " reigned, and gives the 
number of years during which " he " occupied the throne. 

Sin and Kami (God) signify, according to Kaempfer, " souls and spirits.'* The use 
of these words is very misleading. The Kami are not spirits, though they may have 
mitama (spirit, effluence, shekineh) which occupy their temples and manifest their 
presence on occasion. 

Tenjiny a deified statesman of the eighth century, and Hachiman^ a deified Mikado, 
are described by Kaempfer as brothers of Tenshodaijin (the Sun-goddess). The old 
myths lend no countenance to this statement. 

He calls Y^ebisu the Japanese Neptune, and Inari " the Great God of Foxes," and 
says that the Gohci are white bits of paper emblematic of purity. All this is incorrect. 

Ka^mpfer recognises two classes of Shinto deities. One consists of deified men. 
Of the other he quotes only a few names, knowing nothing of their character and 
functions, not even the fact ihat they are nature-deities. The general impression left 
by his observations is that the leading feature of Shinto is hero-worship, ancestor- 
worship, or whatever else the cult of the dead may be called. He is probably responsible 
for Grant Allen's statement that Shinto is based entirely on ancestor-worship. The 
real state of the case may be gathered from the following analysis of a list of *'^ Greater 
Shrines " prepared in the ninth century. Of the gods comprised in it, seventeen are nature- 
deities, one is a sword which probably represented a nature-deity, two are more or less 
legendary deceased Mikados, one is the deified type and supposed ancestor of a hereditary 
priestly corporation, one is the ancestor of an empress, and one a deceased statesman. 
A similar list compiled from more ancient sources would show a still greater proportion 
of nature-deities. 

Mr. J. G. Frazer in his admirable work. The Golden Bough (I. 234), quotes from 
Ka3mpfer a long passage descriptive of the personal cult of living Mikados. I am 
unable at present to examine his statements in detail. They seem to me to consist of a 
good deal of ignorant gossip mixed with, perhaps, a few grains of truth. It is in any case 
impossible to accept Ktempfer's authority for them. His woeful blundering in Shinto 
matters deprives him of all claim to our credence, and what knowledge of the domestic 
arrangements of Windsor Castle could we expect from a Japanese who had lived two 
years in semi-captivity at Gal way, prevented from intercourse with the inhabitants and 
entirely ignorant of the English language ? 

Siebold's Nippon Archif is, in so far as Shinto is concerned, a vast improvement 
on Kjempfer. Nevertheless, the student of anthropology and religion cannot be too 
emphatically warned that his only safe rule is to disregard everything that has been 
written on Shinto by Europeans before Sir Ernest Satow's accurate and scholarly con- 
tributions to the Japan Asiatic Society's transactions in 1874-1881. He is the founder 
of our knowledge of Shinto. Since then the Kojiki and Nihongi^ which contain the 

[ 183 1 



1902.] 



MAN. 



ClToB. 127-128. 



old inytliloal lore of JiigiiKi, Imvc lieeu tmualiilcJ ialu Eir);li6li, 
n<l<lili(in In ciiir ktiiiwleilge of lliu uereuiuiiiitl li»!i lieL'ii r«(.'Qiitl.v ui 
<!otitiiiitnlii)ii of Sii' Kriioiit Satuw*ii Ancient Jitpaurte Hilualii ii 
Sowoty'* TrjiiiMt-lioDS for 1899. With llipsu lualeriuU aviiilulile it 
for wriier.- in lliis couulry to go on i|UO[iii'! so iiulii|Uiited auJ so 
an autburitf ns KicmpCer'e HUt'try ofJnpnn. 



^■\^\\e 



ID iinfioruiiit 
b_v Dr. Florenz's 
10 Jiipnn Asiatir 
urolv inex [led lent 

auiUlly worLhleee 
VV. G. ASTON. 



New Zealand. 

Note on a Sn 
New Zealand. /;// A. ll-rmi/to,/. Ln. 



Note on a Small Stone Relic found near OrepukI, Southland, -inn 

o,,ol..,,.ral I/O 
Itutiliilc. 

The specimen descriljed in lliia note was found nenr Oru piiki, n siniill township 
oil the shore of Foveatix StrtiJt, iu tho eitrome south of New /.eulsnd. Id thifl neigh- 
boni'hooil there nro still n stubII niimher of the original Mnori population of the South 
Iskiid who reHide at Coluc Baj and one or two other placi^B. 

J<i(il oppn^ilv at the wefllern entrance to ihe i^traic ifi tlic island of Rarotoka or 
Rarotongu, which tradition states was nami.<d after a UarotiiM^in iif the olden time far 
awH_v in tlie FnoiBc. The ielHud has ulwa3's been regHrded a» a sacred island, and from 
lime lo time the wind nneovers mi's and curion^ itpecimemi on I lie si tee of old setttemenl^. 
Some of theso will be aUiided lo later. The present Knrupeuii name for the inlaud ie 
Centre Island. It ie in the uei^hhonrbuod of this saered isle that the spceimen now 
under i^on^ideration was foiniil. It belongs to Mr. Diiulop, the manager of ibe Orepnki 
Shale Uil Works, and I am obliged to bim for iho loan of it. 




1902.] 



MAN. 



[No. 128. 



I ue&rlj' every 



As will be aeeo from the tigares, it iit shaped like the handle aud gnard of a amall 
sword or dagger. It is eUbomtely carTed froiu a dark -coloured phyllite, and, unfortu- 
uatelv, liHB bcon iDuch dHiuaged, a lirge fragment having been split off from each 
Bide. Fortunately, however, the portions destroyed can be reproduced i 
case by a study of both sides, aod iho fall design reconstructed (Fig. 2). 

It is too small to I>e used as a dagger or 
weapon, though the ubape and broken fragmctit 
where the blade sliould be suggest this at oucc. 
The length altogetlier is a little more tliau 
3J iuclies (9-25 cm. by 1-60 iu width). The 
cross-hilt is recurved with a fine sweep boldly 
executed. The process oF maunfacture is in- 
dicated by the marks of the drill on the inner 
curve of the urms, and tliero is a large hole 
bored near the butt, which has evidently beeu 
worked with a loose Polynesian drill, somewhat 
unsteady in Its action. Beyond the cross-piece 
is a fragment of a shaft, circular in section, 
20 rom.in diameter. It is, of course, impossib 
to say what leoglli it was originally, or whether ' 
it tapered. There is no iudicutiou of tapering 
in the fragment remaining. Curious as 
shape is, the ornamentation with wliicb it 
covered is still more interesting. The design 
is formed by cutting out portions of the surface 
so aa to leave the lines in low relief. The 
main design is best seen by placing the large 
hole at the top. Round the margin of the liole 
is a lino which projects vertically at the top, 
and passing over, probably, met the corresjKinding tine on the other side. Outside' this 
first line is another, which forms lower dowu the uutliue of a large lozenge-sbaped or 
kite-shaped face. The inner line is notched at short intervals all round, I take these 
two lines to represent the framework of a feather head-dress such as are common in the 
Pacific. There is a line parallel with these on the oulside, but the termination on ^ch 
side is so damaged that I am uncertain as to what it represents. The linos bounding the 
area of the face are incomplete on both sides, but, judging by the small perfect maskoid 
on one of the curves, it came to a |)oint. but that no mouth was indicated. The eyes are 
represented by concentric circles, two on one side, three on the other. The larger spaoe 
seems to be the only reason for one having three rings. Below the face the lines are 
somewhat difficult to follow, but on one side it appears to he plain that the upper lines 
on each side are intended for arms, as there is u distinct indication of an elbow, and I 
take the two lower lines to \ie meant for legs. 

The edge of the cnrve on the inner side is ornamented with closely -placed notches, 
and also the angle above and below the msskoidi'. The arms and 1^ terminate at these 
kite-shaped maskoids, which have the eyes represented by concentric circles ; no mouths, 
but they are angled on the centre line and notched from top to bottom. In relation to 
the arms of the two figures just described the maskoids appear to be upside down, but 
when we e?camine the handle at each side, as seen in Fig. 3 -below, we find a small 
full-length figure so placed that the small mark on the curved arms become the heads 
of these small figures by superposition. 

As will be seen from the figures, one figure represents a male drawn in a very 
peculiar and archaic style. On the opposite side is a female figure even more peculiar, 
f 186 ] 




1903.] 



HAN. 



[Hob. 12S-139. 



The extremo butt or oml has been oroamented, bat the Bmall fragment which remaini 
does not give flufficieut to justify u restoratioo. 1 think, however, that there were two 
small figures with their heads towards the central part of the end. The expanded 
triangular areas at the base of the shaft arc ornamented with concentric circles and 
tioteheB. The whole represents great laI>onr and was doubtless a sacred or highly 
vulued possessioa. Its small size preclades 
the idea of its having been used as a weapOD, 
and I have looked in vain for a similar object 
i[i the ilrii\vings of the Edge- Parting too Album 
and other works. 

The only possible rcacuiblance that I can 
fiud is to the fan handles made of wbale-tooth 
ivory figured at Plate 2d and Plate 47, Pig. 6, 
_ of the Edge -Partington Album, as being fan 
' \v '^ handles from the Marquesas. Here we have 
the central shuft, the human figures at the 
sides, and the curved anchor-like arms with 
heads at the middle of the arms, only the 
revened way. The head-dr^ss, with the pro- 
joLtJiig spike for u feather plume, ia seen on 
the head of a figure on a dancing stick from 
Now Britain. (Plate 245, Fig. 2.) 

I must call attention to the notched 
character of the subsidiary ornamentatiou, 
which corresponds exactly to the markings in 
the specimen figured in my Maori Art (Plate 
56, Figs. 1, 4, 5, 6), and which I there state 
to have a special character and sigtiificancc of their own. The specimen figured on 
Plate 48 of iVfiori .Ir/ (Fig. 5) came from the same locality as the one under discussion 
and has a similar tj|K! of face. The small object figured iu the sam'e plato in Fig. 3 
is slightly notched along the ridge and may have represented a small raoskoid. 

It is ueedlCHM for me to remark that the Maori wore not a fan-using people, nor do 
I know at present of any mention of fans in their songs, &c. No doubt they would 
fan theinsclveu when hot and tired, but tliuy did not develop the fan, as happened in 
many of the more tropical islands. If, then, this was a fan handle, it was probably 
an old ceremonial spcciaicn brought iu one of the old liekes as a sacred relic from another 
land. A. HAMILTON. 




' BELIC FODKD AT 




REVIEWS. 
Phj^lcal Anthropology. Sohwalbe. 

I. Der NcnntlcrthaUcliddcl, Von G. Schwalbc, in Strassburg, I.E. Jsonder- lAQ 
abdriick aus ' Bonner Jahrbuchor." Heft 106, \£m 

II. Die Nvaiiderthalraase. Emil Schmidt. Globus, lid. LXXX., No. 14. 
10th October 1901. 

III. Neanderthaltchadel mid Friacnschiidcl. Von G. Schwalbe, in Strassburg. 
Globus. Bd. LXXXl.. No. 11. 20th March 1902. 

In these three essays, the subject of consideration is the fossil skeleton of the 
Neanderthal, viewed in the fresh light recently thrown upon its anatomical eliaracters 
by the exhaustive work of Professor Schwalbe of Strasburg. In the first paper are set 
forth the methods adopted and the results obtained from these. The second paper 
consistB of a brief account of Schwalbe's work by Dr. Schmidt ; and in the third 
[ 186 ] 



1903.] MAN. [No. 129. 

essay Scbwalbe controverts Virchow^s recent pronouncement on the nature of the 
Neauderthal skeleton, and explains the grounds for his inability to accept Virchow^s 
conclusion. 

Returning to the first-mentioned paper, it will be found to consist of an elaborate 
investigation of the several bones of the famous skeleton which is now to be seen in the 
Rheinische-Antiquitlits Museum at Bonn. The most important results of this new 
enquiry are that the evidence for the view which ascribes the peculiar features of the 
skeleton to pathological causea must be deemed insufficient, and that the skull in 
particular (the limb bones have been investigated separately by Professor Klaatsch) 
presents so many features which ally it to the skulls of Pithecanthropus erectus and of 
apes, that the Neanderthal man must be considered to belong to a species different from 
any variety or race of men now known. Indeed, the conclusion tiiat the Neanderthal 
variety is so distinct as to justify its description as a separate species is the essential 
point now demonstrated. 

The methods employed by Schwalbe deserve a word of mention. It is to be noticed 
that almost without exception, the measurements selected with a view to the comparison 
of different specimens are applicable with perfect exactitude to the crania of apes as well 
as those of human beings. Several of these measurements and the indices derived from 
them were used by Schwalbe in his exhaustive examination of the calvaria of Pithecan- 
thropus erectus (cf. Zeitschrift fur Anthropologic und Morphologic^ Bd. I.). An impor- 
tant point of comparison depends on the proportions which exist between the lengths of 
the several margins of the parietal bone of various primate mammals. In respect of the 
great proportionate length of the temporal margin of the parietal bone, the Neauderthal 
skull is found to be more closely allied to the apes (anthropoid and other) than it is to any 
human race now existing. At the same time the Neauderthal skull escapes a complete 
correspondence with those lower forms by reason of the associated length of the coroual 
margin of the same bone. 

With the remark that a carefully elaborated method used by Dubois was applied 
to a new determination of the probable cranial capacity of the Neanderthal skull, the 
subject of methods must be passed over. An important point, brought out into promi- 
nence by the work under consideration, is the stress to be laid on observations from a 
single specimen as affording ground for a general statement or description of the species 
to which the individual belonged. The point upon which Schwalbe insists is that when 
a single specimen presents feature after feature approximating it to the higher apes 
rather than to man, there is justification for such separation of the specimen as is 
iuvolved in assigning it to a separate species. This brings up the consideration of the 
exact term to be employed in describing the zoological group to which the Neanderthal 
skull is to be relegated ; and^ it must be admitted that Schwalbe does not quite clearly or 
consistently state whether it is as a new genus, or as a new species merely, that he would 
describe the specimen (cf. p. 67). What is clear, however, is, as has been already said, 
that the anomalies of the skull place it far outside the range of normal modern human 
crania, and assign to it a place distinctly nearer Pithecanthropus and the anthropoid 
apes than to these. Consequently, Schwalbe suggests that the name Pithecanthropus 
should be applied to the zoological group to which the Neanderthal man belonged, and 
he is thereby constrained to employ the term Homo pithecanthropus to describe the new 
species. This entails a change of name in the case of the Javan fossil (discovered by 
Dubois) from Pithecanthropus to Anthropopithecus, and as the latter name has to be 
wrested from the Chimpanzees, Schwalbe suggests the re-employment of the name Troglo- 
dytes for these. Such a wholesale shuffling of names appears, however, quite inexpedient 
at the present time, and the best term descriptive of the new species would seem to be 
Homo neanderthalensis. A scheme of the very varying opinions expressed on the 
subject is givcu by Schwalbe on pp. 56 and 57 of his work* 

[ 187 ] 



1902.] MAN. [Kor 139. 

The second essay is, as has been said, a carefully and clearly written account of 
the foregoing publication. 

In the third paper under consideration, Schwalbe takes up the address recently 
delivered by Virchow at Metz, on the occasion of the annual meeting of the (rermau 
Anthropological Society in that city. Virchow reiterated his opinion that the peculiar 
features of the Neanderthal skull do not exclude it from association in the t^ame species 
with other human beings. Schwalbe examines Virchow's arguments most critically, and 
is able to point out that even this great authority had not taken the opportunity of informing 
himself correctly on the subject of various anatomical points on which stress was laid. 
Thus Schwalbe refutes, with apparent success, Virchow's contention that pathological 
causes can be invoked to explain the extraordinary combination of anomalies in the 
Neanderthal skull. He then discusses again the question of the value of the differences 
between the Neanderthal and other human crania, in so far as they may justify separation 
to the extent of a genus or a species only, and, as already stated, concludes that the 
differences have a specific value. Finally, comes the most important part of this third 
{mper, viz., the demonstration that several skulls claimed as '^ neanderthaloid," notably 
certain Frisian skulls thought by Virchow to be modern representatives of the Neanderthal 
type, do not stand the test of a minute examination, and are only superficially allied in 
appearance to the type specimen. 

It should be finally mentioned that the question of the geological age of the strata in 
which the Neanderthal skeleton was discovered has been further investigated by Koenen, 
with the result that their antiquity is now considered as very considerable as regards the 
occurrence of human remains, it having been suggested that the formation is a tertiary 
one {see No. 1., p. 63, Nachtrag). 

The foregoing essays and the questions incidentally discussed give rise to the 
following reflections amongst others! In the first place, as concerns the character of the 
work, one is impressed by the preci.sion and accuraey of the mcthcKls employed, with 
consequent freedom from ambiguity in the indications obtained. As one result, among 
many, it is very clearly shown that in craniology, as in other matters, things are occa- 
sionally not what they seem ; and that the claim of such skulls as that from Borreby, that 
of Kai-Lykke, &c., to a resemblance with the Neanderthal skull, resis on the slender 
basis of an outward similarity in the common possession of a retreating forehead, a basis 
which will not stand the test of a searching examination. The net result of the work 
of Dubois on the calvaria of Pithecanthropus erectus, work which was the precursor in 
point of time, which anticipated in principle this later work of Schwalbe, and which 
must be associated with it, is a great gain to physical anthropology in respect of 
precision of methoil. 

Secondly and lastly, one cannot avoid a special reference to the work of the eminent 
anthropologist so lately deceased, rrot'cssor Virchow. Keenly interested in physical 
anthropology, Professor Virchow had investigated the Neanderthal skeleton more than 
thirty years ago. The difference of opinion as to the nature of the Neanderthal man seems 
to emphasize the whole difference which of late years placed Virchow with a limited 
following, in contrast with, if not in opposition to, the majority of anthropologists 
in Germany. To me, Virchow's position appears to have been essentially that of an 
agnostic with regard to the origin of species in general and of man in particular. The 
reason for his extreme caution in this matter could only be furnished by one intimately 
acquainted with Virchow's character and trend of mind. But it has had as its result, 
that Virchow's contributions to physical anthropology have been made rather through 
the pupils he has inspired than by his own work. Descriptions he has left us in 
immense quantity, but for so vast an amount of labour there is peculiarly little outcome 
in the way of the conception, formulation, or corroboration of a general theory of the 
relation of man to other animals or the inter-relationships of various human races. The 

[ 188 ] 



1902.] HAN. [Ko8. 139-180. 

work of Schwalbe d lifers essentiallj from that of Virchow in that through it all runs a 
spirit of confidence iu the guiding principle of evolution of form. One cannot but feet 
that the satisfaction experienced in reading such work is due to the stability conferred 
by the presence of such confidence, while at the same time, the several results present 
such concordance that oue^s reliance on the trustworthiness of the principle is 
proportionately enhanced. VV. LAURENCE H. DUCKWORTH. 



New Guinea. Sohmidt. 

The Lani^uaffes of North-East Now Guinea. lOA 

1. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Valman-Sprarhe ; auf Grund der voi: P. |uU 
Vormann, S.V.D. gemachten Aufzeichnungen, bearbeitet von P. W. Schmidt, S.V.D. 
Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologic. Berlin, 1900. pp. 87-104. 

2. Beitriige zur Kefuitniss der Valman-Sprache, A. Texte von P. N. Spolgen, 
S.V.D. B. Beitrdge zur Grammatik von P. W. Schmidt, S.V.D. (Wiener Zeitschrift 
filr die Kuude des Morgeulandes. Bd. XV. 1901. pp. 335-366.) 

These two papers refer to the language spoken by the natives of Berlinhafen on 
the north coast of Kaiser-Wilhelmslaud. The Valman, called Leminc: bv their 
neighbours, are the occupants of the coast of the mainland. On the neighbouring 
islands of Tumleo (Tamara), Saliu (Saleo), and All a different language is spoken. 
The first paper consists of a notice by P. W. Schmidt of the Valman language, based 
on the notes of P. Vormann, a missionary of the Societas Verbi Dei at Berlinhafen. 
The second is a series of descriptions of scenes and occupations collected by P. Spolgen, 
the successor of P. Vorman. From these P. Schmidt has extended and corrected his 
former notice. Together they form a most valuable contribution to our knowledge of 
the linguistics of this part of New Guinea, a subject which Professor Schmidt is 
making peculiarly his own. 

The Valman language belongs to that division of the New Guinea languages for 
which the present writer in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute for 1895 sug- 
gested the term Papuan : that is to say, it entirely differs in structure from the 
languages of the Melancsian Islands and has a distinct vocabulary. With the Kai 
(or Katedong) language at Finschhafen, and the Bogadjim of Astrolabe Bay, it 
shows that the languages of German New Guinea exhibit the same phenomena as 
those of the British region, the islands and some districts on the coast using Melanc- 
sian forms of speech, whilst in the greater part of the region, and especially inland, 
non-Melauesian languages are found. 

On the island of Tumleo, opposite the Valman district, a Meianesian language is 
spoken, and from this the Valman has borrowed a few words, but otherwise the 
Meianesian has had no influence. The words borrowed from Tumleo are such as we 
might expect a non-seafaring people to borrow from islanders. Examples are : vago^ 
boat (Tumleo, vaka) ; vnly pig (Tumleo, pul) ; vesiy oar (Tumleo, vest) ; sam, outrigger 
(Tumleo, suam). These are the common Meianesian words : vaka, poloy vose and sama. 

With regard to grammar it is not clear whether the noun, as in some of the Papuan 
languages of British New Guinea, is declined by suffixes. Prepositions are not used 
and postpositions indicate the relationship of things, as nagol-peni, house-in, nupol 
raninke^ tree round. The genitive case is only indicated by position. If denoting 
possession it precedes the governing word, but if qualifying, follows ; nupol mdten 
(tree fruit), tree's fruit, vul hotu (water coconut), coconut water. The nominative 
precedes, the accusative follows, the verb ; but neither have any distinctive form. 

The i)08.sessive of pronouns is shown by affixing the ordinary forms to a stem vo 
(modified to rw, ri). For the separate personal pronouns see examples of verbs : 
Sing. Ist Pers. vukkm : 2. vUi : 3. (masc.) ronom ; (fern.) viiru, 
Plur. 1. vWibin : 2. ritim : 3. riri. 

[ 189 ] 



1908.1 



MAN. 



[No. 180. 



A peculiarity of the language is the expression of gender with some commoD 
nouns, with the third person singular of pronouns and with the verbal prefixes. All 
things of the female sex, or used bj females, are of the feminine gender ; males and 
their possessions are masculiue. Bj a wider distinction, sun, moon, night, soul, life, 
&c., are masculine, whilst rain, boat, fish, sago, hunger, and others are feminine. In 
Western Torres Strait a somewhat similar distinction is made. There, females and 
large things take the one pronoun, masculines and small things another. In Murray 
Island in Eastern Torres Strait things have big and little names. The former being 
generic, the latter specific. 

Numt>er in Valman is indicated by an adjective. Adjectives are sometimes formed 
(like the possessive pronouns) from nouns by prefix vo, and may be used in verbal 
form. 

The verb is shown by a prefix, which varies for number and person. As in the 
Papuan languages of Kiwai, Torres Strait, and other parts of British New Guinea 
the grouping is not that of Melanesian particles. The Valman prefixes are : 

Sing. 1st Pers. m : 2nd and Srd masculine n : 3rd feminine r. 
Plur. 1 St „ k : 2nd and Srd masculine and femine y. 

Examples are : kuni moro^ I go ; tH norOy thou goest ; ruHon noro^ he goes ; ru 
vorOy she goes ; kibin koroj we go ; t^im i/oro, you go ; ri yoro^ they go. These may be 
compared with the Kiwai (Fly Delta), Mairu (Cloudy Bay), and Murray Island. 



Eiwai. 


Mairu. 


Murray Island. 


Mai noguy I go 
' Rai roguy Thou goest 
. yoai rogu, He goes 


la aita'a, I came Kaka mart nasmer, I you see 
r Oa aita. Thou comest Mama karLna^mer, You me see 
y Xoa aita. He come« ^ J Kaka ahi dasmer^ I him see 

V. Mama ahi dattmer^ You him see 



The objective pronoun is prefixed to the verb. Tense is generally indicated by 
prefixes also, but in some few cases by suffixes. The meaning of other verbal forms is 
not yet accurately known. The numerals as in other Papuan languages have only 
distinct words for "one" and "two." "One" is alpan or iio {ngo\ "two" is 
int. Other expressions are : vit-tio, three ; vit-vit^ four ; klago^olun (hand some), 
five. The only ordinals indicated are : vepin^ first ; numon^ in the middle ; kelkij at 

the end. 

A vocabulary is given in the first notice, and largely augmented in the second. It 
differs considerably from the Tombenam language (Hatzfeldt) of Zoller^s Vocabulary, 
and shows a language distinct from any others in the region. 

As a supplement to this note, and as an illustration of the variety of dialects on 
the north-east coast of New Guinea, I append a short vocabulary of words used on or 
near the coast of New Guinea from Berlinhafen to East Cape. These are : 1, Valman, 
coast at Berlinhafen ; 2, Tamara or Tumleo, islands off Berlinhafen ; 3, Kaiserin 
Augusta River ; 4, Tombenam, Hatzfeldthafen ; 5, Szeak and Bagili, on coast between 
Hatzfeldtbafen and C. Croiselles ; 6, Maragum, inland from north coast of Astrolabe 
Bay ; 7, Bilibili, island in Astrolabe Bay ; 8, Bogadjim, coast of Astrolabe Bay ; 9, 
Wenke, and 10, Wuong, mountains inland from Bogadjim ; 11, Bongu, Constantiuhafen ; 
12, Englam, mountains inland ; 13, Kadda, inland east of Kabeuau River; 14, Rook 
Island ; 15, Kelatia, coast opposite Rook Island ; 16, Kelana Kei, inland from Kelana ; 
17, Pom, north of Finschhafen ; 18, Yabim (Jabim), Finschhafen ; 19, Kei, inland from 
Finschhafen ; 20, Tami Island, off Cape Cretin ; 21, Bukaua, Cape Cretin ; 22^ 
Hinaudele, Mamba River ; 23, Musa River ; 24, Oiun and 25, Kiviri, north-west shore 

[ 190 1 



1902.3 



MAN. 



[No. 180. 



t^ 



o. 



C g S -3 

8 JS 



c 

m 

« ^ S 



a 
3 



& 



slllt;al 



- 5 I g g o 

s s 



I 



4) 






•3 



5 



cS ^ 5 



S 




s s s i - 



1 1 



V c 



- 3 



•a E 2 a c •« -o 



ssslsssssa 



». 

>§ 




g gig 

llill l-s = a g g i s-s|lt i 

I II I •§ -^ I 3 3 2 3 3 I i S i I ; £ 






& 

? 



o 



g| g -a 









3 O fli 
.M >k >> 



O 

s 



SB 



S 



Is 



g e 



2 

O 






c 
s 









a RaRl 



o .S o 

JS ^ JS 



a 





















0) 



Sc 

c 



•i a 



.2 
S 



0, ? £ 6 = E 



a 

9 



I 






8 
C 

.5 




5 I s 

sill 



o 



a „ 
S 1 



a •§ _ 

Ills 
-_ _. .. 





I 

s 

n ® «S 
A B S ^^ 



.9 ? § I 

'O .0 s 

J! = J 

"C CD "C 



2 •= 

s a 

e S « 



Sc .)< te J« S. 



o o 
o ^ ^ 




a 

o 

a 

i 

S 

M 

5 

o 

s 
£ 

9 



e 

C 

JS 



%m 

o 



9 

s 



-=-?i ?{si|i.i|ii 

2« i^ 2 j4 £ s JS ^ JS J4 :i 4*0 



.M0 rt'O.M as:?^ 3 >- 3 a M 



p ^ ^ ^ tS" V 

•52{ia{s§||ii-5 



' s 

JS 

3 

£ 



1 1 I 




^ 



o a 



3 S 



3 
33 



•3 



I 2 &| i 

5 B a 3 s 
s o «tf :e as 



a a 3 
« c o 5 5 5 1 
I s a § s a 3 



3 e 
2 I 






li 



§ a 
S a a 

"3 ~ 41 



J! o P 

o o c" o «« a ^ 

Egg 1. 1 -si 






0000 



2 

£ 

o 

m 
3 

£ 



2 2 
£ 2 

C £ 



(4 



i 2 ^ 

a 3 -^ 



i'5 c - 



T3 ..I 






OS 

5 a 



— 91 



:itf 



ll|;sl|sj^|^|5al_lJ3ils-Sas|,3|^|-5 



[ 191 ] 



1902.] MAN. [1^08.130-182. 

of Collingwood Bay ; 26, Raqa and 27, Knbiri, south shore of Collingwood Bay ; 
28, Kapikapi, Cape Yogel ; 29, Dobii, Goulvain Island, between Goodenough and 
Ferguson Islands ; 30, Boianai or Galavi, south coast of Goodenough Bay ; 31, Wedan, 
Bartle Bay ; 32, Taupota, east of Bartle Bay ; 33, Awalama, Chad's Bay. Of these 
Nos. 1-21 are spoken in German territory, 22-33 in British. The words of Nos. 1-2. 
are from P. W. Schmidt ; 3-5, 7, 11, 13-21 are from H. Zoller's Deutsch Neu" Guinea ; 
6 and 12 from Miklucho-Maclay in Gabeleut^ and Meyer's Melanesischen und Mikrone- 
sischen Sprachen ; 22 from Rev. C. King's Vocabulary ; and the remainder from 
manuscripts of the Rhenisli and Anglican missionaries. SID^iEY H. RAY. 



131 



South Africa. Luck. 

J'lsit to Lewanika. By Reginald Arthur Luck. London : Simpkin, Marshall, 
1902. 18 X 13, pp. b6, with three plates. Price 1*. net. 

' In this interesting little book the author has placed on record the adventures, 
difficulties, and dangers encountered in a journey undertaken in March 1900 from 
Buluwayo to Lialui, the chief town of Lewanika, the king of Barotseland, for the 
piu'pose of buying cattle for the Government. On his journey Mr. Luck had neces.sarily 
few opportunities of obtaining anything more than a superficial acquaintance with the 
natives with whom he came into contact, but their personal appearance, dress, and 
weapons are described in a manner that gives rise to regret that opportunities for further 
observations were lacking. The author de.*«cribes part of a dance he saw in Barotseland 
" which ha<^l never been seen by a Avhite man," but before its termination he was 
unfortunately discovered and the performance ceased abruptly — a matter for regret, not 
only for Mr. Luck, but for all interested in native customs. E. N. F. 



PROOEEDINOS OP SOCIETIES. 
London. Anthropological Institute. 

Ordinary Meeting^ 11th November. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. IQQ 

The election was announced of the following as Ordinary Fellows of the \istm 
Institute : — T. A. Joyce, B.A., N. Annaodale, B.A., H. C. Robiusou, Major W. Cooke 
Daniels, W. Sheldon Ridge, M. Longworth Dames^ J. Garstang, B A., A. Jennings- 
Bramly, E. F. Martin, J. Watt, T. Rines, Miss A. Amy Bulley, Miss A. M. B. Meakin. 

The Assistant Secretary read a paper by Mr. W. H. Holmes on The Classijication 
and Arrangement of the Material of an Anthropological Museum. The paper was 
discussed bv Mr. Dal ton and the President. 

The President read a paper by the Rev. J. Holmes on The Initiation Ceremonies of 
the Natives of the Papuan Gulf. 

The papers will be published in full in Journ, Anthr, Inst.^ XXXII., 1902. 
Ordinary Meeting, 2oth November. Dr. A. C. Haddon, F.R.S., President. 

The election was announced of the followiuo^ as ordinary Fellows of thelostitute : — 
A. Harrison, Miss Nina Layard. 

Dr. C. S. Myers read a paper on Recent Anthropometric Investigations among the 
Xatire Troops of the Egyptian Army, 

The Hon. Jolin Abercromby read a paper on The Oldest Bronze Age Ceramic Type 
in Britain, 

The paper will be publishetl in full in Journ, Anthr, Inst,, XXX II., 1902. 



Prifltetl by Eyhe and Spottiswoode, His Majesty's Printers, East Hardinj? Street, E.C. 



•-4